Home

iDrive USER MANUAL - Lönne Scandinavia

Contents

1. 24 1 1 KEY iren ieri tede bee e EO EC HR reed ien Ib i Capo 24 1 12 Indicator LEDS Ori ihe Displ y Keypa 25 2 DESCRIPTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS essere nennen enne 26 3 REFERENCES AND FEEDBACKS crises 27 3 1 Main Speed Torque 27 3 2 Speed Torque Limit 27 3 3 PID errr rerecee tree erererce errr tree 27 3 4 a UU ee HII US 27 4 PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS 28 4 1 28 4 2 Voltage Frequency POLtlerri c ten Eie 28 4 3 Slip Compensation 28 4 4 5 e 28 4 5 Controlled Stop in Case of Power Failure Power DOWN sese nnne 28 4 6 Bremen
2. 444 56 1 What Happens When Protection Trips 444 56 2 What To Do When an Alary IMDS 445 263 446 56 4 List Or Ihe GOodes 466 56 5 95 468 90 60 469 564 E E E 471 57 CUSTOM PARAMETERS enata e 472 58 481 6 482 ee PROGRAMMING M uw L NNE 0 2 Figures PIQUE 1 Menu TOO 17 Figure 2 NAVIGATION E P Co so Rm 18 Figure 3 EET 25 Figure 4 Example 5 93 Figure 5 Speed profile without Rounding Off and with Rounding Off 2 example 94 Figure 6 Speed profile with Acceleration Reset Yes to 95 Figure 7 Speed Reference COMPUTING 106 Figure 8 Torque Reference compUllhg Reg 108 Figure 9 Computing Speed Analog Reference from terminal board AINT 110 Figure 10 Computing Inputs REF 1 and 2 11 Figure 11 Computing REF Input Examp
3. C129 lacclim 150 C130 Irunlim 150 C13Lldeclim li C132 defilimRed M3 0 Disabled C133 Imin 0 0 C134 Imax 120 C135 Tlim Ramp M3 50ms C136 fRedLimAcc 0 Enabled C14x Control Method C140 Sel Comm 1 1 Terminals C141 Sel Comm 2 1 Terminals 142 5 Comm 3 0 Disabled C143 Sel InRef 1 1 REF C144 Sel InRef 2 2 AINT C145 Sel InRef 3 0 Disabled C146 Sel InRef 4 0 Disabled C147 Sel T lim 0 Disabled C148 RemLoc mode 0 StandBy Fluxing C15x C 18x Digital Inputs C149 Start C149a StartB 0 None C150 top 0 None C150a StopB 0 None 151 0 None C151a RevB 0 None C152 Enable S 0 None C153 Disable 0 None C154 DisabReset 0 No C155 Mitsp 0 4 MDI4 C156 MItsp 1 5 MDIS C157 Mitsp 2 0 None C158 Mitsp 0 None C159 Cw CCw 8 MDI8 C160 DCB 0 None C161 Up 0 None C162 Down 0 None C163 U D Reset 0 None C164 ExtAlrm 1 0 None C164a ExtAlr Delay Oms C165 ExtAlrm 2 0 None C165a ExtAlr2Delay Oms C166 ExtAlrm 3 0 None C166a ExtAlr3Delay Oms C167 MitRmp 0 0 None C168 MitRmp 1 0 None C169 Jog 0 None C170 Master Slave 0 None C17L PID disab 0 None C171a PID sel control 0 Disabled C172 Keypad lock 0 None C173 2nd Mot 0 None C174 3rd Mot 0 None C175 PercSpd 0 0 None C176 PercSpd 1 0 None C177 PercSpd 2 0 None C178 PiDud_res 0 None C179 SourceSel 0 MDI6 2 C180 Loc Rem 0 MDI7 C180a Loc RemType Pushbutton Storage C181 Safe Start 0 Disabled
4. 75 Table 10 List of parameter P263 and Fire Mode Enable Password enne nnne enses 78 Table 11 Indexes corresponding to the different models sizes of the IDrive Drive essen 79 Table 12 79 Table 1S Fanicontrol MOdES 80 Table 142 Codirig for TANG HY COM 80 Table 15 List of parameters POOO to 82 Table 16 list of parameters P264 FOP 269 86 Table 17 Preset PID units Of Measure 90 Table 18 Example ot a Speed RaM 92 Table 19 List of parameters 9 to 3 96 Table 20 Parameters used for the Inputs for References eene 105 Table 21 Analog Input Hardware 109 Table 22 Est of parameters PO
5. 167 Table 37 Coding P226 Timers assigned to digital inputs 1 4 nennen nnns 169 Table 38 Bist of parameters P236 To P260 niacin EREIGNIS 178 Table 39 List of parameters P436 to P460 sss nennen enne nnne enhn trns erase 187 Table 40 Digital Output 189 Table 41 List of the selectable digital inputs and analog 190 Table 42 Test TER EUR EIE 195 Table 43 MDO parameterization for Status 1 020000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 enint tasse 201 Table 44 MDO parameterization for drive RUN OK ccecccssscessssccssscessccessccssseceeccssescssecesseceseecssescssecessecesseceseeeesesenseees 201 Table 45 MDO parameterization for speed thresholds cccssccesscesssccssecessecessecsseccssecessecesseceseceseeessecessecesseceeeeeseees 202 Table 46 MDO parameterization for electromechanical brake command 203 Table 47 MDO parameterization for the PWM 204 Table 48 MDO parameterization for the Ready state of PLC 0 205 Table 49 List of parameters P270 to
6. JOJON 66 d 06 d 710 704 v90d 0604 uoljesnjes uogeinjesg oouoJoJos Jo ndul JOJOW YELO EELO spur L609 0609 ZU 8705 1709 JOJO 107 482 EV PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 7 Figure 8 Torque Reference computing 108 482 PROGRAMMING cs L NNE 13 2 Scaling Analog Inputs REF AIN1 AIN2 Please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual for hardware details about analog inputs Three analog inputs are available REF AIN1 AIN2 They can be voltage inputs or current inputs switching is made possible through hardware Dip Switch and software parameters and are bipolar analog inputs 10V 10V or 20mA 20 REF input is single ended AIN1 and AIN2 inputs are differential inputs Factory setting is as follows the main speed reference is given by REF analog input OV HLOV mode only motor 1 is active 5 max speed and speed parameters are C088 1500 rpm and 029 0 rpm respectively For the analog inputs parameters P050 P064 allow setting the type of signal to be acquired offset compensation if any scaling to obtain a speed reference or a torque reference the signal filtering time constant Parameter P053 sets t
7. P390 XAIN4 3 0 10 P391 XAIN4MIN 0 0 V P391a XAINAMIN 26 10076 P392 XAINAMAX 10 0 V P392a XAINAMAX 10076 P393 XAINAOFFS 0 000 V P394 TauFilt XAINA 100 ms P395 XAIN5 2 4 20mA P396 XAINSMIN 4 0 mA P396a X AINSMIN_ 100 P397 XAINSMAX 20 0 mA P397a XAINSMAX_ 100 98 5 0 000 P399 TauFilt XAIN5 100 ms P43x P46x PID2 Parameters P436 PID2 Out Max 100 00 P437 PID2 Out Min 100 00 P437a Wake Up 0 Disabled P437b Wake Up 000 Level P438 Integ Max 100 00 P439 Der Max 100 00 P440 PID2 1 000 P441 PID2 KpMult 0 442 2 Ti Tc 500 Tc PAA3 PID2 Td Tc 0 P444 PID2 Tc 5 ms P445 PID2 Ref Min 0 00 P446 PID2 Ref Max 100 00 P447 PID2 Fdbk Min 0 00 P448 PID2 Fdbk 100 00 P449 PID2 0 005 P450 PID2 0 00 5 51 2 U Mea 1 0 1 P452 Rnd start 50 P453 Rnd stop 50 P454 Thresh Int 0 0 Refmax P455 Disab Time Disabled P456 Trate Lim lms P457 GainScale 1 000 P460 GainAWUP 1 00 475 482 LONNE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 00 00x Canier Freq C001 Minimun Carrier C002 Maximum Carrier 003 Pulse Number 1 24 C004 Silent Modulation CO0x CO4x M1 C008 VmainsNom C009 Mot Numb C010 Ctrl Type MI
8. 187 24 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 2 Ite er eere hc ete ere A a ed cx a deret 188 24 OVOVIOW 188 24 1 1 Setliugs 188 24 1 2 STUCTUFE OF TNE Digtal QUID UTS in iem 188 24 2 Programmable Operating Modes Diagrams 198 24 3 201 24 4 List Of Parameters 05 206 25 AUXILIARY DIGITAL OUTPUTS 221 251 221 252 stof Parameters P30610 P317 ees 221 26 MEASURE CONTROL FROM 100 225 2045 225 26 2 List of Parameters P318 to 25 225 2T FIELDBUS PARAMETERS MENU rrume 228 271 228 27 2 lishorParameters P330 10 P331 neo nrnenim nm EE REOS 228 28 VIRTUAL DIGITAL OUTPUTS MPL 230 281 OV EE 230 28 1 1 230 28 1 2 Str ct re ot me Vitval Digital
9. INSTRUCTIONS LONNE When Kp is increased the error is reduced at constant rate but the transient can also be adversely affected Adverse effects can be a longer transient with stronger oscillations due to the damping reduction or even instability This is shown in the figure below iDrive 22 3 2 Figure 27 Response to the step when is too large INTEGRAL ACTION 1 Symbol Tuning function Main goal Ti As soon as an input variance occurs Error an output variance occurs The variation rate is proportional to the error magnitude Sets the tuning point eliminates the offset from the proportional action Regulator Response to the step Response time Small Overshoot Shorter Optimum Kp Optimum Optimum Large Kp Undershoot Longer 175 482 PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE P000813 0 TI 0 333 CONSTANT KP 0 1 1 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Figure 28 Response to the step based on the value of Ti when Kp is kept constant The figure below represents the response of the regulator when the values for Kp and Ti are lower than the optimum value computed with the method of Zegler and Nichols n p 20008140 Figure 29 Response to the step when the values Kp and Ti are too small 176 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 22 3 3 DERIVATIVE ACTION D Symbol
10. aids LO e Figure 18 Curve voltage speed implemented 1 Example 2 40 9 8 7 64 5 4 3 2 1 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 rpm Example 3 Table 32 Programming AO1 ABS 10V P176 ABS 0 10 AO Analog output P177 1 Speed Selected variable for AO1 analog output P178 500 rpm Min value of AOI selected variable P179 500 rpm Max value of AOI selected variable P180 0 000 V AO Analog output offset P181 ms Filter for AO1 analog output P182 00 V 2 output value with reference to P183 10 0V output value with reference to 179 Figure 19 Curve voltage speed implemented 1 Example 3 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 rpm The programming mode above would imply straight line passing through NOTE 500rpm OV 500 but based on the selected mode and considering the variable as an absolute value the min point for output AOT will be 0 rpm 5 V 152 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Example 4 Table 33 Programming AO1 ABS 0 10V P176 ABS 0 10V Analog output 177 1 Speed Selected variable for 1 analog output P178 100 rom Min value of AO1 selected variable 179 500 Max value of AOI selected variable P180 0 000 V Analog output offset P181
11. 2 20 077 M2 C077a Boost M2 0 0 oo 0 0 078 10 M2 CO079 Boost M2 C080 FraBst C081 AutoBst M 82 5 M2 Disabled C083 DV_M2 Disabled CO84 Tfl M2 C085 Vout Sat 2 85 8 9 Limits M2 C086 lacclim M2 150 C087 lrunlim M2 150 C088 Ideclim M2 C089 defilimRed M2 0 Disabled C090 Tmin M2 0 0 C091 Tmax 2 120 C092 Tlim Ramp M2 50ms 093 fRedLimAcc M2 0 Enabled 476 482 PROGRAMMING c L NNE 09 12x Motor Control 96 0 IFD C097 RefMode 0 Speed C098 EncEnab 0 No 099 f mode3 C100 Phase Rot Mot3 0 No C101 Fmot M3 50 0 Hz C102 n mot M3 1420 rpm C103 Pmot M3 C104 Imot C105 Vmot 106 0 0 C107 i0 M3 0 C108 Rstat C109 Ld 110 m M3 250 00 mH 111 M3 0 ms C112 vacFiltM3 Oms C114 nmin 115 3 1500 116 5 90 C117 nsa M3 Disabled C118 red_Trq3 30 0 119 5 20 120 0 0 C120b Boost ref neg M3 0 0 121 510 d C122 Boost M3 C123 FraBst C124 AutoBst C125 SlipComp Disabled C126DV M3 Disabled C127 Tfl M3 li C128 Vout Sat M3 85 C12x C 13x Limits M3
12. nite Rt Dei p reet 312 ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS 326 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OF THE ASYNCHRONOUS MACHINE 253 L clc E 74 LEDS 24 BM 285 1 23 296 LOC REM INPUT 323 crine eite eene 81 M MAIN SPEED TORQUE 26 eroe Meere eria po eco etre rH teda 365 MDI MULITPROGRAMMING ENABLE 324 MENU 16 METHOD OF ZIEGLER AND NICHOLS mE MOTOR CONTROL rtt 251 MOTOR SEL INBPUT sae ent eot ii i on een cns 320 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION 214 MIO 27 MULTIRAMP INPUTS 28317 118 MULTISPEED INPUTS 313 325 481 482 T PROGRAMMING iDrive INSTRUCTIONS N SOURCE SELECTION 322 SPEED HE NAVIGATION 18 SPEED RAMPS SPEED SEARCHING SPEED VAR INPUTS SPEED TORQUE LIMIT REFERENCE ees 26 OPERATION TIME COUNTER 68 SPEED TORQUE REFERENCE SOURCES 293 304 START INPUT 309 START INPUT 30
13. EO tco PAR IDPliDrive MOTOR PASSWORD AND Start Up Menu MEA Press to start gt o MEA PID REGULATOR PRODUCT Access to Ramps menu Navigation within P010 Ramps Deceler menu SAVE 1 4 0 Lr Access to 5 P910 parameter Heeler modification P010 16 Nie Parameter 7 P810 modification PO10 Deceler Ramp 1 gt 20 00s If the ESC key is pressed to quit the new parameter value will be acknowledged but not saved to non volatile memory and will therefore be lost at power off Press SAVE ENTER to confirm parameter alteration 18 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE 1 4 Parameter Modification Factory setting allows parameter modification The parameters included in the Parameters Menu Pox parameters can be changed at any moment whereas the parameters included in the Configuration Menu box parameters can be changed only when the motor is stopped For safer operating conditions the configuration parameters must be changed only when the drive is disabled the ENABLE command is inactive to do so must be set to stand by only To disable parameter changes just change 000 write enable and save its new setting POOO and P002 password are both factory set to 1 If 00 0 inexpert user cannot change parameter values but if POOO 1 an advanced user will be
14. deze degere 407 46 1 COV CP VIGW 407 aids LO e 46 2 List Of Parameters C310 10 316 410 41 TIMED FLAGS MENU eoe eae A a 413 47 1 413 47 2 EXGUIMIDIOS E 413 47 3 Troc 330 10403573 414 48 SERIAL 88 417 46 1 417 48 2 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 55856980 417 49 SERIAL LINKS MENU 420 49 1 E 420 49 1 1 Watchdog AINNIS 420 49 2 1507 Parameters ROOT TO ROLT3 421 50 FIELDBUS CONFIGURATION MENU 424 50 1 b 424 50 1 1 Alarm A070 COMMUNICATION Suspended 424 50 2 List of Parameters ROT6 To ROIZ 424 50 3 Excharnged Parameters 3
15. 305 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 33 LIMITS MENU 33 1 Overview The Limits Menu defines the current torque limits applied to the control functions IFD VTC or FOC controls selected for the three connected motors For IFD control current limits are used Three limit current levels are available which are expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current 1 Current limit while accelerating 2 Curent limit at constant rpm 3 Current limit while decelerating Two special parameters are also available one sets the decrease of the limit current value when the motor runs at constant power flux weakening while the other parameter disables the frequency decrease in case of acceleration current limit this is useful for inertial loads If VIC control or a FOC control is used limits are expressed as a percentage of the rated motor torque Values set in the two parameters relating to min torque and max torque represent the limits for saturation of the control torque demand If an external torque limit is set C147 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU the values set in the parameters above represent the range of the source used for limitation the torque ramp times set in the RAMPS MENU will be applied to the preset limit torque reference The ramp time for torque limit can be selected C049 for motor 1 C092 for motor 2 and C135 for motor 3 for The VTC control only The Ipeak current load is available see
16. aR 230 28 2 Operating Diagram of the Virtual Digital Outputs 236 28 38 stor Pdrdmelers 5 PSO 5 WP RRPRRRROBPRRBITENRENIREWHISTNUIN RE TEES 240 29 INPUTS FOR REFERENCES FROM OPTIONAL BOARD eene 255 29 1 Scaling Analog Inputs XAINA XAINS 255 29 2 List Ot OErame ers PSY 9 256 30 AUTOTUNE MENU 261 30 1 261 30 1 1 Motor Autotune and Adjusting LOOPS 261 30 1 2 Checking the Encoder 263 30 2 HISTOR Inpuls dO73 IDA ore NUR ANI IM MES 264 31 CARRIER FREQUENCY 2000000 0100000000 265 31 1 ou ees 265 31 1 1 IFD Control and VIG 265 31 1 2 Example IFD VIC 265 31 1 3 aero tee CI 267 31 1 4 ANY COMMOL ALGOMA 267 31 2 istot Parameters COO 11 OC O04 268 32 MOTOR CONTROL aa DEAE aa ae aaraa aE 270 32 1 DASTIN 270 32 1 1 Electrical Specifications of the Connected Motor
17. 129 15 1 ee 129 15 2 List of Parameters POSOG 10 PO99 131 16 PROHIBIT SPEED 244 4 133 16 1 ON CIO 133 16 2 Bisr orPararmelers PT05 TOP T08 s esie terre ERES 134 17 REFERENCE VARIATION PERCENT 4 135 17 1 ev 135 17 2 ls or Pairarmelers PTl5d0 P A oiu EE 137 18 SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING nennen nnn 138 18 1 OVSIVIGW 138 18 2 tist ot Parameters P125 TOP 152 139 19 FOC REGULATORS 143 19 1 143 19 2 LiStORPGrOMe TEs RT55 10 PT79 143 20 ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS 146 20 1 ON CIVIC 146 20 1 1 Factory setting of the Analog OUT OUTS 146 20 1 2 Analog OUTPUTS ee 146 20 1 3 EG quere y OUIDUl BELLE 148 202 149 20 2 1 Operating Mode of Analog and Frequency 150 2
18. dora Dis 1406 1019 BASIC Red corresponding to from serial link MDI8 Bit input 0 1 for 8 bits 1407 1020 Basic Auxillary virtual terminal board Corresponding to from serial link XMDI8 N 1020 is enabled only if 023 is set other than 0 If C140 3 Fieldbus and C141 2 Serial link the ENABLE command is sent by closing terminal MDI2 on the terminal board and AND by forcing bit MDI2 from the serial link on input 1019 MODBUS address 1406 and bit MDI2 from Fieldbus see the FIELDBUS CONFIGURATION MENU The SIART command may also be sent OR by forcing bit MDI1 from serial link on input 1019 or by forcing bit from Fieldbus for the relevant variable 313 482 NEST PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE mass 34 1 2 SPEED TORQUE REFERENCE SOURCES The main reference is the value at constant speed to be attained by the controlled variable speed or torque M000 M007 required from the drive This reference is acquired by the drive only if the START command and the ENABLE commands are active otherwise it is ignored When the main reference is acquired by the drive SIARTand ENABLE are active it becomes the input signal controlled by the time ramp functions that generate the speed torque reference setpoint for the connected motor The speed ortorque references may come from the following command sources 0 Source disabled 1 REF si
19. e 194 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE Testing Variable for 1 2 3 4 P273 P282 P291 P300 If an analog variable is selected a logic TEST is performed to obtain a TRUE FALSE Boolean signal Seven different tests are available that can be performed for selected variable A and its comparing value A Table 42 Test functions GREATER THAN Selected variable comparing value GREATER THAN EQUAL TO Selected variable comparing value LOWER Selected variable comparing value LOWER THAN EQUAL TO Selected variable lt comparing value ABS GREATER THAN Absolute value selected variable comparing value ABS GREATER THAN EQUAL TO Absolute value selected variable comparing value ABS LOWER Absolute value selected variable comparing value ABS LOWER THAN EQUAL TO Absolute value selected variable x comparing value d NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 Example MDO1 P2702 Testing Variable B for MDO 1 2 3 4 P274 P283 P292 P301 If an analog variable is selected a logic TEST is performed to obtain a TRUE FALSE Boolean signal Seven different tests are available that can be performed for selected variable B and its comparing value B see Table 42 NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 and lt 9 Example MD
20. speed reference 4 Mot Freq 1000 0 Hz Frequency produced by the drive 5 Mot Curr 9000 0 A Current RMS 6 Out Volt 2000 0 V Output voltage RMS 7 OutPower 5000 0 kW Output power 8 DC Vbus 2000 0 V DC link voltage 9 1000076 orque reference at constant speed 10 Torq Dem 10000Nm Demanded torque Nm 11 Torq Out 1000076 Evaluation of the torque output 12 Tora Lim 1000076 Setpoint of the torque limit 13 PID Ref 100 00 PID reference at constant speed 14 PID RMP 100 00 Ramped PID reference 15 PID Err 100 00 Error between PID reference and feedbc 16 PID Fok 100 00 Feedback to the PID 17 PID Out 100 00 Output of the PID 18 REF 100 00 Analog input REF 19 AINT 100 00 Analog input 20 AIN2 PTC 100 00 Analog input AIN2 21 Enc In 10000 Speed read by the encoder used as a re 22 Pulseln 100 00 kHz Frequency input 23 Flux Ref 1 0000 Wb Flux reference at constant speed 24 Flux 1 0000 Wb Current flux reference 25 ig ref 5000 0A Current reference in axis 26 id ref 5000 0 A Current reference in axis d 27 iq 5000 0A Current measure in axis 28 id 5000 0 A Current measure in axis d 29 2000 0 Voltage axis 30 Volt Vd 2000 0 Voltage in axis d 31 Cosine 100 0076 Cosine waveform 32 Sine 100 0076 Sine waveform 33 Angle 1 0000 rad___ Electric angle of delivered Vu 34 10V 10 000 V Voltage level 10V 35 10V 10 000 V jVoltage level 10V
21. ADVANCED If PO68c 1 Yes the Speed Torque reference sent via the UP DOWN digital signals or with the A keys in the keypad is reset whenever switching from Remote mode to the Local mode and vice versa using the LOC REM key or the LOC REM digital input or when a control source switches to the other using the digital input programmed in C179 MDI for source selection see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Function PO68d Reset UP DOWN PID at Source Changeover Range ADVANCED If PO68d 1 Yes the PID reference sent via the UP DOWN digital signals with the and keys in the keypad is reset whenever switching from the Remote mode to the Local mode and vice versa using the LOC REM key or the LOC REM digital input or when a control source switches to the other using the digital input programmed in C179 for source selection see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Function 69 Range of UP DOWN Reference 0 1 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar 1 Unipolar ADVANCED If PO69 1 the quantity added via the UP DOWN digital signals or with the and W keys Local mode is unipolar i e it is positive only and has a min value equal to zero For bipolar quantities the added quantity may be negative P070 J OG reference Speed Torque ADVANCED Value of the JOG reference For speed control the percentage of the jog reference relates to the maximum speed value of the selecte
22. Reset UP DOWN speed torque at Source ADVANCED 942 Changeover PO68d Reset UP DOWN PID at Source Changeover ADVANCED 0 NO 943 P069 Range of UP DOWN reference ADVANCED 1 Unipolar 669 P070 Jog reference soeed torque ADVANCED 0 670 71 Value AN producing min reference X axis ADVANCED 10 kHz 67 Percentage of Speed_Min Trq_Min producing min reference Y axis related to 71 AYA NOES 00 0 5 72 Value AN producing max reference X axis ADVANCED 100 kHz 672 Percentage of Soeed_Max Trq_Max producing max Foren reference Y axis related to P072 ADVANCES 00 0 P073 Value of ECH producing min reference X axis ADVANCED 1500rpm 673 Percentage of Speed Min Trq Min producing min 7 pure reference Y axis related to P073 AE 90 0 ins P074 Value of ECH producing mox reference X axis ADVANCED 41500 674 Percentage of Speed Max producing max Fm reference Y axis related to P074 DENISE 0252 703 113 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e 114 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE P050 e of Signal over REF Input 650 This parameter selects the type of single ended analog signal over the REF terminal in the terminal board The signal can be a voltage signal a current signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 0 V Bipolar voltage input between 10V and 10V The detected signal is saturated between t
23. parameter 7 ENABLE LOCKED CAUTION The drive will start up as soon as writing is over Editing mode cannot be accessed because parameter modification is ee disabled PO00is different from 2 W39 KEYPAD DISABLED Editing mode cannot be accessed because the keypad is disabled FAN FAULT Fan locked or disconnected or faulty W41 SW VERSION KO Download impossible because of different SW Versions wa2 IDP KO Download impossible because of different IDPs Identification Products PINKO Download impossible because of different PINs Part Identification Numbers Wa4 CURRENT CLASS KO Download impossible because of different current classes W45 VOLTAGE CLASS KO Download impossible because of different voltage classes w46 DOWNLOAD KO Download impossible generic cause The preset threshold for the drive Operation Time has been exceeded 469 482 NE PROGRAMMING w9 ST Time over The preset threshold for the drive Supply Time has been exceeded W50 NTC Fault NTC sensor for heatsink temperature disconnected or faulty 470 482 INSTRUCTIONS f O iDrive 56 7 State List Table 125 State list 0 ALARMI Alarm tripped 1 STARTING UP The drive is starting up 2 MAINS LOSS Mains loss 3 TUNING The drive is tun
24. 45 8 MEASURES MENJU iere reef bite ee DD bonn dele 50 8 1 50 8 2 Motor Measures MENU 4 51 8 3 PID Regulator a 57 8 4 Digital MENU 0 eee 61 PROGRAMMING uw LONNE 8 5 Reterences MENU et 64 8 6 JO Ue TSIM SING vee TEE 68 8 7 Temperature Measures from 100 70 8 8 AUTOCIAGMOSTICS EE 71 8 9 Datalogger Measures 73 8 10 75 8 11 Fault 76 8 12 aes 77 9 PRODUCT MENU 78 9 1 OV GIVI 78 9 2 List of Parameter P263 Fire Mode Enable Password 78 10 PASSWORD AND USER LEVEL 82 10 1 82 10 2 List of Parameters POOO to 003 202 4 0000 82 11 a ep Dx Pe dt Dad vaa adde eaa re e
25. PO92 Spd9 0 00 rom PO93 Spd10 0 00 rom 094 5 11 0 00 095 5 12 0 00 096 5 1 0 00 097 5 14 0 00 098 5 15 0 00 P099 FireM Spd 750 00 rpm P100 Un Meas 0 0 01 rpm PO8x PO9x PID Multireference PO080a Mref use PID O Preset Ref PO81a Ref 1 PID 0 00 P082a Ref 2 PID 0 00 PO83a Ref PID 0 00 P084a Ref 4 PID 0 00 P085a Ref 5 PID 0 00 P086a Ref 6 PID 0 00 P087a Ref 7 PID 0 00 P099a FireM Ref PID 0 00 P10x Prohibit Speeds P105 Velbp1 0 P106 Velbp2 P107 Velbp3 Orpm P108 Bwbps 11 12 Ref P115 VarPerc1 0 0 P116 VarPerc2 0 0 P117 VarPerc3 0 0 118 4 0 0 119 5 0 0 P120 VarPerc 0 0 P121 VarPerc7 0 0 P12x P15x Speed Loop P125 Ti min M1 0 500 s P126 Ti max 1 0 500 s P128 Kp min 1 10 00 P129 Kp max M1 10 00 P130 Err min MI 1 00 P131 Err max 1 1 00 P135 Ti min M2 0 500 s P136 Ti max M2 0 500 s P138 Kp min M2 10 00 139 max M2 10 00 P140 Err min M2 1 00 P141 Err max M2 1 00 145 min 0 500 s P146 Ti max M3 0 500 s 148 min 10 00 149 max M3 10 00 P150 Err min 1 00 76 P151 Err max 1 00 P152 curr_symm 0 P15x P17x FOC Regulator P155 Cur Kp MI 3 00 P156 Curr Ti 1 20 0 ms P158 Flux Kp 0 00 P159 Flux Ti 33 ms P162 Curr Kp M2 3 00 P163 Curr Ti M2 20 0 ms P165 Flux Kp M2 0 00 P166 Flux Ti M2 33 ms P169 Curr Kp M3 3 00 P170 Curr Ti 20 0 m
26. A101 MDIS Configuration if additional functions are allocated to MDI8 or if the power drive detects The presence of ES836 or or ES913 option board 349 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 36 1 2 WHEN USING ES836 ES913 e Reading 1 or 2 Encoders To read one Encoder use ES836 option board or digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 if push pull encoder is used Both the option board and digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 can be used to read two encoders at a time Use parameter C189 to set the readout of the speed measure of the controlled motor or to read reference values You can use encoder A or encoder B as a speed feedback or a reference source speed reference torque reference or PID reference Example If you want to use encoder A as a speed reference source and encoder B as a speed feedback set C189 as 6 A Ref B Fok use P073 and P074 INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU to define the min speed and the max speed read for scaling and saturation of encoder A selected as a reference source in one of parameters C144 C147 CONTROL METHOD MENU set parameter 012 motor 1 to Yes to enable the Speed Feedback from Encoder function If encoder A is selected no function can be programmed for MDI6 and otherwise alarm A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes If encoder B is selected and ES836 or ES913 option board is not detected by the drive alarm 082 Illegal Encoder Configuration will
27. Multireference 5 15 949 P086a PID Multireference 6 16 986 P087a Multireference 7 Mref7 ENGI SING 987 P099a PID Reference in Fire Mode 988 8 Multireference 0 Preset Ref Range 1 Sum Ref 2 Exclusive Preset Ref Default Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter sets if the PID reference resulting from the selection of a digital multireference is to be considered either as the unique active reference or as summed up to the other configured PID reference sources see example above Function 81 87 PID Multireference 1 7 1000 1000 ENGINEERING 945 949 986 987 This is the value of the PID reference selected with the corresponding combination of the digital inputs programmed as multireferences The reference is expressed in the unit of measure set with P267 see the DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU and is based on parameter P257 Gain for PID Scaling Example The max value for the PID feedback is 100 This value corresponds to a level of 25m in a tank When P257 0 25 100 of PID feedback corresponds to 25 metres When setting a reference level of 15 meters multireference 1 shall be set as 81 15 0 131 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P099a PID Reference in Fire Mode Range 1000 1000 Default 500 Level ENGINEERING Address Function This parameter sets the value of the PID reference when in Fire Mode The value
28. the 7 5kW motor in the table below can be approximated to have a trip class of 820 x 20 IEC Class 27 3 100x 6 The motor thermal time constant that you would select is IEC class 30 C267 1080s As an even quicker guide the IEC trip class can generally be approximated as NOTE the locked rotor time Table 106 Typical datasheet for 4 pole 50Hz 400V motors Locked Rotor Full Load Locked Rotor Output kW Frame LRC Cunent Time cold EM FIC LRT s 0 12 63 450 0 41 44 415 0 18 63 460 0 58 59 400 0 25 71 500 0 7 106 400 0 37 71 500 1 03 81 395 0 55 80 600 13 37 430 0 75 80 570 1 61 35 420 1 1 905 700 237 31 1445 1 5 90L 750 3 28 29 450 22 112 720 4 42 55 455 4 112 660 7 85 26 1445 5 5 1325 850 10 34 26 465 7 5 1325 820 465 Example la 1b 92 160M 460 n 160M 465 15 160L 465 18 5 180M L 470 22 180L 475 30 200L 475 37 2255 1480 45 2255 480 55 2505 1480 75 2505 480 90 2805 485 10 3155 485 132 3155 485 150 3155 485 160 3155 485 185 355M L 1490 200 355M L 1490 220 355M L 1490 250 355M L 1490 Example 2 260 355M L 1490 280 355M L 1490 300 355M L 1490 315 355M L 1490 330 355M L 1490 385 482 PROGRAMMING w LONNE 42 2 3 MAXIMUM LOCKED ROTOR TIME ENHANCED If more precise calculation is required when the ratio between LRC and FLC is different from 7 2 you can refer to the graph below
29. they are expected to generate 100 of the minimum motor speed reference C028 i e Orom at they are expected to generate 100 of the maximum motor speed reference C029 i e 1500rpm The main reference will be their sum and will start from Orpm when both references are at OV and its maximum value would be 3000rpm when both references are at 10V but it will be limited to 1500 as set by C029 as soon as the sum of the two references exceeds 1500rpm Suppose that the parameters below are to be programmed only the parameters changing with respect to the example above are given C028 _ Min Motor Speed 50rpm As the minimum motor speed is set to 50rpm each of the two references at OV will generate a reference equating 100 of 50rpm i e 50 The minimum value of the main reference that is the sum of the two references will then equating 100 if the two references are at OV If the main reference shall start from 50rpm that is it can generate the minimum motor speed the following parameters shall be set accordingly PO5la Percentage of Ref Min producing Min Reference 50 076 5 Percentage of Ref Min producing Min Reference 50 076 In that way either references at will generate 50 of 50 i e 25rpm Their sum will be worth 50 at a minimum as required If the whole resolution of the references is to be exploited so that e Gat OV for
30. 029 074 Master mode or in 048 074 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and 48 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used P074a Percentage of Speed Max Producing Max Reference Y axis related to P074 Liye m 1000 Level ADVANCED Address This parameter represents the max speed percentage or the max torque percentage for a torque reference to be used for the maximum reference set with 074 125 482 INSTRUCTIONS pns LONNE 14 MULTISPEED MENU 14 1 Overview s The Multispeed menu allows defining the values for 15 preset speed or multispeed references set in parameters P081 to PO98 Their application method is set in 080 The desired speed is selected through the digital inputs described in the previous section relating to the Digital Inputs Menu The following reference ranges that can be programmed with the parameters above 32000 rpm if multispeed unit of measure is P100 1 00 rom 3200 0 rpm if multispeed unit of measure is P100 0 10 rom 320 00 rpm if multispeed unit of measure is P100 0 01 rom See also the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU and the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Use parameters C155 C156 C157 and C158 to set the digital inputs in multispeed mode Parameter P080 defines the functionality of the references set in the preset speed fun
31. 357 3 22 List of Parameters C210 to C212 cccccscccsssccssscsssccsseccssecessecesseceseccsseeessecesseceeecsssecsseecssecessecesecessesesseeesseeesaes 358 38 DG BRAKING MENU ode 360 38 1 360 38 1 1 DC Braking at Start and Non condensing FUNCTION 360 38 1 2 DC Brakirig ai Stop eres ee ens 362 38 1 3 DC Braking Command Sent from Terminal 363 38 2 bisi or Parameters C215 1O C224 2552 52 E 366 39 POWER DOWN MENU 368 39 1 OVOIVIBW 368 39 2 List Ot Parameters 225 10 0235 371 40 SPEED SEARCHING MENU 375 40 1 e 375 40 2 List or Parameters C245 TO 249 Linie GER PREISEN ERREUR 378 41 AUTORESET MENU inei ME 381 41 1 OVERVIEW 381 41 2 List or Parameters C255 tO 2258 381 42 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION 383 42 1 DVE EERE 38
32. C023 C066 C 109 Motor Leakage Inductance 0 32000 0 00 320 00mH See Table 76 and Table 80 ADVANCED 1023 1066 1109 This parameter defines the global leakage inductance of the connected motor If a star connection is used it matches with the value of the inductance of one phase if a delta connection is used it matches with 1 3 of the inductance of one phase Autotune is always recommended 284 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE With the Autotuning function calculate the value of the leakage inductance C023 NOTE From the resulting value manually subtract the value in mH of the output inductance if any 285 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C024 C067 C 110 Mutual Inductance Range 0 65000 0 00 650 00mH 25000 Level ADVANCED 1024 1067 1110 This parameter defines the mutual inductance of the connected motor The approximate value of the mutual inductance results from no load current according to the formula below M Vmot Rstat lo 2nfmot lo Function Parameter C024 mutual inductance is automatically calculated based on the preset no load current value C021 whenever parameters 1073 and 1074 are set as follows NOTE 073 1 Motor Tune 1074 0 All no rotation whether current loop tuning is performed or not C025 C068 C 111 Rotor Time Constant 0 5000msec 0 ADVANCED 1025 1068 1111 FOC This
33. P385 MPLA Output Logic Level ADVANCED 985 MPL4 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied 254 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE 29 INPUTS FOR REFERENCES FROM OPTIONAL BOARD This menu relates to ES847 I O expansion board It be viewed only if R023 I O board setting XAIN see the EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU In addition to the analog inputs located on the control board a current analog input and a voltage analog input can be acquired if ES847 is fitted 29 1 Scaling Analog Inputs XAIN4 XAIN5 NOTE Please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual for hardware details about analog inputs Two analog inputs XAIN4 XAIN5 are located on 5847 control board XAIN4 is a current input and XAINS is a voltage input They are both bipolar analog inputs 10V 10V 20mA 20 For both analog inputs parameters P390 to P399 allow setting the type of signal to be acquired offset compensation if any scaling to obtain a speed reference or a torque reference the signal filtering time constant Parameter P393 sets the offset of the input analog signal if P393 0 offset is zero while parameter P394 defines the filtering time constant factory setting P394 100ms The voltage signal can be bipolar 10V 10 or unipolar OV 10 The c
34. TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED and VTC For other types of control this function has no effect even if C160z0 The DCB command enables DC braking for a time period depending on the speed value determining the input activation See the DC BRAKING MENU for more details 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFLA 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED 1161 1162 This function increases UP or decreases DOWN the reference for which the UpDown source from MDI has been selected by adding a quantity to the reference itself This also depends upon the following parameters C163 Up Down Reset P067 Up Down Ramp Time PO68 Store Up Down value at power off 68 Speed Torque Up Down Reset at stop PO68b PID Up Down Reset at stop PO68c Speed Torque Up Down Reset at sources changeover PO68d PID Up Down Reset at sources changeover P069 Up Down Reference range 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted This function sets to zero the reference variation obtained via the UP or DOWN inputs or the A and keys located on the display keypad The Up Down reference Speed Torque only may also be reset using different functions see 68 337 482 iDrive
35. C016 rpmnom rated rom C017 Pmot rated power C018 rated current C019 Vmotl rated voltage C029 Speedmax max allowable speed For loads with square torque with respect to the rpm centrifugal pumps fans etc set preboostl to 0 Press SAVE ENTER each time a new parameter value is set 6 Autotune For the IFD control algorithm the Autotune function is not necessary but is always recommended First remove the ENABLE command then access the AUTOTUNE MENU and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 0 All Ctrl no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until tune is complete Warning W32 Open Enable is displayed The drive has computed and saved the values for C022 stator resistance and C023 leakage inductance If alarm A097 Motor Wires KO trips check the motor wiring If alarm 065 Autotune trips this means that the ENABLE command has opened before autotune was complete In this case reset the drive sending a command from terminal or press the RESETkey in the display keypad and perform the autotune procedure again 7 Overload Set parameters in the LIMITS MENU depending on the max desired current 40 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE 8 Startup Activate the ENABLE input terminal 15 and the SIARTinput terminal 14 and send a speed reference the RUN LED and REF LED will come on and the motor will start
36. Default 100 00 Level ENGINEERING Address This is the max allowable value of the integral term It is to be considered as an absolute value the output value resulting from the integral term ranges from P238 to P238 Function 180 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE P239 Max Value of Derivative Term 0 10000 100 00 100 00 100 00 ENGINEERING 839 This is the max allowable value of the derivative term it is to be considered as_an absolute value the output value resulting from the derivative term ranges from P239 to P239 P240 PID Proportional C onstant Range Default Level ENGINEERING Address 840 This is the value of the proportional coefficient The PID regulator will use Function Kp resulting from the product of P240 multiplied by 241 multiplicative factor P241 Multiplicative Factor of P240 ENGINEERING 841 Multiplicative factor of the proportional coefficient This is used to obtain a wider range for the proportional coefficient used in PID regulator and ranging from 0 000 to 6500 0 Supposing that the default values are used for P240 and 241 the proportional coefficient used in the PID regulator is unitary in case an error of 1 occurs between the reference and the controlled variable the proportional term representing one of the three values of the regulator output will be 1 P242 PID Integral Time Multiples of P244 0 65000 0 Disabled 6500
37. For the ENABLE digital input no disable delay is allowed because the logic status of the ENABLE command is used directly by the hardware activating IGBT switching when no ENABLE command is sent the output power stage is instantly deactivated NOTE NOTE The reset function for the alarms on the leading edges of is not delayed NOTE Any auxiliary alarm set to the digital inputs is not delayed Five timers are available the use can set an enabling disable delay for each of NOTE them same timer may also be assigned to multiple digital inputs outputs NOTE The ENABLE Sfunction cannot be delayed gt gt gt gt gt Example 1 The drive enable MDI1 START depends on a signal coming from a different source An activation delay of 2 seconds and a deactivation delay of 5 seconds are needed To do so set two delay times for activation and deactivation for the same timer and assign it to MDI1 START digital input In the example below timer 1 is used P216 20sec Activation delay P217 5 05 Deactivation delay P226 0x0001 Timer assigned to MDI1 START 165 482 EV PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE MDIT 4 217 t Siart Start ton lt P216 MEM Inverter ME Inverter ON ON OFF OFF t P000340 b Figure 22 Using Timers example The figure shows two possible operating modes left application of the delay times se
38. function In SLAVE mode the JOG function is ignored if the motor is still rotating due to an active reference torque C170 SLAVE Input 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFLA 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 02 ADVANCED 1170 FOC When activating the terminal allocated to the Slave Input the main reference becomes a torque reference and the speed loop is by passed This function enables the SLAVE operating mode torque reference instead of the MASTER operating mode speed reference the Torque References and the Ramp Torques are used see the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU and the RAMPS MENU 0 16 0 241 5847 or ES870 is fitted Function 340 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS o A N CAUTION C171 PID DISABLE Input LONNE bis This function is ignored if the operating mode selected for the active motor is the SLAVE mode i e 11 1 or 2 motor 1 054 1 or 2 motor 2 097 1 or2 motor 3 Commands are factory set to MASTER mode and the speed reference is selected as factory setting 011 0 C054 0 C097 0 Switching from MASTER to SLAVE mode vice versa is allowed only when the drive is disabled 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED This function is used for managing the PID regulator see the PI
39. so 10 10 On 10 02 0024 300 150 10 10 On 30 02 032 so 10 10 On 10 01 02 004 300 159 so 10 10 On 10 01 02 0051 30 15 so 10 10 On 30 01 02 002 30 so 10 10 On 30 01 02 009 300 10 10 10 01 02 ove 30 1590 10 10 10 On 10 01 02 ooss so 15 150 10 10 On 10 01 02 S32 0131 so 150 15 10 10 On 10 02 04 300 150 200 10 10 On 10 02 0172 so 200 10 10 10 01 02 0181 250 100 200 100 100 Off 100 2 E 0201 450 100 220 100 100 Of 100 2 0218 450 10 250 100 100 Off 100 2 0259 450 10 250 100 100 Oft 100 2 0290 450 10 250 100 100 Off 100 2 0314 450 100 250 100 100 Off 100 2 038 450 100 250 10 100 Off 100 2 0401 450 10 250 100 100 off 100 2 0457 450 10 250 10 100 100 2 0524 450 10 250 10 100 Off 100 2 0598 450 10 250 10 100 100 2 0748 450 10 250 100 100 off 100 2 570 0831 450 100 250 10 100 off 100 2 094 450 100 250 100 100 100 2 1130 450 o0 250 100 100 Of 00 2 580 1296 aso 10 250 10 100 100 2 ra00 450 100 250 10 100 Off 100 2 2076 450 10 250 10 100 off 100 2 2
40. 2 Check and enter the correct value for C173 C174 3 Check the status of the digital commands for terminals C173 and C174 If remote command sources are selected check the status of the commands That have been sent Sensor 2 fault Power heatsink overheated with cooling fan off see also A094 and A096 Failure in temperature control device and or cooling system Please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service A100 MDIG Illegal Configuration Function programmed to MDI6 and frequency input A as well MDI6 terminal is programmed with a digital function command and as frequency input A Incorrect programming of a command function for MDI6 because frequency input A is already set in parameter C189 FinA see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU and the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 463 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Check and adjust programming of the digital input functions and of parameter Solution C189 464 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive A101 MDIS Illegal Configuration Function programmed to MDI8 and frequency input B as well MDI8 terminal is programmed with a digital function command and as frequency input Incorrect programming of a command function for MDI8 because frequency input B is already set in parameter C189 FinB see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU and the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Check and adjust programming of the digital input functions and of Solution pa
41. 28 4 7 Motor Thermal Protection EE 28 4 8 PRONIDIMS DSSS 29 49 Digital 29 410 29 4 11 Setting Two Alternative Command Sources and Reference 50 29 4 12 al SU olellce 30 5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES 31 5 1 ONVOIDVIOW DID 31 5 2 31 5 3 Configuring the External Torque 35 5 4 Configuririg the Feedback from Encoder aae eee Perte D UM a PERO A 36 5 5 Configuring a Reference from Encoder 37 6 START UP MENU E 38 6 1 bie iie 38 T EI m 40 7 1 Control 2 614 40 7 2 VTC COMMOL AIG OMIM E EET 43 7 3
42. A AND BY 10 A RESET B SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 1 SET RESET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADVANCED 966 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value P366a MPL2 Selecting Variable C See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 934 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MPL2 digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in Table 41 P366b MPL2 Function Applied to the Result of f A B C f A B OR C f A B SET C RESET RISING EDGE A B AND f A B XOR NOR C AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B OONA 10 A RESET SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 0 ADVANCED 935 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value 247 482 iDrive P367 MPL2 Output Logic Level ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ADVANCED 967 MPL2 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 P368 MPL3 Digital Output Mode 248 482 TRUE no negation is applied
43. ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 692 P093 Output speed 5 10 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 693 P094 Output speed Mspd 11 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 694 P095 Output speed Mspd 12 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 695 P096 Output speed Mspd 13 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 696 P097 Output speed Mspd 14 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 697 PO98 Output speed Mspd 15 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 698 P099 Fire Mode speed ENGINEERING 750 rpm 699 P100 Multispeed unit of ADVANCED 2 1 0 rpm 700 measure 126 482 e PROGRAMMING cs LONNE 80 Multispeed Function 0 Preset Speed 1 Sum Speed 2 Exclusive Preset Speed o O0 Preset Speed Defines the functionality of the multispeed values for the global speed reference Three functions are available e 0 Preset Speed gt the selected multispeed is the actual rpm value upon limit due to min and max speed parameters for the selected motor of the motor speed reference If no multispeed is selected no digital input programmed for multispeed selection is activated or all digital inputs programmed for multispeed selection are deactivated the speed reference is the reference for the sources set in the CONTROL METHOD MENU e 1 Sum Speed the reference relating to the selected multispeed is considered as the sum of the references for the other reference sources selected in the CONTROL METHOD MENU e 2 Exclusive Preset Speed gt the selected multispeed is the actual rom value upon saturation due to min and max speed pa
44. Level BASIC 729 739 749 VIC and FOC This parameter sets the max proportional coefficient for the speed regulator Default value 10 if a soeed error of 1 occurs the regulator will require 10 of the motor rated torque This parameter may be accessed only if the and max error thresholds are different P130 z P131 for Motor1 P140 z P141 for Motor2 P150 P151 for Motor3 O 32000 0 00 320 00 730 740 750 and FOC This parameter determines the min error threshold In case of speed errors lower than or equal to the min threshold parameters P126 and P128 will be used P131 P141 P151 Max Enor Threshold hz To 0 32000 0 00 320 00 EMO j Level Ye 731 741 751 and FOC This parameter sets the max error threshold If P130 P131 or in case of speed errors greater than or equal to the max threshold parameters P125 and P129 will be used 141 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P152 Symmetry Regulation of Three phase Curent ENGINEERING This parameter affects three phase current balancing It must be used when dissymmetry of the motor currents occurs especially when no load currents are delivered and the motor rotates at low rpm 142 482 INSTRUCTIONS 19 FOC REGULATORS MENU 19 1 Overview LONNE Please refer to the MOTOR CONTROL MENU as well iDrive This menu may be
45. OR P278 Out 1 Logic 1 True P279 Out2Mode 6 Brake P280 Out2Sell A81 Torque output P281 Out2Sel2 A71 Speed P282 Out2 Test 0 gt P283 Out2 Test2 3 lt P284 D02 ValTst1 20 000 285 002 ValTst2 50 000 rom P286 Out2Func 1 A Set B Reset P286a Out2Sell 00 Disable P286b Out2Func 0 OR C P287 Out2Logic 1 True P288 Out3Mode 1 Digital P289 Out3Sell D3 Inverter Alarm P290 Out3Sel2 D3 Inverter Alarm P291 Out3 Test 0 gt P292 Out3 Test2 0 gt 293 003 ValTst 0 000 294 003 ValTst2 0 000 P295 Out3Func 0 A OR P295a Out3Sell DO Disable P295b Out3Func 0 OR P296 Out3Logic 0 False P297 Out4Mode 1 Digital P298 Out4Sell D1 Inverter Run Ok P299 Out4Sel2 D1 Inverter Run Ok P300 Out4 Test 0 gt P301 Out4 Test2 0 gt P302 D04 1 511 0 000 P303 D04 ValTst2 0 000 P304 Out4Func 0 A OR B P304a Out4Sell 00 Disable P304b Out4Func 0 f A B OR C P305 Out4Logic 1 True 474 482 INSTRUCTIONS LONNE iDrive P306 P317 Aux Digital Outputs P306 Out1Sel 00 Disable P307 OutlLogic 1 True P308 Out2Sel DO Disable P309 Out2Logic 1 True P310 Out3Sel 00 Disable P311 Out3Logic 1 True P312 Out4Sel 00 Disable P313 Out4Logic 1 True P314 Out5Sel 00 Disable P315 Out5Logic 1 True P316 Out Sel 00 Disable P317 Out Logic 1 True P32x 100 Settin
46. ORE ORLEANS 41 251 ROOT zi ROUNDING esee tette totis S WARNING LIST WATCHDOG tert S RAMPS exercent pu EU 88 SERIAL LINKS 393 X SERIAL NUMBER eret tentent 76 SLAVE 1 318 GAIN 238 SLIP COMPENSATION trn ei 27 TT T 238 482 482
47. The parameters included in the Motor Control Menus are detailed in the table below 270 482 INSTRUCTIONS LONNE Table 65 Description of the parameters classified by motor iDrive Mains rated 008 Control algorithm being used 010 C053 C096 Type of reference being used con CO5A C097 speed torque Availability of the speed feedback from con 55 98 encoder Electric ratings of the motor C015 C025 C058 C068 101 111 Max speed min speed required speed at the beginning of flux weakening C028 C031 C071 C074 C114 C117 mox speed alarm threshold and enabling C013 C032 056 C075 C099 C 118 V f pattern parameters C038 C081 C124 Slip compensation activation C039 C082 C125 Drop in rated current voltage 083 126 Fluxing ramp time C041 C084 C127 The parameters that can be modified depend on the type of control that has been selected 32 1 1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CONNECTED This group of parameters can be divided into two subunits the first subunit includes the motor ratings the second subunit includes the parameters of the equivalent circuit of the asynchronous machine being used 32 1 2 MOTOR RATI NGS Table 66 Motor ratings TR 15 C058 C101 Rated rom C016 C059 C102 Rated power C017 C060 C103 Rated current C018 C061 C104 Rated voltage 019 C062 C
48. 059 2 Rated motor rom BASIC 1059 C102 M3 1102 ream 017 1 1017 C060 2 Rated motor power BASIC 1060 See Table 76 and Table 80 C103 M3 1103 018 1018 061 2 Rated motor current BASIC 1061 See Table 76 and Table 80 C104 M3 1104 019 1 1019 C062 2 Rated motor voltage BASIC 1062 Pepe ing Ma EINEN C105 M3 1105 020 1 1020 C063 2 Motor no load power ADVANCED 1063 0 0 C106 M3 1106 C021 1 1021 C064 2 Motor no load current ADVANCED 1064 0 107 1107 C022 1 1022 C065 2 Motor stator resistance ENGINEERING 1065 See Table 76 and Table 80 C108 M3 1108 023 1 1023 C066 M2 Leakage inductance ENGINEERING 1066 See Table 76 and Table 80 C109 M3 1109 277 482 PROGRAMMING iDrive INSTRUCTIONS C024 1 1024 067 2 Mutual inductance 1067 250 00mH C110 M3 1110 C025 1 1025 C068 2 Rotor time constant 1068 Oms C111 M3 1111 026 1 1026 coco M2 2 of bus voltage 1069 ms C112 M3 1112 CO28 1 1028 71 2 motor speed 107
49. 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service Illegal configuration of XMDI in the Digital Inputs menu The drive checked if at least one XMDI input from ES847 or ES870 option board is available in the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU e The drive checked if R023 I O Board setting is set to O in the EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU Wrong settings Check settings and enter correct settings 450 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A044 SW Overcunent Description Event A045 Bypass Circuit Fault Description Event Possible cause Solution LONNE SW Overcurrent Immediate current limit tripped e Abrupt variations of the connected load e Output short circuit or ground short circuit e Strong electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference If alarm A044 tripped while accelerating e Too short acceleration ramp If alarm A044 tripped while decelerating e Too short deceleration ramp e Excessive gain of the current regulator P155 or too short integral time 156 when using the FOC control algorithm e Excessive gain of the speed regulator P128 or too short integral time P126 when using the VIC control algorithm 1 Check if the drive and the motor are properly dimensioned with respect to the connected load 2 Make sure that no short circuit is to be found between two phases or between one phase and the grounding outgoing from the drive term
50. 248 15 75 C249 5psSpd 0 Last Speed C25x AutoReset C255 nPulsRes Disable C256 T ResCyc 3005 C257 PowOnRes 0 No C258 UvMIStore 0 No C26x C 27x Thermal Protection C264 FanTemp 50 C C265 ThermProt M1 3 Yes C266 ThermCurr 1 105 267 51 1 7205 C268 ThermProt M2 3 Yes B C269 ThermCurr M2 105 C270 ThermConstM2 720s C271 ThermProt 3 Yes B C272 ThermCurr 105 C273 ThermConstM3 720s 274 ThermProt 0 Disable C27x Maintenance 276 5 OP Time Oh C276 Set SP Time Oh C28x C29x PID Configuration C285 Sel InPID 1 2 AINI C286 Sel InPID 2 0 Disabled C287 Sel InPID 3 0 Disabled C288 Sel Fdbk 1 PID 3 AIN2 PTC C289 Sel Fdbk 2 PID 0 Disable C290 Sel Fdbk 3 PID 0 Disable 291 0 Mode 0 Disable er 0 Standard SUM C291b PID Mode 0 Disable C292 Der Mode 0 Measure C293 PID Struct 0 No C294 PID Act 1 Reference C30x Crane C300 StartTrg ref pos 0 0 76 C301 t_StartTrgq ref pos ms C300a StartTrq 00 C301a StartTrq 0 ms ref neg ref neg C302 Brk On 0 None 478 482 INSTRUCTIONS LONNE iDrive C31x Date and Time C310 ModWeekday 1 Monday C311 ModDay C312 ModMonth January 313 0 C314 ModHour 0 315 0 C316 Modify Date C33x C 35x Timed Hags C330 TFLI Ton h 0 C331 TFL1 T on m 0 C332 TFL1 Tons 0 C333 TFL1 T off h 0 C
51. 5 etate 206 Table 50 Eistot parameters P306 To P317 221 Table 51 List of parameters P318 to 3 25 225 8 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Table 52 List of parameters P330 to 228 Table 53 List of Programmable Measures for P330 331 229 Table 54 Digital Output Modes sese tutuen tntu tutn EnEn En ENESES ESENES 231 55 TespTUDCllOFris E RR I AR URNA INI GREEN 232 Table 56 MPL parameterization for Dry Run Detection 237 Table 57 MPL parameterization for Pipe Fill function 239 Table 58 List of parameters P350 to 385 240 Table 59 Analog input hardware MOE 255 Table 60 List of parameters P390 to 99 256 Table 61 Programmable Motor Tune functions esterne nnne 262 62 List otinpuis 1073 OLA EX 264 Table 63 Maximum value of the output frequency depending on the IDrive size 267 Table 64 List ot parameters To C004 innt ER EPREIIPGIOI EUR II FO 268 Table 65 Description of the parameters classified by MOTOM ccccccsscccsssces
52. C072 C073 Motor 2 C114 C 115 Motor 3 32000 integer part 99 decimal part Always active 1690 integer part 1691 decimal part This is the value of the speed reference set via serial link M042 Speed Reference from Fieldbus 32000 99 rpm integer Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it 15 defined by the value set in the parameters for the max speed min 99 speed of the selected motor C028 C029 Motor 1 072 073 Motor 2 C114 C115 Motor 3 Active Always active Dr 1692 integer 1693 decimal part 32000 decimal part 971 This is the measure of the speed reference set by the fieldbus 44 Torque Reference from Serial Link 500 0 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit value set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Always active 5000 This is the measure of the torque reference set via serial link and expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor 65 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS M045 Torque Reference from Fieldbus 500 0 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active Always active Address Range This is the measure of the torque reference set by the fieldbus and expressed as a amann
53. DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT DIGITAL ADVANCED 968 This parameter defines the operating mode of virtual digital output 3 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter See Table 41 D38 Fire Mode ADVANCED 969 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 970 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of MPL3 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 e PROGRAMMING c LO NNE P371 MPL3 Testing Variable A ABS gt gt ABS x lt oo ADVANCED 971 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P369 using P373 as comparing value P372 MPL3 Testing Variable B ABS x gt ABS x ABS lt ABS x lt ADVANCED 972 This parameter defines the test
54. NOTE Warnings are neither protections nor alarms and are not stored to the fault list Some warnings simply state what s happening or suggest what to do when using the keypad However most of the warning messages are Coded wamings they are displayed with letter followed by two digits stating which warning is active at that moment Example W3 2 EN A L E Warning messages are detailed in the following section 468 482 INSTRUCTIONS 56 6 LONNE iDrive Warning List Table 124 Waming list SEARCHING The user interface is searching the data of the next page to display Wo4 DATA READ KO Software warnings concerning data reading wos HOME SAVED The page displayed has been saved as the home page displayed at power on wo7 DOWNLOADING The keypad is writing to the drive the WORK zone parameters saved on its own flash memory The keypad is reading from the drive the WORK zone parameters that will vos UPLOADING be saved on its own flash memory woo DOWNLOAD OK were successfully downloaded written from the keypad to wn UPLOAD OK Parameters were successfuly uploaded read from the drive to the keypad The keypad interrupted parameter upload to the drive we UPLOAD KO Parameter reading hos failed w3 NO DOWNLOAD A Download procedure was queried but no parameter
55. PO80 Preset Speed no Multispeed function is selected the active reference is the reference set according to the parameters in the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU If 80 Speed Sum the selected Multispeed function adds up to the active reference the reference set according to the parameters in the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU If POBO Preset Speed Esc the selected Multispeed replaces the active reference which will be ignored If no Multispeed function is selected the resulting reference is equal to zero See also the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU for the reference processing sequence the Speed Decrease function and the Reference Reversal function become active downstream of the Multispeed function In Table 90 0 2 Inactive input NOTE 2 Active input X 2 Input having no effect C159 CW CCW Input 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFLA 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED The Cw CCw function reverses the active reference signal the connected motor decelerates to zero following the preset deceleration ramp then it accelerates following the preset acceleration ramp until it reaches the new reference value 336 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C160 DCB Input Default Level Address Control Function Function Function LONNE Dis 0 5 Inactive 1 85 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16
56. PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A NOTE LONNE i The Watchdog activates only once the drive has received the first legal message from the master as described in Alarm A070 Communication Suspended This avoids untimely activation due to different start times between the master and the drive 425 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS RO17 Analog Outputs Contolled by the Fieldbus 000b gt None 001b AOI 0106 gt AO2 100b gt 000b gt None 000b 111b binary 0000h 0007h hex 0 7 decimal ENGINEERING To select analog outputs controlled by the fieldbus select the bit corresponding to the analog output to be controlled Example R017 0011b 3 decimal analog outputs AOI and 2 are controlled directly by the fieldbus imespective of their configuration the ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU 426 482 PROGRAMMING c L NNE 50 3 Exchanged Parameters The tables below state the IDrive parameters exchanged via Fieldbus Each table contains 1 the parameter code 2 its description 3 its range 4 its unit of measure also indicated on the display 5 the ratio between the IDrive value exchanged via Fieldbus and the represented hardware value as displayed N B Each parameter is exchanged as an integer number with 16 bit sign from 32768 to 32767 Bytes are exchanged in big endian mode the most significant value is stored to NOTE the s
57. Prop coefficient for maximum BASIC 10 00 749 150 Min error threshold BASIC 1 00 750 P151 Mot3 Max error threshold BASIC 1 00 751 pia SYMMetry regulation of ENGINEERING 0 752 three phase current P125 P135 P145 Integral Time for Maximum Enor 1 32000 0 001 32 000 Disable ms 500 500 ms Level BASIC 725 8 735 745 and This parameter sets the min integral time for the 5 regulator It may be accessed only if the and max error thresholds are different 1302 131 for Motor P140zP141 for Motor2 150 151 for Motor3 P126 P136 P146 Integral Time for Minimum Enor 1 32000 0 001 32 000 Disable ms Default Level Address 139 482 PROGRAMMING LO NNE 4 and ia eii This parameter sets the max integral time for the speed regulator 140 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P128 P138 P148 Proportional Coefficient for Minimum Eror Range 0 65000 0 00 650 00 1000 10 00 Level BASIC D iE 728 738 748 and FOC This parameter sets the min proportional coefficient for the speed regulator Default value 10 if a speed error of 1 occurs the regulator will require 10 of the motor rated torque P129 P139 P149 Proportional Coefficient for Maximum Enor 0 65000 0 00 650 00
58. RESET C SET FALLING EDGE 0 A B OR C ADVANCED 643 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P278 MDO1 Output Logic Level ADVANCED 878 MDO1 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied P279 MDO2 Digital Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT PWM MODE BRAKE 22 oU M IC EO 0 Level ADVANCED 879 This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 2 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter 280 MDO2 Selecting Variable A 0 119 41 81 Torque Output ADVANCED This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO 2 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MDO2 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P281 MDO2 Selecting Variable B 0 119 41 A71 Speed MEA ADVANCED This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO2 digital output It selects an analog variable used to
59. When C274 Enabled the thermal protection function is implemented from a PTC sensor the PTC alarm A055 trips when voltage acquired by AIN2 used as a PTC signal input exceeds a preset threshold value when the characteristic temperature is attained Alarm 055 be reset only if temperature decreases by 5 with respect to the trip temperature 42 2 Choosing the Characteristic Parameters Parameter C266 relates to the instantaneous trip current that the internal thermal protection function will begin to monitor the current The default value of 105 is a typical value and it is usually unnecessary to change it The motor thermal time is specific to the motor design and it varies between different motor manufacturers If the motor thermal time is unknown the thermal time constant C267 can be set up as described in the sections below IEC Class Maximum Locked Rotor Time Basic and Maximum Locked Rotor Time Enhanced The first method is the most simple and gives an approximate result The other two methods are more complex but give more accurate results 42 2 1 IEC CLASS The motor can be protected as defined in the IEC 60947 4 1 standard for the thermal overload relays If the protection class is known in order to set up the thermal protection for a certain IEC trip class the value of C267 can be entered as Clas 267 5 10 360 20 720 30 1080 Table 105 Suggested values forthe motor therm
60. e PID reference e PID feedback 3 1 Main Speed Torque Reference If a speed control e g 011 Speed for Motor 1 is used the main reference is a speed reference while if a torque control is used e g COl1 Torque or C011 Speed for Motor 1 but the digital input is closed for The Slave programmed with C170 the main reference of the drive is a torque reference The main reference can be one of the following e Analog digital inputs programmed as sources see parameters C143 C 146 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU e PID output if C294 PID Action Reference e Digital inputs programmed as Multispeed see MULTISPEED MENU only when the main reference is a speed reference 3 2 Speed Torque Limit Reference If speed control is used e g 011 Speed for Motor 1 and or FOC algorithm is used you can program a source as an external torque limit see parameter C 147 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU If a torque control is used and an external speed limit has been set up e g CO11 Torque with Speed Limit for Motor 1 and a FOC algorithm is used you can program one source as an external speed limit see parameter C147 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU 3 3 PID Reference If the internal PID regulator is enabled C291 different from Disabled its reference is given by default by the sum of the three sources programmed as references see parameters C285 C287 in the PID CONFIGURATION MENU Different types of PID reference control Tw
61. ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C164 C165 C166 Extemal Alarm Inputs 0 gt Inactive 1 85 MDI8 9 12 gt MPLA 13 16 gt TFL4 17 24 2 XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED 1164 1165 1166 When allocating one of these 3 functions to a digital input the status of this input will ALWAYS BE CHECKED ON THE DRIVE S TERMINAL BOARD When the command contact opens the drive is locked due to an alarm tripped 2719 Parameters 164 165 C166a allow delaying external alarms To restart the drive the digital input set as an external alarm must be closed and a Reset procedure is required Alarms tripped due to these 3 functions are A083 A084 A085 respectively This function is factory set as disabled The terminal board for these 3 functions is the hardware terminal board of the drive If different command sources are enabled see the CONTROL METHOD MENU the External Alarm signal command is obtained only for the hardware CAUTION terminal board of the drive Therefore in order to avoid any external alarm the input signal for the active terminal must be active in the terminal board Alarms trip when only one input signal for the terminal selected on one of the active command sources is disabled A trip delay can be programmed with parameters C164a C165a C166a C164a C165a C166a Extemal Alarm Trip Dela Range 0 32000 0 3
62. the 2 zone mode as 020 but multiplied by the gain level set in P457 see also the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU As for the display keypad the unit of measure can be programmed with parameters P267b P267c in the DISPLAY KEYPAD menu o PROGRAMMING c L NNE 8 4 Digital Inputs Menu This menu allows checking the state of the command sources for the digital inputs Ilocal terminals serial link and fieldbus the terminal board resulting from their combination and the terminals which are actually used for the drive control The terminals which are actually used to control the drive also consider any timers applied to the digital inputs M031 Delayed Digital Inputs See Table 1 State of the virtual control terminal board used by the drive This is the terminal board resulting from the combination of the preset command sources local terminal board serial link and fieldbus where the ENABLE command is given by the AND logic of all the ENABLE commands For the other inputs the OR command between the different command sources is used See also the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the TIMERS MENU Range Bit controlled See Table 1 measure Active Always active Address State of the virtual control terminal board before applying the timers to the digital inputs if no timer is applied it matches with M031 This is the terminal board resulting from the combination of the preset command sources local termin
63. 026 27 C048 C091 C134 Maximum Torque 5000 5000 500 0 500 0 BASIC C048 ADVANCED 091 134 1048 1091 1134 VTC and FOC This parameter sets the max limit of the torque demanded by the control being used Torque is expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor If an external torque limit is set C147 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU the values set in the parameters above represent the range of the source used for limitation the torque ramp times set in the RAMPS MENU will be applied to the preset limit torque reference 26 027 C049 C092 C135 Ramp Time for Torque Limit 10 30000 10 30000ms ADVANCED 1049 1092 1135 and FOC This parameter sets the time taken by the torque limit of the selected motor to go to zero from max value 309 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C050 C093 C136 Frequency Decrease during Acceleration Limit 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 Enabled ADVANCED 1050 1093 1136 IFD This parameter enables output frequency decrease during acceleration limit NOTE are connected to the drive the frequency decrease can lead to strong Setting 1 Disabled is recommended for high inertia loads When high inertia loads regeneration and DC bus voltage oscillations 310 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE 34 CONTROL METHOD MENU 34 1 Overview o
64. 5 Motor current ADVANCED Selects the variable to be allocated to AO3 analog output 194 Min Value of AO3 Selected Variable P196 AO3 Analog Output Offset Range Default Level Address Function 320 00 320 00 of the full scale value 320 00 320 00 of the full scale value Depends on the value See Table 29 selected through P193 ADVANCED Minimum value of the variable selected via P193 corresponding to the min output value of AO3 set in P198 320 00 320 00 Depends on the value selected through P193 320 00 320 00 of the full scale value See Table 29 Max drive current depending on the drive size see Table 73 and Table 77 Maximum value of the variable selected via P193 corresponding to the max output value of AO3 set 199 9999 9999 Depends on the value 9 999 9 999 selected through P192 ADVANCED Offset value applied to AO3 analog output P197 Filter for AO3 Analog Output 65000 sec 0 000 65 000 sec ADVANCED Value of the filter time constant applied to AO3 analog output 161 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P198 Min AO3 Output Value with Reference to 194 100 100 200 200 10 0 10 0 V Function according to 20 0 20 0 mA the selection 192 ADVANCED 798 Minimum output value obtained when the minimum value of the variable set in 194 is implemented
65. 84 11 1 eux 84 11 2 ROOM T 84 11 3 Keypad Page and 85 11 4 List of Parameters P264 to 269 86 12 RAMPS MENU 92 12 1 Ove eW 92 12 1 1 Description of the Speed 92 12 1 2 Description ihe Torque Ramps 3 2 22 Bened doce era iade Eee 95 12 2 List of Parameters 009 3 96 13 INPUTS FOR REFERENCES 105 13 1 Processing Speed Torque 5 105 13 2 Scaling Analog Inputs REF AINT AIN2 109 13 3 List of Parameters P050 To POZ40 nai agadanandoaenaca aaa dedic iadianee aoc eed 113 14 MULTISPEED MENU 126 14 1 OV6OIVIOW RIDE 126 14 2 Parameters PO8O TO 126 15 MULTIREFERENCES
66. 91 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 12 RAMPS MENU 12 1 Overview An acceleration deceleration ramp is a function allowing linear variations of the motor speed The ramp time is the time the motor takes to reach its max speed when it starts from zero speed or the time the motor takes to reach 0 speed when decelerating Four pairs of programmable values are available Each pair defines the motor acceleration time and deceleration time The unit of measure of the basic time period is assigned to each pair of values In the Ramps menu you can set the acceleration and deceleration times for the four speed ramps available for ordinary operation for the torque ramp and the speed torque ramp in JOG mode Using two special parameters you can also set the start rounding off and the end rounding off for the acceleration ramps while two different parameters allow setting the start rounding off and the end rounding off for the deceleration ramps A fiffh parameter allows selecting the ramps for the preset rounding off 12 1 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE SPEED RAMPS For the four speed ramps that can be selected through a combination of the digital inputs set in C167 and C168 you can set the following acceleration time deceleration time and their units of measure allowing increasing the programmable time range P009 Ramp Up Time 1 P010 Ramp Down Time 1 P012 Ramp Up Time 2 P013 Ramp Down Time 2 P014 Unit of Measure for Ramp Times 1 a
67. ADVANCED Sets the rounding off time period for the end stage of the acceleration ramp This parameter is expressed as a percentage of the acceleration ramp time of the active ramp NOTE When using parameter 23 the preset acceleration ramp time is increased by PO23 2 101 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE P024 Deceleration Ramp Start Rounding Off Time See the function for P022 The only difference is that this rounding off function is applied to the first stage of a deceleration ramp NOTE When using parameter P024 the preset deceleration ramp time is increased by 24 2 25 Deceleration Ramp End Rounding Off Time See the function for 23 The only difference is that this rounding off function is remeron applied to the last stage of a deceleration ramp NOTE When using parameter 025 the preset deceleration ramp time is increased by 25 2 P026 Torque Ramp Time Up 32700 Function of 28 Default 500 ADVANCED Address 626 Defines the time taken by the torque reference of the selected motor to go to zero from max value as an absolute value between Torque min and Torque C047 CO48 for motor 1 and so P027 Torque Ramp Time Down 0 32700 Function of P028 ADVANCED Defines the time taken by the torque reference of the selected motor to go 31741917 from max value to zero as an absolute value between Tor
68. Control only For safety reasons the brake closure contact must be an NO contact closed NOTE contact only when the brake is engaged In addition to parameters C300 to C302 a dedicated MDO must be set as NOE 6 BRAKE see the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU gt gt gt 45 2 List Parameters C300 to C302 Table 111 List of parameters C300 to C302 C300 Positive pretensioning torque ENGINEERING 1300 0 0 301 Positive pretensioning torque time ENGINEERING 1301 0 C300a Negative pretensioning torque ENGINEERING 1308 0 0 C30la mr of negative pretensioning ENGINEERING 1309 0 C302 Closed brake input NO contact ENGINEERING 1302 0 None 405 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C300a Pretensioning Torque mot Range 5000 5000 500 0 500 0 Default Level ENGINEERING Address 1300 1308 Control and If not set to zero this parameter defines the torque value expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor reached before the speed ramp starts after sending a SIARTcommand After sending a SIART command the drive brings the motor torque to the level set in C300 C 300a and torque is adjusted by the speed loop for the time set in C301 C301a in order to keep the motor standstill Once this time has elapsed the speed ramp can start and the motor follows the required speed profile The torque sign defines the
69. DISABLE D ADVANCE 0 gt D ADVANCE 0 gt D ADVANCE 0 D ADVANCE 0 D ADVANCE 0 OR B D 1 Selecting variable C ADVANCE 0 Disable D 1 Function applied to the result of f A B C ADVANCE 0 f A B OR C D ADVANCE 1 TRUE D ADVANCE 0 DISABLE D ADVANCE DO DISABLE D ADVANCE DO DISABLE D ADVANCE 0 gt D ADVANCE 0 gt D ADVANCE 0 D ADVANCE 0 D ADVANCE 0 A OR D Selecting variable ADVANCE 0 Disable D Function applied to the result of f A B C ADVANCE 0 f A B ORC D ADVANCE 1 TRUE D 1 Digital output mode 1 Selecting variable A 1 Selecting variable B 1 Testing variable A 1 Testing variable B 1 Comparing value for Test A 1 Comparing value for Test B 1 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests 1 Output logic level Digital output mode Selecting variable A Selecting variable B Testing variable A Testing variable Comparing value for Test A Comparing value for Test B Function applied to the result of the 2 tests Output logic level P368 MPL3 Digital output mode mu S 0 DISABLE 968 Selecting variable di a 00 DISABLE 969 E370 MPL3 Selecting variable B Pv E 00 DISABLE 970 P371 MPL3 Testing variable A ice 0 gt 971 P372 MPL3 Testing variable B a id 0 gt 972 373 MPL3 Comparing value for Test A ADV
70. ENGINEERING 559 581 587 These parameters allow selecting the measures to be passed to the drive from the Master PLC through the eight process data items that can be mapped the fast communication area between the Master and the Slave station You can select any measure from the MEASURES MENU R044 DRIVE PROHLE COMMUNICATION MODE ae Ce 21251 520 This parameter sets the version of the protocol 435 482 iDrive R045 DRIVE PROFLE SELECTION ENGINEERING _Address 507 LONNE 0 PROFiDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1 VENDOR SPECIFIC 1 2 VENDOR SPECIFIC 2 1 VENDOR SPECIFIC 1 This parameter sets the control mode Command and Reference for the Slave station 0 PROFiDrive 1 VENDOR SPECIFIC 1 2 VENDOR SPECIFIC 2 Command Reference PRO FiDrive VENDOR 1 VENDOR SPECIAC 2 According to the protocol According to the protocol The eight low bits in the CONTROL WORD represent the eight digital inputs in the control board According to the PROFldrive protocol One to one scale of the programmed reference One to one scale of the programmed reference NOTE Bit 11 in the control board enables or not the Fieldbus line watchdog in any of the Three control modes above provided that parameter RO16 is set higher than zero The watchdog activates only after the drive has received t
71. FOC Input description Use the ESC key to enter the value of an input If the SAVE ENTER key is used W17 SAVE IMPOSSIBLE warning is displayed When changing a or Cxxx parameter via the display keypad you may activate its new value immediately flashing cursor or when you quit the programming mode fixed cursor Typically numeric parameters immediately come to effect while alphanumeric parameters have a delayed effect When changing a Pxxx or parameter via the RemoteDrive the drive will immediately use the new parameter value ALARMS AND WARNINGS The last part of this User Manual covers alarms and warnings Wxxx displayed by the drive 14 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE 1 USING THE DISPLAY KEYPAD UNIT 1 1 Overview This section contains several examples about navigating in the display keypad unit and the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD functions of the programming settings of the drive when using the keypad More details about the keypad settings contrast backlight etc are given in the section covering the display keypad in the Installation Instructions Manual Details about custom navigation in the root page the measures in the Keypad page and the Root page and the custom unit of measure of the PID controller are given in the DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU in this manual When using the navigation by menu mode P264 BY MENU the structure of the menu tree that can be explored
72. Last speed 379 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Speed Searching starts according to the value set in C249 C249 5 amp Speed Value the last speed search value generated before disabling the system is used for soeed searching C249 1 MaxSpd LastDir the max speed programmed for the motor in the last direction of rotation of the connected motor is produced C249 2 MaxSpd Pos Dir the speed searching function will begin with the max speed programmed for the motor in the positive direction of rotation independently of the last frequency value produced before disabling the drive C249 3 MaxSpd Neg Dir 2 but the direction of rotation of the connected motor will always be negative 380 482 PROGRAMMING c L NNE 41 AUTORESET MENU 41 1 Overview The Autoreset function can be enabled in case an alarm trips You can enter the maximum number of autoreset attempts and the time required for resetting the attempt number If the Autoreset function is disabled you can program an autoreset procedure at power on which resets an active alarm when the drive is shut off Undervoltage alarms or mains loss alarms can be saved in the fault list the Autoreset menu To activate the Autoreset function set a number of attempts other than zero in parameter C255 When the number of reset attempts is the same as the value set in C255 the autoreset function is disabled It will be enabled agai
73. P000665 b Figure 43 Torque contol with speed limit NOTE Mode 2 be selected only if FOC control is implemented 281 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C012 C055 C 098 Speed Feedback from Encoder Default EN 1012 1055 1098 and FOC This parameter enables the encoder as a speed feedback F ncton It defines the encoder characteristics and whether Encoder MDI and MDI7 in the terminal board or Encoder B with option board is used as a speed feedback see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU C013 C056 C099 Type of 0 Constant Torque Range 0 2 1 Quadratic 2 Free Setting 182117 See Table 75 and Table 79 Level BASIC 1013 1056 1099 teo OMM Allows selecting different types of V f pattern If 013 056 099 Constant torque voltage at zero frequency can be selected Preboost C034 077 120 If C013 056 099 Quadratic you can select voltage at zero frequency preboost 077 120 max voltage drop with respect to the theoretical V f pattern C032 C075 C118 and the frequency allowing implementing max voltage drop C033 C076 C119 If C013 056 099 Free Setting you can set voltage at zero frequency preboost C034 CO77 C120 voltage increase to 20 of the rated frequency BoostO0 C035 C078 C121 and voltage increase to a programmed frequency B
74. P268 P268a Measure n 1 n 2 on Root Page MO90 see the MEASURES MENU P268 gt M004 Motor Spd 268 gt gt M000 Speed Ref ADVANCED Cannot be accessed via serial link These two parameters allow selecting two measures to be displayed on the Root Page P268y P268z Scaling of Measure n 1 n 2 on Root page O 100 00 100 00 ADVANCED 515 516 These parameters allow scaling the read out of the measures on the Root page which have been selected with parameters P268 and P268a 000 MO90 see the MEASURES MENU P268b MOO06 Mot Freq P268c M026 Motor Current P268d M004 Motor Spd 268 M000 Speed Ref ADVANCED Cannot be accessed via serial link These four parameters allow selecting four measures to be displayed on the Keypad Page Measure n 4 is available in the measure Keypad page only The reference to NOTE a measure n 4is available for the remaining Keypad pages P269 Disable LOC REM FWD REV Ke Default Level Address Function O No No 3 YES YES ENGINEERING This parameter allows disabling the LOC REM and or the AWD REV key This is a bit controlled parameter bit 0 relates to LOC REM while bit 1 relates to FWD REV Set 0 to select NO set 1 to select Yes P269 0 gt both keys are enabled P269 1 gt the LOC REM key is disabled P269 2 the FWD REV key is disabled P269 3 both keys are disabled
75. P396 Percentage of Speed Min producing E min reference Y axis related to P396 poe ee _ eee P397 5 XAINS input producing max reference ADVANCED 20 0mA 997 Percentage of Speed Min Trq Min producing VES pose min reference Y axis related to P397 ee NS P398 Offset over XAIN5 input ADVANCED OmA 298 P399 Filtering time over XAIN5 input ADVANCED 100 ms 999 256 482 This parameter selects the type of single ended analog signal over XAINA terminal in the terminal board The signal can be a voltage signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 0 10 V Bipolar voltage input between 10V and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 1 O 10 V Unipolar voltage input between and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE P391 Value of XAIN4 Input Producing Min Reference 100 100 if P390 0 10 0V 10 0 if P390 0 10 V 100 if P390 1 OOV 100 if P390 1 0 10V ADVANCED This parameter selects the value for XAIN4 input signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in C028 xP391a Master mode or in C047xP39la Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used P391a Percentage of Speed Min Trg Min Producing Min Reference Y axis related to P391 O 1000 ADVANCED This
76. integral derivative regulator that can be used to implement the following Analog output e Main reference of the drive Speed Torque reference e Correction of the main reference e Correction of the output voltage only for Volt Freq IFD control See the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU for more details 4 10 Bridge Crane Application For lifting applications such as a bridge crane it may be useful to consider the actual time required to release The safety electromechanical brake the delay between the electrical command and the actual opening of The brake and the closure of the electromechanical brake For a detailed description of the benefits offered by the parameters relating to liffing applications see the BRIDGE CRANE MENU 4 11 Setting Two Alternative Command Sources and Reference Sources You can set a digital input as a selector switch allowing selecting two alternative control sources and reference sources Example A selector switch is required to select control mode B the drive references and commands are sent via fieldbus and control mode A the drive reference is sent analog input and commands are sent via keypad The following parameters shall be set up accordingly C179 MDI for source selection MDI6 C140 Selection of control source n 1 Keypad C141 Selection of control source n 2 Fieldbus C143 Selection of reference 1 AIN1 C144 Selection of reference n 2 F
77. m bar 1 bar bar ft mbar 2 mbar mbar m s atm 3 atm atm ft s Pa 4 Pa Pa rom kPa 5 kPa kPa gal s PSI PSI PSI gal min m s 7 m3 s m3 s gal h m min 8 m3 m m3 m ft3 s m3 h 9 m3 h m3 h 1 5 10 1 5 1 5 l min 11 1 m 12 13 9 id 31 W 14 C kW 32 kW kW P267a P267c Custom PID PID2 Units of Measure Range 0x20 8 every ASCII 0x20 blank byte ASCII OxBA ASCII Ox5D ASCII 0x25 0 1 502558 OxSB gt ENGINEERING This is a 32 bit data item Characters are 8 bit ASCII encoded there are 1207 1892 three 8 bit characters starting from the less significant bit Bit 24 must always be set to 1 Parameter 267 267 is active only if P267 P267b 0 Disable and it relates to the unit of measure actually displayed in M023 M024 2 MO24a This parameter allows setting a 3 character string to display the units of measures for the PID Measures M023 M024 2 24 Press the key to edit each character when a flashing cursor appears on the left of each character press A and V to scroll all the characters displayed Press the ESC key to go to the next character Press SAVE ENTER to store the new parameter value See also parameter P257 P457 in the PID PARAMETERS MENU ANO 90 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE Bis
78. see the 5 Installation Instructions manual an additional encoder reading encoder B is allowed NOTE If and MDI7 are used for encoder reading only Push Pull encoders can be used For the reversal of the encoder speed measure properly set up parameter C 199 36 1 1 WHEN ES836 1 NOT USED e Encoder reading Digital inputs MDI6 and MDI7 are used for reading the two channels of a 24V push pull encoder powered directly by the IDrive control board see the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual No function can be programmed for MDI6 and MDIZ if you attempt to program and MDI7 alarm A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes e Reading a Frequency Input Digital inputs or MDI8 can be used If MDI6 is programmed as a frequency input HNA with C189 no other function can be programmed otherwise alarm A100 MDI6 Illegal Configuration trips when ENABLE closes If is programmed as a frequency input ANB with C189 no other function can be allocated to MDI8 and ES836 ES913 option board must not be applied to the power drive otherwise alarm A101 MDI8 Illegal Configuration trips when ENABLE closes Reading a Frequency Inputand an Encoder and MDI7 are used to read the push pull encoder and MDIS is used to read the frequency input The following alarms may trip A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration if additional functions are allocated to MDI6 or MDI7
79. set parameter 014 Phase Rotation to 1 Yes or open the ENABLE and START inputs remove voltage from the drive and after waiting at least 5 minutes reverse two of the motor phases If overshoot occurs when the speed setpoint is attained or if a system instability is detected uneven motor operation adjust the parameters relating to the speed loop SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU Set the two parameters relating to integral time P125 P126 as Disabled and set low values for the parameters relating to proportional gain P127 P128 Set equal values for P127 and P128 and increase them until overshoot takes place when the setpoint is attained Decrease P127 and P128 by approx 30 then decrease the high values set for integral time in P125 and P126 keep both values equal until an acceptable setpoint response is obtained Check to see if the motor runs smoothly at constant speed If alarm A060 Fault No Curr trips this means that the current loop is not properly tuned Follow the instructions given in step 8 and decrease the value of lo parameter CO21in the MOTOR CONTROL MENU If the motor is noisy when starting this means that the rotor time constant is not correct Follow the instructions given in step 9 again or manually change the value of the rotor time constant parameter C025 for a smooth motor startup If no failure occurred go to step 13 Otherwise check the drive connections paying particular attention to sup
80. the braking period is then compatible with that rating Otherwise a higher rated resistor should be applied Parameter setting C210 With resistor 211 305 212 50 Factory setting assumes that braking resistor is provided In this case C210 sets promptness with respect to variations of DC bus for the deceleration ramp slowing down in order not to overload the bus capacitor bank If C210 is set to zero in FOC control deceleration slows down when given values of the voltage bar are reached depending on the drive voltage class If C210 is gt 0 DC bus voltage is controlled by considering the derivative of the bus voltage The higher the value in C210 the lower the values for voltage variation affecting deceleration ramp times NOTE The clamp transistor is commanded if the drive is supplied from a Regenerative source see C008 xT Regen where x can be 2 4 5 or 6 357 482 PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 37 2 List of Parameters C210 to C212 Table 100 List of parameters C210 to C212 74 210 Automatic extension of down ramp 1210 and Table 78 C211 Max time of continuous supply 1211 2 00sec C212 Duty Cycle Braking Ton Toff Ton 1212 10 C210 Automatic Extension of Down Ramp iTi CE 1 32000 0 01 With Resistance 320 00 plies See Table 74 and Table 78 Level ENGINEERING Dez 1210 If C210 W
81. the stronger the integral action is this phenomenon is called windup In case of output saturation the integral term can reach very high values as a result the error shall have opposite sign for a long period before exiting from saturation The PID regulator of the IDrive drive is provided with an Anti windup function which compensates the effect described above This Anti windup action is described below P proportional term l integral term D derivative term The output is always calculated as follows OUT e 1 0 When output saturation occurs OUT lt OUTsat The integral term is forced based on the following lt OUTsat which is the Anti windup function This prevents the integral term from reaching very high values the integral term is then kept constantly in line with the saturated output value OUTsat that is present at each moment any variations of the error i e the that allows exiting from saturation have immediate effect to the output without having to wait for a long time before discharging the integral term itself The effect of the Anti windup can be adjusted with parameter P260 if P260 lt 1 the effect is reduced and the system is less sensitive to error variations if P260 0 the effect is cancelled The value of 260 1 is correct for the applications requiring to quickly exit from saturation On the other hand reducing P260 can be useful when output variations are to be avoided for neg
82. where the x axis shows the LRC FLC ratio and the y axis shows the multiplicative constant to be applied to the LRT to calculate the value of parameter C267 60 50 40 30 C267ILRT e o 20 10 8 9 LRC FLC 000816 0 Figure 61 Set up of parameter C 267 depending on the ratio Example 1b When using a 7 5kW motor the multiplicative constant corresponding to an LRC FLC 8 2 is approx 46 if referring to the graph above As a result the motor thermal time constant that you would select is 27 3 x 46 C267 1257s which is a more accurate value than 1080s computed in Example 1a Example 2 The 250kW motor in Table 106 can be approximated to have a trip class of 690 x 79 IEC Class 90 85 100 x 6 Because this value is not given in Table 105 the motor thermal time constant that you would select is directly C267 90 85 x 36 32605 90 85 x 33 2998s if the value 33 is considered resulting from Table 106 with a ratio between LRC FLC 6 9 386 482 PROGRAMMING LO NNE Dive 42 3 Thermal Protection Trip Delay The graph below shows the thermal protection trip delay depending on the IEC Class and the current flowing which is supposed to be constant Parameter C266 trip current is factory set to 105 10000 IEC Class 90 IEC Class 60 IEC Class 30 Class 20 1o _ IEC Class 1
83. 0 IFD COlLRefMode MI 0 Speed CO12 EncEnab 1 0 No 013 f model C014 Phase Rot Mot 0 No C015 Fmot 50 0 Hz 016 mot 1420 rom 017 018 019 1 C020 P0 MI 0 0 21 0 0 C022 Rstat C023 Ld 024 m MI 250 00 mH C025 TauRot 1 0 ms CO26 vacFiltMI Oms C028 nmin 1 Orpm C029 nmax 1500 rpm C030 spddeflux 1 90 1 Disabled CO32 red Tra 30 0 033 5 1 20 C034 Preboost C034a Boost ref pos 1 0 0 0 0 035 510 1 C036 Boost MI C037 FraBst C038 AutoBst CO039 SlipComp Disabled C040 DV MI Disabled COALTI 1 C042 Vout Sat 85 C04x C 05x Limits 1 C043 lacclim 1 150 CO44 Irunlim 1 150 CO045 Ideclim 1 C046 defilimRed 1 0 Disabled C047 Tmin 1 0 0 C048 Tmax MI 120 049 Ramp 1 505 C050 fRedLimAcc MI 0 Enabled C05x C 08x Motor Control M2 C053 Cirl Type M2 0 IFD C054 RefMode M2 0 Speed CO55 EncEnab M2 0 No CO056 v f mode2 C057 Phase Rot Mot2 0 No C058 Fmot M2 50 0 Hz 059 mot M2 1420 rom C060 Pmot M2 1 1 M2 C062 Vmot M2 63 M2 0 0 76 064 0 M2 0 C065 Rstat M2 C066 Ld 2 C067 Lm M2 250 00 mH C068 TauRot M2 Oms CO069 vacFiltM2 Oms C071 nmin M2 Orpm C072 nmax M2 1500 rpm C073 spadeflux M2 90 C074 nsa M2 Disabled 075 2 30 0 076 5
84. 1131 Current limit decrease in flux 1046 89 2 weakening ADVANCED 1089 0 Disabled C132 M3 1132 C047 M1 1047 9 M2 Minimum torque ADVANCED 1090 0 0 C133 M3 1133 48 1 1048 091 2 Maximum torque 1091 120 0 C134 ADVANCED 1134 C049 M1 1049 C092 2 Ramp time for torque limit ADVANCED 1092 50ms C135 1135 C050 M1 Frequency decrease during 1930 9 2 aec leration limit ADVANCED 1093 0 Enabled C136 M3 1136 307 482 PROGRAMMING iDnve INSTRUCTIONS C043 C086 C129 Curent Limit While acceleratin 0 Disabled O 400 C 1 0 inverter Imot 400 0 150 Level BASIC C043 ADVANCED C086 C129 I e 1043 1086 1129 efi ME IFD This parameter defines the current limit while accelerating it is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the selected motor The maximum allowable value dependson the drive size C044 C087 C130 Current Limit at Constant Rom 0 Disabled iE 400 7 1 0 Min Ipeak inverter Imot 400 0 150 044 087 130 1044 1087 1130 ero NM This parameter defines the current limit at constant rom it is expressed as a percentage rated current of the selected motor The maximum allowable value depends on the drive size C045 C088 C131 Curent Limit whil
85. 12 gt MPLI MPL4 13 16 gt TFLA 17 24 2 XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED 1297 The START input behaves as the SIARTinput see the START section when terminal board B is active 0 5 Inactive 1 8 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI8 This parameter disables the RUN function enabled by SIARTcommand The setting of this function affects the enabling disabling mode of the RUN commana it can be enabled disabled using the START and STOP keys or the START STOP and REVERSE keys instead of the START key as an ON OFF switch factory setting If the drive is enabled 117 Press enable the drive RUN Press STOP to disable the drive RUN reference is set to zero so the speed or torque setpoint decreases to zero based on the preset deceleration ramp In case of preset STOP the keypad and one or more terminal boards may be enabled at a time In this case the START key and the STOP key in the display keypad are active and can enable or disable the drive RUN The STOP input is normally closed input signal According to factory setting only the hardware terminal board selected with command source 1 C140 1 is active as a switch operated mode 150 0 To switch to the key operated mode set the STOP input C150 0 The keypad other terminal boards may be selec
86. 2 5T 3 er 79 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 The type of fan control is marked by 3 characters Table 13 Fan control modes F The fan activation is controlled by the inverter S The fan operation is correct when a fan fault is detected the relevant alarm trips N A sensor is fitted that acquires the heatsink temperature The fan activation threshold is set in parameter C264 Table 14 Coding forfan activation Code Symbol Fansatus 0 1 S No Yes No 2 F Yes No No 3 FS Yes Yes No 4 N No No Yes 5 SN No Yes Yes 6 F N Yes No Yes 7 FSN Yes Yes Yes SW Application SWApplication This screen displays the type of software application which is implemented in the drive e g Multipump Regenerative etc 211 See L nne Scandinavia AS s Catalogue about Software Accessories For the application software downloading instructions see the relevant User Manuals User SW Versions 0 65535 Texas 233 MMI 1489 Motorola 1487 This screen displays the SW versions implemented on the IDrive drive Texas SW version of the DSP Texas MMI SW version of the display keypad Motorola SW version of Motorola microprocessor Serial Number 0 9999999 0 9999999 Address 1827 1828 LSWord MSWord This is the serial number of the drive The serial numbe
87. 271 32 1 2 271 32 1 3 Parameters of the Equivalent Circuit of the Asynchronous Machine 272 32 1 4 Maui PAIN RR 273 32 1 5 Example 1 Pattern Parameterization 274 32 1 6 Example 2 V f Pattern Parameterization 275 32 1 7 5165 Compensation AED OPI ist E 275 32 1 8 Torque Control and FOC OMY 276 32 2 istot Parameter C008 19 277 32 3 Tables Including the Parameters Depending on the Drive 5 293 32 3 1 Irc 293 3232 Voltage Class 5 6 301 33 LIMITS pat Hood v be UE RN RAE 306 33 1 306 4 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE 33 2 LiSt OF Parame ler 3 135 307 34 CONTROL METHOD MENU edere 311 34 1 OVEN VIEW 15 35 311 34 1 1 1 312 34 1 2 Speed Torque REFERENCE 5 314 34 1 3 Alternative Command Reference 317 34 1 4 318 34 1 5 Remote Eocal MOGQGOG ip re IP 318 34 2 How to Manage the Refe
88. 3 The SLAVE mode may also be selected through a digital input see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU When the main reference is acquired by the drive RUNNING it becomes the reference for the time ramps generating the current speed torque set point for the connected motor The set up of the main reference is based on a number of parameters included in several menus Table 20 Parameters used for the Inputs for References Menu Scaling parameters for references sent from analog inputs REF AIN2 Scaling parameters for references sent from encoder and frequency input P050 P074 References Parameters for changes made using the UP and DOWN keys Parameter for JOG reference setting Parameter for drive disabling in case of reference at min value P390 P399 References from Scaling parameters for references sent from analog option board inputs XAIN4 XAIN5 PO80 P098 i Parameters setting preset multispeed values to be selected through digital inputs P105 P108 Prohibit Speed Parameters setting prohibit speed values 115 P121 Reference Parameters setting slowing down values percent to be Vaniation Percent selected through digital inputs C143 C146 Control Method Parameters setting the reference source C011 C028 CO29 Control of Motor 1 Parameter setting the Master speed mode or the C054 C071 72 Control of Motor 2 Slave torque mode Parameters setting
89. 3 PID 0 Disabled v R w s 291 Operating Mode R w s 281 1 Control Mode 0 Standarasum IR w C291b PID2 Operating Mode 1 Normal R w s C292 Quantity Selection to Compute Derivative Term 0 Measue R w s 293 Used a Multiplier for Integral and Derivative Terms 0 No R 5 1 Reference The PID regulator parameters are defined in the PID PARAMETERS MENU This configuration limits the PID output between 0 and 100 for a proper rotation of the connected pump Set P255 1000 ts if the PID output is equal to the min value for 5 seconds the drive is put on stand by 403 482 e PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE s P236 PID Maximum Output fi 00 00 R w P237 PID Minimum Output 0 00 R w P237a Wake Up mode for PID 0 Disabled R w s P23 b Wake Up level for PID 238 Value of PID Integral Term hooo R w s P239 Maximum Value of PID Derivative Term fi 00 00 P240 Proportional Coefficient Value 5 000 P241 Proportional Term Multiplicative Factor 1 P242 Integral Time Multiples of Tc 500 Disabled R w s P243 Derivative Time Multiples of Tc 1000 0 R w P244 Cycle Time Tc 5 ms R w S P245 PID Reference Moo R w P246 PID Reference Max Value 0000 R w s
90. 5 4 3 0 BE XMDOS5 XMDOA XMDO3 XMDO2 XMDO Joco MDO4 1 Status of the Pre charge contactor Words 8 9 10 REF AIN1 AIN2 Analogue Signal Full scale value 16380 is a rated value corresponding to an input range of 10V This value can be changed due to automatic compensation of the tolerance of the input stage REF AINT AIN2 The measures of the analog inputs sent from the IDrive to the Master are the NOTE unfiltered measure values detected in the A D converter output For filtered measures use M037 M038 and 39 respectively 432 482 iDrive Z SANTERNO GRUPPO CARRARO INSTRUCTIONS 51 EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU 51 1 Overview NOTE Once saved they are active only when the drive is next switched on or when the Parameters this menu are Rxxx parameters control board is reset by holding down the RESETkey for more than 5 secs 51 2 List of Parameters R021 to R023 Table 116 List of parameters R021 to R023 Disable 553 None R021 Data Logger setting R023 board setting R021 Data Logger Seting 1 Disable rang 2 Enable dM 1 Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter enables or disables Data Logger initialization if the Data Function Logger board is fitted R023 I O Board Setting 0 None 1 XMDI O 2 XMDI O XAIN 3 XMDI O PT100 4 XMDI O XAIN PT100 Based
91. 6 V If P052 6V a speed reference of 1500rpm is set for REF with 5V Setting the reference from digital inputs Default setting two digital inputs for multispeed values Digital Inputs Menu C155 MDI4 C156 MDI5 Depending on the status of digital inputs MDI4 and MDI5 In the MULTISPEED MENU menu set the speed steps as follows 8 1 Sum Speed 81 100 Multispeed 1 8 200rpm Multispeed 2 85 300rpm Multispeed 3 P080 Multispeed function the selected multispeed is summed up to the reference for the analog input 081 P083 PO85 are the steps depending on the selected multispeed for digital inputs MDIS5 34 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS iDrive 5 3 Configuring the External Torque Limit Setting POOO Write Enable POOL Eng Access Level lins of equired as a torque values ameters ie C048 s PO26 d to the 35 482 iDrive L Setting Write Enable 1 Eng Access Level 36 482 menu set PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS tion board Installation for the er and the oder type enabling following rection of ers in the B is used J and the used as PROGRAMMING T c OLONNE Dive 5 5 Configuring a Reference from Encoder Setting Write Enable 1 Eng Access Level st the t C189
92. 78 C127 M3 1127 042 1 1042 085 2 Vout saturation percentage 1085 100 C128 M3 1128 C008 Rated Mains Voltage 200 240 V 2T Regen 380 480 V 481 500 V AT Regen 500 600 V ST Regen 600 690 V 6T Regen 380 480 V This parameter defines the rated voltage of the mains powering the drive thus allowing obtaining voltage ranges to be used for the drive operation The value set in this parameter depends on the Drive voltage class To supply the drive via a non stabilized DC source the corresponding AC voltage range must be used see Table 72 DO NOT USE xT Regen settings in this case Table 72 Equivalence between AC mains range and DC range 200 240 Vac 280 338 380 480 530 678 481 500 Vac 680 705 500 600 705 810 600 690 Vac 810 970 Select xT Regen where x relates to the voltage class of the drive if the drive is DC supplied through a regenerative Drive or a different drive used to stabilize the DC bus to higher level than the stabilization level obtained when rectifying the 3 phase mains C009 of Configured Motors ENGINEERING This parameter determines the number of motors to be configured The active motor is selected through digital inputs programmed with C173 and C174 see the DIGITAL INPUTS MEN
93. C182 MultiProg 0 Disabled C183 lflux dis AlwaysON C184 StartFlux 0 No C185 tartFrwheel 0 Dec Ramp C186 FireMode 0 None C187 DisabExtTlim 0 None C188a MrefPID 1 0 None C188b MrefPID 2 0 None C188c MrefPID 3 0 None C18x C 19x Encoder Frequency Input C189 UseEnc 0 A B Unused C190 pulsEncA 1024 C191 pulsEncB 1024 192 5 5 00 5 1935 300 C194 TrackAlrEn 1 Enable C195 tauFiltFdbk 5 0 ms C196 tauFiltRef 5 0 ms 477 482 iDrive LONNE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C197 nCH ENCA 0 2Ch Quad C198 nCH ENCB 0 2Ch Quad C199 EncSign 0 Fdbk NO Ref NO C21x Braking Unit C210 Enab Vel Brake C211 BrakeTon 2 00 s C212 BrkDutyCycle 10 21 22 Braking C215 Enab dcb stop 0 No C216 Enab dcb start 0 No C217 Tdcb stop 0 5 C218 Tdcb start 0 5 5 C219 dcb speed 50 rom C220 dcb 100 C221 dcb hold 0 C222 Tdefl C223 Tdefl M2 C224 Idefl M3 C22x C 23x Power Down C225 pwd type 3 Alarm 226 10 ms C227 Toddec 20 5 C228 Pddecboost 0 10 C229 Pddcder 1 C230 Vpadel 231 0 050 C232 Kivdclc 0 500s C234 stopmode 0 Stop C235 stoplev Orpm C24x Speed Searching C245 Enab SpdSch 0 No C246 tssd ls C247 SpsRate 10
94. C194 Speed Enor Enable Default Level Address Function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 50 ENGINEERING This parameter defines the time constant used for filtering the reading of the encoder used as a speed feedback 50 ENGINEERING 1196 This parameter defines the time constant used for filtering the reading of the encoder used as a reference 0 2 Squaring Channels 1 Channel only 0 2 Squaring Channels ENGINEERING This parameter defines the number of channels used for encoder A reading Factory setting is 2 Squaring channels Soeed can be read through one channel only as for phonic wheel channel 2 can define the direction of rotation low level negative rotation high level gt positive rotation 355 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C198 Number of Channels of EncoderB 0 2 Squaring channels 1 Channel only 0 2 Squaring channels ENGINEERING 1198 This parameter defines the number of channels used for encoder B reading see parameter C197 C199 Encoder Sign Reversal See Table 99 0 Fdbk Ref NO ENGINEERING 1199 This parameter permits to reverse the speed sign measured by encoder inputs NOTE When tuning the encoder the encoder sign used as feedback is automatically adjusted to the direction of rotation of the connected motor Table 99 Coding of C199 0 Fdbk NO Ref NO 1 Fdbk YES Ref NO 2 Fdbk NO Ref YES 3 F
95. Commands Bumpless 3 Drive Running All Bumpless 0 StandBy or Fluxing ENGINEERING The drive factory setting StandBy or Fluxing allows switching over from Remote to Local mode and vice versa only when the drive is not running Different settings allowed by parameter C148 are detailed below switching from Remote to Local mode and vice versa can be performed even when the drive is running No Bumpless When switching from Remote to Local mode zero speed or torque reference is sent to the drive the SIART button must be pressed to start the drive Commands Bumpless When switching from Remote to Local mode zero speed or torque reference is sent to the drive but the running conditions are the same as in Remote mode For example if the motor is running in Remote mode the drive still runs even in Local mode and the reference can be changed with the INC DEC key starting from zero e All Bumpless When switching from Remote to Local mode the drive maintains the same speed torque reference and the same running condition as in Remote mode For example if the motor is running at 1000 rpm in Remote mode the drive still runs even in Local mode with a reference of 1000 rpm that can be changed with the INC DEC key starting from Zero NOTE Parameter C148 affects parameters C140 C147 C285 C287 see CONFIGURATION MENU when the PID controller is enabled 323 482 PRO
96. Disable ENGINEERING 916 Selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of XMDO6 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of XMDO6 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P317 XMDO6 Output Logic Level ENGINEERING 917 XMDOS6 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied 224 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE 26 MEASURE CONTROL FROM PT100 26 1 Overview This menu relates to ES847 control board It can be viewed only if R023 I O board setting PT100 see the EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU The analog inputs can be linked to measure sensors NOTE Set DIP Switches 1 and 2 as follows for proper data acquisition from PT100 26 2 List of Parameters P318 to P325 Table 51 List of parameters P318 to P325 Channel 1 measure mode t 920 0 no input P321 Channel 1 measure offset 00 921 322 Channel 2 measure mode T 922 0 no input P323 Channel 2 measure offset 00 923 324 Channel 3 measure mode ee 924 0 no input P325 Channel 3 mesaure offset 0 0 C 925 P326 Channel 4 measure mode T 926 0 no input P327 Channel 4 mesaure offset 00 927 225 482 iDrive P320 Channel 1 Meas
97. If the connected motor must run at a higher speed than its rated speed flux weakening measure the load current value of the motor at its rated speed not at its max speed If the no load current of the motor is not known and the motor cannot run in no load conditions use a first attempt value for lo that is automatically computed by the drive as described in step 7 When parameter 021 lo 0 the drive will automatically set a value depending on the motor NOTE ratings whenever the motor autotune step 7 is performed Once a no load current value is entered in 021 the value of the parameter relating to mutual inductance C024 will be automatically computed when parameters 073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 1 FOC Auto no rotation are set up as for current autotune CO24 is computed even if no autotune procedure occurs Also set C022 resistance of one stator phase for a star connection or one third of one phase resistance for a delta connection and C023 stator leakage inductance of one phase for a star connection or one third of the leakage of one phase for a delta connection The value for C022 corresponds to half the resistance value measured with ohm meter between two phases of the motor If values to be set for C022 and C023 are iDrive 45 482 o PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 7 not known motor autotune is required see step 6 otherwise go to step 7 Press SAVE ENTER each ti
98. Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction If not select the Engineering Level P001 and set parameter C014 Phase Rotation to 1 Yes or open the ENABLE and START inputs remove voltage from the drive and after waiting at least 5 minutes reverse two of the motor phases 41 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 9 Possible failures If no failure occurred go to step 10 Otherwise check the drive connections paying particular attention to supply voltages DC link and input reference Also check if alarm messages are displayed In the MEASURES MENU check the reference speed MOOI the supply voltage to the control section 030 the DC link voltage M029 and the condition of control terminals 3 Check to see if these readouts match with the measured values 10 Additional When parameter P003 Standby Only condition required for changing C parameter parameters you can change Cxxx parameters in the CONFIGURATION modifications menu only when the drive is DISABLED or STOPPED whereas if P003 Standby Fluxing you can change Cxxx parameters when the motor is stopped but the drive is enabled Before changing any parameters remember that the correct code for parameter must be previously set up You can write down any custom parameters in the table provided on the last pages of this Programming Manual 11 Reset If an alarm trips find the cause responsible for the alarm and reset the
99. Measure Default See Table 74 and Table 78 Level ADVANCED Address Defines the unit of measure for the times for speed ramp 3 P015 and Function 016 and speed ramp 4 20 and 18 The allowable programmable range may be extended from 0 5 to 3270005 100 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE P021 Selection for Ramp Rounding Off 0000b 11116 binary Ox0000 0x000F hexadecimal 00005 ramps 9 15 11116 all ramps See Table 74 and Table 78 Level ADVANCED Address In this parameter you can select the bit corresponding to the ramp to be rounded off Example iz iei PO21 0011b decimal ramps 1 and 2 are rounded off The ramp rounding off allows reaching the reference end value with a zero tangent both while accelerating and while decelerating thus suppressing torque peaks that could damage mechanical couplings P022 Acceleration Ramp Start Rounding Off Time Sets the rounding off time period for the first stage of the acceleration ramp This parameter is expressed as a percentage of the acceleration ramp time of the active ramp Example the second ramp is active with an acceleration ramp time of 5sec 22 50 Therefore reference acceleration is limited for the first 2 5 sec of the ramp time NOTE When using parameter 022 the preset acceleration ramp time is increased by 22 2 2 Acceleration Ramp End Rounding Off Time
100. NOTE Voltage Sum Block 3 PID Control Mode This block allows applying different processing types to the feedback signals and allows enabling disabling the PID2 integrated into the system see 291 Block 4 Ramp over PID Reference Aramp may be applied to the PID references sent from block 3 The same ramp is applicable for both blocks the processed references are the ones actually used in the PID regulator The parameters of the PID reference ramp are illustrated in the figure below The initial rounding off is applied to the reference whenever a new acceleration deceleration ramp is started while the end reference is applied at the end of each ramp 392 482 PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P249 Ramp UP for PID reference P250 Ramp DOWN for reference Ramps reference PID Reference P251 PID Ramp unit of measure gt gt gt P252 Start S Curve for PID ramps P253 End S Curve for PID ramps P000362 B 4 Figure 65 PID ramp reference NOTE The PID2 ramp reference control is the same but parameters P2xx are replaced with parameters Block 5 PID regulators This is the real PID regulator Its output may be disabled by an external digital command if programmed with C171 the PID regulator is used as a reference source and P255 P455 for PID2 is not set to zero the PID output value control is enabled If the PID output equals the preset minimum value
101. P030 J 1 5 PO31 SodAccReset 1 Yes P032 TupFireM P033 TanFireM 5 7 Reference PO50 REF 3 0 10 51 0 0 V PO51a REFMIN_ 100 P052 REFMAX 10 0 P052a REFMAX 76 10076 PO53 REFOFFS 0 000 V PO54 TauFilt REF 5ms P055 AINT 2 4 20mA P056 AIN MIN 4 0 mA P056a AINIMIN 10076 P057 AINIMAX 20 0 mA P057a AINTMAX 76 10076 P058 AINTOFFS 0 000 mA P059 TauFilt AINT 5ms PO060 AIN2 2 4 20 PO61 AIN2MIN 4 0 mA PO61a AIN2MIN_ 100 PO62 AIN2MAX 20 0 mA P062a AIN2MAX 76 10076 PO63 AIN2OFFS 0 000 mA PO64 TauFilt AIN2 5ms PO65 SpdDisab Orpm PO66 SpdDisabTime Os P067 U D Ramp Square P068 U D Mem Yes PO068a U D1 StopRes 0 No PO68b U D2 StopRes 0 No PO68c U D1SwSRes 0 No PO68d U D2SwSRes 0 No P069 U D Range 1 Unipolar P070 Jog Ref 0 PO71 PulseMin 10000 Hz P071a PulseMin 96 10076 P072 PulseMax 100000 Hz PO72a PulseMax_ 100 P073 EncMin 1500 rpm P073a EncMin 96 10076 PO74 EncMax 1500 rom PO74a EncMax_ 100 472 482 PROGRAMMING iDrive INSTRUCTIONS PO8x P10x Multispeed PO80 Mspd use O Preset Speed 81 5 1 0 00 PO83 Spd2 0 00 rom 085 5 0 00 P087 Spd4 0 00 rpm 88 5 5 0 00 PO89 Spd 0 00 rom 090 5 7 0 00 091 5 0 00
102. P199 Max AO3 Output Value with Reference to P195 100 100 200 200 10 0 10 0 V Function according 20 0 20 0 mA selection 192 ADVANCED 799 Maximum output value obtained when the maximum value of the variable set in 195 is implemented P200 FOUT Output MDO 1 Frequency 0 Disabled 1 Pulse 2 ABS Pulse 0 Disabled ADVANCED 800 Selects the operating mode of FOUT frequency output NOTE When P200 is not set to DISABLE MDOldigital output is used as a frequency output and any settings for MDOI in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU are ignored P201 Selected Variable for FOUT Frequency Output 0 9 See Table 29 Default Motor speed Level ADVANCED Address 501 Selects the variable to be allocated to FOUT frequency output P202 Min FOUT Value of Selected Variable 32000 32000 Depends on the value selected through P201 320 00 320 00 of the full scale value See Table 29 ADVANCED Minimum value of the selected variable 162 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P203 Max FOUT Value of Selected Variable 32000 32000 Range Depends on the value oo of the full scale value selected through P201 Default Level ADVANCED Address Maximum value of the selected variable P204 Min FOUTOutput Value with Reference to P202 100010000 10 00 100 00 kHz 100 000 ADVANCED Minimum output value obtained when the minimum value of
103. P247 PID Feedback Minimum Value 0 R w s 248 Feedback Maximum Value 00 00 P249 PID Ramp UP Acceleration Time 0 00 S P250 PID Ramp DOWN Deceleration Time 0 00 5 R w P251 Unit of Measure for PID Ramps e 118 M R w s P252 Start S Curve for PID Ramps E 253 S Curve for PID Ramps P254 PID Out Threshold Enabling Integral Implem 00 R w P255 Inverter Disabling Time for PID Output Equal to Min Value 5 5 Disabled R W 5 P256 Time Spent by PID Output from 0 to 100 i ms When the level of liquid in the tank exceeds the reference value set from keypad a negative error is produced Error Reference Feedback Because the complemented output computing mode is selected and because the complemented output is the soeed reference the higher the error absolute value the higher the PID output value This means that the quicker the level increases the quicker the pump suction On the other hand if the level is lower than the reference a positive error is produced because the PID output is limited to 0 the pump will not activate if the PID output is equal to the min value for a timer longer than P255 1000 P244 5sec the drive is put on stand by 404 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE 45 BRIDGE CRANE MENU 45 1 Overview For liffing applications it may be necessary to consider the opening closing of a mechanical
104. S signal cannot be delayed by software timers if a timer is 334 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C153 DISABLE Input Function Function LONNE Bis 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDII MDI8 9 12 5 MPL1 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED The DISABLE function disables the drive and overrides any ENABLE signals The DISABLE command sets the drive output voltage to zero so the motor starts idling the motor idles and stops due to friction or the mechanical load If the DISABLE function is set C1530 to activate the drive deactivate the input signal on the terminal selected with C153 to enable the drive then activate the ENABLE function and the ENABLE S function if programmed 0 NO 1 Yes ADVANCED If C154 21 Yes the alarm reset function can be disabled from MDI3 that can be assigned to other functions C155 C 156 C 157 C158 MULTISPEED Inputs Function 0 5 Inactive 0 16 1 8 5 MDII 8 O 24 if ES847 ES870 is 9 12 gt MPL4 fitted 13 16 TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 C155 4 156 5 155 C156 5 C157 0 C158 0 C157 C158 Inactive ADVANCED 1155 1156 1157 1158 This function generates up to 15 speed references that can be programmed with parameters 081 098 according to the programming mode set in 8 The 4 Multispeed functions determin
105. SAVE ENTER Key The SAVE ENTER key allows selecting a lower level when navigating within the programming menus It also allows changing a parameter value to change a parameter value press the SAVE ENTER key from the page of the parameter you want to change An example is given in Figure 2 From the Keypad pages the SAVE ENTER key allows accessing the Keypad Help page containing any details about the measures displayed in the Keypad page 24 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1 12 LONNE bis Indicator LEDs on the Display Keypad Eleven LEDs are located on the keypad along with a 4 line 16 character LCD display a buzzer and 12 function keys The display shows the parameter values the diagnostic messages and the variables processed by the drive The figure below shows the location of the indicator LEDs and their functionality REF LED Green Reference for speed frequency or torque Motor K acceleration or P000307 0 Reference RUN LED Green Motor not o Motor powered but no torave Motor powered and running ALARM LED Red Inverter OK Alarm tripped TX and RX LEDs Green for confirmation rameter downloading from keypad to inverter Parameter uploading from inverter to Total reference of frequency speed torque is being sent is positive Total refer
106. See Table 125 In factory setting when the drive is switched on after an alarm has tripped which has not been reset it is kept in emergency condition If the drive is in emergency mode when switched on this could be due to an alarm tripped before the drive was reset To avoid storing the alarms tripped before the drive is switched off set parameter C257 the Autoreset Menu The drive stores the moment when an alarm trips to the FAULTLIST supply time and operation time The drive status when the alarm tripped and some measures sampled when the alarm tripped are also stored to the Fault List The readout and storage of the fault list can be very useful to detect the cause responsible for the alarm and its possible solution see also the Fault List Menu Alarms AO01 to A039 relate to the main microcontroller DSP Motorola of the control board which detected a fault on the control board itself No fault list is available for Alarms A001 to A039 and no Reset command can be sent via serial link alarms can be reset through the RESETterminal on the terminal board or the AN NOTE RESET key on the keypad No software for the keypad interface is available the drive parameters and measures cannot be accessed via serial link Avoid resetting alarms A033 and A039 as they trip when the flash memory is not provided with its correct software Alarms A033 and A039 be reset only when proper software is downloaded for the the inverter flash memo
107. Table 73 and Table 77 for a maximum time of 3 seconds and only if The preset carrier frequency is lower than equal to the default frequency value see Table 73 and Table 77 When operating with synchronous modulation the curent peak value dynamically decreases when the output frequency increases Manually enabling disabling that function can be done only when using the IFD control with current limit parameters 043 044 C045 When using the or FOC control the system will automatically handle the maximum current value that can be used also based on the torque limit configured with C047 C048 lim c043 co44 C045 C001 C002 faer f fmax Figure 44 Curent limit decreased based on the canier frequency f Max frequency for which Imax can be obtained 306 482 INSTRUCTIONS 33 2 LONNE List of Parameters C043 to C135 Table 81 List of parameters 043 to C 135 iDrive 43 1 BASIC 1043 C086 M2 Current limit while accelerating 1086 150 C129 M3 ADVANCED 1129 C044 1 BASIC 1044 C087 M2 Current limit at constant rom 1087 150 C130 M3 ADVANCED 1130 C045 1 BASIC 1045 Coss M2 Current limit while decelerating 1088 See Table 74 and Table 78 C131 M3 ADVANCED
108. The analog output is set as a voltage output and the possible min and max output values range from 10 The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 2 0 10V The analog output is set as a voltage output and the possible min and max output values range from 0 to 10V The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 3 0 20mA The analog output is set as a current output and the possible min and max output values range from 0 to 20mA The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 4 4 20 The analog output is set as a current output and the possible min and max output values range from 4 to 20mA The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 5 ABSO 10V As 0 10V output mode but the selected variable is considered as an absolute value 6 ABS0 20mA As 0 20mA output mode but the selected variable is considered as an absolute value 7 ABS4 20mA As 4 20mA output mode but the selected variable is considered as an absolute value NOTE Always check the min and max values of the outputs programmed in the relevant parameters Three operating modes can be selected for the Frequency Output 0 Disabled The output frequency is disabled 1 Pulse Out MDOI Digital Output is programmed as a frequency output The selected variable has a positive or negative sign 2 ABS Pulse Out As Pulse Out but the selected variable is considered as an absolute value NOTE When P200is not set to DISABLE MDO1 digital out
109. Tuning function Main goal An input variance error generates an Decreases the response time for the return output variance proportional to the 2 2 to the tuning point variance rate The derivative action set with Td increases the stability of the system thus increasing the transient response The derivative action tends to get an earlier response but it increases the system sensitivity to the disturbance overriding the error signal 22 3 4 TUNING ACTIONS AT CONSTANT SPEED When the system is operating at constant speed the system response shall be the most accurate as possible minimum error and shall adjust any little reference variations When at constant speed if the system does not promptly respond little reference variations a shorter integral time may solve this problem Otherwise when little and long lasting oscillations affect the reference value setting a longer integral time could be the right solution 22 4 Anti windup The major benefit of the integral action is to ensure null errors at steady speed However just like the derivative action the integral action shall be applied with caution to avoid worse performance A case in point is the output saturation occurring at the same time as an excessive integral action When the output saturates the control action is limited so the error is still remarkable If the error persists the actuator will saturate because the longer the time the error persists
110. XMDI digital outputs values from 13 20 in the parameters relating to the control functions can be set up only after setting XMDI O in parameter R023 24 1 1 FACTORY SETTINGS The factory settings are as follows MDOI is a zero speed relay it energizes when a preset threshold is exceeded MDOJ2 controls an electromechanical brake used for crane applications it energizes to release the brake MDOS3 de energizes fail safe logic in case of Inverter Alarm MDO4 energizes in case of Inverter Run Ok Drive running no standby 24 1 2 STRUCTURE OF THE DiGITAL OUTPUTS A digital output is composed of two logic blocks allowing data processing before actuating the actual digital output Block 2 depends on the settings in parameters P277a P286a P295a P304a yes INFUTA Output logic Bock INPUTB parameter f A B Output 271 277 Logic block setbyP277 that tests A B 9 and signal C P000659 b Figure 31 MDO block diagram 188 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE Operating modes set in MDO1 2 3 4 Digital Output P270 P279 P288 P297 The user can select one of the following operating modes Table 40 Digital Output Mode DISABLE The selected digital output is disabled DIGITAL The digital output depends on a selected digital signal and on the logic output function True False See Examples 1 and 2 DOUBLE DIGITAL The digital outp
111. able to change the parameter values For even safer operating conditions you can change the password stored in P002 in that case you must set P000 accordingly Note down and keep at hand the value set in 002 Press the SAVE ENTER key for parameter modifications when a flashing cursor appears press and V to change the parameter value Do one of the following to quit the editing mode Press ESC the parameter value used by the drive is changed and is maintained until the drive is shut down Press SAVE ENTER the parameter value is stored to non volatile memory and is not deleted when the drive is shut down Inputs cannot be saved to non volatile memory and are automatically set to their default values Rxxx parameters become active only when the drive control board has been reset by pressing the RESETkey for a few seconds or by switching off the drive 1 5 Programming the Root Page When the drive is turned on the Root page is displayed as the starting page The Root page allows you to access the main menus Measures Parameters Configuration Product ID or to shift to the Keypad pages using the MENU key You can customise the root page using parameter P265 see the DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU 19 482 PROGRAMMING w LONNE 1 6 Using the MENU Key The MENU key allows going to the next menu From the Root page press the MENU key to enable circular navigation AN NOTE Start U
112. accessed only if the FOC control is programmed for one of the n 3 The FOC control has the same basic structure as that of any classic field oriented control The inner loops of FOC control are two PI current regulators having the same parameterization The first regulator controls Iq torque current the second regulator controls Id flux current Iq Torque current is computed based on the required torque set point In Slave mode torque reference the required set point comes from the external reference in Master mode the torque set point is given by the output of the speed regulator see the SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU for the regulation of the motor speed of rotation Id Flux current results from the output of the flux regulator ensuring that the connected motor is always properly fluxed This menu allows accessing the current PI regulators and flux regulators for the FOC control connected motors 010 2 for motor 1 C053 2 for motor n 2 C096 2 for motor 19 2 List of Parameters P155 to P173 Table 28 List of parameters P155 to P173 P155 Current regulator proportional constant Mot ENGINEERING 3 00 755 n P156 Current regulator integral time Mot n 1 ENGINEERING 20 0 ms 756 P158 Flux regulator proportional constant Mot n 1 ENGINEERING 0 00 758 P159 Flux regulator integral time Mot n 1 ENGINEERING 33 ms 759 P162 Current regulator proportional constant Mot ENGINEERING 3 00 762 n 2 P163
113. based on power frequency monitoring Stop trip due to dry run is initiated under the following conditions Table 56 MPL parameterization for Dry Run Detection P359 MPL2 Digital output mode DOUBLE ANALOG P360 MPL2 Selecting variable A A77 Output Power P361 MPL2 Selecting variable B 86 PID Feedback P362 MPL2 Testing variable A lt P363 MPL2 Testing variable B lt P364 MPL2 Comparing value for Test A Min operating PWR P365 MPL2 Comparing value for Test B Min FBK value P366 MPL2 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests AND B P366a MPL2 Selecting variable C 011 PID Out P366b MPL2 Function applied to the result of f A B C AND P367 MPL2 Output logic level TRUE NOTE It is recommended that a TIMEOUT be entered for Dry Run Detection Enter a timeout for MPL2 output see TIMERS MENU P368 Digital output mode DOUBLE ANALOG P369 MPL3 Selecting variable A77 Output Power P370 MPL3 Selecting variable B 86 PID Feedback P371 Testing variable A gt P372 MPL3 Testing variable B lt P373 MPL3 Comparing value for Test A Min operating PWR P374 MPL3 Comparing value for Test B Min FBK value P375 MPL3 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests P375a MPL3 Selecting variable C D51 MPL2 P375b MPL3 Function applied to the result of f
114. brake in order to obtain a proper control of the connected motor For example if a mechanical brake takes 500ms to open after the start command the delay is due to the type of brake the motor will not be running for 500ms while the speed reference increases the preset ramp The motor then pushes against the brake and when it can rotate freely the motor torque will not match with The torque required to move the connected load If the speed setpoint is kept to zero for a given time after sending the start command considering the time required for the mechanical brake to open the motor control will implement the proper torque for the motor speed as soon as the motor can start rotating The brake closure can be controlled via a digital input that is properly set up when the drive detects the brake closure it automatically adjusts the value of the current injected into the motor to the fluxing value This is required when during the liffing stage the mechanical brake closes when the load is suspended after reaching negligible speed In that case the torque produced by the motor is capable of keeping the load hanging when the brake closes this has no effect on the speed regulator because the motor is already standstill When the brake closes no torque must be generated to keep the load hanging so the current injected into the motor drops to the value required for the motor fluxing NOTE The Bridge CRANE menu is used for
115. calculate the value of MDO2 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 211 482 PROGRAMMING iDrive INSTRUCTIONS P282 MDO2 Testing Variable A ABS x gt ABSx gt ABS x lt This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P280 using P284 as a comparing value P283 MDO2 Testing Variable B gt gt lt 5 lt Default Level ADVANCED Address This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P281 using P285 as comparing value P284 MDO2 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 320 00 96 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table Default Level Address This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for Function test A This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test B 212 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P286 MDO2 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests Default Level Address Function P286a Selecting Variable OR SET RESET A AND A XOR B A NOR B A NAND B AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B A AND BY 10 A RESET B SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLI
116. calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied 220 482 e PROGRAMMING c LONNE 25 AUXILIARY DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU 25 1 Overview This menu includes the parameters allowing allocating the control functions implemented via the digital inputs located on I O expansion boards This menu can be viewed only after enabling data acquisition from the expansion boards 25 2 List of Parameters P306 to P317 Table 50 List of parameters P306 to P317 P306 XMDO1 Signal selection DO Disable 906 P307 XMDO I Output logic level 1 True 907 P308 XMDO2 Signal selection DO Disable 908 P309 XMDO2 Output logic level 1 True 909 P310 XMDO 93 Signal selection DO Disable 910 P311 XMDOS Output logic level 1 True 911 312 Signal selection 00 Disable 912 P313 XMDOd4 Output logic level 1 True 913 P314 XMDOS Signal selection DO Disable 914 P315 XMDO5 Output logic level 1 True 915 P316 XMDO6 Signal selection DO Disable 916 P317 XMDO6 Output logic level 1 True 917 P306 XMDO1 Signal Selection 0 59 See Table 41 0 DO Disable ENGINEERING 906 Selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of XMDO1 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of XM
117. can be applied to the reference provided that multiramp MENU P013 Speed Ramp 2 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 s if 14 0 0 01 5 0 3270 0 s if PO14 0 gt 0 1 0 32700 s if PO14 0 gt 15 0 327000 s if PO14 0 gt 105 0 32700 Default See Table 74 and Table 78 Level ADVANCED Address 613 Function Same as ramp 1 see 10 NOTE digital inputs are set up and that ramp 2 is selected see the DIGITAL INPUTS Values for ramp 2 can be applied to the reference provided that multiramp MENU 98 482 e PROGRAMMING cs OLONNE P014 Speed Ramps 1 and 2 Time Unit of Measure See Table 74 and Table 78 ADVANCED 614 Defines the unit of measure for the time periods for speed ramp 1 P009 and 010 for speed ramp 2 P012 and 013 and for ramps in Fire Mode P032 and P033 The allowable programmable range may be extended from 0 s to 3270005 PO14 1 then 09 100 this means P009 100 0 15 105 14 0 then 09 100 this means P009 100 x 0 01 5 1 5 014 3 then 09 100 this means P009 100 10s 1000 5 015 Speed Ramp 3 Acceleration Time 0 327 00 s if 20 0 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if 20 0 0 1 5 0 32700 s if 20 0 gt 15 0 327000 s if 20 0 105 See Table 74 and Table 78 ADVANCED Same as ramp 1 see P009 NOTE Values for ramp 3 can be applied to the reference provided that multiramp digital inputs ar
118. com infoGlonne com mm LO e 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 1 Chapters 0 TABLEOF CONTENT Q9 tace oe ed te uev eme Dac edm De sv edu D ve 2 0 1 2 0 2 7 0 3 8 0 4 How to Use this 11 QA RR ERI RR WARREN RIAM IIO NU 11 0 4 2 Special Applications Dedicated to IDrive Drives nennen 11 043 Menus dnd SUOMEN US uo aestate UE ERRARE e TIS UE OH EMEN 12 0 4 4 Alarms 14 1 USING THE DISPLAY KEYPAD UNIT 15 1 1 OVS EW A 15 1 2 Menmu 16 1 3 LO AEREE 18 1 4 Parameter 19 1 5 Programming the 19 1 6 Using THE MENU Key iiie tete 20 1 7 ESC OV nee 21 1 8 RESET Key Alarm and Control Board Reset 22 1 9 TX RX Key Download Upload from to the Keypad 22 1 10 LOG REM Key Keypad Pages
119. cutting speed At max cutting speed the electrovalve controlling lubrication must work for 0 5 sec with a frequency of time period of 1 sec at max speed a duty cycle of 50 Ton T is required with a time period of 1 second the time when the electrovalve opens is directly proportional to the cutting speed Spdl is the max cutting speed and is the duty cycle required the saw carrier frequency required for PWM must be 1 Hz P213 the min value must be Orpm when speed Orpm the electrovalve is disabled and max value Spd1 100 dtcl 2 Spdl Supposing that the tool can rotate in both directions that 5 1500rpm and that the first digital output is used parameters are set as follows Table 47 parameterization for the function P270 Digital output mode PWM MODE P271 Variable A selection A72 Speed Ref P273 Testing variable A gt P275 Comparing value for Test 3000 00 276 MDO1 Comparing value for Test 0 0 rom P277a Variable selection DO Disabled P278 Output logic level TRUE P215 Saw signal frequency 1Hz Parameter P215 in the ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU sets the frequency of the saw wave i e the PWM frequency of the digital output In PWM mode parameter P275 sets the max value peak value of the saw wave while parameter P276 sets the min value of the saw
120. default setting Table 43 MDO parameterization for PD Status OK P288 MDO3 Digital output mode DIGITAL P289 Variable A selection D3 Inverter Alarm pase 1 295 Variable selection DO Disabled P296 Output logic level FALSE The digital output status depends on the Boolean variable Inverter Alarm which is TRUE only when an alarm trips This output is a fail safe contact the relay energizes if the drive is on and no alarms tripped Example 2 Digital output for Drive Run OK digital command MDO4 digital output default setting Table 44 MDO parameterization for drive Run OK P297 MDO4 Digital output mode DIGITAL P298 MDO4 Variable A selection 01 Drive Run Ok P304 4 Function applied to the result of the two tests P295a MDO3 Variable C selection 00 Disabled P305 MDO4 Output logic level TRUE The digital output status depends on the Boolean variable Drive Run which is TRUE only when the drive is modulating IGBTs on 201 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ps LONNE Example 3 Digital output for speed thresholds Suppose that a digital output energizes if the motor speed exceeds 100rpm as an absolute value and de energizes when the motor speed is lower than or equal to 20rpm as an absolute value Parameter P270 sets ABS mode s
121. drive Enable input MDI3 terminal 16 for some time or press the RESET key on the display keypad AN NOTE When the IFD control algorithm is used only speed references can be set up 42 482 INSTRUCTIONS o cs L NNE 7 2 VTC Control Algorithm 1 Wiring 2 Poweron 3 Parameter modification 4 Supply voltage 5 Motor parameters 6 Autotune 7 Overoad 8 Startup Follow the instructions stated in the Caution Statements and Installation sections in the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual Power on the drive and do not close the link to the SIARTinput to prevent the motor from running Access parameter 000 Key parameter and set its code default value 00001 Select the Engineering access level setting 001 Eng Use the ESC A V and SAVE ENTER keys to access the programming parameters Also refer to the Menu Tree Set the real supply voltage for the drive You can set either mains voltage range or the DC supply stabilized by a Regenerative IDrive drive To set the type of power supply for the drive access the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and set configuration parameter C008 to the value corresponding to the installation concerned Set 010 Control Algorithm as Vector Torque Control Set the motor ratings as follows C015 rated frequency C016 rpmnom l rated rpm C017 Pmot1 rated power C018 rated current C019 1 rated
122. expressed as a value percent If set to 0 this function is disabled C040 C083 C126 Voltage Drop at Rated Curent Range 0 500 0 50 0 Poo O Discabled ADVANCED 1040 1083 1126 Contol Defines the increase in voltage in terms of the corresponding produced frequency when the current produced by the motor is greater than or equal to the rated current For example C040 10 Voltage drop at rated current C013 Constant Torque Type of V f pattern C015 50 Hz Rated frequency C019 380 Rated voltage Function If the drive output frequency is 25 Hz it must deliver 190V When the output current is equal to the rated current of the motor C018 the voltage actually produced is Vout 190 1 040 100 209 Range 40 4000 40 4000 msec Default See Table 74 and Table 78 Level ENGINEERING Address 1041 1084 1127 Contol VTC and FOC This parameter indicates the time spent for motor fluxing 291 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C042 C085 C0128 Vout Saturation Percentage 10 120 ENGINEERING 1042 1085 1128 This parameter sets the bus voltage value percent used to generate the output voltage of the drive Changes made to this parameter affect the motor performance in terms of flux weakening 292 482 PROGRAMMING cw LONNE 32 3 Tables Including the Parameters Depending on the Drive Size 32 3 1 VOLTAGE C
123. for reference source n 2 and parameter C289 for feedback source n 2 set different from O Disabled reference sources n 3 C145 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU and 287 and C290 in the PID CONFIGURATION MENU and CAUTION reference sources n 4 C146 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU are always considered as summed up to the reference source selected by the source selector 344 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive C180 LOC REM Input 0 gt Inactive 1 85 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL1 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted 7 ADVANCED 1180 The digital input set as a source selector is considered the drive terminal board only not in the virtual terminal boards as Fieldbus or Serial Link see Command Sources The LOCAL mode can be enabled via the relevant digital input it ignores any enabling disable delay times set via software timers or by pressing the LOC REM key located on the display keypad Factory setting allows enabling the Local mode only when the drive is not running Settings may be changed through C148 Changeover from Remote to Local Command see the CONTROL METHOD MENU switching from Remote to Local command is allowed even when the drive is operating and when the running condition or reference must be maintained in Local mode This function allows switching over to LOCAL mode and allows ignoring parameters C140 to C14
124. for the max level The PID reference is sent from keypad while The probe feedback is sent to AIN2 PTC analog input which is configured as follows 50 of Reference for Input AIN2 PTC 2 4 20mA SW1 3 On R w S P061 Reference Minimum Value for Input AIN2 PTC ECI mA w P062 Reference Maximum Value for Input AIN2 PTC 200 P063 Offset for Input AIN2 PTC 000 S P064 Filter AIN2 PTC Constant 5 ms The reference shall be saved from keypad thus avoiding setting it up again when the drive is shut off 402 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE R W P068 Storage of UP DN values at Power Off Yes R w s 068 of Speed Torque UP DN zm Erg 0 No 7 P068b Reset PID UP DN value at Stop 0 No R w 8 P b8c Reset of Speed Torque UP DN value at Source Selection 0 P068d Reset of PID UP DN value at Source Selection 0 No W P069 Amplitude of UP DN and KPD Reference 1 Unipolar The regulator action and the PID output computing mode must also be set R w s C285 Selection of Reference Type 1 PID raNi s C266 Selection of Reference 2 PID D Disabled R w s C287 Selection of Reference Type 3 PID D Disabled R w s C288 Selection of Feedback Type 1 PID raN2 R w s C289 Gelection of Feedback Type 2 PID 0 Disabea R w 8 C290 Selection of Feedback Type
125. gt 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 320 00 320 00 320 00 C 320 00 C 100 00 100 00 100 00 320000h 320000h Ke 0 0 1 0 1 10000 10000 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 1 1 0 0 1 1 d gt gt gt a S 5 D Speed reference at constant speed Speed reference when ramps are over Frequency produced by the drive Current RMS Output voltage RMS DC link voltage Torque reference at constant speed Torque demand Estimation of the torque output orque limit setpoint ID reference at constant speed ID reference when ramps are over ror between PID reference and PID feedback ID feedback ID output nalog input REF Analog input AIN Analog input AIN2 PTC Speed read from encoder and used as a reference requency input lux reference at constant speed ctive flux reference Current reference over axis q Current reference over axis d Current measure over axis q Current measure over axis d Voltage over axis q Voltage over axis d Waveform Cosine Waveform Sine Electric angle of delivered Vu Analog 10 Volt Analog 10 Volt quare wave aw wave eatsink temperature mbient temperature 00 channel 1 00 channel 2 00 channel 3 100 channel 4 otor thermal capacity AIN4 analog input AIN5 analog input aintenance Operation Time counter aintenance Supply Time counter A A 3 3 193 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L
126. in the Caution Statements and Installation sections in the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual Power on the drive and do not close the link to the SIARTinput to prevent the motor from running Access parameter 000 Key parameter and set its code default value 00001 Use the ESC A Y and SAVE ENTER keys to access the programming parameters Select the Engineering access level setting 001 Eng Also refer to the Menu Tree Set the real supply voltage for the drive You can set either mains voltage range or the DC supply stabilized by a Regenerative IDrive drive To set the type of power supply for the drive access the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and set configuration parameter 008 to the value corresponding to the installation concerned Set 010 Control Algorithm as FOC Field Oriented Control Set the motor ratings as follows 015 rated frequency 016 1 rated rom C017 Pmot1 rated power C018 rated current 019 11 rated voltage 029 Speedmaxl max speed desired If the no load current of the motor is known in C021 lo set the value of lo expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current If the no load current of the motor is not known but the motor can run with no connected load start the motor at its rated speed read the current value detected by the drive parameter M026 in the Motor Measures Menu and use it as the first attempt value for lo
127. inductance installed between the drive the motor Set parameter C048 in the LIMITS MENU based on the maximum torque that can be generated expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque Activate the ENABLE input terminal 15 and the SIARTinput terminal 14 and send a speed reference The RUN LED and REF LED will come on and the motor will start Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction If not set parameter 014 Phase Rotation to 1 Yes or open the ENABLE START inputs remove voltage from the drive and after waiting at least 5 minutes reverse two of the motor phases 43 482 iDrive 9 Speed regulator adjustment 10 Possible failures 11 Additional parameter modifications 12 Reset 44 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS If overshoot occurs when the speed setpoint is attained or if a system instability is detected uneven motor operation adjust the parameters relating to the speed loop SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU Set the two parameters relating to integral time P125 P126 as Disabled and set low values for the parameters relating to proportional gain P127 P128 Set equal values for P127 and P128 and increase them until overshoot takes place when the setpoint is attained Decrease P127 and P128 by approx 30 then decrease the high values set for integral time in P125 and P126 keep both values equal until an acceptable setpoint response is obtained Chec
128. input Qn depends on the previous value Qn 1 on the result of the two tests Signals and are considered only when passing from 0 51 Rising Edge or 1 50 Falling Edge Signal A and signal B may be used both as Set and Reset command Example Suppose that the output enables only when the motor speed exceeds 50rpm and disables when the motor speed drops below 5 rom To do so assign the first condition to Test A representing the Set command for Flip P271 Motor Speed P273 gt P275 50 and assign the second condition to Test representing the Reset command P272 Motor Speed P274 lt P276 A more detailed example is given at the end of this section Test A Set TestB Reset Qu __ LX 09 0 Inanyothercase Reset 091 x 0 Inanyofhercose Reset 196 482 PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive A AND The selected digital output enables when both conditions are true A XOR The selected digital output enables when either one condition or the other is true but not when both conditions are true at a time NOR The selected digital output enables when no condition is true The NOR function between two variables corresponds to the AND of the same false variables i e A NOR AND A NAND B The selected digital output ena
129. is implemented the drive will deliver 55V 10000 10000 100 00 100 00 100 00 ENGINEERING 837 This is the min allowable value of PID regulator output For the value percent of P237 see the description of parameter P236 P237a Wake up Mode 0 Disabled 1 Feedback lt P237b 2 Feedback gt P237b 3 Error lt P237b 4 Error gt P237b 0 Disabled ENGINEERING 858 If this parameter is disabled the PID control re activates only when the PID output exceeds the value set in parameter P237 If this parameter is enabled the PID control re activates when P237a 1 the Feedback value drops below the level set with P237b P237a 2 the Feedback value exceeds the level set with P237b P237a 3 the Error value drops below the level set with P237b P237a 4 the Error value exceeds the level set with P237b 179 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P237b Wake up Level Range 10000 10000 100 00 100 00 76 Default 0 0 00 Level ENGINEERING Address 859 Level of the Feedback or Error signal allowing re activating the PID control see 237 Feedback P237a 1 Feedback lt P237b P237b Wake Up Level TIME IPID Output P2 Lon Sleep Level TIME RUNNING P000666 b STOP Figure 30 PID Sleep Wake up Mode when P237a is set to 1 P238 Max Value of Integral Term 0 10000 100 00 100 00
130. maximum allowable programmable speed is 15 000rpm RP Moutmax7 Foutmox 1 20 number of motor poles 267 482 PROGRAMMING LO NNE 31 2 List of Parameters C001 to C004 Table 64 List of parameters C001 to C004 1 Minimum carrier ENGINEERING 1001 see Table 73 and Table 77 frequency _ M cogo Maximum comer 1003 See Table 73 and Table 77 frequency C003 Number of pulses ENGINEERING 1003 1 24 C004 Silent modulation ENGINEERING 1004 See Table 73 and Table 77 The default value and the max value of carrier frequency C001 and C002 depend on the drive size To check those values see Table 73 and Table 77 C001 Minimum Canier Frequency 1600 16000 1600 16000 Hz Depending on the drive Depending on the drive model see Table model 73 and Table 77 See Table 73 and Table 77 Level ENGINEERING 17 00 1001 and It represents the min value of the modulation frequency being used NOTE the max value in C002 if you need to increase the min value and if COOL equals The min value set in COOL cannot exceed the max value set in C002 Increase Coo2 C002 Maximum Canier Frequenc 1600 16000 Hz 1 the drive sze Depending on the drive model see Table 73 and Table 77 73 77 ENGINEERING It
131. motor 2 or C133 motor 3 Speed Max depends on the selected motor see parameter C029 motor 1 C072 motor 2 or C 115 motor 3 Tiq Max depends on the selected motor see parameter C048 motor 1 C091 motor 2 or C134 motor 3 The X axis values of the two points depend on the analog input Input 255 482 iDrive INSTRUCTIONS LONNE Parameter 91 15 the X axis of the first point parameter P392 is the X axis of the second point XAINS Input Parameter P396 is the X axis of the first point parameter P397 is the X axis of the second point see also Scaling Analog Inputs REF AIN2 29 2 List of parameters P390 to P399 Table 60 List of parameters P390 to P399 P390 Type of signal over XAIN4 input ADVANCED 1 0 10 990 P391 ane XAIN4 input producing min reference ADVANCED 00 991 Percentage of Speed_Min Trq_Min producing P391a min reference Y axis related to P391 ADVANCE 1000 104 P392 d XAIN4 input producing max reference ADVANCED 10 0V 992 Percentage of Speed_Max Trq_Max producing Anvancen pe max reference Y axis related to P392 ARON ANGER 2 n P393 Offset over XAIN4 input ADVANCED _ OV 993 P394 Filtering time over XAIN4 input ADVANCED 100ms 994 P395 Type of signal over 5 input ADVANCED 3 4 20 995 P396 5 XAINS input producing min reference ADVANCED P 996
132. of control IFD FOC the measure is related to ModBus address which the measure can be read from integer Measure description Display on the display keypad and the Drive representation RemoteDrive integer may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Factory setting of the Factory setting of the parameter parameter as displayed as represented for the drive plus unit of measure User level BASIC ADVANCED ENGINEERING ModBus address which the parameter can be read from integer This optional field is displayed when a parameter is not active for all types of motor controls Parameter description 12 482 ee PROGRAMMING f M Cxxx Parameters Read Only when the drive is running and the motor is operating R W when the drive is in stand by or in Run but the motor is stopped see P003in PASSWORD AND USER LEVEL MENU Display on the display keypad and the Drive representation RemoteDrive integer may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Factory setting of the parameter as displayed plus unit of measure Factory setting of the parameter as represented for the drive This optional field is displayed when a parameter is not active for all types of motor controls IFD VTC FOC Parameter description Rxxx Parameters Read Only when the drive is in Run R W when the drive is in stand by or in Run but the motor is stopped see P003 Condition require
133. of the control board RTC Real Time Clock is based on the Clock Calendar of the Data Logger ES851 please refer to the Installation Instructions manual even the ES851 RTC version only and if parameter R021 Data Logger setting is set to The Data and Time Menu may be accessed only if the Data Logger board is installed 2 The clock calendar can be updated special parameters The display keypad permits to immediately update the clock calendar just select the Set Time page or the Set Date page and press ENTER Press ESC to go to the next field press ENTER to confirm If you use the serial link of the inverter where the Data Logger is installed the Clock Calendar is viewed in the measure parameters below To update the Clock Calendar via serial link set the new values in C310 to C315 and send the edit command C316 Parameters R050 to R053 set the rules for daylight saving time C 3 1 4 Set T IME D S T F F Press Save Enter TIME setting 16 29 55 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 5 AT First page of the Date Time menu on the display keypad C310 Set DATE 16 29 55 Press Save Enter DATE setting gt 2011 0 Y Second page of the Date and Time menu on the display keypad The date and time on the display keypad are represented by the measures below Time Hours 0 23 hours This measure is available only if the
134. of the drive command source If the command source is set as Keypad different command sources can be set NOTE up only if the STOP or STOP B digital inputs are programmed see C150 and C150a to enable pushbutton operation or to make sure that the Source Selection function is activated see C179 If the first command source is already set and it is not a Keypad source you can NOTE set the Keypad as a second third source only if the STOP or STOP B inputs are programmed C150 0 or C150a 0 to enable pushbutton operation or to make sure that the Source Selection function is activated see C179 gt gt 321 482 iDrive LONNE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C143 C145 146 Reference 1 2 3 4 Selection C147 Torque Limit Input 0 Disabled 1 REF 2 AINT 3 AIN2 4 Frequency input 5 6 7 8 0 9 0 11 if ES847 is in Serial Link Fieldbus Keypad Encoder 9 UpDown from MDI 10 XAIN4 11 5 143 1 REF C144 2 AINT C145 C146 0 Disabled C143 C144 ADVANCED C145 C146 ENGINEERING 1143 1144 1145 1146 This parameter selects the sources for the speed or torque reference The reference resulting from the sum of the selected sources represents the drive speed or torque reference If the PID action has been set as reference C294 Reference the drive speed or torque references shall only be given by the PID output and by the sources set in C143
135. on the Drive Size and Model Class 5T 6T 4 305 Table 81 List of parameters C043 to C135 307 Table 82 Remote command inputs from serial link 313 Table 83 Reference inputs from serial link 315 Table 84 Eistof parameters 321 Table 85 325 Table 86 Terminals Used 5 325 Table 87 Terminal board Factory setting 328 Table 88 List ot parameters C149 to C188c dnd lQO6 iiis iei 329 Table 89 Multispeed selection 335 Table 90 Selected Speed eene ense tns ttn setatis etate tease stas essa setas esas setas estas etia etas ssa sena 336 Table 91 Multiramp selection essa etas 339 Table 92 Selected 2 1 RE RPAN 339 Table 93 Motor 5 m 342 Table 94 Selection of the speed reference variation 343 Table 95 Variation of the selected speed reference 343 Table 96 Selection of PID 348 Table 97 Lis
136. output value whereas the True False logic output function calculates the end value DOUBLE ANALOG The digital outputs depends 2 selected analog variables Test A is performed for variable A whilst Test B is performed for variable B thus obtaining 2 digital signals starting from their value the selected logic function calculates the output value whereas the logic output function True False calculates the end value DOUBLE FULL As DOUBLE ANALOG or DOUBLE DIGITAL mode but both digital signals and analog variables can be selected If you select a digital signal its value TRUE or FALSE is used to calculate the selected logic function If you select an analog variable the test selected for this variable is performed and its result TRUE or FALSE is used to calculate the selected logic function BRAKE As ABS BRAKE below although the selected variables are not expressed as absolute values but depend on the selected tests ABS BRAKE The ABS BRAKE mode allows controlling the electromechanical brake of a motor used for lifting applications To enable the relevant output make sure that all the conditions depending on the drive status are true see the description at the end of this section The ABS BRAKE mode is applied by selecting the measured or estimated speed value A71 as the first variable and the output torque A80 as the second variable Variables are considered as absolute values ABS LIFT As ABS BRAKE b
137. parameter CO12 for motor 1 or equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 Otherwise no encoder enabled for speed measure with parameter C189 see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU e 012 0 for motor 1 or equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 See the MOTOR CONTROL MENU e The value set in C189 does not enable any encoder for speed measure e The FOC control has been improperly enabled Set parameters correctly 459 482 iDrive A080 Speed Tracking A081 Keypad Watchdog 460 482 Description Possible cause ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Encoder speed measure error The system detected an error between the measured speed and the measure setpoint Speed has been exceeding the value set in parameter C193 for a time longer than the value set in parameter C192 This protection is enabled only if parameter C 194 is not set at zero e Wrong setting in parameters C192 C193 C194 the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU e Torque limit too low e Connected load foo heavy e Encoder failure encoder mechanical joint broken down disconnection of one of the signal cables of the encoder 1 Set parameters C192 C193 correctly 2 Check torque limit value see the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU and the CONTROL METHOD MENU 3 Check the mechanical load 4 Make sure that the encoder works properly check its mechanical connection to the motor and check that the encoder signal cables are properly connected to the t
138. parameter represents the min soeed percentage or the min torque percentage for a torque reference to be used for the minimum reference set with 391 100 100 if P390 0 10 0V 10 0V if P390 0 10 0 100 if P390 3 10 0V if P3907 1 0 10 ADVANCED This parameter selects the value for XAIN4 input signal for maximum reference or better the reference set CO29xP392a Master mode or in 048 392 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and 48 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used P392a Percentage of Speed Max Trqg Max Producing Max Reference Y axis related to P392 ADVANCED This parameter represents the max speed percentage or the max torque percentage for a torque reference to be used for the maximum reference set with P392 1000 1000 10 00 _ 10 00 V ADVANCED This parameter selects the offset correction value of the XAIN4 analog signal that has been measured The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation or conversion its unit of measure is the same as the one of the signal selected for XAIN4 analog input 257 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e 258 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE O 65000 0 65000ms ADVANCED This parameter selects the value of the filter time constant of the first command applied to the XAIN4 input signal when
139. percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor M046 PID Reference from Serial Link 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value of the PID reference set in parameters P245 P246 This is the measure of the PID reference set via serial link and expressed as a percentage 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value of the PID reference set in parameters P245 P246 Always active This is the measure of the PID reference set by the fieldbus and expressed as a percentage 100 00 10000 Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value n of the PID feedback set in parameters P247 P248 Always active This is the measure of the PID feedback set via serial link and expressed as a percentage 66 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive M049 PID Feedback from Fieldbus 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max value of the PID feedback set in parameters 247 248 10000 Always active 0 1699 This is the measure of the PID feedback set the fieldbus and expressed as Function percentage M050 Enc oder Reference 32000 32000 rom Always active Reading of the encoder set as a reference source see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU and the CONTROL METHOD MENU M051 Frequency Input Reference 10000 1000
140. ptions Input being is not FBK XX 37 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 6 START UP MENU 6 1 Overview For easier startup of the IDrive drive you can activate the Start Up Menu The Start Up Menu is a wizard allowing programming the main parameters for the connected motor and the parameters for PID control The parameters in this menu are the same as described in the FIRST STARTUP section The Start Up Menu is displayed when the IDrive drive is first started The Start Up Menu can be reactivated at any time do so set P265 Start Up mode see the DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU and power on the Drive drive again The following is the root page of the Start Up menu Lee START UP MENU Press ENTER to start Press ENTER to enter the wizard Before entering the control parameters you are asked to choose a dialogue language P263 Language gt 9 9 0 0 O O 0 9 O O O Then you are asked to choose the display mode of the Start Up Menu When does the Start Up Menu activate 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 O O O Choose of the following EVERY START UP ONLY NOW START UP NEVER If you select EVERY START UP the wizard appears whenever the IDrive drive is powered on if you select ONLY NOW you can scroll through the menu and the wizard is disabled as soon as you quit the menu if you select NEXT S
141. regeneration that can no longer be dissipated has led to overvoltage This application requires an intense use of the Braking Resistor for example in lifting applications where a long downstroke is required when the load is connected to the motor 1 Reset the alarm send a RESETCommand 2 f the power dissipated by the braking resistance allows for a heavier use set C211 with a greater ON time A093 Precharge Bypass open Bypass relay open The control board requested the closure of the bypass relay or contactor for the short circuit of the DC link capacitor precharge resistors but no closing signal is sent auxiliary of the relay during functioning precharge already closed Failure in the relay control circuit or in the auxiliary signal circuit detecting relay closing 1 Reset the alarm send a RESETCommand 2 If the alarm persists please contact L NNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service IGBT heatsink temperature too high IGBT power heatsink overheated even if the cooling fan is on see also A096 and A099 Ambient temperature exceeding 40 Too high motor current e e Excessive carrier frequency for the application required 1 Check ambient temperature 2 Check motor current 3 Decrease IGBT carrier frequency see the CARRIER FREQUENCY MENU The Drive Profile board is configured for a different drive The Drive Profile board is not configured Faulty Drive Profile board Make s
142. running direction The sign of the speed reference determines which value percent is to be used C300is for the positive sign C300a is for the negative sign C301 C301a Pretensioning Torque Time Range 0 32000 0 32000 ms 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 1301 1309 Contol and FOC Delay time passing between the start command and the speed ramp Start During this time the motor torque output is set C300 C300a to keep the load suspended C302 Closed Brake Input contact 0 5 Inactive 0 12 1 8 4 MDI8 O 20 if ES847 or ES870 is 9 12 installed 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 0 5 Inactive ENGINEERING FOC This parameter determines the digital input assigned to the mechanical brake closure feedback NO contact which closes only when the brake is engaged When the brake closure is detected after a deceleration ramp the current required for motor fluxing is injected into the motor If no digital input is available for the detection of the brake closure set max time in C183 in order to avoid injecting current into the motor after the deceleration ramp When the motor is not running the SIARTcommand is disabled and the speed setpoint is at zero for a time longer than the one set in C183 the drive will be put on standby 406 482 o PROGRAMMING cs L NNE 46 DATE AND TIME MENU 46 1 Overview Clock Calendar
143. the PID reference ramp is zero if given ramp time is set up the ramp will be rounded 50 at the beginning and at the end of the ramp See parameters P252 and P253 183 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P252 PID Ramp Start Rounding Off 0 100 ENGINEERING 852 This parameter sets the time period of the rounding off applied to the first stage of the ramps It is expressed as a percentage of the ramp up down time Example ramp up of 5sec P252 50 means that the speed reference is limited in acceleration for the first 2 5 sec of the ramp up AN NOTE When 252 5 used the preset ramp time is increased by 252 2 P253 PID Ramp End Rounding Off 0 100 ENGINEERING 853 As P252 but P253 sets the rounding off applied at the end of the ramps When P253 is used the preset ramp time is increased by P253 2 P254 Integral Term Activation Threshold 0 0 500 0 ENGINEERING 854 This parameter sets a threshold value below which the integrator is kept to zero It has effect only when the PID regulator is used as a reference corrector or generator In this case the threshold percentage value refers to the max speed or torque absolute value set for the active motor The integral term is not calculated when the speed or torque percentage value expressed as an absolute value is lower than the value set in P254 If P254 is set to zer
144. the X axis value of the first point parameter P057 is the X axis value of the second point Input AIN2 Parameter 61 15 the X axis value of the first point parameter P062 is the X axis value of the second point The figure below illustrates how parameters set computing the signals for speed or torque analog reference Saturation 10 0V Input Signal gt Speed Torque 10 0V Saturation Input type Ref_Max P057a h selection Offset Correction Saturation 20 0 2 40 Saturation Ref Min Ref Max MASTER mode Speed 1 Speed_Min C028 029 Motor n 2 2 Min C071 Motor n 2 Max 72 Min 114 peed C115 SLAVE mode Torque a Trq_Min C047 Trq C048 Trq_Min 090 4 icin Trq_Max C091 0 Trq_Min C133 134 Saturation P000332 B Figure 9 Computing Speed Analog Reference from terminal board AIN1 110 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS The figures below illustrate programming examples for REF analog input if motor 1 is selected and in MASTER mode speed reference Input type 029 052 selection M037 C028 P051a P051 P052 Saturation Input type C028 P051a selection M037 C029 P052a P000333 B Figure 10 Computing Inputs REF 1 and 2 examples The setup in the first part of the figure is as
145. the active motor parameters 011 C054 C097 is set as 2 Torque with Speed Limit Word 2 Speed reference limit from HELDBUS decimal portion Word 2 details the decimal portion of the speed reference M043 ONLY IN FOC MODE The value sent by the Master to the IDrive as the decimal portion of the speed reference must be multiplied by 100 In order to send a speed reference of XXX 50rpm the low byte of the word must contain the value 50 o or 001100102 0 5010 x 100 5010 Example 42 210 043 50 speed ref 210 50 rpm Word 3 Torque reference limit from HELDBUS The torque reference from the FIELDBUS 45 is significant if at least one of parameters C143 to 146 set as 6 FieldBus and if the type of reference of the active motor parameters C011 C054 C097 is set as 1 Torque or as 2 Torque with Speed Limit or if the drive is in slave mode from digital input The torque limit from the FIELDBUS is significant if parameter C147 is set as 6 FieldBus The value sent by the Master to the IDrive as the torque reference torque limit must be multiplied by 10 In order to send a torque reference torque limit of 50 the word must contain the value 50010 or 1111101002 509610 x 10 50010 15 8 bit 7 0 Torque reference limit Word 4 PID reference from HELDBUS The PID reference M047 can be sent from the fieldbus if at least one of the parameters C285 to C287 set as 6 Fieldbus The val
146. the figures below Example P009 10sec 21 1111 binary rounding off selected for all four ramps P022 50 P023 50 The resulting ramp up time is as follows 09 9 22 023 2 100 10 10 50 50 2 100 15sec The effect of this rounding off can be seen in the figures below 93 482 PROGRAMMING The figure shows two patterns for the ramp reference The first pattern is not rounded off the second pattern has the same ramp times but different rounding off values are applied to the start end ramp up down time Figure 5 Speed profile without Rounding Off and with Rounding Off 2 example In the figures above the run command is represented by the high level of the second signal Note that the time the reference takes to reach constant rom depends not only on the ramp times but also on the rounding off values you have defined 94 482 ee PROGRAMMING ie oe cw L NNE Acceleration RESET function This parameter has effect only if S ramps are used Parameter P031 enables to reset acceleration when reference trends change Whenever a speed reference trend changes the motor acceleration is instantly set to zero and the ramp output reference will be computed considering the preset rounding off see Figure 6 The figure shows the instant when deceleration begins the rounding off value assigned to the spe
147. the full scale value of selected variable B see Table 41 Default Level ADVANCED Address This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test B Function 209 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 P277 1 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests Default Level Address Function P277a MDO1 Selecting Variable A OR A SET B RESET A AND B A XOR B A NOR B A NAND B AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B A AND BY 10 A RESET B SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 1 SET RESET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADVANCED 877 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 642 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO1 digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in Table 41 P277b 1 Function Applied to the Result of 210 482 0 f A B OR C 1 SET C RESET RISING EDGE 2 AND 3 C 4 f A B NOR C 5 NAND 6 OR C 7 OR CY 8 AND C 9 A B AND CY 10 RESET C SET RISING EDGE 11 SET C RESET FALLING EDGE 12
148. tne e 427 50 3 1 From the Master to the 427 50 3 2 Fomthe Drive tothe EPIIT 431 51 EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION 433 51 1 433 51 2 Parameters RO2T RO23 5 5 nee 433 52 PROFiDrive BOARD CONFIGURATION 4400000 0 0 434 52 1 discite mnm es WT I 434 52 2 istot Pareme hers RO2Z5 TO ROAS M 434 53 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME eire iere ce ee ace ce ate crater gas 437 53 1 WEWIEW 437 53 2 bist or Pardmetres ROSO0 TO RO53 437 54 DATA LOGGER MENU reda ovis ente ur ee 440 54 1 iiiv WW inii RECEN US 440 54 2 List of Parameters R115 cind EUREN 440 55 EEPROM MENU eem 442 55 1 OV CIV IO Wick AAS 442 55 2 5 Inpuls 1009 443 56 ALARMS AND WARNINGS
149. to be performed for the variable detected by P370 using 374 comparing value P373 MPL3 Comparing Value forTestA 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table 41 ADVANCED 973 This parameter defines the comparing value with the variable selected for test A P374 MPL3 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable B see Table 41 ADVANCED 974 This parameter defines the comparing value with the variable selected for test B 249 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e P375 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests P375a MPL3 Selecting Variable C OR A SET B RESET A AND B A XOR B A NOR B A NAND B AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B A AND BY 10 A RESET B SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 0 A OR B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADVANCED 975 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 936 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in see Table 41 P375b MPL3 Function Applied to t
150. trip when ENABLE closes e Reading a Frequency Input Only MDI6 digital input FINA can be used as a frequency input if is programmed as a frequency input FINB with C189 if the option board is installed alarm A101 MDIS Configuration trips No additional function must be assigned to otherwise alarm A100 Illegal Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes e Reading a Frequency Input and an Encoder MDI6 Digital input FINA is used as a frequency input and Encoder is used because ES836 ES913 board avoids reading frequency input FINB through MDI8 If additional functions are programmed for digital input MDI6 alarm A100 Illegal Configuration will trip when ENABLE closes If alarm A082 Illegal Encoder Configuration trips this means that the drive has not detected ES836 or ES913 board check the board wiring Parameter C189 defines whether quick acquisition digital inputs are used to read a frequency input or an encoder and if the encoder is a reference source or a feedback source In the Encoder Menu you can also do the following e define the number of pls rev for the encoder being used e enable or disable the speed alarm e define a time constant applied to read filtering e define whether encoders are read by means of squaring channels by channel A only while the direction of rotation will be defined by channel ChB low level gt negative rotation ChB high level gt positive ro
151. user 2 Restore Backup the parameters stored in the Backup zone are copied and stored in the WORK zone They represent the new RAM parameterization the previous RAM parameters are cleared Backup gt RAM 5 Work 4 Save Backup the parameters in the WORK zone are saved to a copy of the Backup zone Work Backup 5 Save Work the current values of the parameters stored in the RAM zone are saved to non volatile memory in the Work zone All the parameters are saved with this command Work 11 Restore Default factory setting values are restored for all parameters each factory setting value is stored to non volatile memory in the Work zone Default gt RAM Work 443 482 PROGRAMMING w LONNE 75 56 ALARMS AND WARNINGS If a protection trips or the drive enters the emergency mode the drive is locked CAUTION and the motor starts idling 56 1 What Happens When a Protection Trips NOTE Before operating the drive in emergency conditions carefully read this section and the following section WhatTo Do When Alarm Tips The drive alarms are detailed below When a protection alarm trips 1 the ALARM LED on the keypad comes on 2 the page displayed on the keypad is the root page of the FAULT UST 3 the FAULTLISTis refreshed 4 when using the Drive Profile board the drive reports faults as hexadecimal values which are assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification
152. with parameters P115 P121 The 3 functions determine which of the 7 values of the speed reference variation is active the active value 1 or inactive value 0 of each preset input signal determines a bit logic binary number where SPEED VAR Ois the less significant bit bit while SPEED VAR 215 the most significant bit bit 3 as shown in Table 94 and Table 95 If one of these functions is not set up its bit is zero Table 94 Selection of the speed reference variation 2 1 Bit 0 Variation of the Selected Speed SPEED VARIATION SPEED Reference 2 VARIATION 1 SPEED VARIATION 0 Table 95 Variation of the selected speed reference MULTISPEED 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 MULTISPEED 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 MULTISPEED 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 115 116 P117 P118 P119 P120 P121 one of the functions above is not set up its bit is zero For example if C175 and C177 are INACTIVE 0 and C176 is programmed for one terminal only variation 2 corresponding to parameter P116 can be selected In any case the output must never exceed the max allowable speed even when a higher speed is required In Table 95 above AN NOE 0 2 Inactive Input 1 2 Active Input 343 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 C178 PID Up Down Reset Input 0 2 Inactive 0 16 1 8 5 MDII MDI8 9 12
153. with respect to the ramp time 32000 integer part 99 decimal part Always active 1654 integer part 1655 decimal part 32000 99 rom Motor speed value 1000 0 Hz see Table 63 Always active This is the measure of the voltage frequency output of the drive 51 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 M007 Torque Reference at Constant Speed Nm 3200 Nm Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active only when a torque reference is used for the selected motor This is the measure of the torque reference required at constant speed and expressed in Nm 32000 Nm Note The actual range depends on the rated torque and the torque 32000 limit values set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 133 134 Motor 3 Active for VIC and FOC controls only With speed control Torque demand of the speed regulator for the type of control used With torque control Torque reference processed with respect to the preset torque ramp time 500 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active only when a torque reference is used for the selected motor This is the measure of the torque reference required at constant speed and expressed as a pe
154. 0 1 150 200 250 0 350 1 000817 Figure 62 delay of alarm 075 based the IEC Class Example The protection level is compliant with IEC Class 30 If the current flowing is 200 of the FLC alarm A075 will trip after approx 480s 8 minutes 387 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 42 4 List of Parameters C264 to C274 Table 107 List of parameters C264 to C274 Heatsink temperature for fan activation ADVANCED C265 Thermal Protection activation for motor 1 BASIC 1265 3 Fan Shaft C266 current for motor 1 Imot ADVANCED 1266 10596 C267 Thermal time constant for motor 1 BASIC 1267 720s C268 Thermal Protection activation for motor 2 1268 3 Fan Shaft C269 Trip current for motor 2 Imot 1269 105 270 Thermal time constant for motor 2 1270 7205 271 Thermal Protection activation for motor 3 1272 3 Fan Shaft C272 current for motor 3 Imot 1271 105 C273 Thermal time constant for motor 3 ADVANCED 1273 720s C274 PTC Thermal Protection Enable BASIC 1274 0 Disabled C264 Heatsink Temperature for Fan Activation 0 1 Aways 50 The heatsink cooling fans are switched on each time the drive is enabled and the IGBTs are switching When disabled the fans are switched off only if the heatsink temperature drops below the value set in C264 S
155. 0 200 200 10 0 10 0 V Depending on the value 20 0 20 0 mA selected in P176 Range Default Level ADVANCED Address Maximum output value obtained when the maximum value of the variable set 179 is implemented Function 158 482 e PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P184 AO2 Analog Output Disabled 10V 0 0 20mA 4 20mA ABS 10V ABS 0 20mA ABS 4 20mA Default Level ADVANCED Address Selects the operating mode of AO2 analog output NOTE outputs see the DIP switch configuration and follow the instructions displayed on Analog outputs are set as voltage outputs by default set them as current the keypad or refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual P185 Selected Variable for AO2 Analog Output 0 9 SeeToble 29 Reference at constant speed ADVANCED Selects the variable to be allocated to AO2 digital output 32000 32000 Depends on the value selected in P185 1500 1500 rom ADVANCED 320 00 320 00 of the full scale value See Table 29 Minimum value of the variable selected via P185 corresponding to the min output value of AO2 set in P190 32000 32000 Depends on the value selected in P185 320 00 320 00 of the full scale value See Table 29 1500 rom ADVANCED Maximum value of the variable selected via P185 corresponding to the max output value of AO2 set
156. 0 Tc ms Default 500 Tc ms Level ENGINEERING Address 842 Ti constant dividing the integral term of PID regulator Ki 1 Ti 1 P242 Ts It is expressed in sampling time units 15 see 244 If this parameter is set to zero the integral action is cancelled Function P243 PID Derivative Time Multiples of P244 0 65000 0 65 000 Tc ms Defaut Level ENGINEERING PST Ml 843 Constant multiplying the derivative term of PID regulator If this parameter is set to zero the derivative action is disabled Function 181 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P244 Cycle Time of PID Regulator Tc 5 65000 0 65000 ms ENGINEERING 844 This parameter sets the cycle time of PID regulator It is expressed in ms multiples of 5 only Example if 244 1000 ms the PID regulator cycle will be executed every second and the output will be refreshed every second as well P245 Min Value of PID Reference 10000 10000 100 00 ENGINEERING 845 This parameter defines the min allowable value of the PID reference The PID references are to be considered as percentage values If analog references are selected P245 relates to the minimum value of the selected analog input Example Select AIN1 analog input as the PID reference and suppose that its max and min values are 10V and 10V respectively If P245 is 5055 this means that the PID reference will be saturat
157. 0 2 2 Analog Output Programming 151 20 3 List or Pararmelets P215 eun REN ERE EC ERN Pet E INS 155 21 TIMERS MEN 165 21 1 165 21 2 List or Pararmelters P216 10 P229 167 22 PARAMETERS ncis ai 171 22 1 OVGEIVIOW 171 22 2 PID Regulator Tuning Method of Ziegler and Nichols 172 22 3 Manvel Tunirigz of The PI RegULlGITOT 173 LO e 22 3 1 ACTION P 173 22 3 2 tegra DE 175 22 3 3 Derivative Action 0 RR 177 22 3 4 Tuning Actions at Constant Speed 177 22 4 177 22 5 Lkist oF Parameters P236 10 P260 sett 178 23 PID2 PARAMETERS MENU dena 186 2931 186 23 2 Listof Parameters 36 To PA60 anh
158. 0 482 PROGRAMMING cw LO NNE 49 2 List of Parameters R001 to R013 Table 114 List of parameters ROO1 to R013 ROO1 Drive MODBUS Address for Serial Link 0 D9 pole 1 002 Response Delay for Serial Link 0 D9 pole 589 5msec R003 Baud Rate for Serial Link 0 D9 pole 590 6 38400 bps R004 added to 4byte time for Serial Link 0 D9 591 am t R005 Watchdog time for Serial Link 0 D9 pole 592 0 05 8006 Parity Bit for Serial Link O D9 pole 593 NUS 2 Stop R008 Drive MODBUS address for Serial Link 1 RJ45 595 1 ROO9 Response Delay for Serial Link 1 RJ45 596 5 msec RO10 Baud Rate for Serial Link 1 RJ45 EN 597 6 38400 bps 11 Added to 4byte time for Serial link 1 RJ45 598 2msec 8012 Watchdog Time for Serial Link 1 RJ45 ENGINEERII 599 0 05 8013 Parity Bit for Serial Link 1 RJ45 600 2398 1 Drive MODBUS Address for Serial Link 0 D9 pole ENGINEERING 588 This parameter determines the address assigned to the drive connected through RS485 of serial link O 9 pole male D connector R002 Response Delay for Serial Link 0 D9 pole 1 1000 msec ENGINEERING 589 This parameter determines the drive response delay after a master query sent through serial link O pole
159. 00 Hz aes Note The actual range depends on the frequency min value and max value set 71 72 Always active Frequency readout the digital input set as a reference source see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU and the CONTROL METHOD MENU 67 482 PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 8 6 Outputs Menu This menu allows checking the status of the digital outputs the analog outputs and the frequency outputs located in the terminal board MO56 Digital Outputs Bit controlled measure See Table 4 Always active Status of digital outputs MDO1 4 and status of the precharge contactor Table 4 Coding of Measure M056 MDOT FOUT MDO2 MDO3 MDO4 Status of the precharge contactor 05 Virtual Digital Outputs Bit controlled measure See Table 5 Always active TI Status of virtual digital outputs MPL1 4 Table 5 Coding of Measure M056a DigitalOutut 0 1 2 2 3 MPL4 MO56b Timed Fags Bit controlled See Table 5 measure Always active Status of timed flags 4 Table 6 Coding of Measure MO56b Btn med Flag 0 TFL 1 TFL2 2 TFL3 3 TFL4 68 482 e PROGRAMMING cs L NNE M057 Frequency Output 10000 100000 Hz Note The actual range depends on the min value and the max 10
160. 000 100000 value of digital output set as a frequency reference Values are set in P204 and P205 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU Always active This is the frequency measure produced by MDO1 digital output when set as a frequency output M058 AO1 Analog Output Always active Value percent of analog output AOI referred to the preset max output value maximum absolute value between 182 and P183 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU M059 AO2 Analog Output Value percent of AO2 analog output referred to the preset max output value maximum absolute value between P190 and 191 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU Value percent of AO3 analog output referred to the preset max output value maximum absolute value between 198 and P199 see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU See Table 7 Always active Status of the auxiliary digital outputs located on the expansion board Table 7 Coding of Measure M061 0 XMDO1 3 XMDO4 1 XMDO2 4 XMDO5 2 XMDO3 5 XMDO6 69 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j LO e 8 7 Temperature Measures from 100 Menu This menu displays the temperatures detected in the first four analog channels of the expansion board Scaling complies with DIN EN 60751 for PT100 100 ohm 0 C and 0 385 ohm C ES847 Expansion Board must be fitted on the equipment See also the EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU M069 PT100 Measure in Cha
161. 000809 0 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive A 22 3 P0008100 Figure 25 Response to a system tuned with the method of Zegler and Nichols The method of Ziegler and Nichols is not always applicable because some systems do NOTE not produce any oscillations even in presence of large proportional gains However leading a system close to instability can be very dangerous Manual Tuning of the PI Regulator The PI regulator con be manually tuned when the tuning method of Ziegler and Nichols is not applicable The sections below cover the following how the transient is affected from the proportional action when the integral action is kept constant in a PI regulator how the transient is affected from the integral action when the proportional action is kept constant in a PI regulator how the transient is affected from the derivative action in a PID regulator 22 3 1 PROPORTIONAL ACTION P Symbol Tuning function Main goal vanance error produces am Changes the tuning variable based on the Kp output variance proportional to the variable being tuned variance amplitude Response to the step Response time Small Kp Overshoot Longer Optimum Kp Optimum Optimum Large Kp Undershoot Shorter 173 482 o PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE 000811 0 0 1 Figure 26 Response to the step based on the value of Kp when Ti is kept constant 174 482
162. 03 Data record No 3 Illegal XMDI A042 6304 Data record No 4 Illegal XMDI DGO A052 6305 Data record No 5 Illegal XMDI MPL A057 6306 Data record No 6 FOC No Encoder A079 6307 Data record No 7 Illegal Encoder Cfg A082 6308 Data record No 8 Illegal Motor Selected A098 6309 Data record No 9 MDI Illegal Configuration A100 630A Data record No 10 MDIB Illegal Configuration A101 7000 Supplementary modules 7100 Power 7110 Brake chopper Braking Resistor Overload A091 7120 Motor Motor Not Connected A097 7300 Sensor PTC Alarm A055 PTC Short Circuit A056 REF lt 4mA A066 AINI lt 4mA A067 AIN2 lt 4mA A068 5 lt 4mA 069 gt 20 102 AIN1 gt 20 103 AIN2 gt 20 104 XAIN5 gt 20 A086 7301 Tacho fault Tracking Error A080 Encoder Fault A059 7310 Speed Speed Alarm A076 7500 Communication Ser WatchDog A061 SRI WatchDog A062 Fos WatchDog A070 Illegal Drive Profile Board A095 8000 Monitoring 8300 Torque control 8311 Excess torque Motor OverHeated A075 9000 Extemal malfunction External Alarm 1 A083 External Alarm 2 A084 External Alarm 3 A085 467 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 56 5 Warnings Waming messages are displayed on the display keypad They are flashing messages that usually appear in line 1 or 2 of the first three lines of the display
163. 030 PZD7 OUT ENGINEERING 555 0 NOT USED R031 PZD8 OUT ENGINEERING 556 0 NOT USED R032 PZD9 OUT ENGINEERING 557 0 NOT USED R033 PZD10 OUT ENGINEERING 558 0 NOT USED R034 PZD3 IN ENGINEERING 559 0 NOT USED R035 PZD4 IN ENGINEERING 581 0 NOT USED R036 PZD5 IN ENGINEERING 582 0 NOT USED R037 PZD6 IN ENGINEERING 583 0 NOT USED R038 PZD7 IN ENGINEERING 584 0 NOT USED R039 PZD8 IN ENGINEERING 585 0 NOT USED R040 PZD9 IN ENGINEERING 586 0 NOT USED RO41 PZD10 IN ENGINEERING 587 0 NOT USED R044 puro ENGINEERING 520 0 DP VO R045 Drive Profile Selection ENGINEERING 521 1 VENDOR SPECIFIC 1 434 482 PROGRAMMING cs LONNE fO 1121251 547 parameter sets the address for the PROFldrive board NOTE zero see the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual and the PROAdrive comms The programmed value has effect only if the board address selectors are set to board User Manual R026 to R033 PZD3 10 OUT 0 NOT USED 1 DIGITAL INPUTS 2 AUXILIARY DIGITAL INPUTS I O expansion board 3 DIGITAL OUTPUT COMMANDS 4 TORQUE REFERENCE 5 PID REFERENCE 6 PID FEEDBACK 1 DIGITAL INPUTS ENGINEERING 548 550 554 558 These parameters allow selecting the inputs to be downloaded the Master PLC to the drive through the eight process data items that can be mapped the fast communication area between the Master and the Slave 0 NOT USED
164. 1 C114 M3 1114 29 M1 1029 C072 2 Max motor speed BASIC 1072 1500 rom C115 M3 1115 M1 1030 C073 M2 Flux weakening speed 1073 90 116 1116 031 1 1031 74 2 Max speed alarm 1074 0 Disabled 117 1117 032 ME cm in quadratic torque 1032 30 118 1118 C033 1 1033 coma Lows 20 C119 M3 1119 C034 1 1034 C077 2 Voltage Preboost for 1077 See Table 75 and Table 79 C120 M3 1120 C034a M1 1204 077 2 Boost for positive reference 1206 0 C120a M3 1208 CO34b 1 1205 77 M2 Jor negeiive 1207 0 120 M3 1209 035 1 1035 078 2 422 1078 See Table 75 and Table 79 C121 1121 6 1 1036 079 2 arprogrammable 1079 See Table 75 and Table 79 C122 M3 1122 C037 M1 Frequency for application of 1037 C080 2 voltage Boost at programmable 1080 See Table 75 and Table 79 C123 MB frequency 1123 8 M1 1038 81 M2 Autoboost 1081 See Table 75 and Table 79 C124 M3 1124 039 1 1039 082 2 Slip compensation 1082 0 Disabled 125 1125 040 1 1040 083 2 Voltage drop at rated current 1083 0 Disabled C126 M3 1126 278 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS iDrive COM 1 1041 84 2 Fluxing ramp time 1084 See Table 74 and Table
165. 1 20 037 015 fn P000342 b Figure 42 Types of programmable V f curves The voltage produced by the drive may be changed also by setting the Automatic increase in torque curve parameter C038 for motor 1 For the description of the parameters used in the figure above see the table below 273 482 o PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE Table 69 IFD contol parameters for the connected motors Rated frequency 1 101 Rated frequency of the connected motor current rating cois Rated voltage rated voltage of the connected motor voltage co19 062 C105 rating V f curve type Type of V f curve applied 9958 9999 Torque reduction with quadratic curve 2 075 cus Torque reduction using V f quadratic curve Rated speed refering to torque reduction with quadratic curve C033 119 Speed actuating the torque reduction using a quadratic curve Voltage preboost Determines the voltage produced by the drive at min output C034 C077 C120 frequency fomin Voltage boost O0 of torque curve Determines the variation of the output rated voltage at fmot 20 C035 C078 C121 Boost 0 increases the starting torque Voltage boost 1 of torque curve Determines the voltage variation with respect to rated voltage at C036 C079 C122 preset frequency Frequency for the application of Boost 1 Determines the frequency for the application of the boost at preset C037 coso C123 frequency To
166. 1 or ramp 3 can be selected NOTE 5 If the ramp rounding off function is enabled 021 0 the real ramp times also depend on the values set in parameters P022 P023 P024 P025 P031 339 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE C169 J OG Input 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 gt TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED When the JOG function is enabled the motor rotates at low speed following slow ramps which are manually controlled by the user only by means of the keys in keypad If the drive is enabled ENABLE activated but is not running and if the JOG terminal is enabled the drive will run the connected motor will accelerate following a JOG ramp 029 up to the JOG speed reference 070 On the other hand if the terminal is disabled the drive will stop the connected motor will decelerate to zero speed following the JOG ramp 029 Reverse the direction of rotation of the active reference to reverse the JOG reference CAUTION The motor starts running as soon as this terminal is activated only if the drive is enabled NOTE The RUN function will override the JOG function Therefore if the RUN function is active the JOG function is ignored If the motor is not running in SLAVE mode torque reference instead of speed reference it can rotate at JOG speed when the user activates the JOG
167. 105 No load power 20 C063 C106 coa co64 C107 271 482 ps LONNE 32 1 3 PARAMETERS OF THE EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OF THE ASYNCHRONOUS MACHINE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Table 67 Parameters of the equivalent circuit of the asynchronous machine Stator resistance C022 C065 C108 Leakage inductance C023 C066 C109 Mutual inductance C024 C067 C110 Rotor time constant C025 C068 C111 Figure 41 Equivalent circuit of the async hronous machine ls R l Where Rs Stator resistance wires included Rr Rotor resistance hilo Full leakage inductance M Mutual inductance not required for control implementation S Slip trot Rrrotor time constant Because the motor characteristics are generally unknown the IDrive is capable of automatically determining the motor characteristics see the FIRST STARTUP section and the AUTOTUNE MENU However some parameters may be manually adjusted to meet the requirements needed for special applications The parameters used for the different control algorithms are stated in the table below Table 68 Motor parameters used by control algorithms Stator resistance Leakage inductance Mutual inductance Rotor time constant v Used Not used Because the value of the stator resistance is used for any type of control NOTE always perform the autotune procedure wi
168. 191 159 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 9999 9999 Depends on the value 9 999 9 999 selected 184 D c c P188 AO2 Analog Output Offset ADVANCED Offset value applied to AO2 analog output P189 Filter for AO2 Analog Output 0 65000 0 000 65 000 sec Default Level ADVANCED Address Function 10 0 10 0 V range 20 0 20 0 MA Depends on the value selected in P184 H0 Level ADVANCED 0 790 Minimum output value obtained when the minimum value of the variable set in P186 is implemented P191 Max AO2 Output Value with Reference to P187 100 100 200 200 10 0 10 0 V Depends on the value 20 0 20 0 mA selected P184 ADVANCED Maximum output value obtained when the maximum value of the variable set in P187 is implemented 192 Analog Output 6 ABS 0 20mA 7 ABS 4 20 Default Level ADVANCED Address Selects the operating mode of AO3 analog output 160 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE bis Analog outputs are set as voltage outputs by default To set them as current outputs see the DIP switch configuration and follow the instructions displayed on the keypad or refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual P193 Selected Variable for AO3 Analog Output Default Level Address Function 0 6 See Table 29
169. 191 1024 pls rev Number of pls rev for Encoder B 197 0 2Ch Quad Number of channels of Encoder A C198 0 2Ch Quad Number of channels of Encoder B C199 0 Fdbk No Ref No Encoder reading sign reversal 351 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE Motor Control 1 Menu Setup of control mode with speed feedback from encoder and min speed and max speed of the controlled motor 012 Yes Speed feedback from MI encoder 028 Min soeed motor M1 C029 1500 rom speed of motor Control Method Menu Setup of the source of the speed feedback from encoder 143 8 Encoder Selection of reference 1 source 144 O Disable Selection of reference 2 source 145 0 Disable Selection of reference 3 source 146 0 Disable Selection of reference 4 source References Menu Setup of the reading range for the encoder used as a speed reference P073 0 rpm Encoder input min rpm P074 750 rpm Encoder input max rpm Ramps Menu Ramps time applied to the reference are reset to maintain the desired speed variation without entering any delay value PO09 Acceleration time 1 10 Deceleration time 1 When motor 1 reaches its max speed 750 the speed reference is 100 because the speed value read by the encoder used as a reference source is saturated and scaled with respect to the min rpm and max rpm set in P073 P074 Because th
170. 2 RS485 9600 1 2 17 2 RS485 9600 2 no 20 18 2 RS485 9600 1 20 19 Dial Out analog modem 20 Dial Out GSM modem 441 482 L Q e 55 EEPROM MENU 55 1 Overview The drive has four different memory zones e gt Volatile memory containing the drive s current parameterization e DefaultZone gt Non volatile memory that cannot be accessed by the user containing the factory setting of the drive parameters e Work Zone Non volatile memory where customized parameters are saved Whenever the drive is reset this parameterization is loaded to the RAM e Back up Zone gt Non volatile memory storing a new drive parameterization Back up parameters are modified only when the user explicitly saves the back up zone Any parameter can be changed by the user The drive will immediately use the new parameter value The user may save the parameter value in the Work zone If no new value is saved for a given parameter the drive will use the parameter value stored in the Work zone when next turned on e P parameters can be written at any moment e According to factory setting C parameters see P003 to modify them even when fluxing and the motor is not running can be written only if the drive is not running and the ENABLE command is disabled terminal MDI2 open e R parameters have the same features as C parameters but the new parameter value once writte
171. 2000 msec 1 ADVANCED 1305 1306 1307 External alarm trip delay To avoid untimely alarm trip it may be necessary to set a check time for the opening of the input set as an external alarm before the alarm trips 338 482 PROGRAMMING cs LONNE C167 C168 MULTIRAMP Inputs 0 5 Inactive 1 8 MDI8 9 12 5 MPLI 4 13 16 gt TFLA 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if ES847 ES870 is fitted ENGINEERING 1167 1168 This function allows selecting up to 4 acceleration deceleration ramps Each ramp has its own programming parameters see 009 25 RAMPS MENU These 2 functions determine which of the 4 ramps is to be selected the active value 1 or inactive value 0 of each preset input signal determines a binary number with a bit logic where Multiramp 0 is the less significant bit bit 0 and Multiramp 1is the most significant bit bit 1 The ramps range from 1 to 4 for the selected ramp add 1 to the binary figure obtained If one of these functions is not programmed the relevant bit is zero Table 91 Multiramp selection Selected Ramp Multiramp 1 Multiramp 0 1 Table 92 Selected ramp Multiramp 0 0 1 0 1 Multiramp 1 If one these functions is not programmed its bit is zero For example if C167 is Inactive 0 and C168 is programmed for one terminal only ramp
172. 225 Procedure in case of Power Down 1225 3 Alarm C226 Power Down enable delay 1226 10 ms C227 Stop ramp time in Power Down INEE 1227 20 sec C228 of ramp gradient LEE 1228 0 10 C229 Improved sensitivity of DC bus 1229 1 control 339V for class 2T 679V for class 4T 380 480V C230 2 level of DC bus in Power 1230 707 for class 4T 481 500V 813 for class 5 976V for class 6T Proportional constant for ca automatic deceleration ee 2947 PI Integral time for automatic C232 1232 0 5 5 C234 Ramp action at the end of Power 1234 0 Stop Down C235 Motor speed at the end of Power 1235 0rpm Down C225 Procedure in Case of Power Down 0 Disabled 1 Yes 2 YesV 3 Alarm ENGINEERING Type of power down 0 Disabled The Power Down function is disabled 1 Yes In case of mains loss after a time longer than the time set in C226 starting from the mains loss detection the deceleration ramp set C227 is performed 2 YesV In case of mains loss deceleration is automatically regulated by a PI regulator see C231 and C232 so that voltage level in DC link is kept constant at the reference value set in C230 IFD control because no torque demand regulation is available the deceleration ramp gradient is adjusted depending on the gradient value set C227 3 Alarm In case of power failure the A064 Mains Loss alarm trips after the time set in C226 NOTE DC bus voltage Power Down ca
173. 3 42 2 Choosing the Characteristic Parameters 384 42 2 1 TERR 384 42 2 2 Maximum Locked Rotor Time BOSIC 364 42 2 3 Maximum Locked Rotor Time 386 42 3 ThemnalProtecion Mpo D SOY 387 42 4 List of Parameters C264 TO C274 isset teer tete et tnos ette 388 43 MAINTENANCE MENU n dre uide Eee an debe ee te tac 390 43 1 ev 390 43 2 List Of Paramelters C275 t0 C278 isse tee 390 44 PID CONFIGURATION MENU ient 391 44 1 eU 391 44 2 Operation and Structure of the PID Regulator 391 44 3 Lisi or Parameters C285 102294 394 44 4 Keeping Fluid Level Constant Example 402 45 BRIDGE CRANE MENUJ ideni etui e Donc a tote 405 45 1 eU 405 45 2 List Parameters 30010 02 405 46 DATE AND TIME MENU
174. 334 TFL1 T off m 0 C335 TFL1 T off 5 0 C336 TFLI WeekDays 0 C337 TFL2 Ton h 0 C338 TFL2 m 0 C339 TFL2 Ton s 0 C340 TFL2 T off h 0 C341 TFL2 T off m 0 C342 TFL2 T off s 0 C343 TFL2 WeekDays 0 C344 TFL3 h 0 C345 TFL3 m 0 C346 TFL3 Tons 0 C347 TFL3 T off h 0 C348 TFL3 T off m 0 C349 TFL3 T off s 0 C350 TFL3 WeekDays 0 C35LTFL4 Ton h 0 C352 TFL4 Ton m 0 C353 TFL4 Tons 0 C354 TFL4 T off h 0 C355 TFL4 T off m 0 C356 TFL4 T off s 0 C357 TFL4 WeekDays 0 479 482 iDrive LONNE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ROOx RO1x Serial Link Connections 1 slaveadar 1 R002 com answdelay 5 ms R003 scO baudrate 38400 bps 2ms com 4time delay 005 wdg time 0 0 ROO6 parity scO 1 No 2 Stop Bit ROO8 cm1_slaveaddr ROO9 cm1_answdelay 5ms RO1O sc1_baudrate 38400 bps FOLI 3 2 ms cm1_4time_delay RO12 sr1_wdg_time 0 0 RO13 parity scl 1 No 2 Stop Bit RO1x Fieldbus Configuration RO16 fos_wdg_time Oms R017a AO fb sel 0 No RO17b AO2 fb sel 0 No R017c AO3 fb sel 0 No RO2x Expansion Board Settings RO21 Data Logger 1 NO R023 Board 0 None Setting setting RO2x RO4x PROAdrive Settings RO25 SlaveAddr R026 P7D3 O Adar 1 Digital Inputs R027 P7D4 Addr 0 not used R028 P7D5 O Adar 0 not used R029 P7D Addr 0 not used R030 P7D7 Adar 0 not used RO31
175. 36 Flux Current 5000 0A Flux Current 37 Sqr Wave 100 00 Square wave 38 Saw Wave 100 00 Saw wave 39 Hts Temp 100 00 ___ of the heatsink 40 Amb Temp 100 00 C Ambient temperature 41 49 RESERVED RESERVED 50 PT100 1 100 0076 PT100 Channel 1 51 PT100 2 100 0076 100 Channel 2 52 PT100 3 100 00 100 Channel 3 53 100 4 100 00 PT100 Channel 4 54 121 100 00 Motor thermal capacity 55 XAIN4 100 00 KAIN4 Analog input 56 XAINS 100 00 KAIN5 Analog input 57 OT Count 100000h Maintenance Operation Time Counter 58 ST Count 100000h Maintenance Supply Time Counter 149 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 59 PID2 Reference 100 00 Reference at constant speed of PID2 60 PID2 Set Point 100 00 Ramped reference of PID2 61 PID2 Error 100 0076 Error between reference and feedback of PID2 62 PID2 Feedback 100 00 Feedback of PID2 63 PID2 Out 100 00 Output of PID2 64 Torque Demand 100 0076 Torque demand value percent Table 29 provides a brief description of each variable and its full scale value used to set the minimum and maximum value 20 2 1 OPERATING MODE OF ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS This section covers the different representation modes to be selected for the analog and frequency outputs The following modes can be used for analog outputs 0 Disabled Disabled analog output enables a RESERVED operating mode 1 x 10V
176. 39 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 7 FIRST STARTUP For the signal wiring and power wiring please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual Parameter programming is detailed in the START UP MENU 7 1 IFD Control Algorithm iDrive drives are factory set with the IFD C010 control algorithm allowing the first startup of the equipment The default functions of the drive terminals are given in the table below For more details please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual 1 Wiring Follow the instructions stated in the Caution Statements and Installation sections Installation Instructions Manual 2 Poweron Power on the drive and do not close the link to the SIARTinput to prevent the motor from running 3 Parameter Access parameter 000 Key parameter and set its code default value modification 00001 Use the ESC A Y and SAVE ENTER keys to access the programming parameters Also refer to the Menu Tree 4 Supply voltage Set the real supply voltage for the drive You can set either mains voltage range or the DC supply stabilized by a Regenerative IDrive drive To set the type of power supply for the drive access the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and set configuration parameter 008 to the value corresponding to the installation concerned 5 Motorparameters Set C010 Control Algorithm as Voltage Frequency set the motor ratings as follows 015 rated frequency
177. 4 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted 13 216 gt TFL TFLA 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 ADVANCED This function resets the variation of the PID reference obtained with the V keys on the KEYPAD page of the user interface on the display keypad in PID mode C179 Source Selection Input 0 gt Inactive 0 16 1 8 5 MDI8 uu m 9 12 gt MPL4 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted 13 2 16 gt TFL TFL4 17 24 2 XMDII XMDI8 Defaut Level ADVANCED 1179 The digital input set as a source selector is considered the drive terminal board only not in the virtual terminal boards as Fieldbus or Serial Link see Command Sources Range When the digital input set as a source selector is open only the first command sources and references programmed in the CONTROL METHOD MENU are considered C140 command source 1 and C143 reference source 1 respectively as well as the first reference and feedback sources programmed in the PID CONFIGURATION MENU parameter C285 for reference source 1 and C288 for feedback source n 1 When the digital input set as a source selector is closed only the second command source and the second reference source programmed in the CONTROL METHOD MENU are considered C141 for command source n 2 and C144 for reference source n 2 as well as the second reference sources feedback sources set in the PID CONFIGURATION MENU parameter C286
178. 4 Solve any external problems that may have been responsible for the protection trip 5 If the alarm tripped due the entry of wrong parameter values set new correct values and save them 6 Reset the alarm 7 Ifthe alarm condition persists please contact L nne Scandinavia AS Customer Service A RESETcommand must be sent to reset the alarms tripped Do one of the following e Enable the RESETsignal in terminal in the hardware terminal board e Press the RESETkey on the keypad e Enable the RESETMDI3 signal in one of the virtual terminal boards enabled as remote control sources see the CONTROL METHOD MENU To activate the Autoreset function enable parameter C255 see the AUTORESET MENU the drive will automatically try to reset the alarms tripped 445 482 iDrive 56 3 A001 A032 LONNE Alarm List PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Table 122 List of the possible alarms Control board failure A033 TEXAS VER KO Incompatible Texas Software Version A039 FLASH KO Texas Flash not programmed A040 User Fault Alarm caused by the user A041 PWMA Fault General hardware fault from IGBT side A A042 Illegal XMDI in Illegal configuration of XMDI in the Digital Inputs menu A043 False Interrupt Control board failure A044 SW OverCurrent Software overcurrent A045 Bypass Circuit Fault Fault of the precharge By Pass A046 Bypass C
179. 5 Enable delay 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec Default TA ENGINEERING Address 824 This parameter sets T5 enable time Operation as per P216 Function P225 15 Disable delay Range O 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec Default Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter sets T5 disable time Operation as 217 P226 Timers Assigned to Inputs MDI1 4 ACRI RUE En den 0 No timer assigned 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 145 TI 5 Default 0 No timer assigned Level ENGINEERING Address The first group of four digital inputs may be assigned to any of the five timers and The same timer may be assigned to multiple inputs Select zero to avoid delaying the digital inputs Setting via serial link see coding table below Function Table 37 Coding of P226 Timers assigned to digital inputs MDI 1 4 Coding example for P226 MDI1 Timer T2 MDI2 No timer assigned MDI3 Timer T2 MDIA Timer T5 gt value in P226 101 010 000 010 bin 2690 dec P227 Timers Assigned to Inputs MDI5 8 uH 0 0 01 15 5 5 5 9 assigned Default 0 0 0 0 0 No timer assigned Level ENGINEERING Address The second group of four digital inputs may be assigned to any of the five timers and the same timer may be assigned to multiple inputs Select zero to avoid delaying the digital inputs Setting via serial link see coding in P226 Function 169 482 iDrive PROGRAMMI
180. 5 and C146 are not set to Disable the reference sent for these sources shall be a sum of the source selected by MD16 vector Please refer to C179 in the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 317 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 34 1 4 TORQUE LIMIT SOURCE The source of the Torque Limit can be selected with parameter C147 The Torque limit function is a limit of the absolute value of the torque required from the drive Torque limit lt torque lt Torque limit The torque limit references may be selected from the following 0 Source disabled REF single ended analog input from terminal board 2 AIN1 differential analog input from terminal board 3 AIN2 differential analog input from terminal board see also the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 4 HN frequency input from terminal board 5 Seriallink with MODBUS protocol 6 Fieldbus fieldbus on option board 7 Keypad remota ble displa y keypad 8 Encoder in terminal board MDI6 ECHA MDI7 EC HB or option board 9 Up Down from MDI Up down from digital inputs see C161 and C162 10 XAIN4 auxilia ry differential voltage analog input from ES847 terminal board 11 XAIN5 auxilia ry differential current analog input from ES847 terminal board If the reference source is disabled the torque limit results from the max absolute torque determined by the drive size and the motor size NOTE The max absolute torque is the max value ranging between
181. 50 to POZA Gs 113 Table 23 List of parameters PO80 to P10O ccccssccssccessscessccesecessecessecessccesssessecessecesecessecessecssecessecessecessecesesesseceaeeeseeens 126 Table 24 List of parameters PO80a P099G isdnaadededaqedeaaqedeesieiditie 131 Table 25 List of parameters P105 to 108 134 Table 26 E istot parameters PITS To P T2 ELE EE ITUR NEUSS 137 Table 27 List of parameters P125 to 152 139 Table 28 List ot parameters P155 ese E ESPERE EGET EEUU 143 Table 29 Variables be selected for the Analog and Frequency Outpults essere 149 Table 30 Programming AOT OF ad DECIES EE EIER ten erac I E eee 151 Table 31 Programming AO ABS 0 151 Table 32 Programmirig AOI ABS erect eae e d EUR 152 Table 33 Programming AO ABS 0 153 T ble 34 Programming AON TOV pee en ven re ERE ERE uei ERIS 153 Table 35 List of parameters P176 to 215 2 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 erase esses 155 Table362List of parameters 229 EE
182. 542 0459 aso 10 250 100 100 100 2 0526 450 10 250 10 100 Off 100 2 T 450 100 250 100 10 or 100 2 0750 450 100 250 100 10 or 100 2 0828 aso 10 250 100 100 off 100 2 09 450 10 250 100 100 Off 100 2 128 45 100 250 100 100 off 100 2 302 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE iDrive 303 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Table 79 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 51 6T 3 C035 C 036 C078 C079 121 122 01 E C gt gt so 12 2 FREE 1800 2 FREE 0 2 20 A 2076 2 FREE 0 2 20 20 2xs42 0459 2 FREE 2965 2 FREE S 2 128 2 FREE 0 2 304 482 PROGRAMMING c LONNE Table 80 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 5T 6 4 1000 0 13 1170 1400 130 0 001 016 1340 0 13 0 08 2100 2100 0001 0 10 0 07 2400 2400 0001 0 08 035 630 626 0014 043 S0 3xS52
183. 6 MDO parameterization for electromec hanical brake command P297 MDO4 Digital output mode ABS BRAKE P298 MDOX Variable A selection A81 Torque Output P299 MDO4 Variable B selection 71 Speed MEA P300 MDO4 Testing variable gt P301 MDO4 Testing variable B 302 MDO4 Comparing value for Test 20 00 P303 Comparing value for Test B 50 00 rom P304 MDO4 Function applied to the result of the two tests A Set B Reset Rising Edge P30da MDO4 Variable C selection DO Disabled P305 MDO4 Output logic level TRUE The digital output energizes only if no alarm trips The torque demand is greater than P302 20 00 Set The digital output de energizes if an alarm trips or if the decelerating speed is lower than the speed value set in P303 50rpm Reset Motor Speed rom A 1500 L v Torque Out 100 50 ps su Out Figure 37 Electromechanical brake command example CAUTION Always use the NO contact of the digital output for the electromechanical brake command NOTE For details about the electromechanical brake used for lifting applications see also the BRIDGE CRANE MENU 203 482 PROGRAMMING w LONNE Example 5 Using the PWM Function Suppose that the motor of a machine tool is controlled by a drive The tool must be lubricated based on the
184. 7 and C285 to C287 see the PID CONFIGURATION MENU when the PID controller is enabled thus allowing setting them via KEYPAD only The following functions are still active in the hardware terminal board of the control board being used ENABLE Extemal Alam 1 2 3 Sel Motor n 2 Sel Motor n 3 SLAVE PID Disable and the LOCAL function itself that can be disabled at any time If the input is deactivated when the drive is disabled signals coming from different sources will activate again If the main reference of the drive is the PID output you can set C180a Type of LOC REM Contact Pushbutton and P266 Type of Keypad page in Local Mode Ref Activated Spd As a result when the Loc key is pressed and released once the drive enters the Local mode and the PID reference can be changed whereas when the Loc command is pressed and released again provided that The drive is not enabled the PID is disabled and the RPM reference can be sent to the connected motor See also the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the Keypad page and Local mode in the DISPLAY KEYPAD menu C 180a Type of LOC REM Contact O Switch 1 Pushbutton 2 Pushbutton Storage 2 Pushbutton Storage ADVANCED Factory setting the digital contact set as LOC REM C180 is Pushbutton based If the PID output is the main reference and P266 Type of Keypad Page in Local Mode Ref Activated Spd allowing entering the LOCAL mode when the LOC REM comma
185. 8 STARTUP Mo 37 PARAMETER 19 SPATE inne E 437 RASSWORD M 13 78 STOP BINPUT 310 PID 366 STOP INPUT 309 PID DISABLE 319 STOP 21325 26 SUPPLY TIME COUNTER 68 PIDIPARAMETERS 158 AEON eterne tette tetto 76 PIDIRERERENGE 26 PID UP DOWN RESET INPUT 322 PID PID2 UNITS OF MEASURE 84 T PID2 PARAMETERS 173 TIMERS 152 PIPE FILL TORQUE CONTROL 257 262 POWER 27 345 TORQUE LIMIT SOURCE 296 POWER OFF 73 TORQUE LIMIT SOURCE REF DISABLE INPUT 305 405 E 90 PROHIBIT SPEEDS 28 121 124 TYPE OF LOC REM CONTACT 323 PT RE 66 209 359 U R UP AND DOWN eerte 315 UP DOWN REAL TIME CLOCK 380 USER LEVEL REFERENCE FROM 36 330 REFERENCE VARIATION PERCENT Az RESET UP DOWN INPUT VIRTUAL DIGITAL OUTPUTS 214 REVERSE B INPUT VOLTAGE FREQUENCY PATTERN 27 254 REVERSE INPUT pu
186. A see Table 41 ADVANCED 955 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test A P356 MPL1 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable B see Table 41 ADVANCED 956 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test B 243 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE P357 MPL1 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests P357a MPLI Selecting Variable C A OR B A SET B RESET A AND B A XOR B A NOR B A NAND B AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B A AND BY 10 A RESET B SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 0 OR B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADVANCED 957 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the tests allowing calculating the output value See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 932 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MPL1 digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in Table 41 P357b MPL1 Function Applied to the Result of f A B 244 482 0 OR C 1 SET C RESET RISING EDGE 2 AND C 3 XOR C 4 NOR C 5 6 A B N OR C 7 OR 8
187. A B C OR C P376 MPL3 Output logic level TRUE malfunctioning e g the pump membrane is locked when the sensor is located MPL3 detects when piping is clogged or faulty or when the delivery pressure sensor is dn downstream of the mains 237 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE P377 Digital output mode DOUBLE FULL P378 Selecting variable 051 MPL3 P379 Selecting variable A86 PID Feedback P381 MPL4 Testing variable B 2 P383 MPL4 Comparing value for Test B Min FBK value P384 MPL4 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests Set B Reset 84 MPL4 Selecting variable C DO Disabled P385 Output logic level See steps 1 and 2 below Virtual digital output MPL4 locks the system operation in two modes 1 Virtually connecting the output to an external alarm input P385 FALSE C164 12 MPL4 2 Disabling the PID P385 TRUE 171 12 MPL4 On the other hand when the malfunctioning signal is sent to the PLC supervisor the same parameterization in MPL4 shall be entered in the digital output concerned Operating PWR Min power required for the pump delivery Min FBK value the min feedback value shall be 2 P237 minimum PID When the Sleep Mode see PID PARAMETERS MENU and the Dry Run Detection mode NOTE are activated simultaneously the delay time for the Dry Run Detection
188. A B C 216 482 0 OR C 1 SET C RESET RISING EDGE 2 AND C 3 XOR 4 NOR 5 NAND 6 A B N OR C 7 OR 8 f A B AND C 9 AND CN 10 f A B RESET C SET RISING EDGE 11 SET C RESET FALLING EDGE 12 f A C SET FALLING EDGE 1 SET RESET ADVANCED 647 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value e PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive P296 Output Logic Level ADVANCED 896 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT Defaut 1 DIGITAL Level ADVANCED Address eos Un dE 02 This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 4 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO4 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MDO4 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 D1 Inverter Run Ok ADVANCED 899 This pa
189. ANCE 0 973 240 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS F374 MPL3 Comparing value for Test B AD ADLE 0 74 P375 MPL3 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests 4 OR B P375a MPL3 Selecting variable ADVANCE 0 Disable 936 P375b MPL3 Function applied to the result f A B C DVANCE 0 f A B ORC 937 D 376 ADVANCE 1 TRUE 976 MPL3 Output logic level Digital output mode 0 DISABLE Selecting variable DO DISABLE Selecting variable B DO DISABLE Testing variable A 72 Testing variable Comparing value for Test Comparing value for Test B MPL4 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests Selecting variable DVANCE 0 Disable MPL4 Function applied to the result of f A B C 0 OR MPL4 Output logic level 1 TRUE 241 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P350 MPL1 Digital Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT DIGITAL ADVANCED 950 This parameter defines the operating mode of virtual digital output 1 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter NOTE MPL Digital output can be programmed only if the frequency output is not set up P200 Dis
190. AND C 9 AND CY 10 f A B RESET C SET RISING EDGE 11 SET C RESET FALLING EDGE 12 RESET SET FALLING EDGE 0 OR ADVANCED 933 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value e PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P358 MPL1 Output Logic Level ADVANCED 958 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied P359 MPL2 Digital Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT DIGITAL ADVANCED 959 This parameter defines the operating mode of virtual digital output 2 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter See Table 41 D33 Fan Fault ADVANCED 960 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MPL2 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MPL2 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P361 MPL2 Selecting Variable B See Table 41 00 Disable ADVANCED 961 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of MPL2 digital output It selects an analog variabl
191. Board Drive Profile board not correctly configured A096 Fan Fault Fault of the cooling fans A097 Motor Not Connected Motor not connected A098 Motor Selected Illegal motor selected via A099 2nd Sensor Fault Fault of fan sensor 2 A100 MDI6 Illegal Configuration Function programmed for MDI6 along with frequency input A101 MDI8 Illegal Configuration Function programmed for MDI8 along with frequency input B A102 REF gt 20 REF Current input 4 20 or 0 20mA greater than 20mA A103 AINT gt 20mA AINT Current input 4 20mA or 0 20 greater than 20mA A104 AIN2 gt 20mA AIN2 Current input 4 20mA or 0 20 greater than 20mA A105 100 Channel 1 Fault Hardware address out of measure range of the drive A106 100 Channel 2 Fault Hardware address out of measure range of the drive A107 100 Channel 3 Fault Hardware address out of measure range of the drive A108 100 Channel 4 Fault Hardware address out of measure range of the drive A109 Amb Overtemp Ambient overtemperature 110 120 Control board failure A001 A032 A043 A049 A063 A071 A078 A088 A092 A110 A120 Control Board Failure Description Control board failure There may be several causes the board autodiagnostics file constantly checks its operating conditions e Strong electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference e Possible failure of the microcontroller or other circuits on the contr
192. C068 for motor 2 and C111 for motor 3 The machine equations allow separating torque control from flux the drive can be controlled with a torque reference instead of a speed reference NOTE FOC control requires a speed transducer such as an encoder feedback 280 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive C011 C C097 e of Reference Master Slave 0 Speed MASTER mode 1 Torque SLAVE mode 2 Torque with speed limit SLAVE mode FOC only ADVANCED 1011 1054 1097 VTC and FOC This parameter defines the type of reference to be used The torque control may be set up see section Torque Control VTC and FOC Only as well When the Torque control with speed limit mode is used the drive will limit the motor rotation to the rom set in parameter C029 C072 C115 This function can be used to automatically toggle from the torque control mode to the speed control mode when the torque control mode is implemented the motor speed can reach any value included in the AB area see figure below If the limit speed is attained due to particular load conditions the drive will automatically switch to the speed control zone The controlled torque is no longer maintained If the torque returns to its setpoint value the drive will automatically switch to the torque control again AB zone TORQUE TORQUE CONTROL ZONE SPEED CONTROL ZONE AB Torque Set Point BC Speed Limit SPEED
193. C146 Reference sources 10 and 11 can be selected only after setting XAIN in parameter RO23 0 Disabled 1 REF 2 3 2 4 Frequency input 5 Serial Link 6 Fieldbus 7 Keypad 8 Encoder 9 UpDown from MDI 10 XAIN4 11 5 700 Level Address Control 322 482 ENGINEERING 1147 VTC and FOC If speed control with or VTC control algorithms is used an external torque limit can be used Parameter C147 selects the Torque Limit source The torque ramp times set 26 27 will be applied to the torque limit reference source that has been selected The external torque limit may be disabled by closing the digital input set with C187 Limiting sources 10 and 11 can be selected only after setting XAIN in parameter R023 ee PROGRAMMING f If the reference source is disabled the torque limit results from the max absolute torque determined by the drive size and the motor size max absolute torque is the max value ranging between the absolute values of C047 and C048 motor 1 and relevant parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 Max absolute torque Max C047 C048 Factory setting the reference source is disabled C147 0 so the torque limit depends on the max absolute torque see also the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU C148 Switch over from Remote to Local Command 0 StandBy Fluxing 1 Drive Running No Bumpless 2 Drive Running
194. CY INPUTS MENU 2 Check and adjust the control function programming for digital inputs MDI6 and see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 3 Check if optional encoder board is fitted and properly mounted A083 A084 A085 Extemal Alarm Possible cause A083 External alarm 1 A084 External alarm 2 A085 External alarm 3 The External Alarm 1 2 3 functionality has been programmed but the relevant digital input is disabled see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU If multiple digital command sources are programmed alarms 083 085 trip if one of the terminals in the active sources is disabled see the CONTROL METHOD MENU The cause for the alarm trip does not depend on the drive check for the reason why the contact connected to terminal MDIx where the External Alarm function is programmed opens Check external signal Loss of 215 e The voltage level of 15V is inadequate Possible failure of the control board or other circuits in the IDrive Drive 1 Reset the alarm send a RESETCommand 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service 461 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A091 Braking Resistor Overload Overvoltage due to the overload of the braking resistor that has been operating for a time equal to the maximum time due to settings in C211 and C212 The braking resistance command was inhibited because the maximum ON time was expired and the energy caused by
195. Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table 41 ADVANCED This parameter defines the comparing value with the variable selected for test A P294 MDO3 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable See Table 41 Default Level ADVANCED Address 894 ia IS This parameter defines the comparing value with the variable selected for test B 215 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e 295 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests Default Level Address Function P295a MDO3 Selecting Variable C A OR A SET B RESET A AND B 0 1 2 3 XOR B 4 NOR 5 6 7 8 9 10 A RESET SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 0 0 ADVANCED 895 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 646 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO3 digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in Table 41 P295b MDO3 Function Applied to the Result of f
196. Current regulator integral time Mot n 2 ENGINEERING 20 0 ms 763 P165 Flux regulator proportional constant Mot n 2 ENGINEERING 0 00 765 P166 Flux regulator integral time Mot n 2 ENGINEERING 33 ms 766 P169 Current regulator proportional constant ENGINEERING 3 00 769 n 3 P170 Current regulator integral time Mot n 3 ENGINEERING 20 0 ms 770 P172 Flux regulator proportional constant Mot n 3 ENGINEERING 0 00 772 P173 Flux regulator integral time Mot n 3 ENGINEERING 33 ms 773 143 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P155 P162 P169 C urent Regulator Proportional Constant Range 0 65000 0 00 650 00 3 00 TEE ENGINEERING 755 762 769 FOC Kp Proportional coefficient of Pl current regulator Id in field rotary reference for motor n 1 P162 and P169 relate to motors 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure integral status integral status eror Ki Ts Output integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient is the integral coefficient 1 Ti where Ti is the integral time is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency This parameter is automatically computed and saved when the Autotuning procedure is performed see the AUTOTUNE MENU P156 P163 P170 C urrent Regulator Integra
197. D UST ORIENTED CONTROL MEA PAR POWER OFF ANALOG OUTPUTS AND UST FREQUENCY OUTPUTS INSTRUCTIONS MEASURES COMMANDS PARAMETERS CONHGURATION PRODUCTIDENTIHER INVERTEROK INVERTEROK INVERTEROK INVERTEROK 0 00 0 00 0 00 M00 0 00rpm M02 0 00 pm 2 0 00 pm M02 0 00 pm 02 0 00 rpm MEA PARCF IDP MEA CF IDP MEA PAR CF IDP MEA PARCF IDP MEASURE MENU PARAMETERS MENU PRODUCTMENU M Parameters P Par thatcan Language Cannotbe changed be changed when the Selection and motoris running Inverter Data MEA PAR IDP iDrive MOTOR PASSWORD AND SIARF UP MENU MEASURES ACCESS LEVEL Press ENTER to start MEA PARI IDP PID REGULATOR DISPLAY KEYPAD PRODUCT INSTRUCTIONS Figure 1 LONNE PAR AUXILIARY DIGITAL OUTPUTS 100 MEASURE SETTINGS 5 5 PAR VIRTUAL DIGITAL OUTPUTS INPUTS FOR REFERENCES FROM 5847 iDrive 17 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS pns LONNE 1 3 Navigation Figure 2 Navigation example Go oss d Page 4 lt M gt MEASURE MENU PARAMETERS MENU PRODUCT MENU M Parameters P Pars thatcan Language selection Cannot be changed be changed when and Inverter data the
198. D CONFIGURATION MENU When the terminal allocated to this function is activated the PID requlator can be disabled its output and its external variable are set to zero More precisely if the PID regulator is in Extemal Out mode 294 0 when the PID DISABLE function is enabled the PID output is set to zero and the external variable regulated by the PID regulator feedback is no longer regulated by the PID regulator itself In Reference mode the PID DISABLE function disables the PID regulator as described above and switches the reference thus becoming the main active reference again C171a Input for PID Control Selection Function 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDII 8 9 12 gt MPL1 MPL4 13 16 TFLA 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted This parameter pertains to the activation of the two PIDs or the 2 zone mode see the PID CONFIGURATION MENU It allows using the PID regulator outputs in different ways and allows disabling the 2 zone mode 341 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 0 gt Inactive 1 8 5 MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 2 XMDI1 XMDI8 Default Inactive Level ADVANCED Address C172 KEYPAD LOCK Input 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted This function avoids accessing parameter modification through the removable 1917 display keypad and avoids accessing the LOCAL mode b
199. D operates on the system with the larger algebraic error MAX C285 C 288 C 286 C 289 This means that the system takes control of the PID having the minimum feedback in respect to its setpoint 2 Zone MAX The PID operates on the system with the smaller algebraic error MIN C285 C288 C 286 C 289 This means that the system takes control of the PID having the maximum feedback in respect to its reference NOTE When C171a Input for PID Control Selection is activated and the selected input is activated the 2 zone MIN or MAX mode is disabled and the PID always operates on the error resulting from C285 C288 Function 7 Two PIDs programming automatically disables the Source Selection function that can be programmed with C179 The two PIDs use only the signals selected with C285 C288 for PID and with 286 C289 for PID2 2 PID PID and PID2 operate in parallel the outputs of the two PIDs are matched based on the configuration of C171a If C171a 0 Disabled the outputs of the two PIDs are summed to each other If C171a is enabled the output of the PID regulator depends on the logic state of the configured input 0 PID 1 PID2 C291b PID2 Operating Mode 1 Normal 2 Inverse 1 Normal ENGINEERING 1296 This parameter sets how to calculate the PID2 output Two modes are available 1 Normal 2 Inverse In Normal mode the output of the PID regulator is the actual PID2 output If 2 Inverse is selected the error sig
200. D2 feedback ENGINEERING 0 00 1357 P448 Max allowable value of PID2 feedback ENGINEERING 100 00 1358 P449 PID2 reference ramp up time ENGINEERING Os 1359 P450 PID2 reference ramp down time ENGINEERING Os 1360 P451 Unit of measure of PID2 ramp ENGINEERING 1 0 1s 1361 P452 PID2 ramp start rounding off ENGINEERING 50 1362 P453 PID2 ramp end rounding off ENGINEERING 50 1363 P454 Integral term activation threshold ENGINEERING 0 00 1364 P455 SIARTDisable delay with PID Out P437 ENGINEERING 0 Disabled 1284 P456 PID2 output gradient limit ENGINEERING 1 ms 1368 P457 Gain for PID2 measure scaling ENGINEERING 1 000 1369 P460 Gain for Anti Wind Up ENGINEERING 1 00 1370 NOTE Parameters P437a P437b and P455 are overridden if the Two PIDs mode is selected with summed outputs 291 7 2 PID and C171a Disabled 187 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 24 DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU 24 1 Overview The Digital Outputs menu includes the parameters allowing configuring the drive digital outputs MDO1 MDO2 MDO3 and MDO4 NOTE The Digital Outputs menu may be accessed only if the user level is ADVANCED or ENGINEERING For a detailed hardware description of the digital outputs please refer to the NOTE P IDrive s Installation Instructions manual NOTE MDO1 digital output can be programmed only if the frequency output is not set up P200 Disable see the ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU NOTE
201. DO1 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P307 XMDO1 Output Logic Level ENGINEERING 907 XMDO1 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied 221 482 iDrive P308 XMDO2 Signal Selection PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS See Table 41 DO Disable ENGINEERING 908 Selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of XMDO2 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of XMDO2 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P309 XMDO2 Output Logic Level P311 XMDO3 Output Logic Level ENGINEERING 909 XMDO2 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied See Table 41 DO Disable ENGINEERING 910 Selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of XMDO3 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of XMDO3 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 ENGINEERING 911 XMDO3 digital output logic function to appl
202. Data Logger ES851 is installed and Time hours current value 407 482 EV PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE Seconds This measure is available only if the Data Logger 851 is installed and activated R021 ENABLE Day of the Week Day of the Month Daylight Saving Time This measure is available only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated 021 ENABLE Status of the DST 0 Inactive 1 Inactive from less than 1 hour 2 Active 408 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 6 7 8 June July August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December This measure is available only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated 021 ENABLE Month current value 2000 2099 2000 2099 years This measure is available only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated RO21 ENABLE Active Address Level eee oli Year current value 409 482 PROGRAMMING LO NNE 46 2 List of Parameters C310 to C316 Table 112 List of Parameters C310 to C316 C310 Day of the week to be changed C311 Day of the month to be changed C312 Month to be Month AD Year to be changea C314 Hours tobe changed C315 Time Minutes tobe changed C310 Day of the
203. Example 1111100 flag TLF1 will activate every day of the week but Saturday and Sunday 0000000 the flag will never activate 1111111 the flag will activate every day 416 482 PROGRAMMING UE css L NNE 4 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 48 1 Overview IDrive drives may be connected to other devices through a serial link This allows reading and writing the parameters accessed through the remotable display keypad L nne Scandinavia AS also supplies the RemoteDrive software package allowing controlling the drive through a computer connected via serial link The RemoteDrive offers the following functionality image keypad emulation oscilloscope functions and multifunction tester data logger history data table compiler parameter setting and data reception transmission storage from and to a computer scan function for the automatic detection of the connected inverters up to 247 connected inverters 48 2 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL Messages and data are sent by means of standard protocol MODBUS in RTU mode This standard protocol performs control procedures using an 8 bit binary representation In RTU mode a message begins with a silence interval equal to 3 5 times the transmission time of a character If the character transmission stops for a time equal to 3 5 times the transmission time of a character the controller will consider this time interval as the end of the message Similarly a message starting with a sh
204. F Average Minimum Maximum 2 Zone MIN 2 70 MAX 2 PIDs Standard SUM ENGINEERING 1295 This parameter sets the PID control mode Functions O to 4 set the processing mode of the feedback signal as detailed below 1 If C179 Input for Source Selection 0 Disabled STANDARD SUM All the selected feedback signals are summed up SIANDARD DIFF The sum of the selected feedback signals is subtracted from the feedback signal programmed in C288 AVERAGE The resultant of the feedback is given from the arithmetical average of the selected signals MINIMUM The signal having the smallest value among selected signals is considered as the feedback MAXIMUM The signal having the largest value among the selected signals is considered as the feedback 2 If C179is enabled STANDARD SUM 288 290 or 289 290 STANDARD DIFF C288 C 290 or C289 C290 AVERAGE 288 290 or AVG C289 C 290 MINIMUM MIN C288 C 290 MIN C289 C 290 MAXIMUM MAX C288 C 290 or MAX C289 C 290 The references are always summed with each other unless they are managed with the Source Selection see C179 397 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Functions 5 and 6 2 Zone Mode automatically disable the Source Selection function that can be programmed with C179 In functions 5 and 6 only the references selected with C285 C 286 and the feedback values selected with C288 C 289 are used 2 Zone MIN The PI
205. F IFD for Motor 1 you can set the speed searching function for the motor speed of rotation which is useful when the drive controls a motor which is already running as for motors connected to fans See the SPEED SEARCHING MENU for more details 4 5 Controlled Stop in Case of Power Failure Power Down See the POWER DOWN MENU to set a controlled stop in case of power failure 4 6 DC Braking When using a Volt Freq IFD or Vector Torque VTC control algorithm you can set DC braking at start or at stop The DCB Hold function can be set for the Volt Freq IFD function See the DC BRAKING MENU for more details 4 7 Motor Thermal Protection The Motor Thermal Protection function protects the motor against possible overloads This function can be obtained via a PTC acquired AIN2 analog input up to 6 PTCs can be series connected or it can be software protection implemented through an algorithm reproducing the motor thermal image See the MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU for more details For more details about using AIN2 input please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual 28 482 PROGRAMMING cs L NNE 4 8 Prohibit Speeds Prohibit speeds are speed ranges corresponding to mechanical resonance frequencies They prevent the drive from running at the preset speed ranges See the PROHIBIT SPEED MENU for more details 4 9 Digital PID Regulator The IDrive drive is provided with a digital PID proportional
206. GRAMMING LONNE 4 35 DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 35 1 Overview Please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual for the hardware NOTE MEE description of the digital inputs The parameters contained in this menu assign particular digital control functions to each digital input in the terminal board Each parameter has a particular function which is assigned to a given terminal on the terminal board Figure 47 Inputs that can be selected to implement contol functions Physical inputs 8720005 gt START gt ENABLE Start OK RESET gt gt REVERSE CwCCw gt ENABLE S gt DISABLE Direction gt STARTB STOPB Physical inputs TIMERS FOR XMDI 0 gt 1 y MULTISPEED 2 gt MULTISPEED 3 gt DCB vr gt DOWN gt UP DOWN Reset gt EXT ALARM gt EXT ALARM 2 gt EXT ALARM 3 MULTIRAMP 0 gt 1 gt 106 gt PID Disable gt Keypad LOCK 2m Motor gt 3 Motor VAR SPEED 0 gt VAR SPEED M VAR SPEED 2 gt SEQ Enable gt VID UP DOWN Reset MODE LOCAL SOURCE SELECTION 5 5 DISABLE EXT LIMIT Virtual inputs Timed flags The full processing of the digi
207. ID Fbk MO50 Encoder Ref 51 Freq In Ref M052 Lo M053 Op Time Hi M054 Sply Time Lo M055 Sply Time Hi M056 Digital Out M057 Freq Out M058 Analog Out AO1 M059 Analog Out AO2 M060 Analog Out AO3 MO61 Aux Dig OUT 062 Amb Temp Aux Ser Dig IN M064 Hts Temp M065 OP Counter 066 SP Counter MO36b Aux FBus Dig IN 022 PID2 Out 069 PT100 Temp 1 70 PT100 Temp 2 71 PT100 Temp 3 72 PT100 Temp 4 2 12 MO39a Analog In XAIN4 MO39b Analog In XAIN5 MO18a PID2 Ref MO019a PID2 RmpOut M020a PID2 Fok 96 MO21a PID2 Er M023a PID2 Ref MO24a PID2 Fbk MOS9 Status MO90 Alam 229 482 PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE 28 VIRTUAL DIGITAL OUTPUTS MPL MENU 28 1 Overview The Virtual Digital Outputs menu includes the parameters allowing configuring the virtual digital outputs MPL1 4 of the IDrive drive Virtual digital outputs are logic blocks no hardware output is provided allocating more complex logic functions to outputs MDO1 4 MPL virtual outputs can be feedbacked at the input of a new block hardware or virtual block thus allowing implementing more complex functionality NOTE The Virtual Digital Outputs menu may be accessed only if the user level is ADVANCED or ENGINEERING NOTE XMDI auxiliary digital outputs values from 13 to 20 in the parameters relating to the control functions can be set up only after setting XMDI O in parameter R023 28 1 1 FACTO
208. ID Ref Fdb Flowchart B Speed Torque Flowchart A 31 482 PROGRAMMING oe LONNE 752 FLOWC HARTA Setting 00 Write Enable 001 Eng User Level ained in the is ts min the speed 29 32 482 INSTRUCTIONS FLOWCHARTB Setting Write Enable 1 Eng User Level iDrive eferences feedback ut voltage available to the tor Mot 1 tor Mot 1 33 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE EXAMPLE The speed of a motor is to be controlled via a 0 5 V analog input Speed range is 0 1500 rom two digital inputs are available to increase three speed values with steps of 100 Setting the min and max ed The parameters for the motor min max speed are C028 0 rpm 029 1800 rom Setting the analog reference Default setting the analog reference is sent from REF input C143 REF The speed range for the analog input must be 0 1500 rom Default setting in the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU for REF analog input 50 3 0 10 V Type of reference for REF input 51 0 0 V Min value for REF input 52 10 0 value for REF input P052 is the voltage value for REF input for a speed reference 1800rpm C029 For a speed reference of 1500rpm with 5 V P052 is to be set as follows speed REF 5 V C029 Vx Vx 5 1800rpm 1500rpm
209. IDrive series manufactured by L nne Scandinavia AS SpA Setup monitoring may be obtained using one of the following options e Display keypad unit e Seriallink through RS485 standard port or ES822 isolated optional serial board RS485 RS32 e ES851 optional Data Logger and communications board For the instructions on how to use and remote the display keypad unit please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual Any information sent to from the drive via the display keypad unit may be obtained also via serial link using the RemoteDrive software application offered by L nne Scandinavia AS RemoteDrive allows the following functions image acquisition keypad simulation oscilloscope functions and multifunction tester data logger table compiler including history data parameter setup and data reception transmission storage from and to a calculator scan function for the automatic detection of the connected drives up to 247 drives may be connected You can also create your own dedicated software via serial communication link This manual provides any information concerning addressing Address field and scaling Range field for the drive interfacing 0 4 2 SPECIAL APPLICATIONS DEDICATED TO IDRIVE DRIVES Special software is supplied with the drives of the IDrive series that can be used for particular applications menu tree the programming mode and navigation mode of the IDrive cre used parameters or menus w
210. INEERING 0 Disabled 855 P256 PID output gradient limit ENGINEERING 1 ms 856 P257 Gain for PID measure scaling ENGINEERING 1 000 857 P260 Gain for Anti windup ENGINEERING 1 00 860 178 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P236 Max Value of PID Output 100 00 100 00 100 00 ENGINEERING 836 This is the max allowable value of PID regulator output This value is expressed as a percentage its allocation depends parameter C294 defining PID action Example if C294 Extemal Out the PID regulator delivers a reference obtained based on the controlled variable and its setpoint In this case the PID output can be brought outside through an analog output The matching between P236 and the output value see the ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU is user defined If C294 Reference the PID regulator output is the motor speed torque Function reference the system will ignore any other reference source parameter P236 is a percentage referring to the max value considered as an absolute value between the max and the min speed torque reference of the active motor If C294 Add Reference the percentage in P236 relates to the instant value of the speed torque reference to be adjusted If a Frequency control is used the PID regulator can be used to adjust the drive output voltage in this case P236 relates to the instant voltage value E g If a drive delivers 50V and an adjustment of 10
211. IONS Table 75 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 2T 4T 3 C013 C034 C077 C120 5 5 5 5 0086 0113 7 80 C123 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 20 20 20 20 589 297 482 iDrive 298 482 013 C034 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C035 C036 C037 C056 C077 0313 C099 2 FREE C120 0 2 C038 C078 C079 080 CO81 121 122 123 C124 0367 2 FREE 0 2 0402 2 FREE 0 2 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 0457 2 FREE 0524 2 FREE 0598 2 FREE 0748 2 FREE 0831 0964 2 FREE PF 20 20 20 2 20 2 1130 1296 0 0 20 20 EE 20 20 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Table 76 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 27 4T 4 0 012 299 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 355 0 12 355 400 0 09 500 0 06 0 05 560 710 0 05 800 0 05 1000 1200 0523 1400 300 482 PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 32 3 2 VOLTAGE CLASS 5T 6T Table 77 Parameters depending on the Drive Si
212. In addition the autotune sets the encoder signal as feedback with parameter C 199 263 482 M PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 30 2 List of Inputs 1073 1074 Table 62 List of inputs 1073 1074 073 of autotune BASIC 1460 1074 Type of motor BASIC 1461 tune 0 Disable 1 Motor Tune 2 Encoder Tune This is not a programming parameter the input is set to zero whenever the drive is powered and whenever the command is executed 1073 selects the type of tune to perform If you select 1 Motor Tune 1074 sets different types of tune for current loops flux loops and speed loops and for the estimation of the motor ratings see Motor Autotune and Adjusting Loops If you select 2 Encoder Tune you can check the correct operation of the encoder used as a speed feedback see Checking the Encoder Operation 0 All Auto no rotation 1 FOC Auto no rotation 2 FOC Auto rotation 3 VIC FOC Man rotation speed 4 FOC Man no rotation current 5 FOC Man no rotation flux This is not a programming parameter the input is set to zero whenever the Default ae 5 drive is powered whenever the command is executed Level Address 1074 selects the type of autotune to perform if 1073 1 Motor Tune see section Motor Autotune and Adjusting Loops Function No changes can be made to 1073 and 1074 when the ENABLE signal is present If NOTE you attempt to change these values when ENABLE is activ
213. LASS 2T 4T Table 73 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 2T 4 1 293 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS RE 8 0313 480 600 51 0367 550 680 0402 680 850 0457 720 880 0524 800 960 0598 900 1100 1 5 1296 2100 1800 2600 2076 3000 DININ 2 2 71717 7 7 17 17 17 294 482 AER O O O O O JO O alain iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Table 74 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 2T 4T 2 295 482 iDrive C045 088 0313 450 C131 250 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1 0367 450 100 100 250 0402 450 250 0457 450 0524 450 250 250 250 0748 450 100 100 100 250 0831 450 250 250 0964 450 1296 450 450 1800 450 2 541 EN mE 2S4 00 100 100 100 100 100 100 00 100 100 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 296 482 00 00 00 100 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCT
214. MDI8 Frequency Input Values 7 8 the same encoder can be used both as a reference source and as a reference feedback Value 7 encoder A can be used both as a speed feedback for the motor control and as a PID regulator reference C190 Number of Pls Rev for Encoder A 256 10000 256 10000 pls rev 1024 Defines the number of pls rev for encoder A encoder in the terminal board 256 10000 256 10000 5 Defines the number of pls rev for encoder B encoder that can be connected to ES836 option board 65000 0 00 650 00 sec 500 ENGINEERING If the speed alarm C194 is enabled and the speed error exceeds the speed threshold C193 this parameter determines the speed error timeout Even if the alarm speed is disabled time set in C192 and error threshold set in C193 are used to signal a speed searching error to digital outputs set with BRAKE or LIFT mode Digital outputs are then disabled 354 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C193 Speed Enor Threshold LONNE Bis 300 ENGINEERING 0 32000 0 32000 rpm If the speed alarm C194 is enabled and the speed error exceeds the speed threshold C193 this parameter determines the error threshold for The speed error timeout Even if the alarm speed is disabled time set in C192 and error threshold set in C193 are used to signal a speed searching error to digital outputs set with BRAKE or LIFT mode Digital outputs are then disabled
215. NEERING Address Determines the time that passes from the last alarm tripped to reset the autoreset attempt number Function 381 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C257 Alam Reset at Power On 0 Disabled 1 Yes lo Disabled ENGINEERING e 21224 1257 At power this parameter enables the automatic reset of the alarms tripped when the drive is powered off C258 Enable Saving Undervoltage and Mains Loss Alarms 0 Disabled 1 o 0 Diabled ENGINEERING 1 4 1258 ia rst This parameter saves Undervoltage and Mains Loss alarms to the fault list 382 482 PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 42 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU 42 1 Overview The Motor Thermal Protection function protects the motor against overloads Some IDrive models offer the possibility to set the heatsink temperature for the activation of cooling fans All relevant parameters are included in the Motor Thermal Protection menu Each connected motor has its own thermal model If the drive is used to control only one motor its control mode is selected through The selection of the different motors the motor thermal protection is ensured by setting PTC protection for all motors For each programmable motor thermal protection can be configured in 4 modes which can be selected with parameter C265 or C268 or C271 for motor 2 and 3 respectively depending on the cooling system being
216. NG INSTRUCTIONS P228 Timers Assigned to Outputs 1 4 170 482 0 No timer assigned 0 0 0 01 1 5 5 551 511 15 Default 0 0 0 0 0 No timer assigned Range Default Level Address Function ENGINEERING The digital outputs may be assigned to any of the five timers and the same timer may be assigned to multiple outputs Select zero to avoid delaying the digital outputs Setting via serial link see coding in P226 0 No timer assigned 1 5 T1 15 0 0 0 01 ENGINEERING 829 The virtual digital outputs may be assigned to any of the five timers and the same timer may be assigned to multiple outputs Select zero to avoid delaying the virtual digital outputs Setting via serial link see coding in P226 e PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive 22 PID PARAMETERS MENU 22 1 Overview This menu defines the parameters for the digital PID regulator integrated in the drive The PID regulator may be used to control a physical variable which is external to the drive the variable measure shall be available in the system and must be connected to the feedback input The PID regulator is used to keep the reference and the control variable constant feedback to do so the PID regulator controls three internal variables which are described below Y Proportional term this the variable detecting the instant difference between the reference and the measured value of the physical va
217. NG EDGE 1 SET RESET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADVANCED 886 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 644 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO 2 digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in Table 41 P286b MDO2 Function Applied to the Result of f A B C 0 OR C 1 SET C RESET RISING EDGE 2 AND C 3 XOR 4 NOR 5 NAND 6 f A B N OR C 7 OR 8 f A B AND C 9 AND CY 10 f A B RESET C SET RISING EDGE 11 A B SET C RESET FALLING EDGE 12 RESET SET FALLING EDGE 1 A SET B RESET ADVANCED 645 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value 213 482 iDrive P287 MDO2 Output Logic Level ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ADVANCED 887 MDO2 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 P288 MDO3 Digital Output Mode P289 MDO3 Selecting Variable A Function TRUE no negation is applied DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT DIGI
218. NGINEERING 860 Value of the Anti Wind Up coefficient that freezes the integral term of the PID when its output is being saturated see Anti windup When leaving P260 1 00 Anti Wind Up is complete lt OUTsat P D If P260 0 00 Anti Wind Up is inhibited the integral term reaches the value of P238 based on the error sign Intermediate values for P260 give intermediate effects Function 185 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 23 PID2 PARAMETERS MENU 23 1 Overview This menu defines the parameters of the digital regulator PID2 as well as the parameters used in 2 zone mode To activate the PID2 regulator set C291a 7 2 PID PID CONFIGURATION MENU Once activated the PID2 regulator has the same functionality and operates in line with the standard PID PID PARAMETERS MENU The output of the standard regulator is algebraically summed with the output of the PID2 regulator Add 200 to the parameter codes pertaining to the standard PID to obtain the relevant parameter codes for PID2 Example P236 for standard PID corresponds to P436 for PID2 To enable the 2 zone mode set C291a 5 2 Zone MIN or 2 Zone PID CONFIGURATION MENU Once the 2 zone mode is enabled the standard PID regulator operates on the system with the larger error minimum feedback in respect to its reference 2 Zone MIN or with the smaller error maximum feedback in respect to reference 2 Zone In 2 z
219. O1 2 lt 270 lt 9 Reference threshold for P271 P280 P289 P298 in MDO 1 P275 P284 P293 P302 This defines the comparing value of Test A with the first selected variable NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 Example MDO1 270 gt 2 Reference threshold for P272 P281 P290 P299 in MDO2 3 4 P276 P285 P303 This defines the comparing value of Test B with the first selected variable NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 Example MDO1 P2702 195 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE MDO1 Function Applied to the Result of Tests A and P277 P286 P295 P304 A logic function is applied to the two Boolean signals obtained in order to obtain the output TRUE FALSE Boolean signal Six different tests may be performed for variable A using the comparing value and variable B A OR B The selected digital output is enabled when at least one of the two conditions below is true this function also allows enabling the selected digital input based one test only A SET B RESETRising Edge A RESET B SETRising Edge A SET B RESETFalling Edge A RESET B SET Falling Edge The selected digital output is activated as the output of a Flip Set Reset whose inputs are signal A and signal B This function can be used in case of hysteresis The status of the
220. OR CONTROL MENU 32 1 Overview The IDrive allows configuring three different types of motors and three different types of control algorithms at the same time The three types of control algorithms are identified with the acronyms IFD Voltage Frequency Control v Vector Torque Control Y FOC Field Oriented Control The Voltage Frequency control allows controlling the motor by producing voltage depending on frequency The Vector Torque Control sensodess processes the machine equations depending on the equivalent parameters of the asynchronous machine It also allows separating torque control from flux control with no need to use a transducer The Field Oriented Control is closed chain control requiring a speed transducer to detect the position of the motor shaft instant by instant The parameter set for the selected motor is included in the Motor Control menu Y Motor Control 1 Menu concerns motor 1 Y Motor Control 2 Menu concerns motor 2 Y Motor Control 3 Menu concerns motor 3 Factory setting allows configuring only one motor To access the Configuration menus of the other connected motors simply enter the number of the selected motor in C009 Number of Configured Motors in the Motor Control 1 Menu To select the connected motor use digital inputs programmed with parameters C173 and C174 Digital Input for Motor 2 Activation and Digital Input for Motor 3 Activation respectively see also the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU
221. Oms Filter for analog output P182 00 V 2 output value with reference to P183 100 V Max AO output value with reference to P179 Figure 20 Curve voltage speed implemented by AO1 Example 4 10 d 8 4 724 6 5 4 4 4 34 24 14 9 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 rpm Example 5 Table 34 Programming 1 10V P176 10V AO Analog output 177 1 Speed Selected variable for AO1 analog output P178 500 rom Min value of AO selected variable P179 500 rpm Max value of AOI selected variable P180 0 000 V AO Analog output offset P181 0 ms Filter for AO1 analog output P182 10 0 V 22 output value with reference to P183 10 0V iur AO output value with reference to iDrive 153 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 109 100 200 300 400 500 rpm Figure 21 Curve voltage speed implemented by AO1 Example 5 154 482 PROGRAMMING f 20 3 List of Parameters 176 to P215 Table 35 List of parameters P176 to P215 P176 AC analog output ADVANCED 1 10V 776 P177 Selected variable for AOI analog output ADVANCED 1 Motor speed 777 P178 Min value of AOI selected variable ADVANCED 1500 rpm 778 P179 Max value AOI selected variable ADVANCED 1500 rpm 779 P180 AO Analog outp
222. P217 Disable delay 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec This parameter sets disabling time Using P226 or P227 if timer is assigned to a digital input having particular function this parameter represents the delay occurring between the input opening and the function deactivation Use P228 to assign timer 1 to a digital output in that case the digital output de energizing will be delayed according to the time set in P217 Function 167 482 PROGRAMMING iDnve INSTRUCTIONS P218 T2 Enable delay Range 0 0 6000 0 sec Default 0 Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter sets T2 enable time pun Operation as per P216 P219 T2 Disable delay 0 0 6000 0 Ho Level ENGINEERING Address 819 This parameter sets T2 disable time Operation as per P217 Function P220 Enable delay 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec This parameter sets T3 enable time Operation as per P216 P221 T3 Disable delay 0 0 6000 0 sec HE Level Address This parameter sets T3 disable time canchon Operation as per P217 P222 Enable delay 0 0 6000 0 sec This parameter sets T4 enable time Operation as per P216 P223 Disable delay Range O 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec Default Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter sets T4 disable time Operation as per P217 Function 168 482 PROGRAMMING c LO NNE P224 T
223. P7D8 Addr 0 not used R032 P7D9 0 not used RO33 PZD10_O_Addr 0 not used RO34 PZD3_ _Addr 0 not used RO35 PZD4_ _Adar 0 not used R036 P7D5 0 not used R037 P7D6 0 not used R038 P7D7 Addr 0 not used R039 P7D8 Adar 0 not used R040 P7D9 0 not used RO41 P7D3 Adar 0 not used 44 com mode 0 DP VO RO45 DP sel 1 VENDOR SPECIFIC 1 RO5x Daylight Saving Time R050 DSTOn WDMM 5703 RO51 DSTOn HHMM 200 R052 DSTOff WDMM 5710 R053 DSTOff HHMM 200 R11x Data Logger 115 card PIN 0000 0 Disable Key Parameter depending on the curent size Parameter depending on the voltage class 480 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS iDrive 58 INDEX 847 238 295 404 2 ense rest e rete beu 173 A ALARM CODES LIST 416 433 ALARMS AND WARNINGS tentes 414 F ALTERNATIVE COMMAND AND REFERENCE SOURCES 28 295 ANAL AND FRE EN Y TP T eM acl 135 ree reer reer eee eee eee eee 7 QUENCY OUTPUTS FEEDBACK FROM ENCODER es 35 330 APPLICATION oosina 76 FIELDBUS ss AUTORESET ect 356 FIRE AUTOTUNE 243 2 INPUT eaa 238 FLUXING ACTIVATION ILIARY DIGITAL OUTPUTS
224. PT100 The acquired signal is transformed into degrees centigrade See Measure M071 P325 Channel 3 Measure Offset 30000 30000 300 00 300 00 ADVANCED 925 Value of the measure offset for channel 3 an offset can be applied to the measure to correct possible errors 0 no input 1 val PT100 0 no input ADVANCED 926 This parameter selects the type of analog signal available in terminals 33 34 in ES847 expansion board 0 no signal is used The P parameter relating to the analog input disappears 1 val PT100 The acquired signal is transformed into degrees centigrade See Measure 072 P327 Channel 4 Measure Offset 30000 30000 300 00 300 00 ADVANCED 927 Value of the measure offset for channel 4 an offset can be applied to the measure to correct possible errors 227 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 27 FIELDBUS PARAMETERS MENU 27 1 Overview This menu allows selecting the Third measure and the Fourth measure from the Fieldbus The list of the selectable measures is the same as the list in the MEASURES MENU The First measure and the Second measure are fixed Output Current and Motor Speed see Exchanged P 27 2 List of Parameters P330 to P331 Table 52 List of parameters P330 to P331 P330 Third measure from the Fieldbus ENGINEERING 930 P331 Fourth measure from the 23 PID Out 931 Fieldbus P330 Third Measure from th
225. RTcommand see figure below Speed Ipc f C220 Spd DCB Speed Level DCB tl gt t Command ON OFF Start Command ON OFF P000354 b Figure 54 Manual DCB Example 1 Motor Speed DC Braking Manual DCB Command and START Command if t1 gt 1 tl lt t time t1 for braking command is shorter than t Two different cases may occur depending on the control algorithm and the setup of the motor speed searching function 363 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 7 IFD or VIC Control when the Speed Searching function is disabled C245 Prematurely disable the manual braking command to stop DC braking If the motor is still rotating it will start idling To restart the motor following the preset acceleration ramp simply disable and enable the SIARTcommand see Figure 55 Speed f C220 Free wheel Spdl DCE Speed Level DCB Command ON OFF Start Command ON OFF P000355 b Figure 55 Manual DCB Example 2 Motor Speed DC Braking Manual DCB Command and START Command if t1 lt t and the control algorithm is either IFD Voltage Frequency or VIC VectorTorque when the Speed Searching Function is disabled 364 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive IFD Control when the ed Searching function is enabled C245 YES Prematurely disable the manual braking command to activate the Speed Searching fu
226. RY SETTING energizes when the ENABLE input is present MPL2 energizes when a fan fault trips MPL3 energizes when the Fire Mode is activated MPL4 is factory set as disabled 28 1 2 STRUCTURE OF THE VIRTUAL DIGITAL OUTPUTS A virtual digital output is composed of two logic blocks allowing data processing before actuating the actual digital output Block 2 depends on the settings in parameters P357a P366a P375a P384a yes INPUTA Output logic Bock INFUTB samet Output P351 P357 Logic block setbyP3s7 gt that tests and signal F000658 b Figure 38 Block diagram ofthe virtual digital outputs MPL Operating modes set in MPL1 2 3 4 P350 P359 P368 P377 The user can select one of the following operating modes 230 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive Table 54 Digital Output Modes DISABLING The selected digital output is disabled DIGITAL The digital output depends on a selected digital signal and on the logic output function True False DOUBLE DIGITAL The digital output depends 2 selected digital signals on the logic function calculating the output value and on the logic output function True False ANALOG The digital output depends on a selected analog variable which is tested through Test A and Test B thus obtaining 2 digital signals starting from their value the selected logic function calculates the
227. Ramp in Fire Mode see the RAMPS MENU e P099 Speed Fire Mode see the MULTISPEED MENU e C186 MDI Enabling Fire Mode see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU The Fire Mode is enabled when closing the MDI set through C186 The drive will use the speed reference set in P099 and the ramp times set in P032 P033 All alarms will be ignored except for the following A041 IGBT FAULT Side A IGBT Hardware Side A general alarm A044 OVERLOAD SW Software Overcurrent A048 OVER VOLTAGE DC bus voltage exceeding Vdc_max A050 IGBT FAULT A Hardware Fault from IGBT Drive side A A051 OVERLOAD HW A Hardware Overcurrent side A A053 PWMA Not ON Hardware Failure Side A IGBT cannot be fired Control Board Failure When the Fire Mode is active innumerable alarm autoresets are automatically enabled is no longer valid The asterisk appears if at least one condition requiring the activation ofa protection feature occurs when the inverteris running in Fire Mode If an asterisk appears next to INVERTER OK on the display the product guarantee CAUTION 30 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE 5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES 5 1 Overview This section illustrates some programming examples for particular functions of the IDrive drive Flowcharts are used for easier reference For any detail concerning individual parameters see the relevant sections in this manual 5 2 Programming a Reference Speed Torque Reference PID P
228. S FOR REFERENCES MENU 0 10V Type of reference for REF input 10V Value of the min reference for REF input 10 Value of the max reference for REF input 0 10V Type of reference for AIN1 input 5 5V Value of min reference for AIN1 input gt 5 V Value max reference for AINT input The speed reference is the min speed set in 028 motor 1 when both REF input and AINT input values are lower than or equal to the minimum values set in 51 and P056 respectively max motor speed also depends on the preset max frequency see Table The maximum allowable value as an absolute value for 028 and C029 min and AN 63 It can be max 4 times the rated speed of the connected motor The value set as the min speed is used as the saturation of the global reference NOTE the speed reference will never be lower than the value set as min speed The min speed is not respected only when the REV command or the CW CCW NOTE command are sent after setting a value for max speed exceeding the min value 029 gt 028 for motor 1 and with the max reference to the drive The motor rom will be C029 lt C 028 287 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C029 072 115 Max Motor Speed O 32000 note in Range parameter C028 0 32000 rpm note in parameter C028 1500 Level I e 1029 1072 1115 This parameter defines the maximum speed o
229. SETCommand 3 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service 465 482 LONNE 56 4 List of the DRIVECOM Alarm Codes PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS If a expansion board is used see PROFiDrive BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU the IDrive fault codes are also coded according to the DRIVECOM communication profile The specific code is readable address 947 of the specific PROFiDrive PARAMETERS see PROFldrive COMMUNICATIONS BOARD USER MANUAL The DRIVECOM User Group e V is an association of international drive manufacturers universities and institutes It has set itself a goal to develop a simple integration of drives in open automation systems The DRIVECOM User Group therefore decided to standardise the communication interface for accessing drives Also visit www drivecom org Table 123 List of the DRIVECOM alarm codes Code Meaning IDrive Fault 6 0000 No malfunction A000 1000 General malfunction NoCurrent Fault A060 AutoTune Fault A065 2000 Current 2300 Current on device output side 2310 Continuous overcurrent 2311 Continuous overcurrent No 1 SW OverCurrent A044 2312 Continuous overcurrent No 2 Fault A051 2320 Short circuit earth leakage PWMA Fault A041 PWMAO Fault A050 PWMA Not ON A053 3000 Voltage 3100 Mains voltage 3130 Phase fa
230. T drives 4000 for class 4T drives 400 0V for class 4T drives 5750 for class 5T drives 575 0V for class 5T drives 6900 for class 6T drives 690 0V for class 6T drives 1019 1062 1105 This parameter defines the rated motor voltage nameplate rating 283 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C020 C063 C 106 Motor No Load Power This parameter defines the power absorbed by the motor at rated voltage and rated rom when no load is connected to the motor 1 100 1021 1064 1107 This parameter defines the current absorbed by the motor at rated voltage and rated rom when no load is connected to the motor It is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current C018 C061 C104 For a proper tuning of the current loops required for FOC control enter a value other than zero If the stator resistance is tuned 1073 1 Motor Tune 1074 0 All no rotation and the no load current parameter is zero a value for first attempt is assigned to this parameter depending on power and pole pairs of the connected motor 0 32000 0 000 32 0000 See Table 76 and Table 80 ADVANCED 1022 1065 1108 This parameter defines stator resistance Rs If a star connection is used it matches with the value of the resistance of 117 one phase half the resistance measured between two terminals if a delta connection is used it matches with 1 3 of the resistance of one phase Autotune is always recommended
231. TAL LOS Ure CON O2 ADVANCED This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 3 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter 0 19 5 D3 Inverter Alarm This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MDO3 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected P290 MDO3 Selecting Variable B Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 0 119 See Table 41 D3 Inverter Alarm ADVANCED This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO3 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of digital input MDO3 if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables detailed in Table 41 214 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE P291 Testing Variable A 5 gt ABS x gt lt ABS x lt This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P289 using P293 as a comparing value P292 MDO3 Testing Variable B ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt ABS x lt ovn de oo ADVANCED This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P290 using P294 as a comparing value P293 MDO3
232. TART UP the menu is displayed only when the IDrive drive is next started up if you select NEVER the Start Up menu is disabled 38 482 PROGRAMMING cs LO NNE Parameters included in the Start Up menu Visibility Rated mains voltage Type of control algorithm Speed feedback from encoder Type of V f pattern Rated motor power Rated motor rom Rated motor power Rated motor current Rated motor voltage No load current of the motor Min motor speed Max motor speed Voltage preboost Acceleration ramp time Deceleration ramp time Current limit while accelerating Current limit at constant rpm Current limit while decelerating only if FOC is active only if IFD is active only if FOC is active only if IFD is active only if IFD is active only if IFD is active only if IFD is active Torque limit only if VIC FOC are active only if FOC is active only if FOC is active only if FOC is active Autotuning selection only if VIC FOC are active Motor tuning selection only if VTC FOC Encoder operating mode Encoder A pls rev Encoder B pls rev Motor thermal protection Motor thermal time constant only if protection is active After setting the last parameter and moving the cursor forward the following page will appear Press UP ARROW to quit DOWN ARROW to continue Press to quit the Start up menu The default page of the system will be displayed
233. U The programming parameters of the Motor Control 2 Menu can be accessed only if C009 2 or 3 the programming parameters of the Motor Control 3 Menu can be accessed only if C009 3 Function 279 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C010 053 096 e of Control Algorithm This parameter sets the type of control algorithm to be used Type of controls O IFD V f control 1 VIC Sensorless Vector Torque control 2 FOC Field Oriented Control V f control allows controlling the motor by producing voltage depending on frequency It is possible to configure several types of V f patterns see V f Pattern IFD Sensorless vector control processes the machine equations depending on the equivalent parameters of the asynchronous machine such as stator resistance and leakage inductance C022 C023 for motor 1 CO65 C066 for motor 2 C108 C109 for motor respectively and allows separating torque control from flux control with no need to use a transducer The drive can be then controlled with a torque reference instead of a speed reference Field oriented control is closed loop control requiring a speed transducer to detect the position of the motor shaft instant by instant The machine equations depend on the following magnetizing current obtained from no load current C021 C064 for motor 2 and C107 for motor 3 mutual inductance C024 C067 for motor 2 and C110 for motor 3 rotor time constant C025
234. VANCED 169 none C170 SLAVE Input ADVANCED 170 none C171 PID DISABLE Input ADVANCED 1171 none C171a Input for PID control selection ENGINEERING 1188 none C172 KEYPAD LOCK Input ADVANCED 1172 none C173 MOTOR 2 SEL Input ENGINEERING 1173 none C174 MOTOR 3 SEL Input ENGINEERING 1174 none C175 SPEED VAR Input ENGINEERING 1175 none C176 SPEED VAR 1 Input ENGINEERING 1176 none C177 SPEED VAR 2 Input ENGINEERING 1177 none C178 PID RESET UP DOWN input ADVANCED 1178 none C179 SOURCE SELECTION Input ADVANCED 1179 MDI6 C180 LOC REM Input ADVANCED 1180 MDI7 C180a Type of LOC REM contact ADVANCED 1303 pushbuttont storage C181 Safety Start enable ADVANCED 1181 inactive C182 Multiprogramming enable ENGINEERING 1182 inactive C183 Max fluxing time before drive Disable ADVANCED 1183 disabled C184 Fluxing at activation only with START closed ADVANCED 1184 no C185 Stop Mode ADVANCED 1185 deceleration ramp C 186 Fire Mode enabling Input ENGINEERING 1186 none C187 Torque Limit Source Ref Disabling Input ADVANCED 1187 none 329 482 PROGRAMMING iDrive INSTRUCTIONS C188a PID Multireference 1 Input 1365 none C188b Multireference 2 Input 1366 none C188c PID Multireference 3 Input 1367 none NOTE If parameter is set to zero its function is disabled otherwise the parameter value stands for the MDIx input assigned to the function NOTE Auxiliary digital inputs XMDI values from 17 to 24 in control functio
235. Week to be changed Default Active This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger 5851 is installed and activated 021 ENABLE Address 1237 PM 1053 Level ADVANCED Iz 41917 This parameter sets the value of the day of the week to be changed 31 days ADVANCED This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated R021 ENABLE 1238 PM 1054 371741977 This parameter sets the value of the day of the month to be changed 410 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C312 Month to be changed C313 Yearto be changed Default Level Active Address Function LONNE 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December 1240 oway ADVANCED This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated R021 ENABLE 1239 PM 1055 This parameter sets the value of the month to be changed 2000 2099 years 0 Yer 2000 ADVANCED This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger 5851 is installed and activated 021 ENABLE 1240 PM 1056 C314 Time hours to be changed caa __ Default Level Active Address This parameter sets the value of the year to be changed 0 23 hours ADVANCED This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed
236. able see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU P351 MPL1 Selecting Variable A See Table 41 D21 MDI Enable ADVANCED 951 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MPL digital output if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P352 MPL1 Selecting Variable B See Table 41 00 Disable ADVANCED 952 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of 1 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MPLI digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 242 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE P353 11 Testing Variable A ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt 2 ee ADVANCED 953 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P351 using P355 as comparing value P354 MPL1 Testing Variable ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt ABS x lt ON IO ADVANCED 954 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P352 using P356 as a comparing value P355 MPL1 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable
237. aids L Q e 57 In the table below you can write down settings that are different from the default values User Level POO1 AcsLev 0 Basic P003 ModCmode 1 StandBy Fluxing Product P263 Lang 1 ENGLISH P26x Display P264 ModNav 0 Menu P264a ModNavMenu 1 Yes P264b ModMenu 0 Standard P265 FirstPage 3 Start Up P266 kpd type Ref Activated P267 umis 0 Disable P267a Custom PID units of measure P268y Scaling of M004 Ms n 1 Bh Root 100 0076 page page P268z Scaling of pono MOO0 Measure n 2 a Root 100 00 Root page page a te 1 on M006 P268c Measure n 2 on M026 eypad page Keypad page 2 n 3 on 004 P268e Measure 4 MOOO eypad page Keypad page P269 DisabKey 1 0 No P269a DisabKey2 0 No Ramps POO9 TUp 1 PO10 Tdn1 12 2 013 2 PO14 Un Meas1 2 15 3 016 18 4 2 P019 Tdn4 P020 Un Meas3 4 P021a Rnd Sell PO21b Rnd Sel2 id PO21c Rnd Sel3 PO21d Rnd Sel4 P022 RndStartAcc 50 P023 RndStopAcc 50 PO24 RnaStartDec 50 PO25 RndStopDec 50 26 5 00 5 27 5 00 P028 T Un Mea 1 Ols P029 J 5
238. al board serial link and fieldbus where the ENABLE command is given by the AND logic of all the ENABLE commands For the other inputs the OR command between the different command sources is used See also the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the TIMERS MENU Table 1 Coding of Measures M031 M032 0 START 5 MDI6 ECHA FINA 1 6 MDI7 ECHB 2 MDI3 RESET 7 MDI8 FINB 3 MDI4 8 ENABLE 5 4 MDI5 9 ENABLE M033 Local Control Terminal Board Bit controlled measure See Table 2 Always active State of the digital inputs in the drive terminal board M034 Control Terminals from Serial Link 61 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE State of the digital inputs in the terminal board controlled via serial link 62 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive M035 Control Teminal Board from Fieldbus Range Bit controlled measure See Table 2 Active Always active Address ia De State of the digital inputs in the terminal board controlled from fieldbus Table 2 Coding of Measures M033 M034 035 0 START 4 1 MDI2 ENABLE 5 MDI6 ECHA FINA 2 6 MDI7 ECHB 3 MDI4 7 MDI8 FINB M036 Auxiliary Digital Inputs in the Terminal Board Range See Table 3 Active Always active Address State of the 8 auxiliary digital inputs ES847 ES870 terminal board MO036a Aux
239. al board on the control board which is logically separated into terminal board A and terminal board B keypad The virtual remote terminal board through serial link with MODBUS communications protocol The virtual remote terminal board through Fieldbus option board Multiple terminal boards may also be enabled up to 3 terminal boards with parameters C140 C141 C142 in This case the drive will apply logic functions OR or AND the different terminals to obtain the activated terminal board see Command Sources The following references and torque limit signals may be sent Three analog inputs acquired to the hardware terminal board REF AIN1 AIN2 plus two analog inputs XAIN4 XAIN5 acquired to the hardware terminal board located 5847 option board FIN frequency input Encoder input Keypad Serial link with MODBUS communications protocol Fieldbus option board Up Down from MDI Up and Down digital inputs Multiple reference sources may be enabled at the same time up to 4 reference sources with parameters C143 C144 C145 C146 in this case the drive will consider the sum of all active reference as the reference Finally a dynamic selection between two command sources and two reference sources is allowed when using the digital input configured as Source Selection see C179 311 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 34 1 1 COMMAND SOURCES The drive commands may be
240. al time constant The standard above defines a 7 2 ratio between LRC and FLC The value to be entered in C267 is then defined from the formula below C267 Class x 36 If the ratio between LRC and FLC is not 7 2 please refer to the graph in Figure 61 42 2 2 MAXIMUM LOCKED ROTOR TIME BASIC If the IEC class is not known then the IEC class can be approximated by the procedure described below The following values must be known e Full Load Current FLC of the motor e Locked Rotor Current LRC e Maximum Locked Rotor Time LRT or Direct On Line DOL Start Time The FLC of the motor can be obtained directly from the nameplate on the motor The LRC and LRT must be obtained from the manufacturer or the motor datasheets The LRC also referred to as starting current or motor start up current is the current that a motor draws at start up when full voltage is applied to the terminals LRT is the time a motor can safely maintain LRC from a cold start This information might also be available as a thermal withstand curve or a thermal damage curve If this is the case then the LRC and LRT must be deduced from the curves 384 482 PROGRAMMING ws LONNE Dive The following formula can be applied LRC x LRT IEC Class FLC x 6 Once the approximated IEC class has been calculated use the motor thermal time constant C267 that corresponds to the closest IEC class from Table 105 above Example
241. als Table 85 Unprogrammable functions ENABLE MDI2 RESET MDI3 can be disabled if C154 Yes Some terminals in the local hardware terminal board can also be used for different functions Table 86 Terminals used for other inputs MDI6 ECHA channel of encoderA in the terminal board MDI7 ECHB channel B of encoderA in the terminal board MDI8 FIN frequency input 325 482 PROGRAMMING L O NNE 35 1 1 START The SIARTfunction may be assigned to a digital input MDI1 8 to an auxiliary digital input XMDI1 8 to an auxiliary digital output MPLT 4 or to a timed flag TFL1 4 The input programming is set via parameter C149 To enable the Start input set the control modes via terminal board factory setting The SIARTcommand can also be sent from the display keypad The programmed input Enable Disable can be delayed via special timers The SIART input function is assigned to terminal by default but it can be assigned to other terminals as well The same terminal programmed as SIARTmay be allocated to different functions as well The motor stop mode C185 be programmed When removing the SIARTcommand the following motor stop modes can activate The motor stops following a deceleration ramp or starts idling the motor is fluxed VTC FOC only when the SIARTcommand is shut down and the ENABLE is not closed C184 When SIART is active and when ENABLE is act
242. ams relating to the digital outputs 235 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 28 2 Operating Diagram of the Virtual Digital Outputs Virtual digital outputs are software outputs that can be used as digital inputs from the following items e digital inputs e digital outputs e Quxiliary digital outputs e virtual digital outputs themselves They can be used for special functionality of the system thus avoiding loop wiring on the same control board Example It can be necessary to control the status of the hardware ENABLE contact of the system to cause an external alarm to trip when is selected in parameter C164 DIGITAL INPUTS MENU P350 1 Digital Enable P351 D21 Enable out P358 TRUE F000660 b Figure 39 Example of MPL functionality For more details about possible configurations of the virtual digital outputs see Programmable Operating Modes Diagrams 236 482 INSTRUCTIONS LONNE Bis This section covers some examples for the supervision of pumping systems with the PID control algorithm The settings of the parameters being used are given in the tables below the parameters highlighted in grey have no effect Examples Example 1 Dry Run Detection For most pumps especially submersible bore hole pumps it must be assured that the pump is stopped in case of dry run This is assured by the Dry Run Detection feature How Does It Work Dry run detection is
243. analog input 120 482 e PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 6 Filtering Time over AIN2 Input 0 65000 0 65000ms Default 5 664 This parameter selects the value of the filter time constant of the first command applied to AIN2 input signal when the signal saturation and conversion is over 65 Minimum Reference and START Disabling Threshold 0 32000 2000 rpm peo ADVANCED PST 665 If this parameter is other than zero the current speed reference computed when processing of all active source references is over it is saturated as an absolute value of this parameter s value Saturation implies an absolute value i e this parameter determines a prohibit range of the reference approx zero Example P065 100 and curent speed reference is 500 rpm if reference drops below 100 rpm for example down to 450rpm the value of the active reference is saturated to 100 rpm until reference exceeds 100 rpm again oris lowerthan 100 rpm in that case the preset value will be assigned to the reference If also parameter 066 is other than zero the drive disabling function is enabled if the absolute value of the current speed reference is kept in the prohibit range for a time longer than the time set in P066 reference is set to zero and the motor speed decreases following the active ramp up to zero rpm when the motor speed is equal to zero the drive will
244. and activated R021 ENABLE 1241 PM 1057 Function C315 Minutes to be changed Function This parameter sets the time hour to be changed ADVANCED This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated R021 ENABLE 1242 PM 1058 This parameter sets the time minutes to be changed 411 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C316 Clock Calendar Editing Command ADVANCED This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated 021 ENABLE 1244 PM 1060 If this parameter is set to 1 all the values set in parameters C310 to C315 are written and stored to the clock calendar of the board and the measures described above are instantly changed Also unchanged parameters are written CAUTION to the clock calendar Make sure that unchanged parameters are correct 412 482 PROGRAMMING se L NNE 47 TIMED FLAGS MENU 47 1 Overview The Timed Flag Menu includes the parameters setting the four timed flags for the inverter TFL1 4 The following data items are set for each timed flag activation time Time ON deactivation time Time OFF days of the week when activation shall occur The timed flags may be used as they were digital inputs both when managing digital outputs MDO and when managing virtual digital outputs MPL It is also possible to assign the same control funct
245. ased on the DC bus voltage trend this function allows detecting mains loss in advance If the value for this coefficient is too high erroneous mains loss conditions can be detected due to a sudden drop in DC bus voltage 372 482 e PROGRAMMING c L NNE C230 Voltage Level of DC Bus in Power Down 250 450 for Class 2T 250 450 V for Class 2T 400 800 for Class 400 800 V for Class 4T 500 960 for Class 5T 500 960 V for Class 5T 600 1150 for Class 6T 600 1150 V for Class 6T 339 for Class 2T 339 V for Class 2T 679 for Class 4T 380 480V 679 for Class AT 380 480V 707 for Class 481 500V 707 V for Class 4T 481 500V 813 for Class 5T 813 V for Class 5T 976 for Class 6T 976 for Class 6T Level ENGINEERING Address Determines the reference value for DC bus voltage in case of automatic deceleration in Power Down C225 Yes V C231 PI Proportional Constant for Automatic Deceleration 0 32000 0 000 32 000 Proportional coefficient used regulator controlling automatic deceleration in case of Power Down C225 Yes V C232 Integral Time for Automatic Deceleration 0 001 31 999 sec iE 52000 32000 Disabled Default 500 Level ENGINEERING Address Integral time used in PI regulator controlling automatic deceleration in aul o of Power Down C225 Yes V 373 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C234 Ramp Action at the End of Po
246. ation DIP switches in the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual 8 MDI Multifunction Digital Inputs of them MDI7 MDI8 are fast acquisition inputs allowing acquiring frequency signal or encoder signals MDI6 can be used to acquire a frequency signal called FINA if used in conjunction with MDI7 it also allows acquiring a push pull encoder signal called Encoder A MDI8 can be used to acquire a frequency input called FINB this avoids acquiring encoder B via ES836 or ES913 option board 4 MDO Multifunction Digital Outputs MDO1 is Push pull output MDO2 is an Open Collector output and MDO9 4 are relay outputs Electrical ratings of the control board inputs outputs are given in the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual When programming Analog Inputs see the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU Analog Outputs see the ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU Digital Inputs see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Digital Inputs used as Frequenc y Enc oder Inputs see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Multifunction Digital Outputs see the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU CAUTION configured as 4 20 SW1 dip switches which are located on the control board must be set as follows The drive is factory set with the REF input configured as 0 10 AINT AIN2 inputs 26 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE 3 REFERENCES AND FEEDBACKS The drive references are the following e Main speed torque reference e Speed torque limit reference
247. automatically deactivate The drive will automatically reactivate if the reference exceeds the value set in parameter 65 as an absolute value Function Parameter 65 is active Master mode only i e when the reference is a speed reference NOTE Parameter 065 is active only when the Speed searching and Power Down functions are disabled C245 0 and C225 0 PO66 START Disable delay at PO65 Threshold 1758 o 250 0 250sec 5441390 0 Disabled EE ADVANCED Address If this parameter is other than zero and if also parameter 065 is other than zero the drive disabling function is enabled if the absolute value of the current speed reference is kept in the prohibit range for a time longer than the time set PO66 reference is set to zero and the motor speed decreases following the active ramp up to zero rpm when the motor speed is equal to zero the drive will automatically deactivate See also the description of parameter 065 121 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P067 Keypad and Terminal Board DOWN Ram 0 6501 O sec 6500s Quadratic 6501 Quadratic ADVANCED Reference may be increased or decreased with input digital signals UP and DOWN or using the keys from the keypad local mode Reference increment or decrement is obtained by adding to the current reference a quantity which will increased or decreased with a time ramp Param
248. bles when no condition is true or when only one of the two conditions is true The NAND function between two variables corresponds to the OR of the same false variables i e A OR B NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 and lt 9 Example MDO1 2 lt P270 lt 9 197 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 Function applied to the result of C for MDO1 P277b P286b P295b P304b Once the Boolean signal resulting from f A B is obtained an additional logic function can be applied to obtain the output TRUE FALSE Boolean signal If parameter P277a is disabled the output of f A B goes directly to the corresponding digital output if parameter P277a is enabled the output of the output of f A B becomes one of the two inputs of the second programmed block The user can choose one of the six Boolean tests above for the first variable f A B and for the second variable C See Example 6 MDO1 2 3 4 Logic applied to 1 2 3 4 P278 P287 P296 P305 The logic of the Boolean signal can be reversed at the end of the processing chain The user can choose whether the logic level of the digital output is POSITIVE or NEGATIVE 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied NEGATIVE logic 1 TRUE no negation is applied POSITIVE logic NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected di
249. both references the minimum speed is 50 e Gat for both references the maximum speed is 1500rpm then the following shall be programmed 52 Percentage of Ref Max producing Reference 50 076 P057a Percentage of Ref Max producing Max Reference 50 076 319 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 In that way each reference will range from 25 to 750rpm and their sum will range from 50 and 1500rpm as required Example 2 Speed references altematively selected The two REF analog inputs are to be used as alternative speed references The following parameters shall be programmed accordingly P050 Type of Reference for REF Input 3 0 10V P051 Value of REF Input producing Min Reference 0 0V PO5la Percentage of Ref Min producing Min Reference 100 0 P052 Value of REF Input producing Max Reference 10 0V 052 Percentage of Ref Max producing Max Reference 100 0 55 of Signal over input 3 0 10V 56 Value AINI Input producing Min Reference 0 0V 5 Percentage of Ref Min producing Min Reference 100 0 57 Value of AINI input producing Reference 10 0V 57 Percentage of Ref_Max producing Max Reference 100 0 C143 s Selection of Reference 1 1 REF C144 Selection of Reference 2 2 C179 for Source Selection 6 MDI6 As MDI6 input is selected as reference source
250. bus 7 Keypad 8 Encoder 9 lout 10 Vout 11 Vdc 12 Pout 13 Tout 14 XAIN4 15 XAIN5 C288 3 AIN2 PTC 289 0 Disable C290 0 Disable 0 13 0 15 when ES847 is fitted ENGINEERING 1288 1289 1290 395 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C288 selects the first PID feedback source Up to three feedback sources can be configured among the available reference sources If multiple sources are selected their sum is considered They are saturated based on parameters P247 and P248 PID feedback maximum and minimum value respectively See also parameter C285 Feedback sources 14 and 15 can be selected only after setting XAIN in parameter R023 396 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive C291 PID Operating Mode 0 Disable 1 Normal 2 Reverse 0 Disable ENGINEERING 2 1291 This parameter defines how to compute the PID output Three computing modes are available 0 Disable 1 Normal 2 Reverse If 0 Disable is selected the PID regulator is inactive and its output is always set to zero In Normal mode the real PID output is considered If 2 Reverse is selected the output actuated by the PID regulator results from the subtraction of the max output value set in P236 from the output obtained by the PID regulator This operating mode can be used for special applications see the Keeping Fluid Level Constant Example at the end of this chapter Standard SUM Standard DIF
251. changed parameters P158 and P159 are adjusted based on the time constant value that has been set up o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 30 1 2 CHECKING THE ENCODER OPERATION Set 1073 as Encoder Tune to check the correct operation of the encoder selected as a speed feedback see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU and to automatically set the correct direction of rotation Before checking the correct operation of the encoder used as a speed feedback NOTE enter the motor ratings and the encoder ratings Please refer to the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU Once 1073 is set as Encoder Tune and the ENABLE and SIARTcommands are enabled the connected motor attains a speed of rotation of approx 150 rpm its speed of rotation is detected by the encoder then the drive is disabled The following messages can be displayed on the display keypad A059 Encoder Fault W31 EncoderOK Then the following message is always displayed W32 OPEN ENABLE If alarm A059 Encoder Fault trips in the encoder input the value measured by the drive does not match with the real speed of rotation of the motor Check that the encoder is properly set up see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU and wired if the Encoder B input is used check the Configuration of the dip switches located on ES836 or ES913 option board see the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual If W31 EncoderOK appears the speed feedback from encoder is correct
252. ching if enabled with C245 occurs when the drive restarts RUN irrespective of the time elapsed from disabling The figures below show output frequency and motor rom during speed searching After time t for rotor demagnetization speed searching occurs as follows see 3 steps below Speed at the beginning of the speed searching function depends on the settings in C249 375 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 Fout 7247 oO np Motor Speed Enable ON OFF P000358 b Figure 58 Speed Searching Example 1 Output Frequency and motor RPM for the Speed Searching Function C245 YES activated by the ENABLE command to lt tssais C246 or C246 0 Three stages Time ti The drive output frequency corresponds to the last value which was active before disabling the drive output current matches with the value set in C248 Timet Output frequency is decremented following the ramp set in C247 for rotation speed searching Time The connected motor accelerates following the acceleration ramp 376 482 INSTRUCTIONS wo LONNE Fout mm 10 12 13 Inverter disabled Reset ON OFF Enable ON OFF P000359 b Figure 59 Speed Searching Example 2 Frequency Motor Rom Drive Lock RESET and ENABLE during Speed Searching C245 YES due to an Alarm Trip torr lt tssais C246 or C246 0 A If the Safety at Start fun
253. coder tune a speed error measure occurred with respect to the estimated speed although the sign of the measured speed is consistent with the estimated speed e Incorrect parameterization of the encoder concerning the type and number of pulses rev e Voltage removed from one of the two encoders e Incorrect mounting of the encoders e Encoder failure l Check that the encoder parameters are correct the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 2 Check that both encoders are properly connected 3 Check mounting of the encoders 4 Using an oscilloscope check that the encoder signals are correct 455 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS The error detected in FOC control by the current loop exceeds the max allowable value A060 No Curent Fault FOC The FOC control detected a current regulation error e One motor cable is disconnected e Failure in the current measure circuit e Wrong setting of current regulator parameters for FOC control 1 Check motor connections terminals 2 Check parameterization of current regulators for FOC control see the FOC REGULATORS MENU Perform a new current regulator autotune see AUTOTUNE MENU 3 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service A061 A062 Serial Link Watchdog Description AO61 Serial Link Watchdog 0 tripped 062 Serial Link Watchdog 1 tripped The serial link watchdog has tripped Com
254. ction PRESET SPEED EXCLUSIVE PRESET SPEED SUM SPEED If POSO PRESET SPEED the speed reference is the value set in the preset speed which is active at that moment If digital inputs set as multispeed are all open inactive the speed reference is the reference coming from the sources selected in the Control Method Menu C143 to C146 If POSO EXCLUSIVE PRESET SPEED the speed reference is the value set in the multispeed which is active at that moment If digital inputs set as multispeed are all open inactive no other reference source is considered the speed reference is zero If POBO SUM SPEED the speed reference value assigned to the preset speed which is active at that moment is summed up to the total amount of the speed references The reference obtained is always saturated by the parameters relating to the min speed and the max speed ofthe selected motor 14 2 List of Parameters P080 to P100 Table 23 List of parameters P080 to P100 POS0 Multispeed function BASIC O Preset Speed 680 81 Output speed Mspdl BASIC 0 00 rpm 681 P083 Output speed Mspd2 BASIC 0 00 rpm 683 P085 Output speed Mspd3 BASIC 0 00 rpm 685 P087 Output speed Mspd4 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 687 88 Output speed Mspd5 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 688 P089 Output speed Mspd ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 689 Output speed Mspd7 ADVANCED 0 00 rpm 690 91 Output speed 5 8 ADVANCED 0 00 rom 691 P092 Output speed
255. ction is disabled C181 Inactive it is not necessary to NOTE open and close the ENABLE contact Speed searching matches with the RESET command 377 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j LO e 40 2 List of Parameters C245 to C249 Table 103 List of parameters C245 to C249 1 YES 1246 lsec Speed Searching enable C246 Speed Searching disable if ENABLE is open C247 Speed Searching time as 5 1247 10 deceleration ramp C248 Current used for Speed Searching 1248 75 249 Speed searching starting level 1249 Last speed C245 Speed Searc hing Enable 051 10 1 Yes 0 ENGINEERING 1245 IFD This parameter enables the speed searching function The Speed Searching function is enabled in the following cases when the ENABLE contact is open and closed before time tssqis C246 ia e when the DC Braking command is disabled before the preset time is over see the DC BRAKING MENU when an alarm is reset with a reference other than 0 before time tssdis C246 Speed Searching Disable if ENABLE is Open 0 3000 0 Always 3000 sec 1 ENGINEERING 1246 IFD Determines the maximum allowable time passing between the drive disable and enable command when the Speed Searching function is activated When the drive is restarted output frequency will depend on the preset acceleration ramp When C246 Always ON speed
256. ctive the values set in C115 and C134 wil be used P072a Percentage of Speed Max Trq Max Producing Max Reference Y axis related to P072 1000 Default FS MM ADVANCED Address 714 This parameter represents the max soeed percentage or the max torque 2708 percentage for a torque reference to be used for the maximum reference set 124 482 with 72 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE P073 Value of ECH Producing Min Reference X axis 32000 32000 32000 rpm 1500 1500 rpm 673 This parameter selects the value of the Encoder input for minimum reference or better the reference set CO28xP073a Master mode or in CO47xP073a Slave mode If motor 2 is active the values set in C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used P073a Percentage of Speed Min Trg Min Producing Min Reference Y axis related to P073 1000 Edo 1 1 5 3 ADVANCED Address This parameter represents the max speed percentage or the min torque percentage for a torque reference to be used for the maximum reference set with 073 74 Value of ECH Producing Max Reference X axis 32000 32000 32000 rom 1500 1500 ADVANCED 1 674 This parameter selects the value of the Encoder input for maximum reference or better the reference set
257. ctor R008 Drive MODBUS Address for Serial Link 1 Rj 45 Range 1 247 Default Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter determines the address assigned to the drive connected to function the network through RS485 of serial link 1 RJ45 connector The display keypad connected through RJ45 connector dialogues correctly with the drive using the default values preset the parameter set for serial link 1 RJ45 09 Response Delay for Serial Link 1 Rj 45 1000 msec ENGINEERING This parameter determines the drive response delay after a master query sent through serial link 1 RJ45 connector 422 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE R010 Baud Rate for Serial Link 1 Rj 45 1 1200 bps 2 2400 bps 3 4800 bps 4 9600 bps 5 19200 bps 6 38400 bps 7 57600 bps 638400bps Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter determines the baud rate expressed in bits per second for Function serial link 1 RJ45 connector RO11 Time Added to 4 Time for Serial Link 1 Rj 45 Range 1 10000 msec Default Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter determines the time limit when no character is received from Function serial link 1 RJ45 connector and the message sent from the master to the drive is considered as complete R012 Watchdog Time for Serial Link 1 Rj 45 0 60000 0 gt 6000 0 Default Level ENGINEERING Address If this parameter
258. d Hold down the ESC key for a few seconds to resume navigation This prevents inexpert users from navigating through the parameters stored to the keypad If the Keypad page is preset as the startup page P265 1 Measures P264b 1 OPERATOR navigation is always locked Root 1 Measures 2 Keypad 3 Start Up P265 sets the page to be displayed when the drive is turned on P265 0 the Root page is the startup page P265 1 the Keypad Page displaying 4 measures only is the startup page P265 2 The Keypad page displaying a reference in line 4 is the startup page P265 3 the START UP MENU is the startup page Function 88 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P266 e of Keypad Page in Local Mode 0 Measures Only 0 2 1 Ref Activated 2 Ref Activated Speed PUES I Level ADVANCED Address 511 P266 sets the type of keypad page to be displayed in Local mode If P266 0 Measures Only in Local mode the reference cannot be changed If P266 1 Ref Activated in Local mode the Keypad page containing the activated reference is displayed for example if a torque control is active the Keypad page displayed in Local mode shows the torque reference in line 4 Use the A and V keys to change the torque reference If a speed control is active and the drive reference is the PID output C294 PID Action Reference when in Local mode you should disabl
259. d 240Vac 10 class 2T 500Vac 10 class 4T 600 Vac 10 class 5T 690 10 class 6T e Very inertial loads and a too short deceleration ramp see the RAMPS MENU e Alarm A048 can trip even when the motor is pulled by the load eccentric load e f the drive is powered directly by the bus bar the bus feeder is responsible for the alarm trip e Failure in DC bus voltage measure circuit 1 Check voltage in terminals 5 T Check mains voltage value M030 and DC bus voltage value 029 Also check the values of M030 and M029 sampled in the FAULTLISTwhen the alarm tripped 2 case of very inertial loads if the alarm tripped when decelerating to set a longer deceleration ramp If short stop times are needed or if the motor is pulled by the load activate the resistive braking unit 3 the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service Hardware fault from IGBT converter side A or brake overcurrent The IGBT drivers of power converter A have detected IGBT failure or overcurrent conditions in the brake circuit models 514 522 532 5T 6T only e Strong electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference Overcurrent Overtemperature IGBTs IGBT fault Unsuitable braking resistor models 514 522 532 5T 6T only Reset the alarm send RESETCommand If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service Hardware overcurrent side A Hardware o
260. d for changing C parameters in the PASSWORD AND USER LEVEL MENU Display on the display keypad and the Drive representation RemoteDrive integer may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Factory setting of the parameter as displayed plus unit of measure User level BASIC ADVANCED ENGINEERING ModBus address which the parameter can be read from written to integer This optional field is displayed when a parameter is not active for all types of motor controls IFD FOC Factory setting of the parameter as represented for the drive Parameter description Unlike parameters parameters become active only after the drive has NOTE been switched off and switched on again or after resetting its control board by pressing the RESETbutton for more than 5 seconds 13 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Inputs These are not parameters but inputs the values allocated to these inputs are not stored to non volatile memory value is always when the drive is powered a we we we 0 4 4 Display on the display keypad and the Drive representation RemoteDrive integer may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure User level BASIC ADVANCED ENGINEERING ModBus address which the input be read from written to integer This optional field is displayed when a parameter is not active for all types of motor controls IFD VIC
261. d motor max value as an absolute value between min and max speed parameters in case of torque control the percentage of the jog reference relates to the torque value of the selected motor max value as an absolute value between min and max torque limit 123 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 71 Value of Producing Min Reference X axis 1000 10000 10 kHz 100 kHz ADVANCED This parameter selects the value of the frequency input signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in 028 71 Master mode or in 47 71 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used 71 Percentage of Speed _Min Trq Min Producing Min Reference Y axis related to 71 1000 Default 73 ADVANCED Address This parameter represents the min speed percentage or the min torque 11 91 percentage for a torque reference to be used for the minimum reference set with 71 72 Value of Producing Max Reference X axis 1000 10000 10 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz This parameter selects the value of the frequency input signal for maximum reference or better the reference set in 029 072 Master mode or in 048 72 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and 48 if motor 3 is a
262. dbk YES Ref YES 356 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE 37 BRAKING RESISTANCE MENU 37 1 Overview The Braking Resistance Menu enables the clamp transistor command and sets its max duty cycle in the drive braking resistance If no braking resistance is installed promptness of the DC bus voltage control can be adjusted in order to avoid OVERVOLTAGE alarm causing abrupt deceleration To enable the clamp transistor command for the braking resistance set C210 With resistor In this operating mode when DC bus voltage exceeds a preset threshold value depending on the drive voltage class the clamp transistor closes in the braking resistor so energy in excess is dissipated to the resistor and DC bus voltage does not exceed voltage ratings The max duty cycle of the braking resistor is parameterized with C212 and C211 maximum duty cycle 100 Ton Toff and maximum time of continuous supply Ton respectively If the braking resistor activation is Ton 212 when this interval is over the relevant command will be disabled for a time equal to Toff 100 C212 C211 C212 sec Example A lifting application featuring a IDrive 0086 at 400V requires a braking resistor with a 50 duty cycle The braking period is 30s According to the tables in the Braking Resistors section Installation Instructions manual the applicable braking resistor is 100 24 kW The max continuous duty for said resistor is 62s
263. disabled for a time of inactivity set in C212 Function 358 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE 212 Cycle Braking Ton Toff Ton 0 100 ENGINEERING C212 Ton Ton Toff 100 This parameter determines the operating duty cycle allowed for the braking resistance It is expressed as a percentage and defines the time of inactivity of the braking resistance when it is continuously operating for the max time set C211 359 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 38 DC BRAKING MENU 38 1 Overview When the IFD or VTC control algorithm are used DC current can be injected into the motor to stop it DC current may be automatically injected at stop and or at start DC current injection may also be controlled by the terminal board All relevant parameters are included in the DC BRAKING MENU The intensity of the DC current injected is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the active motor 38 1 1 DC BRAKING AT START AND NON CONDENSING FUNCTION To activate DC braking at start set C216 to YES Braking occurs after sending a SIART command with a speed reference other than zero before the acceleration ramp A SIART command may be one of the following RUN command REV command sent via terminal board SIART command from keypad etc depending on the preset control mode DC braking level and duration are set in the following parameters C220 Expressed as a percentage of the rated current of
264. e NAND function between two variables corresponds to the OR of the same false variables i e A NAND B A OR B NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 and lt 9 Example MPL1 2 lt P350 lt 9 234 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE Function applied to the result of f A B C for MPL1 P357b P366b P375b P384b Once the Boolean signal resulting from f A B is obtained an additional logic function can be applied to obtain the output TRUE FALSE Boolean signal If parameter P357a is disabled the output of f A B goes directly to the corresponding digital output if parameter P357a is enabled the output of the output of f A B becomes one of the two inputs of the second programmed block The user can choose of the six Boolean tests above for the first variable f A B and for the second variable C Logic applied to MPL1 2 3 4 P358 P367 P376 P385 The logic of the Boolean signal can be reversed at the end of the processing chain The user can choose whether the logic level of the digital output is POSITIVE or NEGATIVE 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied NEGATIVE logic 1 TRUE no negation is applied POSITIVE logic NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is other than zero Example P350 0 NOTE Please refer to Programmable Operating Modes Diagr
265. e 32000 32000 320 00 320 00 of the full scale Depending on the value value selected in P177 See Table 29 1500 15 00 10000 1500 ADVANCED Minimum value of the variable selected via 177 corresponding to the min output value of AOI set in P182 157 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P179 Max value of AO1 Selected Variable 32000 32000 Range Depending on the value 320 0096 320 00 of the full scale value 29 selected 77 Default 1500 15 00 of 10000 rpm 1500 rpm Level ADVANCED Address Maximum value of the variable selected via 177 corresponding to the max output value of set in P183 180 1 Analog Output Offset 9999 9999 Depending on the value 9 999 9 999 selected in P176 Default Level ADVANCED Address Offset value applied to analog output P181 Fitter for AO1 Analog Output 0 000 sec 0 65000 0 000 65 000 sec ADVANCED ia ard Te Value of the filter time constant applied to analog output P182 Min AO1 Output Value with Reference to P178 100 100 200 200 10 0 10 0 Depending on the value 20 0 20 0 mA selected in P176 ADVANCED 782 Minimum output value obtained when the minimum value of the variable set in 78 is implemented P183 Max AO2 Output Value with Reference to P179 100 10
266. e W34 ILLEGAL DATA warning appears Remove the ENABLE signal to set these values and activate the ENABLE signal to begin the selected autotune process NOTE If SAVE ENTER is pressed to store the changes made to 1073 and 1074 W17 SAVE IMPOSSIBLE warning appears Use the ESC key instead 264 482 e PROGRAMMING c L NNE 31 CARRIER FREQUENCY MENU 31 1 Overview The Carrier Frequency Menu sets some of the PWM modulation characteristics based on the preset type of control 31 1 1 CONTROL AND VTC CONTROL The IFD and VTC control algorithms allow gaining access to all the parameters included in the Carrier Frequency menu The user can set the minimum value and the maximum value of the switching carrier frequency and the number of pulses per period used to produce the output frequency when switching from min carrier frequency to max carrier frequency synchronous modulation The silent modulation function can also be enabled C004 31 1 2 EXAMPLE IFD AND VTC Setting two levels of carrier frequency and the number of pulses used for synchronous modulation A lower value for carrier frequency ensures a better performance of the motor but implies higher noise levels Suppose that the connected motor has a rated speed equal to 1500rpm at 50Hz and that you need the best performance up to 200rpm and a noiseless carrier frequency at max speed 3000rpm In this case the max speed of the drive will p
267. e determined by the settings of the relevant parameters P390 to P399 allowing proper scaling offset compensation and filtering see the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES FROM OPTIONAL BOARD C143 C144 C145 C146 Sources Reference vector 12 Reference 1 Sources Reference vector C143 Ret Saturation 0 Disabled 1 Ref 2 AINI 3 AIN2PTC Reference 2 Sources Reference vector C144 gt gt Reference 4 FIN 5 Serial Link 6 Field bus Reference 3 Sources Reference vector C145 Min 7 Keypad 8 Encoder JADRE et Reference 4 Sources Reference vector C146 11 5 12 13 00656 Figure 46 Selecting the source references 34 1 3 ALTERNATIVE COMMAND AND REFERENCE SOURCES A digital input can be set as a selector between 2 alternative command and reference sources Example C179 To select sources MDI6 C140 select command source number 1 Keypad 141 select command source number 2 Fieldbus C143 select reference source number 1 AIN1 C144 To select reference source number 2 Fieldbus If MD16 in the drive terminal board set as a selector is open the drive will consider number 1 as reference and command sources that is C140 Keypad and C143 AINJJ if it is closed number 2 will be considered C141 Fieldbus and C144 Fieldbus See also How to Manage the Reference Sources If references sources 3 and 4 C14
268. e analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P272 1 Selecting Variable 0 119 41 A71 Speed MEA ADVANCED This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO1 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MDO1 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 208 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive P273 1 Testing Variable A gt gt lt lt gt OD Default Level ADVANCED Address This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P271 using P275 as a comparing value P274 1 Testing Variable A AN M ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt ABS x lt Default Level ADVANCED 874 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P272 using P276 as a comparing value Function P275 MDO1 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test A P276 MDO1 Comparing Value for Test 320 00 320 00 42 32000 32000 of
269. e B p 1 Comparing value for Test A ido SOME 1 Comparing value for Test B dd cau IDEEN 1 Function applied to the result of the 2 ADVANCE 1 A SET B RESET 1 Selecting variable C XDVAMCE 0 Disable Function applied to the result of f A B C DANCE 0 f A B OR C D Output logic level 522 Digital output mode 6 BRAKE Selecting variable A Selecting variable E S SESS Testing variable A Testing variable B ipi odds um Comparing value for Test A c os 20 Comparing value for Test Function applied to the result of the 2 ADVANCE 1 A SET RESET Selecting variable ABVANGE 0 Disable Function applied to the result of f A B 0 f A B ORC Output logic level XOVANEE 1 TRUE D P288 Digital output mode 886 289 MDOS Selecting variable D3 Inverter Alarm 889 P290 MDO3 Selecting variable B du D3 Inverter Alarm 890 F291 Testing variable pU See Qal nus MDOS3 Testing variable B n 822 293 Comparing value for Test A ADVANCE 0 893 206 482 ee us LONNE E F234 MDO3 Comparing value for Test B b 5 oe P295 Function applied to the result of the 2 AD 0 895 295 Selecting variable D 0 Disable 646 P295b MDO3 Function applied to the result 0 ORC 647 296 MDO3 O
270. e CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check method The16 bit value of the relevant field is computed when the message is sent by the transmitter and is then re computed and checked by the receiver CRC Register is computed as follows 1 CRC Register is set to FFFFh 2 Exclusive OR is executed between CRC register and the first 8 bits of the message the result is saved to 16 bit register 3 This register is right shifted of one place 4 f the right bit is 1 exclusive OR is executed between the 16 bit register and value 1010000000000001 b 5 Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until 8 shifts are performed 6 Exclusive OR is performed between the 16 bit register and the next 8 bits of the message 7 Steps to 6 are repeated until all message bytes are processed 8 The result is CRC that is attached to the message by sending the less significant byte as the first byte Supported Functions 03h Read Holding Register Allows reading the register state of the slave device This function does not allow the broadcast mode address 0 Additional parameters are the address of the basic digital register to be read and the output number to be read QUERY RESPONSE Slave address Slave address 03h Function 03h Function Register address high Byte number Register address low Data Register N high a Register N low Data Error correction Error correction 10h Preset Multiple Register Sets the state of multiple register
271. e Decelerating 0 Disabled 1 0 Min Ipeak Imot 400 0 See Table 74 and Table 78 Level BASIC C045 ADVANCED C088 C131 36 1045 1088 1131 This parameter defines the current limit while decelerating it is expressed as RELON a percentage of the rated current of the selected motor The maximum allowable value dependson the drive sze C046 C089 C132 Current Limit Decrease in Hux Weakening 0 Disabled Pogo 0 Disabled Level ADVANCED zm 1046 1089 1132 Control IFD This parameter enables the current limit decrease function in flux weakening The current limit is multiplied by the ratio between the motor rated torque and the frequency forced to the drive limit 2 current limit being used Fmot Fout Function 308 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive C047 C090 C133 Minimum Torque 5000 5000 500 0 500 0 0 ADVANCED 1047 1090 1133 VTC and FOC This parameter sets the min limit of the torque demanded by the control being used Torque is expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor If an external torque limit is set C147 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU the values set in the parameters above represent the range of the source used for limitation they can be reduced by adjusting the external source the torque ramp times set in the RAMPS MENU will be applied to the preset limit torque reference
272. e Fieldbus 050 See Table 53 Hj Mon Torque Out Level ENGINEERING Address Function Third measure exchanged via Fieldbus P331 Fourth Measure from the Fieldbus DIC MEMO See Table 53 23 M022 PID Out Z Level ENGINEERING Address Function Fourth measure exchanged via Fieldbus 228 482 INSTRUCTIONS Gag ee TORY GRERSFSSSYRERENASRB LONNE iDrive Table 53 List of Pogrammable Measures for P330 P331 NONE 000 Speed Ref 001 dcm Spd Ref 002 Ramp Out dcm Rmp Out M004 Motor Speed M005 dcm MotSpd 006 MotFreq M007 Torq Ref M008 Torq Demand 009 Torq Out M010 Torq Ref 011 Torq Dem 12 Torq Out M013 T Lim Ref M014 T Lim RmpOut 15 T Lim Ref 16 T Lim RmpOut 96 M017 Aux Ref M018 PID Ref 19 PID RmpOut M020 PID Fok 96 M021 PID Er M022 PID Out M023 PID Ref M024 PID Fok 5 Virtual Dig Out M026 MotC urent M027 Out Volt M028 Power Out M029 Vbus DC M030 V Mains M031 Delay Dig IN M032 Instant Dig IN M033 Term Dig IN M034 Ser Dig IN 5 Fbus Dig IN M036 Aux Dig IN 7 Analog In REF 8 Analog In AIN1 M039 Analog In AIN2 Ser SpdRef 41 dcm Ser SpdRef 42 Fbus SpdRef M043 dcm Fbus SpdRef M044 Ser TrqLimRef 75 45 Fbus TrqLimRef M046 SerPID Ref M047 FbusPID Ref 048 SerPID Fok 49 FbusP
273. e detailed in Table 41 P379 MPLA Selecting Variable B See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 979 This parameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of MPLA digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MPLA digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 251 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P380 MPLA Testing Variable A ABS gt ABS x gt lt ADVANCED 980 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P378 using P382 as a comparing value P381 MPLA Testing Variable B ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt ABS x lt c2 Oh ADVANCED 981 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P379 using P383 as comparing value P382 MPLA Comparing Value forTestA 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table 41 ADVANCED 982 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test A P383 MPLA Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable B see Table 41 ADVANCED 983 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for t
274. e frequency programmed in C033 C076 C119 C033 C076 C119 Rated Revs Referring to Reduction in Quadratic Torque Curve Level ADVANCED Address 1033 1076 1119 Control IFD If the V f curve pattern C013 C056 C099 Quadratic this parameter Function defines the frequency implementing the max torque reduction in terms of theoretical V f pattern set in C032 C075 C120 C034 C077 C 120 Voltage Preboost Default See Table 75 and Table 79 Level BASIC Address 1034 1077 1120 Contol IFD Function Torque compensation at minimum frequency produced by the drive IFD control determines the increase of the output voltage at OHz Range 500 500 50 0 50 0 Default 0 ENGINEERING Address 1204 1206 1208 Contol VIC VTC control determines the increase of the torque at low rom with a positive speed torque reference Function 289 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C034b 077 C120b VIC Torque Boost for Negative Reference Range Default 0 Level ENGINEERING Address 1205 1207 1209 Contol VIC control determines the increase of the torque at low rom with a negative speed torque reference 500 500 50 0 50 0 76 Function C035 078 121 Torque Curve Increment Boost 0 Range 100 100 100 100 Default See Table 75 and Table 79 Level ADVANCED Address 1035 1078 1121 Control IFD Torque compensation at low rpm De
275. e max speed of the motor controlled by the drive is 1500 rpm C029 the speed reference is 1500 rpm 352 482 PROGRAMMING se LO NNE 36 2 List Parameters C189 to C199 Table 97 List of parameters C 189 to C 199 Encoder Frequency input 0 Not used operating mode um Not used C190 Number of pls rev for encoder A 1190 1024 C191 Number of pls rev for encoder B 1191 1024 C192 __ Speed searching error timeout 1192 5 00 sec C193 Error between reference and 1193 300 rom speed C194 Tracking error alarm enable 1194 1 C195 Filter time constant over value of 1195 50 ms feedback from encoder C196 Filter time constant over value of 1196 50ms reference from encoder c197 Number of channels of Encoder ENGINEERING 1197 0 2 Squaring channels C198 9i chennels ol Encoder _ ENGINEERING 1198 0 2 Squaring channels C199 Encoder sign reversal 1199 O Fdbk NO Ref NO C189 Encoder Frequency Input Operating Mode This parameter determines the operating mode of quick acquisition digital inputs If MDI8 is used as a frequency input the option board for encoder B is not required MDI6 digital input may be used as a frequency input if used along with it can be used for encoder A reading Reading both encoders A and B can be programmed parameter C189 defines the encoder to be used as a refer
276. e multispeed and Fire Mode values will be RECOMPUTED 128 482 PROGRAMMING wo Bus 15 PID MULTIREFERENCES MENU 15 1 Overview This menu includes the parameters for the utilisation and allocation of PID Multireferences from digital inputs The reference sources are based on the setup in parameters C285 to C287 see the PID CONFIGURATION MENU The overall reference also depends the multireferences that are already set if any or on the reduction percent of the reference itself see the REFERENCE VARIATION PERCENT MENU Configuration example PID Configuration Menu C285 Source of PID reference 1 2 C286 Source of PID reference 2 0 Disable C287 Source of PID reference 3 0 Disable Digital Inputs Menu C188a Input for PID Multireference 1 7 C188b Input for PID Multireference 2 8 MDI8 C188c Input for PID Multireference 3 0 Disable PID Multireferences Menu 81 PID Reference 1 Mref 1 1 0 bars 82 PID Reference 2 Mref 2 1 5 bars PID Reference 3 Mref 3 2 5 bars Parameters Menu P257 Gain for PID scaling 0 1 When analog input is set to 100 the pressure reference is 10 bars 100 P257 10 0 Supposing that is set to 43 the references below are obtained based on the combination of the digital inputs configured as multireferences and based on the function allocated to parameter P080a P80a 0 Preset Ref I
277. e set up and that ramp 3 is selected see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 016 Speed Ramp 3 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 s if 20 0 0 01 s 0 3270 0 s if 20 0 0 1 0 32700 s if PO20 0 gt 15 0 327000 s if PO20 0 gt 105 See Table 74 and Table 78 ADVANCED Same as ramp 1 see PO10 NOTE Values for ramp 3 can be applied to the reference provided that multiramp digital inputs are set up and that ramp 3 is selected see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 99 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 018 Speed Ramp 4 Acceleration Time 0 327 00 s if PO20 0 0 01 5 0 3270 0 5 if 020 0 0 15 32 00 0 32700 sif 2 0 gt 15 0 327000 s if 20 0 105 Default See Table 74 and Table 78 Level ADVANCED Address 618 Function Same as ramp 1 see P009 Values for ramp 4 can be applied to the reference provided that multiramp NOTE digital inputs are set up and that ramp 4 is selected see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 19 Speed Ramp 4 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 if PO20 0 0 01 s 0 3270 0 if PO20 0 gt 0 1 0 32700 s if 20 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if PO20 0 105 See Table 74 and Table 78 ADVANCED Same as ramp 1 see 10 NOTE digital inputs are set up and that ramp 4 is selected see the DIGITAL INPUTS Values for ramp 4 can be applied to the reference provided that multiramp MENU P020 Speed Ramps 3 and 4 Time Unit of
278. e the PID regulator and send a speed reference from keypad to do so set P266 2 Ref Activated 4 Speed When pressing the LOC REM key to enter the Local mode the Keypad page containing the PID reference is displayed Use the A and V keys to change The PID reference Press the LOC REM key once again when the drive is disabled to disable the PID control The Keypad page containing the speed reference is displayed Use the A and V keys to change the speed reference P267 Preset PID PID2 Units of Measure Range See Table 17 0 Disable ENGINEERING The PID PID2 reference and PID PID2 feedback are expresed as a percentage in measures M020 M021 020 21 Parameters P257 P457 allow setting a gain value to scale the PID reference and PID feedback and to obtain the following measures M023 P257 M020 24 P257 MO21 iz which are properly scaled Parameters P267 P267b see coding of P267 P267b sets the unit of measure for the measures above the unit of measure can also be entered in parameter P267a P267c only if P267 P267b 0 Disable Example the reference is 100 MO20 100 if P257 0 04 and P267 1 bars the scaled measure for the PID reference is gt M023 4 00 bars 89 482 iDrive LONNE Table 17 Preset PID units of measure PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Customized 0 Disabled see 267
279. e used for the minimum reference set with PO56 117 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 57 Value of AIN1 Input Producing Max Reference X axis 100 100 if PO55 0 10 0V 10 0 V if P055 0 10 V 200 200 if P055 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 055 1 20 mA 40 200 if P055 2 4 0mA 20 0 mA if PO55 2 4 20 mA 0 100 if P055 3 10 0V if P055 3 0 10 V 0 200 if 55 4 0 0 20 0 mA if 55 4 0 20 mA ADVANCED This parameter selects the value for AINT input signal for maximum reference or better the reference set in CO29xP057a Master mode or CO48xP057a Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used P057a Percentage of Speed Max Producing Max Reference Y axis related to P057 57 o 1000 100 0 Became 000 100 0 ADVANCED Address 678 This parameter represents the speed percentage the min torque percentage for a torque reference to be used for the minimum reference set with P057 PO58 Offset over AIN1 Input 10 00 V 10 00 V if POSS O or 3 2000 2000 20 00 mA 20 00 mA if 55 1 2 4 This parameter selects the offset correction value analog signal that has been measured 27179 The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation or c
280. e used to calculate the value of MPL2 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 245 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P362 MPL2 Testing Variable A ABS gt ABS x gt ABS x lt 3g t 9 ADVANCED 362 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P360 using P364 as a comparing value P363 MPL2 Testing Variable B ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt 5 lt c2 COMO ADVANCED 963 This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P361 using P365 as comparing value P364 MPL2 Comparing Value forTestA 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table 41 ADVANCED 964 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test A P365 MPL2 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable B see Table 41 ADVANCED 965 This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test B 246 482 o PROGRAMMING a se LONNE P366 MPL2 Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests OR SET RESET A AND A XOR B A NOR B A NAND B AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B
281. e which of the 15 active speed references are active active value 1 or inactive value 0 of each preset input signal determines a bit logic binary number MULTISPEED 0 is the less significant bit bit 0 and MULTISPEED is the most significant bit bit 3 If one of these functions is not set up its relevant bit is zero Table 89 Multispeed selection Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O Multispeed selected MULTISPEED 3 MULTISPEED 2 MULTISPEED 1 MULTISPEED O 335 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 Table 90 Selected Speed reference START 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MULTISPEED O X 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 MULTISPEED 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MULTISPEED 2 X 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MULTISPEED3 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X 0 1 2 3 4 51 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 e wo N wo 50 515 If one of these functions is not set up its relevant bit is zero For example if C156 and C157 are Inactive 0 while C155 and C158 are programmed to two different terminals only Multispeed 0 1 8 9 can be selected relating to the following references 9 81 91 P092 Factory setting
282. ected 5 may be configured with All the measures meade EAE P331 6 DIN Digital Inputs 7 DOU Digital Outputs 8 REF Analog Input 16380 16380 9 AIN1 AIN1Analog Input 16380 16380 10 AIN2 AIN2 Analog Input 16380 16380 Word 1 Status Alarms The Status and Alarms are displayed over the fieldbus the following format The Status codes may be found in Table 125 The Alam codes may be found in Table 122 Word 2 Output Current The output current measure 026 is displayed as a value that must be divided by 10 to obtain the actual motor current As a result if the returned value from the IDrive to the Master is 100 then the actual output motor current is 10A Word 3 Motor Speed The output motor speed M004 is displayed as follows Output Current Motor Speed Words 4 amp 5 Third amp Fourth measure that may be configured with P330 amp P331 Words 4 amp 5 may be configured with P330 and P331 more details are given in the FIELDBUS PARAMETERS MENU Both words 4 amp 5 are represented as follows Mxxx represented by P330 and P331 431 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e Word 6 Digital Inputs Digital input status in the word MDI2 IXMDISIXMDI7IXMDIG6XMDISXMDIAIXMDI3IXMDIZ2XMDIT MDI8 MDI7 MDI MDIS MDI4 Word 7 Digital Outputs Digital output status in the word jpit7bi bit
283. ed at 50 for voltage values lower than 5V P246 Max Value of PID Reference 10000 10000 X 100 0076 10000 100 00 ENGINEERING 846 This parameter defines the max allowable value of the PID reference See the description of P245 P247 Min Value of PID Feedback 10000 10000 100 00 ENGINEERING 847 This parameter defines the min allowable value of the PID feedback See the description of 245 10000 10000 100 00 100 00 ENGINEERING 848 This parameter defines the max allowable value of the PID feedback See the description of 245 182 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P249 PID Reference Ram Time ENGINEERING 849 This parameter defines the ramp up time of the PID regulator reference from 0 to the max allowable absolute value max P245 246 32700 Function of P251 ENGINEERING 850 This parameter defines the ramp down time of the PID regulator reference from max allowable value max P245 P246 to 0 P251 Unit of measure of PID Ramp Level Address This parameter defines the unit of measure for the PID reference ramp times Function It defines the unit of measure for the time of the third ramp of the PID reference P249 and 250 so that the allowable range becomes Os 327000s Example 0 0 01 0 327 00 5 1 0 15 0 3270 05 2 1 05 0 327005 3 10 05 0 3270005 Factory setting
284. ed motors and to manually adjust the motor current balancing see parameter P152 The speed regulator for each motor has two parameterization functions two integral terms two proportional terms and two speed error thresholds expressed as a percentage of the motor rated speed The response of the speed regulator can be dynamically linked with the speed error in this way the speed regulator will be more sensitive to remarkable speed errors and less sensitive to negligible speed errors Factory setting because two identical error thresholds are set only two parameters are used P126 maximum integral time and P128 minimum proportional constant The setup of min integral time and max proportional constant is enabled provided that two different error thresholds are used Example P125 100 ms Minimum integral time for maximum error P126 500 ms Integral time for minimum error P123 10 00 Proportional constant for minimum error P129 25 00 Proportional constant for maximum error P130 2 76 Minimum error threshold P131 20 76 Maximum error threshold Error lt P130 For speed errors lower than or equal to 276 of the motor rated speed the speed regulator adopts parameters P126 and P128 Error 2 P131 If the speed error exceeds the second error threshold the speed regulator adopts parameters P125 and P129 P130 lt Error lt P131 When the speed error is included between the two error thresholds the speed regulator will use coefficient
285. ed reference when the gradient changes is the value set for the deceleration starting stage If parameter 1 is set to No acceleration is brought to zero before the speed reference starts decreasing Then deceleration begins with the preset pattern Figure 6 Speed profile with Acceleration Reset Yes to No Example 12 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE TORQUE RAMPS If the control algorithm is or FOC if it is controlled by setting Torque 011 for motor 1 C054 for motor 2 and C097 for motor 3 respectively the reference is ramped based on the values set in parameter 026 torque increase ramp time P027 torque decrease ramp time and P028 unit of measure for the ramp times The ramp up time setting is the time the output torque reference takes to go from 0 to the max value as an absolute value between Torque min and Torque max of the selected motor C047 C048 for motor 1 and so on 95 482 PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 12 2 List of Parameters P009 to P033 Table 19 List of parameters P009 to P033 09 Speed ramp 1 acceleration time BASIC 98S 609 1 Speed ramp 1 deceleration time BASIC See a 610 12 Sp
286. ed the opening of the PTC connected to 2 input gt 3600 ohm e Opening of the PTC due to motor overheating e Incorrect wiring of PTC e Incorrect setting hardware switch on the control board see Installation Instructions Manual 1 Allow the motor to cool then reset the alarm 2 Make sure that the PTC is correctly connected to AIN2 analog input see Installation Instructions Manual 3 Make sure that 5 hardware switch is correctly set 454 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A056 Short Circuit A057 Illegal XMDI in MPL External PTC resistor short circuit Detected the short circuit of the connected to AIN2 input R lt 10 ohm e Short circuit in the PTC e Incorrect wiring of PTC e Incorrect setting of SWL hardware switch on the control board see Installation Instructions Manual 1 Make sure that the PTC is correctly connected to AIN2 analog input see Installation Instructions Manual 2 Make sure that hardware switch is correctly set Illegal configuration of XMDI in the Virtual Digital Outputs MPL Menu The drive checked if at least XMDI input from ES847 ES870 I O option board is available in the VIRTUAL DIGITAL OUTPUTS MPL MENU The drive checked if R023 I O Board setting is set to 0 in the EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU Wrong settings Check settings and enter correct settings Motor speed measure error During the en
287. ed variation P117 80 0 Selected speed variation Variation 2 Variation 1 135 482 EV PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE Figure 13 Speed Control example 136 482 PROGRAMMING cw LONNE 17 2 List of Parameters P115 to P121 Table 26 List of parameters P115 to P121 P115 Reference variation percent n 1 gt 715 116 Reference variation percent n 2 IEERING 0 0 716 P117 Reference variation percent n 3 ENGINEERING 0 0 717 118 Reference variation percent 4 ENGINEERING 0 0 718 119 Reference variation percent n 5 ENGINEERING 0 0 719 120 Reference variation percent n 6 ENGINEERING 0 0 720 P121 Reference variation percent n 7 ENGINEERING 0 0 721 P115 P121 Reference Variation Percent n 1 n 7 1000 100 0 Default ENGINEERING 715 721 These parameters define the variation percent of the current reference 000 for speed control 007 for torque control 018 if PID control is activated to be considered as a ramp reference when selecting variation percent 1 7 Function 137 482 PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE 18 SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU 18 1 Overview The SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU for VTC and FOC controls allows setting the parameter values of the speed regulators for the three connect
288. eed ramp 2 acceleration time ADVANCED PES 612 P013 Speed ramp 2 deceleration time ADVANCED 569 Tobie 74 ana 613 P014 Speed ramps land 2 time unit of measure ADVANCED dus d is and 614 P015 Speed ramp 3 acceleration time ADVANCED Pos Ec gt 615 16 Speed ramp 3 deceleration time ADVANCED uz i d es ane 616 018 Speed ramp 4 acceleration time ADVANCED See E 6 618 019 Speed ramp 4 deceleration time ADVANCED See 619 P020 Speed ramps 3 and 4 time unit of measure ADVANCED bis c ana 620 21 Selection for ramp rounding off ADVANCED 566 1 e ane 621 22 Ua ME S ramp start rounding off ADVANCED 50 622 P023 Acceleration S ramp end rounding off time ADVANCED 50 623 P024 Rn S ramp start rounding off ADVANCED 50 624 25 Deceleration ramp end rounding off time 50 625 P026 Torque ramp time up ADVANCED 55 626 P027 Torque ramp time down ADVANCED 55 627 028 Unit of measure for torque ramp time ADVANCED 0 1 628 29 Jog ramp acceleration time ADVANCED 15 629 Jog ramp deceleration time ADVANCED ls 629 1 Gradient variation acceleration reset ADVANCED 1 YES 630 P032 Mode Ramp acceleration time ENGINEERING 566 aed E ana 632 P033 Mode Ramp deceleration time ENGINEERING 596 2 ana 633 09 Speed Ramp 1 Acceleration Time 0 32700 0 327 00 if POL4 0 gt 0 01 0 3270 0 if 14 1 0 1 0 32700 s
289. efer to the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU 58 482 PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive M022 PID Output 100 00 10000 Note The actual range depends on the min and max saturation values of the PID output set in parameters P236 P237 Always active This is the measure of the output produced by the PID regulator and expressed as a percentage Please refer to the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU for the scaling of the PID output 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min and saturation values of the PID output set in parameters P436 P437 This measure is active if enabled from 291 1718 This is the measure of the output produced by the PID2 regulator and expressed as a percentage Scaling is detailed in the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU M023 PID Reference after Ramps Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min 32000 value of the PID reference set in parameters P245 P246 and the gain level set in P257 Always active This is the measure of the reference after the ramps being used for the PID regulator as 19 but multiplied by the gain level set in P257 see also the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU As for the display keypad the unit of measure can be programmed with parameters 267 267 in the DISPLAY KEYPAD menu 2 2 Reference after Ramps N
290. emote command inputs from serial link and Table 83 Reference inputs from serial link 50 1 1 ALARM A070 COMMUNICATION SUSPENDED Alarm A070 trips if the IDrive is not sent any legal message FIELDBUS within the timeout set in parameter RO16 Set parameter RO16 to to disable alarm A070 A legal message is the word of the digital inputs M035 with bit 15 1 written by the master Important this is enabled only when the drive receives the first message with bit 15 1 To reset alarm A070 force communication between the Master and the IDrive drive with bit 15 of the digital input word always set to 1 and reset the drive control board If communications between the Master and the Slave IDrive cannot be restored alarm A070 is reset after setting parameter 016 to zero and after resetting the IDrive drive When the drive is next powered resetting the alarm reset will affect the drive control board 50 2 List of Parameters R016 to R017 Table 115 List of parameters RO16 to R017 RO16 Fieldbus Watchdog Time ENGINEERING 603 0 ms RO17 Analog Outputs controlled by the Fieldbus _ ENGINEERING 604 000b R016 Fieldbus Watchdog Time 0 60000 60000 ms Default Level ENGINEERING Address If not set at zero this parameter determines the time limit after which A070 Function Fieldbus WDG trips legal writing is received from the fieldbus a given time interval 424 482
291. en C002 and 8 kHz if the max carrier freq allowed is gt 8kHz this means that the value set in C002 is applied only when exceeding 8kHz The carrier frequency is not affected by the value set in 1 31 1 4 ANY CONTROL ALGORITHM The maximum preset carrier frequency value also limits the maximum speed value to be programmed Max programmable speed rated speed maximum output frequenc y rated frequency where the maximum output frequency results from the following C002 gt 5000Hz fout max 002 16 C002 lt 5000Hz fout max 002 10 C002 is the maximum carrier frequency and the divisor is the min allowable number of pulses per period Table 63 Maximum value of the output frequency depending on the IDrive size Max output frequency Hz Smaller than 0015 0015 to 0129 0150 to 0162 Greater than 0162 From 0023 to 0030 437 5Hz 0040 1000Hz and 0049 800Hz Hz Any PD size FEET EET NOTE The maximum output frequency is limited to the speed level programmed in parameters C028 C029 32000 32000 rpm This results in Foutmax RPMmax NPole 120 EXAMPLE When using a 4 pole motor and 30 000rpm are required will be 1000Hz so the performance requirements are fulfilled On the other hand if the same performance requirements are needed with an 8 pole system 30 000rpm cannot be obtained as Four is 2000Hz As a result when using 8 pole motor the
292. en press the DX RX key you can go to the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD pages Any page Press SAVE ENTER from the UPLOAD DOWNLOAD page to confirm UPLOADING DOWNLOADING The relevant LED will come on fixed light If the SAVE ENTER is not pressed for confirmation within 10 seconds from the selection of the UPLOAD DOWNLOAD page the starting page is automatically displayed While UPLOADING UPLOADING flashing warning appears If parameters are successfully uploaded the following warning appears W11 UPLOAD OK 22 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS If not the W12 UPLOAD KO warning appears Retry parameter upload 23 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE ses While DOWNLOADING W07 DOWNLOADING flashing warning appears If parameters are successfully downloaded the following warning appears W09 DOWNLOAD If not alarm A073 trips and download must be retried before restarting the drive 1 10 LOC REM Key Keypad Pages To enable the Local Remote operating mode Remote sources are command and or reference sources other than the display keypad press the LOC REM key in the display keypad or use a digital input configured as Loc Rem see C180 The LOC REM key is enabled when no digital input is configured as Loc Rem or when a NOTE digital input is configured as a Loc Rem button see C180a The LOC REM key is disabled when a digital input is configured as a Loc Rem selector s
293. ence of frequency speed torque negative NOTE Figure 3 Display keypad REF ALARM KFY LIM BRAKE LED Yellow LIMIT LED Yellow No active limit Voltage or current limit active Ordinary run Either one is active er DC current brake IGBT braking Ramp extension LED flashing S LED on fixed L CMD LED Green Commands sent from sources other than _ wt Commands sent 7 X both from keypad and terminal board Commands sent from keypad only LED Green Reference sent from sources other ihan keypad Reference sent both from keypad terminal Reference sent from keypad only See also the OPERATING AND REMOTING THE KEYPAD section in the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual 25 482 22222 D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 INSTRUCTIONS ws LONNE 2 DESCRIPTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS The control board of the drives of the IDrive series is provided with the following inputs outputs 3 Analog Inputs single ended REF input differential AINT amp AIN2 inputs that can be programmed as voltage current inputs via SW1 DIP switch see Configuration DIP switches in the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual 3 Analog Outputs that can be programmed as voltage current inputs via SW2 DIP switch see Configur
294. ence source if set as a speed torque reference source in the MOTOR CONTROL MENU or as a PID reference source in the PID CONFIGURATION MENU and the encoder to be used as a speed feedback Configuration allowed for quick acquisition digital inputs is shown in Table 98 If the encoder is used as a reference source the detected speed value will be saturated and scaled based on values set in P073 and P074 respectively minimum and maximum value forthe encoder Example C189 A Reference B Unused P073 1500rpm P074 1500rpm if the encoder is used as a PID reference the reference measure is expressed as a percentage of the max value 73 P074 Function If a frequency input is selected its readout is saturated and scaled based on parameters P071 and P072 respectively minimum and maximum value forthe frequency input 353 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE Table 98 Coding of C189 0 Not used Not used 1 EncA Feedback Not used 2 EncA Reference Not used 3 Not used Enc B Feedback 4 Not used Enc B Reference 5 EncA Feedback Enc B Reference 6 EncA Reference Enc B Feedback 7 EncA Reference and Feedback Not used 8 Not used Enc B Reference and Feedback 9 MDI6 Frequency Input Not used 10 Not used MDI8 Frequency Input 11 MDI6 Frequency Input EncB Reference 12 EncA Reference MDI8 Frequency Input 13 MDI6 Frequency Input EncB Feedback 14 EncA Feedback
295. ent output during ordinary operation M026 the Measure Menu check the mechanical conditions of the connected load load locked overload 458 482 PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive A075 Motor Overheated Description Event Motor thermal protection tripped The software motor thermal protection tripped Output current has been exceeding the motor rated current for long periods Possible e Poor mechanical conditions of the connected load cause e Wrong setting of parameters the Thermal Protection Menu 1 Check mechanical conditions of the connected load Solution 2 Check parameters C265 C266 C267 and equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 in the MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU A076 Limit Speed The motor speed is too high The motor speed is higher than the current value set in parameter C031 for motor 1 or equivalent parameters for motors 2 and 3 If C031 0 the limit speed protection is disabled If the encoder is disabled the variable used for this software protection is e The current speed setpoint for e The estimated motor speed for VIC control e Value of parameter 031 too low e Torque reference too high for SLAVE mode 1 Check the compatibility of the parameter with respect to the maximum speed parameter 2 In SLAVE mode check the torque reference value FOC control but encoder not enabled The FOC control is active but no encoder has been enabled with
296. er can be accessed only if the operating mode of the digital output NOTE concerned is other than zero Example MDO1 P2700 This selects a different digital signal or the analog variable used for Test B set with P274 P283 P292 P301 The whole list of the selectable items and their description appears at the end of this section see Table 41 If a digital signal is selected Test B is not performed therefore the comparison value for Test B set with P276 P285 P294 P303 has no meaning Parameter P272 cannot be accessed when the digital output operating mode is 1 NOTE DIGITAL or 3 ANALOG Example MDO1 P270 1 OR P270 3 Table 41 List of the selectable digital inputs and analog outputs Selectable digital signals BOOLEAN Selectable Value DO Disable D1 Run Ok D2 Ok On D3 Alarm D4 Run ALR i D5 Fwd Run D Rev Run D7 Lim D8 Lim GEN D9 Limiting Always FALSE 0 Drive running no standby nverter ok no alarms tripped Drive alarm tripped Drive KO alarm tripped when the drive is running 0 Prec Ok 1 PID MAX 2 PID MIN D14 MDI2 Selected MDI2 digital input remote OR physical 15 3 ected MDI3 digital input remote OR physical 216 MDI4 MDM digital input remote OR physical D17 MDI5 Selected MDIS digital input remote OR physical 218 MDI Selected digital input remote OR physical 219 MDI7 Selected digital input remote OR phys
297. ered only when passing from 01 Rising Edge or 10 Falling Edge and may be used both as Set and Reset command Example Suppose that the output enables only when the motor speed exceeds 50 and disables when the motor speed drops below 5 rpm To do so assign the first condition to Test A representing the Set command for Flip Flop P351 Motor Speed P353 P355 50 and assign the second condition to Test B representing the Reset command P352 Motor Speed P354 lt P356 5 A more detailed example is given at the end of this section Test A Set Test Qn TestA Reset 0 1 X 0 1 In any other case Test Set In any other case TetA Reset 120 Test B Set 120 In any other case 0 Qni o 01 Test A Set TestB Reset Qn 0 01 0 Qni 233 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE A AND The selected digital output enables when both conditions are true A XOR The selected digital output enables when either one condition or the other is true but not when both conditions are true at a time A NOR B The selected digital output enables when no condition is true The NOR function between two variables corresponds to the AND of the same false variables i e A NOR A AND B A NAND B The selected digital output enables when no condition is true or when only one of the two conditions is tru
298. erminals Watchdog for the communication to the keypad Communication failed when the keypad was enabled as a reference source or command source or when it was in Local mode Watchdog time is equal to approx 1 6 seconds e Keypad cable disconnected e Failure of one of the two connectors of the keypad e Strong electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference e Keypad failure e Incorrect setting in parameters relating to serial link 1 see the SERIAL LINKS MENU 1 Check the connection of the keypad cable 2 Make sure that the keypad cable connectors are intact on both drive side and keypad side 3 Check communication parameters of serial link 1 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A082 Encoder Configuration Description LONNE bis Functions programmed for MDI6 and MDI7 or Encoder B selected and encoder board not detected e EncoderA has been selected for speed measure or as a reference source but different digital command functions are programmed for terminals MDIG and MDI7 e EncoderBhas been selected for the speed measure or as a reference source but the control board did not detect any optional encoder board e Incorrect setting of the use of the encoders in parameter C189 e Incorrect programming of digital input functions e Option board for Encoder B is not fitted has been improperly mounted or is faulty Possible connector failure 1 Check and adjust the value set in C189 see the ENCODER FREQUEN
299. erter Enabled keySTART START Start Ok REVERSE keySTOP Flip Flop with Set cwicow Reference Flip Flop level Reverse Reset Start Ok keyREV Reverse Reference Flip Flop Reset P000347 b Figure 48 Contolling Run and Direction when the STOP Input is not programmed 333 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j LO e The figure below illustrates the processing logic diagram for the START REV Cw CCw functions and the START STOP REV keys on the display keypad if the STOP function is programmed STOP PROGRAMMED C150 0 Inverter Enabled keySTART Start Ok keySTOP STOP START REVERSE Edge Flip Flop the Reset signal overreading the Set Edge Flip Flop Flip Flop Reset Flip Flop Reset keyREV Reverse Reference Cw CCw Flip Flop Reset P000349 b Figure 49 Controlling Run and Direction when the STOP Input is programmed C152 ENABLE S Input 0 5 Inactive 0 16 1 8 MDII 8 m 9 12 MPL4 0 24 if ES847 ES870 is fitted 13 16 gt TFL TFL4 17 24 2 XMDI8 ADVANCED This is a safety ENABLE if this function is enabled the drive activates only if both ENABLE and ENABLE S inputs are active NOTE programmed for the terminal relating to ENABLE S it will have no effect on the ENABLE S function whereas it will normally delay other functions programmed for the same terminal The ENABLE
300. eset is then required to unlock the drive see the AUTORESET MENU If alarm trips see the ALARMS AND WARNINGS section and reset the CAUTION equipment after detecting the cause responsible for the alarm DANGER Electrical shock hazard exists on output terminals U V W and resistive braking module terminals B even when the drive is disabled Set C154 Yes to remove the reset function from MDI3 After that only one NOTE different function can be allocated to MDI3 even when multiprogramming is active see parameter C182 gt gt gt 35 2 Factory setting of the Digital Inputs Table 87 Terminal board Factory setting START 14 Enables the drive RUN ENABLE 15 MDI2 Enables the drive RESET 16 MDI3 Resets the alarms trioped MULTISPEED 0 17 MDI4 Bit for Multispeed selection MULTISPEED 1 18 MDI5 Bit 1 for Multispeed selection Source Sel 19 MDI Source Selection Loc Rem 20 MDI7 Local Remote Control Selection CwCCW 21 MDI8 Reference reversal 328 482 INSTRUCTIONS nu IRE iDrive 35 3 List of Parameters C149 to C188c and 1006 The parameters ranging from C149 to C180 and from C186 to 188 one for each command function activate single functions and set the terminal for each enabling disabling function Parameter C181 enables a safe SIARTmode Parameter C182 enables multiple programming if compatible to t
301. est B 252 482 o PROGRAMMING a se L NNE P384 MPLA Function Applied to the Result of the 2 Tests OR SET RESET A AND A XOR B A NOR B A NAND B AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B A AND BY 10 A RESET B SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 0 A OR B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADVANCED 984 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value P384a MPLA Selecting Variable C See Table 41 00 Disable ADVANCED 938 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MPLA digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in Table 41 P384b MPLA Function Applied to the Result of f A B C 0 OR C 1 f A B SET C RESET RISING EDGE 2 AND C 3 XOR C 4 NOR C 5 NAND 6 A B N OR C 7 OR 8 AND C 9 AND CY 10 f A B RESET C SET RISING EDGE 11 A B SET C RESET FALLING EDGE 12 RESET SET FALLING EDGE 0 0 OR ADVANCED 939 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value 253 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 0 TRUE 1 FALSE
302. et Always ON for cooling fan continuous operation The real temperature of the heatsink can be displayed in measure parameter M064 Function directly by the drive control board F as displayed on the Product screen in the This parameter has effect only for the IDrive models where fans are controlled NOTE PRODUCT MENU See Table 13 and Table 14 388 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE bis C265 C268 C271 Thermal Protection Activation C266 C269 C272 Current AN Range Default Level Address Function Disabled No Derating ForcedCool Self cool BASIC C265 ADVANCED C268 C271 1265 1268 1271 This parameter enables the Motor Thermal Protection function It also selects the type of thermal protection among different trip patterns 1 min 120 Imax Imot 100 1 min 12092 Imax Imot 100 26 ADVANCED 1266 1269 1272 This parameter sets the thermal protection trip current expressed as a percentage of the rated current of motor 1 2 3 1 10800 1 10 800 720s corresponding BASIC C267 ADVANCED C270 C273 1267 1270 1273 This parameter sets the thermal time constant of the connected motor The time constant is the time within which the calculated thermal stage has reached 63 of its final value The motor attains its thermal time constant when it operates in constant load conditions for a time equal to approx 5 times the con
303. eter P067 indicates the ramp time to increase the reference from zero to the preset speed or torque maximum absolute value i e the max value between absolute values 5 Min and Spd or Trq_Min and _ If motor 1 is active 5 028 5 Max CO029 047 Trq_Max C 048 PO68 Storage of UP DOWN Values at Power Off 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Enabled ADVANCED If PO68 1 the Speed Torque or PID references added through input digital signals UP and DOWN or with the INC and DEC keys local mode are stored at the drive power off and are added to the start reference when the drive is restarted This function allows storing he reference value obtained with UP and DOWN signals PO68a Reset UP DOWN Speed Torque at Stop 10 1 5 EMO NO PRISE 940 If PO68a 1 Yes the Speed Torque reference sent via the UP DOWN digital signals or with the and keys in the keypad is reset whenever the START command for the drive is disabled and the deceleration ramp is finished PO68b Reset UP DOWN PID at Stop oO NOT YES 122 482 ADVANCED If PO68b 1 Yes the PID reference sent via the UP DOWN digital signals or via the keys in the keypad is reset whenever the START command for the drive is disabled and the deceleration ramp is finished o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE PO68c Reset UP DOWN Speed Torque at Source Changeover
304. evant output make sure That all the conditions depending on the drive status are true see the description at the end of this section The ABS BRAKE mode is applied by selecting the measured or estimated speed value A71 as the first variable and the output torque A80 as the second variable Variables are considered as absolute values See Example 4 ABS LIFT As ABS BRAKE the brake unlocks digital output open when a given torque value is attained which is automatically determined based on the last Torque value required in the previous stroke PWM MODE The PWM mode may be selected for digital outputs MDO1 and MDC2 only it cannot be selected for relay digital outputs MDO3 and MDOA The digital output becomes a low frequency PWM output with a duty cycle proportional to the value of the selected analog output See Example 5 189 482 iDnve INSTRUCTIONS LONNE Variable A Selected for MDO1 2 3 4 P271 P280 P289 298 This selects the digital signal or the analog variable used for Test A set with P273 282 291 300 The whole list of the selectable items and their description appears at the end of this section see Table 41 If a digital signal is selected Test A is not performed therefore the comparison value for Test A set with 275 284 293 302 has no meaning Variable selected for 1 2 3 4 P272 P281 P290 P299 This paramet
305. f both digital inputs configured as Multireferences are not activated the overall reference is given from AIN1 analog input selected as the first PID reference C285 PO80a Multireference Function Preset Ref 0 0 4 3 bars 0 1 1 0 bars 1 0 1 5 bars 1 1 2 5 bars P80a 1 Sum Ref If both digital inputs configured as Multireference are inactive the overall reference is given from AINT analog input selected as the first PID reference C285 For the combinations where at least one the digital inputs configured as multireference is active the resulting reference is the sum of the value for AINT plus the value for the selected multireference 8 Multireference Function Exclusive Preset Ref 0 0 4 3 bars 0 1 5 3 bars 1 0 5 8 bars 1 1 6 8 bars 129 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e 130 482 o PROGRAMMING c OLONNE P80a 2 Exclusive Preset Ref no Multireference is activated the overall reference is null 0 0 bars 1 0 bars 1 5 bars 2 5 bars HONO 15 2 List of Parameters P080a to P099a Table 24 List of parameters P080a P099a P080a PID Multireference function 944 P081a PID Multireference 1 Mref1 945 P082a PID Multireference 2 Mref2 946 P083a PID Multireference 3 Mref3 947 P084a Multireference 4 Mref4 948 85
306. f digital inputs COMMANDS and analog inputs REFERENCES Please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual for the hardware description A NOTE See also the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU and the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU The drive is factory set to receive digital commands via the terminal board the main speed reference is sent from the REF analog input and no external limit for torque limitation is enabled The parameters in this menu allow selecting the following The source of the drive commands digital inputs from three signal sources through parameters C140 C141 C142 which are logically matched so as to obtain an active M031 command set For each of these 3 parameters you can select the source of the command signals from 4 different sources The source of the speed reference or torque reference from 4 different sources that can be selected with parameters C143 C144 C145 C146 that can be summed up together For each of these 4 parameters you can select the source of the reference signals from 9 different sources The source of the torque limit reference through parameter 147 allowing selecting the reference source from 9 different sources Therefore you can select and enable different command sources hardware or virtual sources different speed or torque references hardware or virtual sources and enable an external torque limit The drive commands may be sent from The hardware terminal board termin
307. f the connected motor When references forming the global reference are at their max relative value the 217179 global reference equals the max speed of the connected motor If C011 C054 C097 2 Torque with speed limit this parameter is used to limit the motor rotation In the CONTROL METHOD MENU if an external speed torque limit source C147 is selected the speed limit value set with this parameter is the upper limit that can be reduced by adjusting the external source Also the ramp times set in the RAMPS MENU PO09 P025 are applied to this limit 073 116 Hux Weakenin ed 0 200 0 200 69111 Function This parameter defines the speed value determining the motor flux weakening It is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated speed C016 C059 C 102 ESO 00 5 ENGINEERING PIECE 1030 1073 1116 C031 C074 C 117 Max ed Alam 0 Disabled 32000 Peo ADVANCED 1031 1074 1117 If it is not set to zero this parameter determines the speed value to be entered for the maximum speed alarm A076 288 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C032 C075 C118 Reduction in Quadratic Torque Curve 0 100 076 30 0 ADVANCED 1032 1075 1118 If the curve pattern C013 C056 C099 Quadratic this parameter defines the maximum voltage reduction in terms of theoretical V f pattern which is implemented at th
308. ference CIS Feedback Ramp sources selection 2 P000360 B Figure 63 Structure of the PID Regulator The figure above illustrates the block diagram of the PID regulator Each block is described below Block 1 PID reference sources Multiple reference sources can be selected at a time up to 3 reference sources can be selected with parameters C285 C286 C287 The resulting reference value depends on the setup in C291a see block 3 Dynamic selection is possible between two reference sources using the digital input configured as the source selector see C179 this parameter has effect only if the Two PIDs mode is activated Block 2 PID feedback sources Multiple feedback sources can be selected at a time up to 3 feedback sources can be selected with parameters C288 C289 C290 The resulting reference value depends on the setup in C291a see block 3 Dynamic selection is possible between two feedback sources using the digital input configured as the source selector see C179 this parameter has effect only if the Two PIDs mode is activated 391 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE C285 C286 C287 Sources PIDref vector 11 0 Disabled 1 Ref 2 AIN1 PID Reference 1 Sources PIDref vector C285 Ref Max P246 3 AINZ PTC Max 4 FIN 5 Serial Link PID Reference 2 Sources PIDref vector C286 Ref Ramps C291A gt 6 Field bus 7 Keypad PID Refere
309. follows 5 3 51 1V 51 100 P052 10V P052a 100 Speed Min 028 100 rpm Speed 029 1100 rpm The setup in the second part of the figure is as follows P050 3 51 1V 51 100 P052 10 P052a 100 Speed Min 028 1200 rom Speed 029 400rpm Analog Input Speed Saturation Input type C029 P052a 4 10 0V M037 10 0V C028 P051a f f Offset P051 P052 P000334 B 111 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE Figure 11 Computing REF Input Example 3 The Setup in Figure 11 is as follows P050 0 P051 5 51 100 P052 8 052 100 Speed Min C028 300 Speed C029 1450 rpm 112 482 INSTRUCTIONS nu iDrive 13 3 List of Parameters P050 to P074a Table 22 List of parameters 5 to 74 Type of signal over REF input ADVANCED 3 0 10V Value of REFinput producing min reference X axis ADVANCED Percentage of Speed_Min Trq_Min producing min reference Y axis related to 51 ABN ANCER Value of REF input producing max reference X axis ADVANCED Percentage of Speed Max producing max reference Y axis related to P052 ADVANCED Offset over REF input ADVANCED Filtering time ove
310. for a time longer than P255 P455 for PID2 the drive is automatically put on stand by In the last block the PID output is applied to the function defined by the PID Action parameter C294 The PID regulator structure is detailed in the diagram below block 5 P240 P241 P242 td 243 aot PID Out M Inverse Anti P238 P236 Wind Up Reference PID Normal Out PID Out gt err dt P260 ox Set gt Min Desaturation 5929 237 Algoritm PID Out Min Feedback PID Deriv Max P239 gt dt 239 000341 Figure 66 Details of the PID regulator structure with and parameter C291 is replaced with parameter C291b Parameters C292 The PID2 structure is the same as the PID structure but parameters P2xx are replaced A and C293 common for PID and PID2 Block 6 Digital input for PID contol selection Block 6 activates only when both PIDs are enabled 291 2 PID or when 2 Zone mode C291a 2 Zone MIN or 2 Zone MAX 393 482 aids L e In Two PIDs mode if 171 Disabled the PID output is summed with the PID2 output if C171a is enabled the logic state of the configured input determines w
311. for no load rotation of the connected motor up to 90 of its constant speed Manual tune of the speed loop Analog outputs AOI and are displayed showing the speed reference and the speed value obtained with the preset parameters of the speed regulator see the SPEED LOOP AND CURRENT BALANCING MENU Set the current regulator s parameters in order to reduce to a minimum the difference between the two waveforms Manual tune of the current loop If automatic tuning 1 FOC Auto no rotation fails the current loop may be manually tuned Display analog outputs AOI and AO2 showing the current reference value and the current value measured Set the current regulator s parameters see the FOC REGULATORS MENU in order to reduce to a minimum the difference between the two waveforms Manual tune of the flux loop The correct parameters of the flux regulator are calculated whenever the rotor time constant value changes see 2 FOC Auto rotation However you can manually tune the flux loop Display analog outputs AO1 and AO2 showing the flux reference value and the flux value obtained Set the current regulator s parameters in order to reduce to a minimum the difference between the two waveforms See the FOC REGULATORS MENU If Manual tune is selected do the following to quit the function disable the ENABLE command and set 1073 Disable After tuning the rotor time constant whenever the time constant value is manually NOTE
312. g from 10V and the following variables are selected Speed Ref speed reference at constant rpm 12 AO3 Current of the connected motor Depending on the inverter size 20 1 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS As per the analog outputs the ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU allows selecting the variable to be represented its range its acquisition mode or as an absolute value the type of analog output voltage current and the output values corresponding to the min value and the max value of the selected variable An offset value and a filtering function may also be applied to the analog outputs For the frequency output this menu contains the parameters for the selection of the represented variable its acquisition mode or as an absolute value its min value and max value and the corresponding output frequency value and a filtering function The figure below shows the typical structure of the analog outputs in particular AOlanalog output and its parameter set are illustrated 146 482 PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Val Max Out P180 P179 P183 Offset 4 181 gt lt gt DAC Selection Vector Selection Val Min Out Min P178 P182 PO00338 b Figure 15 Typical structure of the Analog Outputs Vector Selection Selects the variable to be represented through the digital analog converter DAC P177 is the selection parameter for AOlanalog out
313. g variable is selected a logic TEST is performed to obtain a TRUE FALSE Boolean signal Eight different tests are available that can be performed for selected variable A and its comparing value A Table 55 Test functions GREATER THAN Selected variable comparing value GREATER THAN EQUAL TO Selected variable gt comparing value LOWER Selected variable comparing value LOWER THAN EQUAL TO Selected variable lt comparing value ABS GREATER THAN Absolute value selected variable gt comparing value ABS GREATER THAN EQUAL TO Absolute value selected variable gt comparing value ABS LOWER Absolute value selected variable lt comparing value ABS LOWER THAN EQUAL TO Absolute value selected variable lt comparing value This parameter can accessed only if the operating mode the selected digital output is gt 2 Example MPL1 P350 gt 2 Operation on variable B digital output MPL1 2 3 4 P3 P363 P372 P381 If an analog variable is selected a logic TEST is performed to obtain a TRUE FALSE Boolean signal Eight different tests are available that can be performed for selected variable B and its comparing value B see Table 57 NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 and lt 9 Example MPL1 2 lt P350 lt 9 Reference threshold for P351 P360 P369 P378 MPL1 P355 P364 P373 P382 Defines the c
314. gital output is other than zero Example MDO1 P2700 24 2 Programmable Operating Modes Diagrams The diagrams shown in the figures illustrate the operating structure of MDO1 digital output the remaining digital outputs MDO2 MDO4 will follow the same logics as implemented the relevant parameters 1 271 DO Disable D1 Inverter Run D2 Inverter Ok On D3 Inverter Ok Off P278 Selected Quantity A Out RES Vector Selection Logic 00260 Figure 32 DIGITAL Mode 198 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Comparing Value fortest A Vector Selection A P000263 B Testing Quantity B Figure 33 ANALOG Mode Selected Quantity A Selected loge Quantis Function Vector Selection B P000261 B Figure 34 DOUBLE DIG MAL Mode 199 482 iDri PROGRAMMING L Q 270 Digital output mode Vector Selection A Selected TestA Out Test 2 Vector Selection B Selected Test B 000262 Figure 35 General structure of the parameterization of a digital output 200 482 PROGRAMMING ses LONNE 24 3 Examples This section illustrates some examples A table stating the set up of the parameters used is given for each example Parameters highlighted in grey have no effect due to their preset selection Example 1 Digital output for Inverter Alarm digital command MDO3 digital output
315. gs P320 Meal Type O Disable P321 Offset Meal 0 322 2 Type O Disable P323 Offset Mea2 0 P324 Mea3 Type O Disable P325 Offset Mea3 0 P326 Mea4 Type O Disable P327 Offset Mea4 0 P33x Fieldbus Parameters P330 fbs meas3 M012 Torq Out P331 fbs meas4 M022 PID Out P35x P38x MPL P350 Out Mode 0 Disable P351 Out1Sell DO Disable P352 Out1Sel2 DO Disable P353 Out1 Test 0 gt 54 11 Test2 0 gt P355 D01 ValTst 0 356 001 ValTst2 0 P357 OutlFunc 0 A OR B P357a Out1Sell 00 Disable P357b OutlFunc 0 OR P358 Outl Logic 1 True P359 Out2Mode 0 Disable P360 Out2Sell DO Disable P361 Out2Sel2 DO Disable P362 Out2 Test 0 gt P363 Out2 Test2 0 gt P364 D02 ValTst 0 365 002 ValTst2 0 P366 Out2Func 0 A OR B P366a Out2Sell DO Disable P366b Out2Func 0 f A B OR C P367 Out2Logic 1 True P368 Out3Mode 0 Disable P369 Out3Sell DO Disable P370 Out3Sel2 DO Disable P371 Out3 Test 0 gt P372 Out3 Test2 0 gt P373 D03 ValTst 0 P374 D03 ValTst2 0 P375 Out3Func 0 A P375a Out3Sell DO Disable P375b Out3Func 0 f A B OR C P376 Out3Logic 1 True P377 Out4Mode 0 Disable P378 Out4Sell DO Disable P379 Out4Sel2 DO Disable P380 Out4 Test 0 gt P381 Out4 Test2 0 gt P382 D04 ValTst 0 P383 D04 ValTst2 0 P384 Out4Func 0 A OR P384a Out4Sell DO Disable P384b Out4Func 0 OR C P385 Out4Logic 1 True P39x Auxiliary Reference
316. h PO61 P062 Value of AIN2 Input Producing Max Reference X axis 100 100 if PO60 0 10 0 V 10 0 if 60 0 10 V 200 200 if P060 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if 60 1 20 mA 40 200 if P060 2 4 0mA 20 0 mA if PO60 2 4 20 mA 0 100 if PO60 10 0V if P0602 3 O 10 V 200 if 60 4 0 0 20 0 mA if P060 4 0 20 mA This parameter selects the value for AIN2 input signal for maximum reference or better the reference set in 029 062 Master mode or in C048 062 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and 91 will used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used 62 Percentage of Speed _Min Trq_ Min Producing Max Reference Y axis related to P062 1000 100 0 PIE 100 7583 ADVANCED 74555 58 701 This parameter represents the max speed percentage or the min torque 7119 percentage for a torque reference to be used for the maximum reference set with 062 Offset over AIN2 Input 10 00V 10 00 V if P060 0 o 3 2000 2000 20 00 20 00 mA if PO6O 1 2 4 Default FV ADVANCED 663 This parameter selects the offset correction value of AIN2 analog signal that has been measured The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation or conversion its unit of measure is the same as the one of the signal selected for AIN2
317. h digits MM indicate the start month 01 January 12 December Example European Union 5703 last Sunday in March USA 2703 second Sunday in March Brazil 3710 third Sunday in October If the first digit of the parameteris higher than or equal to 6 The first two digits WD correspond to the month when the DST starts added to 60 61 corresponds to 1 91 corresponds to 31 The third and fourth digit MM indicate the start month 01 corresponds to January 12 corresponds to December Example 7504 15 April 437 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS R051 DST Start HHMM Hour Minutes 100 2400 100 2400 200 ENGINEERING This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated 021 ENABLE The first digit or the first two digits if the total digits are 3 or 4 respectively correspond to the start date The last two digits correspond to the minutes Example 200 2h 00m 2400 Oh Om midnight between the day set 050 and the previous day Function R052 DSTEnd WDMM Week Day Month 0 9112 0 9112 Default 5710 5710 Level ENGINEERING This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger 5851 is installed and activated 021 ENABLE Address 526 If the first digit of the parameter is lower than 6 The first digit W indicates the week of the month when the DST ends 1 first week 2 sec
318. han 4 mA or greater than 20 mA alarms A067 or A103 trip 3 0 10 V Unipolar voltage input between and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 4 0 20 mA Unipolar current input between 0 mA and 20 The detected signal is saturated between these two values NOTE allowing selecting the proper electric circuit for the analog signal processing i The value set in parameter P055 must match with the status of switch SWI 2 voltage signal or current signal P056 Value of AIN1 Input Producing Min Reference X axis 100 100 if P055 0 10 0V 410 0 V if 0 10V 200 200 if P055 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if 5 1 20 40 200 if 55 2 4 0 20 0 mA if 2 4 20 mA 0 100 if P055 3 OOV 10 0V if P0552 3 0 10V 0 200 if 55 4 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if 4 0 20 mA Default 273 ADVANCED Address This parameter selects the value for AINT input signal for minimum reference Function or better the reference set in C028xP056a Master mode or in C047xP056a Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used P056a Percentage of Speed Min Trg Min Producing Min Reference Y axis related to P056 ADVANCED 677 This parameter represents the min speed percentage or the min torque percentage for a torque reference to b
319. hat the master ensures a constant sequence of legal messages FIELDBUS CONFIGURATION MENU with max time intervals lower than the preset watchdog time 3 Set longer watchdog times see RO16 4 To reset alarm A070 force communication between the Master and the IDrive drive with bit 15 of the digital input word always set to 1 and reset the drive control board If communication between the Master and the Slave IDrive cannot be restored alarm A070 is restored after setting parameter RO16 to zero and after resetting the IDrive drive When the drive is next powered The alarm reset will affect the drive control board 072 3 A089 90 Parameter Upload Download Enor from Keypad to Drive Upload download failed one of the controls of the parameter consistency detected a fault A communication error occured while uploading downloading the programming parameters from the keypad to the drive Temporary interruption to the serial between keypad and control board Check the connection between the keypad and the control board reset the alarm and perform a new upload download procedure 1 21171 Drive thermal protection tripped The output current has been exceeding the drive rated current for long e Current equal to Ipeak 20 for 3 seconds Possible e Current equal to Imax 120 seconds 505 530 2 4 e Current equal to Imax for 60 seconds 541 590 2 4 and all the 5T 6T models Check the drive curr
320. he 2 Tests P304a MDO4 Selecting Variable C OR A SET B RESET A AND B A XOR B A NOR B A NAND B AN OR B A OR BY AN AND B A AND BY 10 A RESET B SET RISING EDGE 11 A SET B RESET FALLING EDGE 12 A RESET B SET FALLING EDGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADVANCED 904 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 648 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO4 digital output The digital signals that can be selected are given in Table 41 P304b MDO4 Function Applied to the Result of f A B C 0 OR C 1 SET C RESET RISING EDGE 2 AND C 3 XOR C 4 f A B NOR 5 NAND 6 A B N OR C 7 OR 8 f A B AND C 9 AND CY 10 f A B RESET C SET RISING EDGE 11 SET C RESET FALLING EDGE 12 RESET SET FALLING EDGE A SET B RESET ADVANCED 649 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value 219 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P305 MDO4 Output Logic Level ADVANCED 905 MDO4 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the
321. he LIMITS MENU of the active motor C 188a C 188b 188c Inputs for PID MULTIREFERENC ES 0 5 Inactive 1 8 5 MDII 8 9 12 13 16 TFL4 17 24 2 XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or 870 is fitted ADVANCED 1365 1366 1367 This function allows generating up to 7 PID references that can be programmed with parameters 81 to P087a according to the operating mode selected with P080a The 3 functions determine which is the active reference among the 7 available PID references the active value 1 or the inactive value 0 of each programmed input signal determines a bit logic value where MULTIREF is the least significant bit bit 0 and MULTIREF 2 is the most significant bit bit 2 If one of the available functions is not programmed the value of the relevant bit is zero 347 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE Table 96 Selection of PID Multireferenc es Bit 2 Bit 1 BitO Multireference selected MULTIRFERENC E 2 MULTIRFERENCE 1 MULTIRFERENC E 348 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 36 ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 36 1 Overview Three quick acquisition digital inputs are available in the IDrive control board e MDI6 ECHA FINA e MDI7 ECHB MDI8 FINB These inputs can be used as encoder reading encoder A or as frequency inputs In addition if ES836 or ES913 option board is used
322. he Product Menu includes parameter P263 Language allowing the user to select a dialog language it also contains the Fire Mode enabling Password and the following information read only about the product Product Name and Type Implemented Software SW Versions Serial Number Manufacturer 9 2 List of Parameter P263 and Fire Mode Enable Password Table 10 List of parameter P263 and Fire Mode Enable Password P263 Language BASIC 1 ENGLISH 863 g E Fire Mode Enable BASIC 0 868 Password P263 Lanquage 0 ITALIANO 1 ENGLISH 2 ESPANOL 3 PORTUGUES 4 DEUTSCH 1 ENGLISH The dialog language is factory set to English Use parameter P263 to choose a different language The software implemented display keypad is called MMI man machine interface its version is displayed in the SW screen of the Product Menu CAUTION By request Lonne Scandinavia AS can provide the extended version of the MMI software containing languages different from the ones mentioned above 78 482 INSTRUCTIONS Product Name and Type LONNE Bis Fan control bits O to 3 0 3 see Table 16 Voltage class bits 4107 0 3 see Table 12 Drive size bits 8 to 15 0 7 81 see Table 11 Type 1593 This screen displays the name of the product iDrive and the type of product see example below The product name iDrive appears in the second line of the di
323. he Result of f A B C 250 482 0 OR C 1 A B SET C RESET RISING EDGE 2 AND C 3 XOR C 4 NOR C 5 NAND 6 A B N OR C 7 OR 8 f A B AND C 9 AND CY 10 f A B RESET C SET RISING EDGE 11 SET C RESET FALLING EDGE 12 RESET SET FALLING EDGE 0 OR ADVANCED 937 This parameter determines the logic function applied to the result of the two tests allowing calculating the output value e PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P376 MPL3 Output Logic Level 0 TRUE 1 FALSE ADVANCED 976 MPL3 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied P377 MPLA Digital Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT DIGITAL ADVANCED 977 This parameter defines the operating mode of virtual digital output 4 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter See Table 41 DO Disable ADVANCED 978 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MPLA digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MPLA digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables ar
324. he drive RUN and press the STOP key to disable the drive RUN If C185 Free Wheel when removing the STARTcommand the drive will carry out NOTE 4 the deceleration ramp and will be put on stand by 326 482 PROGRAMMING M c LONNE Dive 35 1 2 ENABLE TERMINAL 15 MDI2 The ENABLE input function is assigned to terminal and enables the drive operation cannot be set to other terminals whereas the same terminal may be assigned to different functions The ENABLE input is always to be activated to enable the inverter operation irrespective of the control mode If the ENABLE input is disabled the drive output voltage is always set to zero so the connected motor starts idling the motor idles and stops due to friction or the mechanical load In case of pulled loads e g lifting applications when the motor is idling the mechanical load could cause the motor to run at uncontrolled speed If the ENABLE input is disabled when the drive is controlling the motor it is closed with a delay time depending on the drive size This ENABLE delay starts from the instant when the input is disabled irrespective of the enable delay if any set through a software timer in MDI2 The operating mode and the logic used by the ENABLE input to enable disable the drive also depends on the programming of the ENABLE S and DISABLE functions If the IFD control is used the drive enabling also depends on the SIARTinput and the curre
325. he first legal message NOTE sent from the master see Alarm A070 Communication Suspended thus preventing alarm 070 from tripping due to different power on times between master station 436 482 and the IDrive drive e PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 53 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME 53 1 Overview installed even the ES851 RTC version only and if parameter R021 Data Logger setting The Daylight Saving Time menu may be accessed only if the Data Logger board is AN is set to 2 ENABLE Parameters 050 to R053 set the DST rules for the Clock Calendar of the Data Logger or the ES851 RTC See DATE AND TIME MENU NOTE By setting parameters 050 and R052 to 0 the DST is managed 53 2 List of Parametres R050 to R053 Table 118 List of Parameters R050 to R053 R050 DST Start WDMM 5703 524 R051 DST Start 200 525 R052 DST End WDMM 5710 526 R053 DST End 200 527 R050 DST Start WDMM Week Day Month 049112 5703 5703 ENGINEERING This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger ES851 is installed and activated R021 ENABLE 524 If the first digit of the parameteris lower than 6 The first digit W indicates the week of the month when the DST starts 1 first week 2 second week 3 third week 4 fourth week 5 last week The second digit D indicates the day of the week 1 Monday 7 Sunday The third and fourt
326. he max value and the min value of the PID reference set in parameters P245 P246 Always active This is the measure of the PID reference expressed as a percentage Scaling is detailed in the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU MO18a PID2 Reference at Constant RPM 96 100 00 76 Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min value of the PID2 reference set in parameters P445 P446 This is the measure percent of the reference selected with C286 for the PID2 or the 2 zone mode Scaling is detailed in the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU 100 00 76 Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min value of the PID reference set in parameters P245 P246 Always active This is the measure of the PID reference after the ramps expressed as a percentage Scaling is detailed in the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU 1100 00 76 Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min value of the PID2 reference set in parameters Pd45 P446 This measure is active if enabled from C291a This is the measure percent of the current PID reference after the ramps selected with C286 for the PID2 or the 2 zone mode Scaling is detailed in the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU 57 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 20 PID Feedback 90 100 00 Note The actual range depends the max value and the mi
327. he offset of the input analog signal if PO53 0 offset is zero while parameter P054 defines the filtering time constant factory setting PO54 5ms Type of input for each analog input Dip Switch SWI allows setting the acquisition method of the input signal voltage signal or current signal The voltage signal can be bipolar 10V 10 or unipolar OV 10V The current signal can be bipolar 20mA 20mA Unipolar 20mA can have a minimum offset 4mA 20 The user will set each analog input mode in parameters 50 55 PO60 Table 21 Analog Input Hardware Mode Single ended input 10V Input SW1 1 off 1 2 REF 0 20mA Input SW1 1 on m 10V Input SW 1 2 off Differential input 5 6 AINT 0 20mA Input SWI 2 on P055 10V Input SW1 3 off SW1 4 5 off POGO Differential input 7 8 AIN2 0 20mA Input SW1 3 on SW1 4 5 off PTC Input SW1 3 off SW1 4 5 on See note NOTE If AIN2 input is configured as PTC refer to the MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU to select the proper parameters Its measures are no longer valid Configurations different from the ones stated the table above are allowed CAUTION For each analog input REF AIN2 make sure that the mode parameter setting 50 P055 60 matches with the setting of the relevant SW1 Dip Switches Scaling is obtained by setting the parameters relating to the linear function for the c
328. he same terminal Max two functions can be programmed to the same input Table 88 List of parameters C 149 to C188c and 1006 1006 Function selection for MDI control ADVANCED 1393 inactive C149 START Input ADVANCED 1149 C149a START Input B ADVANCED 1297 none C150 STOP Input ADVANCED 150 none C150a STOP B Input ADVANCED 1298 none 151 REVERSE Input ADVANCED 115 none 151 REVERSE Input ADVANCED 1299 none C152 ENABLE S Input ADVANCED 1152 none C153 DISABLE Input ADVANCED 153 none C154 Disable RESET alarms on MDI3 ADVANCED 154 NO C155 MULTISPEED 0 Input ADVANCED 155 MDIA C156 MULTISPEED 1 Input ADVANCED 156 MDI5 C157 MULTISPEED 2 Input ADVANCED 1157 none C158 MULTISPEED 3 Input ADVANCED 158 none C159 CW CCW Input ADVANCED 1159 MDI8 C160 DCB Input ADVANCED 1160 none C161 UP Input ADVANCED 1161 none C162 DOWN Input ADVANCED 162 none C163 RESET UP DOWN Input ADVANCED 163 none C164 External alarm 1 Input ADVANCED 164 none C164a External alarm 1 trip delay ADVANCED 1305 immediate C165 External alarm 2 Input ADVANCED 1165 none C165a External alarm 2 trip delay ADVANCED 1306 immediate C 166 External alarm 3 Input ADVANCED 1166 none C166a External alarm 3 trip delay ADVANCED 1307 immediate C167 MultiRamp 0 Input ENGINEERING 1167 none C168 MultiRamp 1 Input ENGINEERING 168 none C169 JOG Input AD
329. here P is the rated power expressed W and w is the rated speed of rotation expressed in radiants sec Example the rated torque of a 15kW motor at 1420rpm is equal to 15000 C 100 2 Nm 1420 2n 60 The starting torque is rated torque 120 121 1 Nm 276 482 INSTRUCTIONS 32 2 LONNE List of Parameters C008 to C128 Table 71 List of parameters 008 to C 128 iDrive 008 Rated mains voltage BASIC 1008 C009 N of configured motors ENGINEERING 1009 2 380 480V 010 1 010 C053 2 Type of control algorithm BASIC 1053 0 IFD 096 1096 Coll 1 1011 C054 2 Type of reference ADVANCED 1054 0 Speed MASTER mode C097 M3 1097 012 1012 C055 2 Speed feedback from encoder BASIC 1055 0 No 98 1098 1 1 1013 C056 2 Type of curve BASIC 1056 See Table 75 and Table 79 C099 1099 C014 1 1014 057 2 Phase rotation ENGINEERING 1057 0 No C100 M3 100 15 M1 1015 C058 M2 Rated motor frequency BASIC 1058 50 0 Hz C101 M3 1101 016 1 1016
330. hese two values 1 20 mA Bipolar current input between 20 and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values 27179 2 24 20 Unipolar current input with min threshold between 4 mA 20 The detected signal is saturated between these two values Before being saturated if the detected signal is lower than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA alarms 066 or A102 trip 3 0 10 V Unipolar voltage input between 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 4 0 20 mA Unipolar current input between 0 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values The value set in parameter 50 must match with the status of SWI 1 switch allowing selecting the proper electric circuit for the analog signal processing voltage signal or current signal P051 Value of REF Input Producing Min Reference X axis 100 100 if 050 0 10 0V 050 0 10 200 200 if 50 1 20 0 mA 200 mA if 1 20 40 200 if 0 2 4 0 20 0 mA if 2 4 20 mA 100 if P050 3 0 0 100V if 3 0 10V 0 200 if P050 4 00 20 0 mA if 50 4 0 20 mA ADVANCED This parameter selects the value for REF input signal for minimum reference or better the reference set CO28xPO5la Master mode or in 47 51 Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used
331. hich is the output of the PID regulator be used 0 gt PID 1 PID2 In 2 zone mode if C171a is enabled when the selected input is activated the 2 zone mode MIN or MAX is disabled In that case the PID regulator always operates on the error resulting from C285 C288 and with parameters P2xx The PID regulator output may be used as external output speed torque reference of the drive speed torque reference increase if the control is used the PID regulator input may be used for correcting the output voltage If the PID regulator output is the speed reference of the drive the selected speed torque ramp is applied SERIAL LINK The Serial Link source is an input from the MODBUS link the reference value shall be written by the user to the following addresses Table 109 Reference sources from serial link 1418 1031 BASIC PID Reference PID reference value Set in P267 1420 1033 BASIC PID Feedback PID feedback value Set in P267 44 3 List of Parameters C285 to C294 Table 110 List of parameters C 285 to C 294 C285 Selection of PID reference 1 ENGINEERING 1285 2 AIN1 C286 Selection of PID reference n 2 ENGINEERING 1286 O Disable C287 Selection of PID reference n 3 ENGINEERING 1287 O Disable C288 Selection of PID feedback n 1 ENGINEERING 1288 3 AIN2 PTC C289 Selection of PID feedback n 2 ENGINEERING 1289 O Disable C290 Selectio
332. hine 272 Figure 42 Types of programmable V f Curves 273 Fig re 43 Torqge contrel withispeecrllbnib iR 281 Figure 44 Current limit decreased based on the carrier frequency essen enne nnne 306 Fig re 45 Selecting the command 312 Figure 46 Selecting the source references 317 Figure 47 Inputs that can be selected implement control FUNCTIONS 324 Figure 48 Controlling Run and Direction when the STOP Input is not programmed 333 Figure 49 Controlling Run and Direction when the STOP Input is programmed 334 Figure 50 Using Two encoders example 3 1 2 inii iniri PE a P E ber dus 351 Figures S1 DEB DEB sis 360 Figure 52 DCB at Start with VIC 361 362 Figure 54 Manual DCB Example 1 363 Figure 59 Manual DCB Example 2 3 EE FERE PERI 364 Figure 56 Manual DCB Example 3 nennen nennen tenens enne 365 Figure 57 Power Down Example 369 Figure 58 Speed Searching 376 Figure 59 Speed Searc
333. hing Example 2 inest eee pet eae eae CERTES eH REENEL 377 Figure 60 Trip current drop depending on speed 383 LO e Figure 61 Set up of parameter C267 depending on the LRC FLC 386 Figure 62 Trip delay of alarm A075 based on the IEC Class ssessesessessessesorsessesorsessesonseesoroesoeseesorsesorseesersesoesersessesens 387 Figure 63 Structure of the PID Regulator 391 Figure 64 Reference source and feedback source selection essent 392 Figure 65 PID ramp FETEENGCE m 393 Figure 66 Details of the PID regulator STM CHUTE 393 Figure 67 Keeping fluid level constant 402 0 3 Tables Table 1 Coding of Measures M031 32 61 Table 2 Coding of Measures M033 M034 5 63 Table 3 Coding of Measures M036 M0360 63 Table 4 Coding of Measure MOS56 68 Table 5 Coding ot Measure 56 oreet 68 Table 6 Measure MOSED E 68 Coding Of MEGSUFE ct E 69 Table 8 Data Logger CONNECTION status 74 Table 9 Coding of the functions assigned to the digital inputs
334. iDrive MULTIFUNCTION AC DRIVE USER MANUAL Programming Instructons Issued on 24 7 2012 R 01 English e This manual is integrant and essential to the product Carefully read the instructions contained herein as they provide important hints for use and maintenance safety e This device is to be used only for the purposes it has been designed to Other uses should be considered improper and dangerous The manufacturer is not responsible for possible damages caused by improper erroneous and irrational uses e Lonne Scandinavia AS is responsible for the device in its original setting e Any changes to the structure or operating cycle of the device must be performed or authorized by the Engineering Department of Scandinavia AS e Scandinavia AS assumes no responsibility for the consequences resulting by the use of non original spare parts e Scandinavia AS reserves the right to make any technical changes to this manual and to the device without prior notice If printing errors or similar are detected the corrections will be included in the new releases of the manual e The information contained herein is the property of L nne Scandinavia AS and cannot be reproduced L nne Scandinavia AS enforces its rights on the drawings and catalogues according to the law LONNE DRIVE TECHNOLOGY L nne Scandinavia AS Liamyrane 12 N 5132 Nyborg Norway Tel 47 55 39 10 00 Fax 47 55 39 11 00 www onne
335. ia display keypad is required see the DATA LOGGER MENU 2 OK interlocked ES851 is ready to be configured even through the display keypad of the drive where it is installed M100 ES851 Fault Line 4 No alarm Parameter save fault Log write error FBS configuration failure RS232 Modbus configuration failure RS485 Modbus configuration failure 0 6 99 104 TCP IP stack configuration failure 99 Flash card lacking or inaccessible 100 Invalid stream access 101 TCP IP socket fault 102 Dial out connection failure 103 Control board clock failure 104 Modem initialization failure This measure is active only if programmed from parameter RO21 This indicates a general alarm tripped for ES851 In case an alarm trips please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s CUSTOMER SERVICE and mention the alarm code and name 73 482 MT PROGRAMMING Div LONNE M101 Connection Status Bit controlled measure See Table 8 This measure is active only if programmed from parameter RO21 Status of the connections supported by ES851 Note that the COMI serial link is RS232 by default whereas COM 2 is 5485 by default For more details please refer to the Programming Instructions manual for the Data Logger ES851 Table 8 Data Logger connection status Type of modem connection failure 0 None 1 Dial KO 2 Connect KO 3 Authentication KO 4 IPCP KO 5 Modem not yet initialized 6 Modem init KO 7 Modem n
336. ical D20 MDI8 MDI8 digital input remote OR physical 023 MDI 1 Delayed Digital input remote OR physical DELAYED by MDI timers Speed measured or estimated higher than 0 5 rom S U UO U UO UO UO B 024 MD 4 027 MDI 5 029 MDI 7 190 482 Delayed Delayed Delayed Delayed D30 MDI 8 Delayed a D31 ENABLE DL ENABLE Digital input remote AND physical DELAYED by MDI timers MDIS Di MDI7 Di MDI8 Di DI1 Di o DI1 Digi gi gi inpu inpu inpu inpu inpu remote OR physical g remote OR physical remote OR physical remote OR physi remote OR physi ca DELAYED by MDI timers DELAYED by MDI timers DELAYED by MDI timers DELAYED by MDI timers DELAYED by MDI timers PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE iDrive 191 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Speed tracking error SetPoint Measure gt Error Fault of the cooling fan Command 1 from fieldbus Command 2 from fieldbus Command 3 from fieldbus Command 4 from fieldbus Fire Mode function LOCAL Mode Constant speed reference reached D41 Fan ON Fan activation command XMDI1 Auxiliary digital input XMDI2 Auxiliary digital input XMDI3 Auxiliary digital input XMDI4 Auxiliary digital input XMDI5 Auxiliary digital input XMDI6 Auxiliary digital input XMDI7 Auxiliary digital input XMDI8 Auxiliary digi
337. ided with the NTC sensor see Table 13 in the PRODUCT MENU If this sensor is not provided the measure is forced to 32 000 corresponding to 320 0 C 71 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE MO65 Operation Time Counter 65000 0 650000h Active Always active Address Time elapsed after resetting the operation time counter The Operation Time is the Function activation time of the drive IGBTs MO66 Supply Time Counter Range 0 65000 0 650000h Active Always active Address Time elapsed after resetting the supply time counter M089 Drive Status See Table 125 Always active Describes the current condition of the IDrive drive Alarm tripped at the moment 72 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 8 9 Data Logger Measures Menu This menu displays the status of the types of connections serial links Ethernet and modem supported by ES851 Data Logger board This menu can be viewed only if the Data Logger board is fitted See also the DATA LOGGER MENU M100 Data Logger Status Line 3 0 NOT FITTED 1 OK not interlocked 2 OK interlocked This measure is active only if programmed from parameter R021 0 NOTATIED 5851 not installed on the IDrive drive 1 not interlocked 851 is operating independently of the drive where it is installed program ES851 a connection to a computer via the RemoteDrive software is required or a special preset set v
338. ieldbus When 6 digital input in the terminal board is open terminal 19 the command sources and reference sources 1 are selected Keypad and AINI analog input control mode A When is closed the command sources and reference sources n 2 are selected Fieldbus control mode is considered whereas the Fieldbus and AIN1 control sources are considered as In the example above if C179 Disable the OR logic for the Keypad and Fieldbus CAUTION summed up See also parameter C179 the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 29 482 e PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 4 4 12 Fire Mode When the digital input programmed as FIRE MODE is activated all the protecting functions of the drive are ignored so that no alarm trips when the drive is operating pumps to protect human lives This function must never be used to prevent alarms from tripping in domestic or industrial applications To activate the parameters relating to the Fire Mode enter the Password in the NOTE The Fire Mode function must be used only when itis strictly necessary such as in fire CAUTION PRODUCT MENU This Password is provided L nne Scandinavia AS s Service Department The drive Serial Number is required see the Serial Number parameter in the PRODUCT MENU The following parameters can be accessed only after entering the Password enabling the Fire Mode e P032 Acceleration Ramp in Fire Mode see the RAMPS MENU e P033 Deceleration
339. if 14 2 1 s 0 327000 s if 14 3 105 5 74 78 Determines the time the reference takes to go from rpm to the preset speed considering the max value between absolute values for max speed and min speed set for the selected motor If ramps are used the actual time the reference takes to reach constant rpm exceeds the time set in 009 for a percentage equal 22 23 2 96 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE iDrive 97 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Speed Ramp 1 Deceleration Time 0 327 00 if 14 0 gt 0 01 5 0 3270 0 if PO14 0 gt 0 1 0 32700 if PO14 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 if 14 0 105 0 32700 See Table 74 and Table 78 610 Determines the time the reference takes to go from the max preset speed considering the max value between absolute values for max speed and min speed set for the selected motor to zero rom If S ramps are used the actual time the reference takes to reach 0 speed exceeds the time set 010 for a percentage equal to 24 25 2 0 327 00 if 14 0 0 01 5 0 3270 0 if PO14 0 gt 0 1 0 32700 if PO14 0 gt 1 5 0 327000 s if 14 0 105 0 32700 See Table 74 and Table 78 ADVANCED Same as ramp 1 see 009 NOTE digital inputs are set up and that ramp 2 is selected see the DIGITAL INPUTS T Values for ramp 2
340. iliary Digital Inputs via Serial Link Range Bit controlled measure See Table 3 Active Always active Address State of the 8 auxiliary digital inputs via serial link M036b Auxiliary Digital Inputs via Bit controlled measure See Table 3 Always active 1717 State of the 8 auxiliary digital inputs via PROFidrive Table 3 Coding of Measures M036 M036a M036b Btn Digitalinput Digtaliut 0 XMDII 4 XMDI5 1 XMDI2 5 XMDI6 2 XMDI3 6 XMDI7 3 XMDI4 7 XMDI8 63 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 8 5 References Menu This menu contains the measures of the possible reference sources for speed torque PID available in the terminal board analog inputs frequency inputs and encoder input and sent via serial link or fieldbus M037 REF Extemal Analog Reference Function of the preset type Function of the type of reference voltage current set in Range of reference P050 The numerical value always includes two decimal voltage current figures the unit of measure is V or MA Always active Measure of the voltage current value detected by the drive in REF analog input M038 AIN1 Extemal Analog Reference Function of the preset type Function of the type of reference voltage current set in of reference 55 The numerical value always includes two decimal voltage current figures the unit of measure is V or MA Alway
341. ill be added removed whether required not required for the implemented application The dedicated applications implement the most common automation applications thus replacing PLCs or dedicated control boards and they reduce to a minimum the electric equipment required thus ensuring lower maintenance costs Such operating modes can be implemented through the firmware updating and or through additional interface boards The following applications are currently available IDrive Drive standard motor control IDrive Multipump 339 IDrive Regenerative In order to install your application SW and uodate the firmware packages the NOTE iDrive drive you can use the Remote Drive software provided by L nne Scandinavia AS Please refer to the RemoteDrive s User Manual for detailed instructions Any detail concerning optional functionality is given in separate manuals covering iDrive s optional applications 11 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 22 0 4 3 MENUS AND SUBMENUS This User Manual Programming Instructions is divided into different Menus Their sequence is the same as their display sequence in the display keypad and the RemoteDrive software Programming parameters and Measure parameters are divided into Mxxx Measures always Read Only Display on the display keypad and the Drive representation RemoteDrive integer may be a decimal figure plus unit of measure Type
342. ilure Mains Loss A064 3200 Internal voltage 3210 Internal overvoltage OverVoltage A048 3220 Internal undervoltage UnderVoltage A047 4000 Temperature PT100 Channel 1 Fault A105 PT100 Channel 2 Fault A106 PT100 Channel 3 Fault A107 PT100 Channel 4 Fault A108 4100 Ambient 4110 Excess ambient temperature Amb Overtemp A109 4300 Drive temperature 4310 Excess drive temperature Drive OverHeated A074 HeatSink Overheated A094 5000 Device hardware 5111 supply 15 V 15V Loss A087 5200 Control 5210 Measurement control ADC Not Tuned A088 5220 Computing circuit 5300 Operating unit Parm Lost Chk 072 Parm Lost A073 MMI Trouble A078 KeyPad WatchDog A081 Parm Lost COM2 A089 Parm Lost COM3 A090 5400 Power section Fan Fault A096 2nd Sensor Fault A099 5440 Contactors 5441 Contactor 1 manufacturer specific Bypass Circuit Fault A045 5442 Contactor 2 manufacturer specific Bypass Connector Fault A046 5443 Contactor 3 manufacturer specific Bypass Circuit Open A093 5500 Data storage 5510 RAM RAM Fault A049 466 482 PROGRAMMING Dri INSTRUCTIONS rive 6000 Device software 6010 Software reset Watchdog 6100 Internal software False Interrupt A043 Generic Motorola A063 Ims Interrupt OverTime 071 6200 User software User Fault A040 6300 Data record 6301 Data record No 1 SW Version KO A092 6302 Data record No 2 Option Board not in A054 63
343. ime Minutes 0 293 C353 TFL4 Time ON Seconds 0 294 54 TFL4 Time OFF Hour 0 295 C355 TFL4 Time OFF Minutes 0 296 C356 TFL4 Time OFF Seconds 0 297 C357 TFL4 Days of the week ADVANCED 0 298 C330 C337 C351 Hour of Activation of the Timed Hag 1 TR 3 THA ADVANCED 271 278 285 292 Sets the hour of activation of the timed flag TA 192 TAA ADVANCED 272 279 286 293 Sets the hour of activation of the timed flag 192 192 TAA 414 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE C332 C339 C346 C 353 Second of Activation of the Timed Hag TH 1 THA ADVANCED 273 280 287 294 Sets the second of activation of the timed flag 192 192 TAA ADVANCED 274 281 288 295 Sets the hour of deactivation of the timed flag 192 192 ADVANCED 275 282 289 296 Sets the minute of deactivation of the timed flag TA 2 TAA ADVANCED 276 283 290 297 Sets the second of deactivation of the timed flag TA 192 THA 415 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C336 C343 C350 C357 Days of the Week of the Activation of the Timed Hag 192 THA 0000000b 1111111b binary ADVANCED 277 284 291 298 Sets the second of deactivation of the timed flag 191 192 TAA Every bit corresponds to a day of the week bit 1 corresponds to Monday bit 7 corresponds to Sunday
344. inals U V W Remove voltage from the motor set IFD control and operate the drive in no load conditions 3 Check if the command signals are sent to the drive using screened cables where required see IDrive s Installation Instructions manual Detect external sources for electromagnetic disturbance check wiring and make sure that antidisturbance filters are installed on the coils of contactors and electrovalves if fitted inside the cabinet 4 If necessary set longer acceleration times see the RAMPS MENU 5 necessary set longer deceleration times see the RAMPS MENU 6 If necessary decrease the values set in the LIMITS MENU Bypass precharge Fault The drive forced to close its relay or contactor for the short circuit of the precharge resistors in DC link capacitors DC bus but it did not detect the relevant closing signal while precharging See also A046 e Disconnection of auxiliary signal e Precharge relay contactor failure 1 Reset the alarm send a RESETCommand 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service 451 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Precharge bypass connector fault A046 Bypass Connector Fault Auxiliary signal for the closing of the bypass connector of the short circuit precharge resistor is considered as closed before the relevant closing command is sent See also 045 Possible e Precharge bypass connector re
345. ing 4 SPEED SEARCHING Searching for motor speed 5 DCB at START DC Braking start 6 DCB at STOP DC Braking at stop 7 DCB HOLD DC current for Hold function 8 MANUAL DCB Manual DC Braking 9 LIMIT WHILE ACCEL Current torque limit while accelerating 10 LIMIT WHILE DECEL Current torque limit while decelerating 11 LIMIT AT ST SPD Current torque limit at constant rom 12 BRAKING Braking module startup or deceleration ramp extension 13 RUN AT ST SPEED Drive running at speed set point 14 ACCELERATING Drive running with motor in acceleration stage 15 DECELERATING Drive running with motor in deceleration stage 16 INVERTER OK Drive on Stand by with no alarms tripped 17 FLUXING Motor fluxing stage 18 FLUXED MOTOR Motor fluxed 19 FIRE MODE RUN Constant rom in Fire Mode 20 FIRE MODE ACC Acceleration in Fire Mode 21 FIRE MODE DEC Deceleration in Fire Mode 2 INVERTER 25 SPARE Board in Spare mode 27 WAIT NO ENABLE Waiting for opening ENABLE command 28 WAIT NO START Waiting for opening SIARTcommand 29 PIDOUT min DISAB Drive disabled due to PID output Min 30 REF min DISABLED Drive disabled due to REF lt Min 31 EONA NEI Drive enabled with control 32 IED WAITSTART waiting for START in order to start When fluxing the RUN command was not given within the max 33 DISABLE NO START time set in C183 The drive is kept disabled until the RUN command is given 47 1 482
346. instead of C028 and C047 if motor 3 is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used 51 Percentage of Speed _Min Trq Min Producing Min Reference Y axis related to P051 Range Default 1000 Level ADVANCED Address This parameter represents the min speed percentage or the min torque Function percentage for a torque reference to be used for the minimum reference set with 51 115 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 52 Value of REF Input Producing Max Reference X axis 100 100 if P050 0 10 0 V if PO50 0 10 V 200 200 if 50 1 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if 50 1 20 40 200 if PO50 2 4 0mA 20 0 mA if PO50 2 4 20 O 100 if 50 0 10 0V if PO50 3 0 10V 200 if 50 4 00 20 0 mA if 50 4 0 20 mA 652 This parameter selects the value for REF input signal for maximum reference or better the reference set CO29xP052a Master mode or CO48xP052a Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used P052a Percentage of Speed _Max Trq_Max Producing Max Reference Y axis related to P052 2 o 1000 1 100 0 Default oo NE ADVANCED 676 This parameter represents the max speed percentage or the max torque 779 percentage for a torque reference to be used for the maximum reference se
347. ion set C215 to YES or in Power Down mode set C234 Power Down Stop Mode as DCB DC Braking occurs after sending a stop with ramp command The speed level for DC Braking is set in C219 If The drive is in Power Down mode and C234 is set as DCB the speed level is set in C235 Power Down Stop Level The figure below illustrates the output speed and DC Braking trends when the DC Braking at Stop function is active Parameters used to program this function are the following C215 function enabling C217 braking duration C219 motor speed at the beginning of DC Braking C220 intensity of DC braking In Power Down mode if C234 Power Down Stop Mode is set as DCB C235 motor speed at the beginning of DC Braking Speed loc f C220 t gt Stari C217 Command ON OFF n P000353 b Figure 53 DCB at Stop Motor speed and DC Braking patterns when the DC BRAKING AT STOP function is active 362 482 e PROGRAMMING cs OLONNE 38 1 3 DC BRAKING COMMAND SENT FROM TERMINAL BOARD Activate the digital input set as DCB C160 to send a DC Braking command DC Braking duration is determined by the following formula t C217 nov C219 with nov C219 equal to mox 10 Possible cases tl gt t time t1 for braking command is longer than 1 To restart the motor following the preset acceleration ramp when DC Braking is over just disable the DCB command and disable and enable again the SIA
348. ions that can be associated to the other digital inputs see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU even the ES851 RTC version only and if parameter RO21 Data Logger setting is set to The Timed Flags Menu may be accessed only if the Data Logger board is installed cuis 2 ENABLE 47 2 Examples Every time flag features 3 parameters Hour Minute Second setting the activation time of the flag itself 3 parameters Hour Minute Second setting the deactivation time of the flag itself 1 parameter setting the days of the week when the flag shall activate If the activation time precedes the deactivation time the flag will have the TRUE logic value at the activation time whilst it will have the FALSE logic value at the deactivation time in the days of the week concerned If the activation time is subsequent to the deactivation time the flag will have the TRUE logic value at the activation time whilst it will have the FALSE logic value at the deactivation time of the following day Example 1 C330 TFL1 Time ON Hour 08 C331 TFL1 Time ON Minutes 00 C332 TFL1 Time Seconds 00 C333 TFL1 Time OFF Hour 20 C334 Time OFF Minutes 00 C335 TFL1 Time OFF Seconds 00 C336 TFL1 Days of the week 1000000 The timed flag TFL1 is TRUE from 8 00 00AM to 08 00 00PM every Monday Example 2 C330 TFL1 Time ON Hour 20 C331 TFL1 Time ON Minute
349. is not set at zero it determines the time limit after which Function alarm A062 WDG Serial Link 1 Alarm trips if the drive does not receive any legal message through serial link 1 RJ45 connector R013 Parity Bit for Serial Link 1 Rj 45 0 Disabled 1 Stop bit Rande 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit 9 2 Even 1 Stop bit Default Disabled 2 Stop bit Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter determines whether the parity bit is used or not when creating the MODBUS message through serial link 1 RJ45 connector Function 423 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 50 FIELDBUS CONFIGURATION MENU 50 1 Overview See the OPTIONAL BOARDS FOR FIELDBUS section in the IDrive s Installation Instructions NOTE ier Manual for the description of the optional board required Once saved they are active only when the drive is next switched on or when the control The parameters included in this menu are Rxxx parameters A did board is reset by holding down the RESETkey for more than 5 secs This menu is not applicable to ES919 communications boards see relevant section in the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual ES 19 boards act as gateways and change the MODBUS RS485 packets into the packets of each CAUTION protocol being used The exchanged parameters are all the measures from the IDrive to the Master and all the xxx inputs from the Master to the IDrive as detailed in the MEASURES MENU Table 82 R
350. is saved to the flash memory W16 PLEASE WAIT Wait until the system completes the operation required W17 SAVE IMPOSSIBLE Parameter save is not allowed The keypad interrupted parameter download to the drive Parameter W18 PARAMETERS LOST writing has failed As a result not all parameters have been updated parameter inconsistency PARAMETERS UPLOAD impossible LOAD W20 NOT NOW The required function is not available at the moment 21 The required function is inhibited because the drive is running Download failed because parameters saved to keypad memory relate to w23 DOWNLOAD VER a SW version or product ID incompatible with the drive SW version or product ID Download preliminary operation underway the system is checking the 24 VERIFY DATA integrity and compatibility of the parameters saved in the keypad memory W28 OPEN START Open and close the START MDI1 signal to start the drive Encoder tuning procedure finished the encoder is correctly connected W32 OPEN ENABLE Open and close the ENABLE MDI2 signal to enable the drive W33 WRITE IMPOSSIBLE Writing procedure impossible ILLEGAL DATA Illegal value entered operation failed w35 NO WRITE CONTROL ns procedure impossible because Control is active and the drive is W36 ILLEGAL ADDRESS Illegal address entered operation failed The drive is disabled and does not acknowledge the ENABLE command because it is writing
351. ith Resistor this parameter commands enabling resistor and DC bus relating to this operating condition allowing dissipating energy regenerated from the motor If no braking resistor is used energy regenerated from the motor cannot be dissipated In this condition the down ramp is extended if the variation in DC bus voltage is too rapid or exceeds certain threshold values Set a higher value in parameter C210 for a more sensitive ramp extension a lower rating of regenerated power allows obtaining longer ramps thus avoiding overvoltage Parameter C210 decreases the DC bus voltage threshold setting the ramp extension The k factor is as follows Pout Pmax 100 C210 k ranges from 1 0 to 1 3 NOE The greater the k factor the lower the DC bus level setting the ramp extension For example when C210 0 2 power Pout shall exceed 576 of Pmax in order to obtain k gt 1 When C210 2 0 5 of Pmax is required to obtain k gt 1 Parameter C210 is interlocked with parameter Gradient variation NOTE acceleration reset so that C210 0 01 With resistance cannot be programmed in conjunction with 0 No C211 Max Time of Continuous Su for Braking Resistance 0 32000 0 320 00 sec This parameter determines the max continuous operating time required for the braking resistance If the braking resistance is used for a time C211 without being activated the braking resistance command is automatically
352. ive as well the RUN command is enabled the speed or torque setpoint increases proportionally to the preset ramp until it reaches the active reference IFD control in order to enable the RUN command the main speed reference must be other than zero When SIARTis inactive but ENABLE is active the RUN command is disabled the reference is set to zero and The speed or torque setpoint decreases down to zero depending on the preset deceleration ramp The way the STARTenables or disables the RUN command also depends on the setup of other functions in particular the STOP REVERSE and J OG functions see parameters C150 C151 C169 If the REVERSE 151 0 function is enabled it can enable disable the RUN command However if the START and REVERSE commands are both active the RUN command is disabled NOTE In this case START is interpreted as FORWARD and REVERSE as REVERSE When both Start and Reverse are active the system cannot interpret the query to be FORWARD or REVERSE If the JOG function is enabled C1690 it can enable disable the RUN command but only if the RUN command has not been previously enabled by other functions If the STOP function is enabled C1500 the RUN command may be enabled disabled only by pressing the relevant key see the description of the STOP function C150 If only the keypad is enabled as the command source press the START key located on the keypad to enable t
353. k to see if the motor runs smoothly at constant speed If no failure occurred go to step 11 Otherwise check the drive connections paying particular attention to supply voltages DC link and input reference Also check if alarm messages are displayed In the MEASURES MENU check the speed reference 000 the reference speed processed by the ramps 002 the supply voltage of the control section M030 the DC link voltage M029 the condition of the control terminals M033 Check to see if these readouts match with the measured values When parameter Standby Only condition required for changing C parameters you can change parameters in the CONFIGURATION menu only when the drive is DISABLED or STOPPED whereas if P003 Standby Fluxing you can change Cxxx parameters when the motor is stopped but the drive is enabled Before changing any parameters remember that the correct code for parameter POOO must be previously set up You can write down any custom parameters in the table provided on the last pages of this Programming Manual If an alarm trips find the cause responsible for the alarm and reset the drive Enable input MDI3 terminal 16 for some time or press the RESETkey on the display keypad INSTRUCTIONS LONNE 7 3 FOC Motor Control 1 Wiring 2 Poweron 3 Parameter modification 4 Supply voltage 5 Motor parameters Follow the instructions stated
354. l Time 1 32000 1 0 32000 Disabled 763 motor n 2 770 motor n 3 FOC Ti Integral time of current regulator Id and in the field rotary reference for motor n 1 P166 and 170 relate to motors 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure integral satus integral status eror Ki Ts Output integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient is the integral coefficient 1 Ti where Ti is the integral time is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency NOTE This parameter is automatically computed and saved when the Autotuning procedure is performed see the AUTOTUNE MENU 144 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE bis P158 P165 P172 Hux Regulator Proportional Constant 0 00 650 00 Kp Proportional coefficient of PI flux regulator for motor n 1 P165 and P172 relate to motors 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure integral status integral status eror Ki Ts Output integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient is the integral coefficient 1 Ti where Ti is the integral time is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency P159 P166 P173 Hux Regulator Integral Time ANO o Default Level Addres
355. lation Instructions Manual be read as well The Display Keypad Menu contains programming parameters to do the following Set the navigation mode within the drive menus Select the Root Page Select measures from the Root Page and the Keypad Page Select the type of Keypad Page displayed in Local mode Set custom PID units of measure Disable the LOC REM or REV keys in the keypad The Root Page the Keypad Page and Local mode are detailed in the following sections 11 2 Root Page The Root page is factory set as the startup page to be displayed when the drive is turned on You can access the four main menus only from the root page MEA Measures AN NOTE PAR gt Programming parameters Configuration parameters IDP Product identification Line 1 on this page displays the drive operating status see the description of parameter 89 Lines 2 display two measures which may be selected with parameters P268 P268a These measures can be scaled through parameters P268y and 2682 Line 4 displays the four main menus of the drive The selected menu is displayed in square brackets use the A and V keys to select a different menu Press the SAVE ENTER key to access the selected menu 84 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE 11 3 Keypad Page and Local Mode Keypad To access the Keypad pages press the MENU key from the Root Page or press the LOC REM key after selecting the Local m
356. le 3 ceeeseeseeseeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeaeeeeaesaeeaeeeeeaeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaseaseaseaes 112 Prohibit En 133 Figure 13 Speed Control example esee nennen tnnt tnts Ests Ests Este tnts treni 136 Figure 14 Dual Parameterization function example 138 Figure 15 Typical structure of the Analog 147 Figure 16 Str eture or the Frequency OUTDUT P ES ERN GR REGES UR ARE 148 Figure 17 Curve voltage speed implemented by AO Example 1 eee 151 Figure 18 Curve voltage speed implemented by AO Example 2 esee 152 Figure 19 Curve voltage speed implemented by AO Example 3 sees 152 Figure 20 Curve voltage speed implemented by AO Example 4 153 Figure 21 Curve voltage speed implemented by AO Example 5 154 Figure 22 Using Timers HET HERE EH HR 166 Figure 23 PID Block DIGQFOM orte ERE UESTRE ERE GREEN tented Ier ERES 171 Figure 24 Permanent oscillation with critical nnne nnn nnne 172 Figure 25 Response to a system tuned with the method of Ziegler and Nichols essen 173 Figure 26 Respon
357. le effect and to the mechanical parts depending on output voltage and no load power have been subtracted mechanical power is obtained Starting from mechanical power and the value set for slip compensation C039 for motor 1 you can obtain the increase of the output frequency limiting the error between the desired speed value and the actual speed value of the connected motor 275 482 PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE 32 1 8 TORQUE CONTROL VTC AND FOC ONLY VTC and FOC controls allow controlling the drive with a torque reference instead of a speed reference To so set 1 Torque or 2 Torque with Speed Limit FOC only in the relevant parameter 011 for motor 1 C054 for motor 2 C097 for motor 3 In this way the main reference corresponds to the motor torque demand and may range from C047 to C048 Limits Menu for motor 1 minimum and maximum torque expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque For motors 2 and 3 the parameters relating to min and max torque C090 C091 and C133 C134 are included in the Limits Menu 2 and Limits Menu 3 Using 0020 drive connected to a 15kW motor C048 is factory set to 120 of the motor rated torque If the max reference is applied C143 REF the torque reference will be 12076 If 7 5kW motor is connected C048 may exceed 200 torque values exceeding 200 may be obtained based on the value set in C048 The motor rated torque results from the following formula C P o w
358. ligible error variations 177 482 LONNE NEIN 22 5 List of Parameters P236 to P260 Table 38 List of parameters P236 to P260 P236 Max value of PID output ENGINEERING 100 0076 836 P237 Min value of PID output ENGINEERING 100 00 837 237 Wake up Mode ENGINEERING 0 Disabled 858 P237b Wake up Level ENGINEERING 0 00 859 P238 Max value of PID integral term ENGINEERING 100 00 838 P239 Max value of PID derivative term ENGINEERING 100 00 839 P240 PID proportional constant ENGINEERING 1 000 840 P241 Multiplicative factor of P240 ENGINEERING 0 1 0 841 242 PID Integral time multiples of 244 ENGINEERING 500 Tc ms 842 P243 PID Derivative time multiples of P244 ENGINEERING O Tc ms 843 244 Cycle time of PID regulator Tc ENGINEERING 5 ms 844 P245 Min value of PID reference ENGINEERING 0 00 845 P246 Max value of PID reference ENGINEERING 100 00 846 P247 Min value of PID feedback ENGINEERING 0 00 847 P248 Max value of PID feedback ENGINEERING 100 00 848 P249 PID reference ramp up time ENGINEERING Os 849 P250 PID reference ramp down time ENGINEERING Os 850 P251 Unit of measure of PID ramp ENGINEERING 1 0 15 851 P252 PID ramp start rounding off ENGINEERING 50 852 P253 PID ramp end rounding off ENGINEERING 50 853 P254 Integral term activation threshold ENGINEERING 0 00 854 P255 START Disable delay with PID Out P237 ENG
359. limit value being used expressed in Nm 53 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Speed Limit before the Ramps 1 32000 32000 rpm Active for FOC only Limit value at constant speed of the motor speed of rotation in torque control with speed limit mode 0112 2 for Motor 1 C054 C097 for Motors 2 and 3 MO14a Speed Limits after the Ramps Range 32000 2000 rom Active Active for FOC only Address Current limit value of the motor speed of rotation in torque control with speed limit mode 011 2 for Motor 1 C054 C097 for Motors 2 and 3 015 Torque Limit Reference before Ramps 96 500 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 C 048 Motor 1 C090 C 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active for VIC and FOC controls only This is the limit value for the torque at constant speed expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor If an external torque limit is used the value of this measure is the torque limit obtained at constant speed on the other hand if the torque limit is internal to the drive this value is the actual torque limit 500 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for The selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 C090 C 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active for VIC and FOC controls only This is the torque limit value being used expressed as a pe
360. male D connector ROO3 Baud Rate for Serial Link D9 pole 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 38400bps ENGINEERING 590 This parameter determines the baud rate expressed in bits per second for serial link 9 pole male connector 421 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS R004 Time added to 4 Time for Serial Link 0 D9 pole 1 10000 1 10000 Default 2 Level ENGINEERING Address 591 This parameter determines the limit time when no character is received from Function serial link 0 9 pole male D connector and the message sent from the master to the drive is considered as complete R005 Watchdog Time for Serial Link O D9 pole Range 0 60000 0 6000 0 sec Level ENGINEERING Address If not set at zero this parameter determines the time limit after which alarm Function A061 WDG Serial 0 Alarm trips if the drive does not receive any legal message through serial link O 9 pole male D connector ROO6 Parity Bit for Serial Link 0 DO pole 0 Disabled 1 Stop bit 1 Disabled 2 Stop bit 2 Even 1 Stop bit 3 Odd 1 Stop bit Disabled 2 Stop bit Level ENGINEERING Address Range 0 3 This parameter determines whether the parity bit is used when Function creating the MODBUS message through serial link O 9 pole male D conne
361. mallest memory address When using an Intel based master PLC chipset then the data below will be byte swapped 50 3 1 FROM THE MASTER TO THE IDRIVE ription 3 Word 1 4 Speed reference limit _ 32000 from FIELDBUS integer portion Speed reference limit a from FIELDBUS decimal 99 99 pum from FIELDBUS 5000 PID reference from 10000 ERE ABC Digital Inputs from FIELDBUS Command for Digital Outputs from FIELDBUS Analog Output 1 n 7 controlled by Flepus 111 1889 Analog Output 2 ao controlled by FELDBUS 11 1889 Analog Output 3 9 controlled by HEeLpaus 111 1889 PID Feedback from 10000 FIELDBUS 10000 Word 1 Speed reference limit from HELDBUS integer portion Word 1 of the memory map details the integer portion of the speed reference M042 in either or FOC mode Speed reference integer portion The speed reference from the FIELDBUS is obtained by adding the decimal portion to the integer portion see Word 2 This value is included in the global speed reference of the drive measure 000 along with the other reference sources if at least one of parameters C143 to C146is set as 6 FieldBus 427 482 PROGRAMMING The speed limit from FIELDBUS is significant if parameter C147 is set as 6 FieldBus and the type of reference of
362. me a new parameter is set 46 482 INSTRUCTIONS 6 Encoder TESE 7 Autotune of the stator resistance and leakage inductance 8 Autotune of the curent loop AN LONNE bis The motor must run when testing the encoder Access the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU set the source of the encoder signal used as a speed feedback Encoder A in terminal board Encoder B from ES836 ES913 option board enter the number of pulse rev and the number of the encoder channels more details are given in the relevant section in the Installation Instructions Manual In MOTOR CONTROL MENU set the parameter relating to the speed feedback from encoder 012 Yes Access the AUTOTUNE MENU and set parameter 1073 Select Autotune Type as Encoder Tune Use the ESC key to confirm changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until encoder tune is complete W32 Open Enable is displayed Once encoder tune is complete the display will show one of the following messages W31 Encoder Ok the speed feedback is correct If the speed detected by the encoder is opposite to the desired speed the drive will automatically reverse the feedback sign parameter C 199 A059 Encoder Fault the speed detected from the encoder is not consistent with the control speed Possible causes Wrong number of pls rev of the encoder Wrong power supply of the Encoder e g 5V instead of 24V check the encoder ratings and the positio
363. meter PO60 must match with the status of switches SWI 3 SWI 4 SWI 5 allowing selecting the proper electric circuit for the analog signal processing voltage signal or current signal If the PTC thermal protection C274 is enabled the reference AIN2 is NOTE automatically managed as a 0 10V input The only parameter enabled for the control of AIN2 is 64 PO60 61 PO61a P062 62 and P063 cannot viewed and are not considered for calculations 61 Value of AIN2 Input Producing Min Reference X axis 100 100 if PO60 0 10 0 V 10 0 if 0 10V 200 200 if 60 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if 60 1 20 40 200 if PO60 2 4 0 20 0 mA if PO60 2 4 20 mA 0 100 if PO60 0 0 V 10 0V 6 3 0 10 V 0 200 if PO60 4 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if PO6O 4 0 20 ADVANCED This parameter selects the value for AIN2 input signal for minimum reference or better the reference set in CO28xPO6la Master mode or CO47xPO61a Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used 119 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1000 Default Level Nelo 679 This parameter represents the min speed percentage or the min torque 1779 percentage for a torque reference to be used for the minimum reference set wit
364. mode shall be shorter than the Sleep Mode time 238 482 PROGRAMMING c LO NNE Example 2 Pipe Fill Function The PIPE FILL function avoids water hammer in irrigation pipes To avoid water hammer pipes must be filled very slowly for air drainage To do so force a minimum rate reference thus obtaining the minimum delivery of the pumping system Once the min rate is attained the feedback starts increasing when the filling pressure is attained the system can start operating under normal conditions Suppose that the feedback value of the pipe pressure is present at analog input AINT Table 57 MPL parameterization for Pipe Fill function P368 MPL3 Digital output mode DOUBLE ANALOG P369 MPL3 Selecting variable A A79 AINT P370 MPL3 Selecting variable B A79 AINT P371 MPL3 Testing variable A P372 MPL3 Testing variable B 2 P373 MPL3 Comparing value for Test A Pressure value when the system is empty P374 MPL3 Comparing value for Test B Pressure value p the system is P375 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests A Set B Reset P375a Selecting variable C 00 Disabled P375b MPL3 Function applied to the result of f A B C P376 MPL3 Output logic level TRUE P377 MPL4 Digital output mode DIGITAL P378 MPL4 Selecting variable A D52 MPL3 P379 MPL4 Selecting variable B P380 MPL4 Te
365. munication failure no read write query sent to serial link for a time longer than the time set in the parameters relating to serial link watchdog see the SERIAL LINKS MENU e Serial link is disconnected e Communication failure on remote master side e Watchdog operating times too short 1 Check serial link 2 Make sure that the remote master constantly sends read write queries with max intervals between two queries lower than the preset watchdog operating time 3 Set longer watchdog operating times see 005 for serial link 0 and 012 for serial link 1 Possible cause A064 Mains Loss Mains loss Event Mains loss e One supply cable is disconnected 21 1 e Mains supply too weak e Mains gap 1 Check voltage in terminals 5 T Check mains voltage value Also check the value of M030 sampled in the FAULTLISTwhen the alarm tripped 2 This protection may be disabled or delayed see the POWER DOWN MENU 456 482 o PROGRAMMING cs L NNE A065 Autotune Description Event Autotune failed Autotune aborted or failed Possible e The ENABLE contact was opened before autotune was over cauce Autotune aborted maybe because the parameter values were inconsistent with the motor ratings 1 Reset the alarm send RESETCommand 2 Check the motor parameters and make sure that they are consistent with the motor ratings see the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and pe
366. n Range 10000 value of the PID feedback set parameters 247 248 Always active Address This is the measure of the PID feedback expressed as a percentage Scaling is detailed in the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU 20 PID2 Feedback 100 00 E uS Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min range 10009 value of the PID2 feedback set in parameters P447 P448 This measure is active if enabled from 291 Address This is the measure percent of the PID2 feedback selected with C286 for the PID2 or the 2 zone mode Scaling is detailed in the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU M021 PID Enor 100 00 10000 Note The actual range depends the min max saturation values of the reference and the feedback set in parameters 245 P246 for the reference and 247 248 for the feedback Always active This is the measure of the PID input error expressed as a percentage See also the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU 100 00 Note The actual range depends on the min and max saturation values of the reference and the feedback set in parameters P445 P446 for the reference and in P447 P448 for the feedback This is the measure percent of the PID2 input error or the 2 zone mode input error difference between the reference selected with C286 and the feedback selected with C289 Please r
367. n and saved will be used only at next power on To use the new parameter value immediately turn the drive off and on or press the RESETkey for at least 5 seconds The Work zone may be copied to the BACKUP zone through 1012 included in the Eeprom menu and described in the section below 1012 input also allows copying the Backup zone to the WORK zone in order to restore the parameter values stored in the WORK zone 1012 input also allows restoring the factory setting values for all parameters in the WORK zone 1 Restore back up 2 Save back up Memory locations 4 Restore default 442 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 55 2 List of Inputs 1009 to 1012 Table 121 List of programmable inputs 1009 to 1012 1009 Parameter save 3 1012 EEPROM control 1399 1009 Parameter save 131 2466 131 2466 This is parameter at power on whenever the EEPROM command is executed 1009 is set to zero BASIC 1396 Allows only one parameter to be saved to EEPROM The value to be saved must be the same as the value set in the Address field of the parameter concerned 1012 EEPROM Control 0 No Command 2 Restore Backup 4 Save Backup 5 Save Work 11 Restore Default This is not a parameter at power on and whenever the EEPROM command is executed 1012 is set to zero BASIC 1399 This parameter saves and restores the entire set of parameters that can be accessed by the
368. n is reversed The Inverse operating mode can be used for special applications only see Keeping Fluid Level Constant Example C292 Selection of the Variable for Calculating the Derivative Term 0 Measure Error 0 Measure ENGINEERING 1292 This parameter sets the variable used for calculating the derivative term By default the derivative term is computed according to the feedback measure but it can also be computed according to the PID error Error Reference Feedback 398 482 o PROGRAMMING cs L NNE C293 Proportional Multiplier of Derivative and Integral Tems ENGINEERING 1293 This parameter defines if the proportional term is used for the 3 multiplication of the derivative and integral terms as well 0 No means that the proportional term DOES NOT multiply the integral term 399 482 iDrive C294 PID Action 400 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ENGINEERING 1294 0 External output 1 Reference 2 Reference sum 3 Voltage sum 4 Full Ref Sum 1 Reference PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Function This parameter sets the type of implementation carried out by the PID regulator C294 Extemal Output The PID regulator is independent of the drive operation unless a digital input is configured for PID disabling if the digital input closes the PID regulator is disabled the output is set to zero In order to use the PID regulator output externally
369. n of PID feedback n 3 ENGINEERING 1290 O Disable C291 PID operating mode ENGINEERING 1291 0 Disable C291a PID control mode ENGINEERING 295 C291b 2 operating mode ENGINEERING 1296 1 Normal C292 Selection of the variable for calculating the ENGINEERING 1292 Measure derivative term C293 2 Multiplier of derivative integral ENGINEERING 1293 0 NO C294 PID action ENGINEERING 1294 1 Reference 394 482 e PROGRAMMING c OLONNE C285 C286 C287 Selection of PID Reference n 1 2 3 0 Disable 1 REF 2 AINT 3 AIN2 PTC 4 Pulse Input 5 6 7 8 0 9 0 11 when 5847 is fitted Serial Link Fieldbus Keypad Encoder 9 Up Down from MDI 10 XAIN4 11 XAIN5 C285 selects the first PID reference source from the PID regulator Up to three reference sources may be configured 285 C287 considered as a sum The sources are used by the PID and are expressed in percentage values with reference to their max value and min value set in the References Function menu If multiple reference sources are selected their sum is considered They are saturated between P246 and P245 PID reference maximum and minimum value respectively Reference sources 10 and 11 can be selected only after setting XAIN in parameter R023 C288 C289 C290 Selection of PID Feedback n 1 2 3 0 Disable 1 REF 2 AINT 3 AIN2 PTC 4 Pulse Input 5 Serial Link 6 Field
370. n of jumpers and dip switches for the encoder supply in the optional encoder board Wrong configuration of the dip switches for the encoder selection push pull or line driver encoder in the optional encoder board No connection to the encoder channel check wiring At least one Encoder channel is faulty replace the encoder First remove the ENABLE command then access the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 All Ctrl no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until autotune is complete warning W32 Open Enoble is displayed The drive has computed and saved the values for C022 and C023 If alarm A097 Motor wires KO trips check the motor wiring If alarm A065 Autotune trips this means that the ENABLE command has opened before autotune was completed In this case reset the drive sending a command from terminal MDI3 or press the RESET key in the display keypad and perform the autotune procedure again First remove the ENABLE command then access the AUTOTUNE MENU and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 1 FOC Auto no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until autotune is complete warning W32 Open Enable is displayed The drive has computed and saved the values for P155 and P156 If alarm 065 Autotune trips this means that the ENABLE command has opened before autotune was completed or that the autotu
371. n only when a time equal to or longer than the time set in C256 has passed If the drive is turned off when an alarm is active the alarm tripped is stored to memory and will be active at next power on Regardless of the Autoreset function setup an automatic reset of the last alarm stored can be obtained when the drive is next turned on C257 Yes Undervoltage alarm A047 DC bus voltage below allowable threshold with motor running or Mains Loss alarm A064 mains loss when the motor is running and the Power Down function is disabled are not stored in the fault list when the drive is powered off factory setting To enable parameter storage set C258 to Yes 41 2 List of Parameters C255 to C258 Table 104 List of parameters C255 to C258 C255 Autoreset attempt number ENGINEERING 1255 0 256 Attempt counting reset time ENGINEERING 1256 300 sec C257 Alarm reset at Power On ENGINEERING 1257 0 Disabled c2sg Enable Undervoltage and ENGINEERING 1258 0 Disabled Mains Loss alarms C255 Autoreset Attempt Number Default ENGINEERING Address If set other than 0 this parameter enables the Autoreset function and sets the max allowable number of reset attempts The autoreset attempt count is reset when a time equal to the time set in C256 passes starting from the last alarm tripped Function C256 Attempt Counting Reset Time Range 0 1000 sec Default 300 300 sec Level ENGI
372. n parameters can be set up only after setting XMDI O in parameter R023 CAUTION Set C182 1 to allocate 2 functions to the same terminal 1006 Function Selection for MDI Contol 0 5 Inactive 2 Clear all 2 Set factory default This is not a programming parameter the input is set to zero whenever the drive is powered on and whenever the command is executed ADVANCED 0 gt Inactive 1 gt Forces to 0 gt Inactive the settings of all the digital inputs 2 Forces to the default values the settings of all the digital inputs C149 SIART Input 0 5 Inactive 1 8 MDI8 9 12 5 MPLI 4 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 16 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED When the STARTinput is activated the ENABLE input is activated as well RUN is enabled the speed torque setpoint increases following the programmed ramp until it reaches the active reference In control mode the main speed reference shall be other than zero for RUN enable When the SIARTinput is inactive even if the ENABLE input is activated RUN is disabled the reference is set to zero and the speed torque setpoint drops to zero based on the programmed deceleration ramp If the PROFldrive option is present parameter C149 START Input must be assigned to NOTE value 1 330 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE C 149a STARTB Input 0 gt Inactive 1 85 MDI8 9
373. nce 3 Sources PIDref vector C287 Min 4 8 Encoder 9 UpDwn MDI Ref min P245 10 X AINA 11 12 TI XAINS 13 14 C288 C289 C290 ources PID fbk Vector 14 Disabled Ref PID Feedback 1 Sources PIDfbk vector C288 Fbk Max P248 AIN2 PTC FIN Serial Link PID Feedback 2 Sources PIDfbk vector C289 C291A PID Feedback 2 Field bus Keypad Encoder PID Feedback 3 Sources PIDfbk vector C290 i I out out Fbk min P247 2 Vde Pout Torque out XAIN4 11 12 XAINS 13 14 Figure 64 Reference source and feedback source selection The signals selected in the Sources Vector are to be considered as percentage values therefore analog signals are expressed as a percentage of the preset AN NOTE maximum values and minimum values For example when selecting a reference source if 52 Ref max 8V and 51 Ref min 100 will be considered when Ref 8V and 100 will be considered when Ref Among the allowable variables for the PID feedback electrical variables lout output current Vout output voltage Vdc DC bus voltage Pout output power and Torque out output torque only with FOC control Their percentage values relate to rated current values and rated voltage values of the selected motor and to 1500VDC respectively In Local mode the PID regulator is disabled if set as C294 Reference Sum or
374. nction When the motor speed searching occurs the motor speed is increased depending on the preset acceleration ramp see Figure 56 Speed f C220 DCB Command ON OFF Start Command ON OFF 00356 Figure 56 Manual DCB Example 3 Motor Speed DC Braking and Manual DCB Command and START Command if t1 t the control algorithm is IFD and the Speed Searching Function is enabled 365 482 PROGRAMMING LO NNE 38 2 List of Parameters C215 to C224 Table 101 List of parameters C215 to C224 C215 Enabling DCB at Stop function 216 Enabling DCB at Start function 1216 0 NO C217 DCB at Stop duration 1217 0 5 C218 DCB at Start duration 1218 0 5 C219 Speed at the beginning of DCB at Stop 1219 50rpm C220 current level 1220 10076 C221 DCB Hold 1221 0 C222 Ramp braking time for Motor 1 DCB 1222 See Table 74 C223 Ramp braking time for Motor 2 DCB 1223 and Table 78 C224 braking time for Motor DCB 1224 C215 Enabling DCB at Stop Function Range Default Level Address Contol and Enables DC Braking during deceleration when the speed set in C219 is Function reached or the speed set in C235 if in Power Down mode and C234 DCB is reached C216 Enabling DCB at Start Func
375. nd 2 15 Ramp Up Time P016 Ramp Down Time 3 PO18 Ramp Up Time 4 P019 Ramp Down Time 4 P020 Unit of Measure for Ramp Times 3 4 The set ramp time corresponds to the time the speed reference takes to reach the max speed from 0 rpm as an absolute value between min speed and max speed of the selected motor C028 and C029 for motor 1 and so on The time unit of measure may have the following values 0 5 0 015 1 0 15 21s 32 105 The programmable range may be 05 3270005 Example of a speed ramp Table 18 Example of a Speed Ramp 0 0 01 s 0 327 00 1 0 1 0 3270 0 2 15 0 327005 3 105 0 327000 5 92 482 o PROGRAMMING c L NNE The factory setting of the unit of measure is 0 1 s the ramp time is 10 sec Figure 4 Example of S ramps You can also select the rounding off and the rounding off percentage for the 4 stages of starting ramp up and the starting ramp down and for the end ramp up and the end ramp down S ramps The ramp rounding off allows reaching the reference end value with a zero tangent both while accelerating and while decelerating thus suppressing torque peaks that could damage mechanical couplings The rounding off is expressed as a percentage of the ramp time it relates to if used it allows increasing the preset ramp time half the sum value of the two rounding off values Its effect is shown in
376. nd is first sent thus controlling the PID reference and allowing the LOCAL mode to be maintained when the LOC REM command is sent for the second time thus disabling the PID and allowing setting a speed reference the LOC REM digital input must be set as C180a Pushbutton If C180a 2 the logic status of LOC REM will be saved at power off and will be used when the drive is next powered on 345 482 o PROGRAMMING LONNE C181 Safety Sart Inactive Active Inactive ADVANCED This function enables the Safety STARTmode When this function is enabled and the drive is to be restarted after resetting an alarm open and close the ENABLE terminal This prevents the drive from RUNNING when it is turned off and on again for example after a mains loss and the STARTand ENABLE inputs are on If multiple terminal boards are selected with parameters C140 C141 C142 open and NOTE close the ENABLE terminal MDI2 in one of the active terminal boards to restart the drive C182 Multiprogramming Enable Inactive ia Ls This function allows allocating two different functions to the same terminal Only few preset combinations are allowed When invalid configurations are set up ILLEGAL DATA appears on display keypad of the IDrive drive C183 Max Huxing Time Before Drive disablin 0 65000 0 65000 ms Disabled ADVANCED 1183 VTC and FOC This function disables the dri
377. nd the symbol can be used as 4 digits are allowed for the SIM card PIN the PIN terminator R116 Preset C onnection Status Line 2 See Table 120 This parameter indicates if preset configurations are actually set up for the types of connections supported by ES851 440 482 INSTRUCTIONS R116 Preset Connections Line 4 20 Default Function we LONNE ENGINEERING 99 12 2134 See Table 120 0 no active preset This parameter allows forcing one of the available connecting modes to the Data Logger ES851 board The parameters used for Ethernet connections and modem connections are the ones stored in the IDrive drive Configurations 19 and 20 support both dial in and dial out After imposing any of the preset values given in Table 120 the Data Logger is forced to Interlocked mode see the Data Logger Measures Menu Table 120 Preset connections 0 No active presetting 1 Ethernet enabled 2 PPP null modem 3 1 RS232 38400 2 no 2 4 1 RS232 38400 1 2 5 135232 38400 2 20 6 135232 38400 1 20 7 1 RS232 9600 2 no 2 8 1 RS232 9600 1 2 9 1 RS232 9600 2 no 20 10 1 RS232 9600 1 20 11 235485 38400 2 2 12 235485 38400 1 2 13 235485 38400 2 no 20 14 2 RS485 38400 1 20 15 2 RS485 9600 2 no 2 16
378. ne algorithm failed In this case reset the drive sending a command from terminal or press the RESET key in the display keypad and perform the autotune procedure again If the ENABLE command was not opened before autotune was over decrease by 576 the no load current value set in C021 and perform autotune again 47 482 iDrive 9 Tuning the rotor time constant 10 Startup 11 Speed regulator adjustment 12 Possible failures 48 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS The rotor time constant C025 is estimated with a special autotune procedure allowing the motor to run even in no load conditions First remove the ENABLE command then access the AUTOTUNE MENU and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 2 FOC Auto rot Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait uniil autotune is over warning W32 Open Enable is displayed When autotune is complete the value obtained for the rotor time constant is automatically saved in parameter C025 If the motor cannot run in no load conditions use a first attempt value for lo that is automatically computed by the drive as described in step 7 Now that all the parameters have been set for the FOC motor control algorithm activate the ENABLE input terminal 15 and the START input terminal 14 and send speed reference the RUN LED and REF LED will come on and the motor will start Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction If not
379. ngle ended analog input from terminal board 2 AIN1 differential analog input from terminal board 3 AIN2 differential analog input from terminal board 4 HN frequency input from terminal board see also the ENCODER FREQ UENCY INPUTS MENU 5 Seriallink with MODBUS protocol 6 Fieldbus fieldbus in option board 7 Keypad remota ble displa y keypad 8 Encoder in terminal board MDI6 ECHA MDI7 ECHB or option board 9 Up Down from MDI Up down from digital inputs see C161 and C162 10 4 auxilia ry differential voltage analog input from ES847 terminal board 11 XAIN5 auxilia ry differential current analog input from ES847 terminal board With factory setting only one source is enabled C143 1 C144 2 C145 0 and C146 0 Because the digital input for source selection is programmed C179 6 MDIG see Digital Inputs Menu if this input is inactive only the REF item is selected please refer to the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU If multiple reference sources are enabled by programming also C144 C145 or C146 the actual calculated reference is the algebraic sum of all the references that are enabled see How to Manage the Reference Sources REF AIN1 and AIN2 The sources called REF AINT and AIN2 come from the analog inputs the terminal board and generate reference resulting from the setting of the relevant parameters from P050 to P064 See the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU for the scaling offset com
380. nne nentes 394 Table 110 List of parameters C285 to C294 394 Table 111 List of parameters C300 to 302 0 405 1127 Bisr ot Paramelters C310 C316 itu e NUR OA RE ARAS 410 Table 113 List of Parameters C330 C357 retient 414 iDrive Table 114 Table 115 Table 116 Table 117 Table 118 Table 119 Table 120 Table 121 Table 122 Table 123 Table 124 Table 125 10 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS List of parameters ROO to 13 421 LISt Of parameters ROT6 tO ROWS cite ette rette 424 List of parameters RO21 to 23 433 List of parameters 25 to 45 434 List of Parameters ROSO to ROSS 437 LIST OF parameters IT I5 and TIO init tti er 440 Preset eese ono 441 List of programmable inputs 1009 to 012 443 List THE possible CALMS RE 446 List of The alarm codes 466 469 Nei 471 PROGRAMMING a cw LONNE 0 4 How to Use this Manual 0 4 1 OVERVIEW This User Manual Programming Instructions provides any information required to setup and monitor the drives of the
381. nnel 1 500 2600 50 0 260 0 C This measure is active only if programmed from parameter 023 Temperature detected in analog channel 1 50 0 260 0 C This measure is active only if programmed from parameter 023 Temperature detected in analog channel 2 50 0 260 0 C This measure is active only if programmed from parameter R023 Temperature detected in analog channel 3 50 0 260 0 C This measure is active only if programmed from parameter R023 Temperature detected in analog channel 4 70 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE i 8 8 Autodiagnostics Menu This menu allows the user to check the functioning times and the relevant counters for maintenance purposes of the IDrive drive it also allows reading out the analog channels used for temperature sensors and the relevant temperature values as well as the drive status M052 M054 Functioning Times Functioning Times Function 0 429496729 4 sec Supply Time 1702 1703 LSWord MSWord Operation Time 1704 1705 LSWord MSWord This screen displays the ST supply time and the OT operation time The Operation Time is the activation time of the drive IGBTs Both values are expressed in 32 bits divided into two 16 bit words the low part and the high part Always active Measure of the IGBT temperature If the temperature readout is lt 30 0 or gt 150 0 C warning W50 NTC Fault appears Note Not all models are prov
382. nnot occur C008 xT Regen where x can be 2 If a drive is DC powered a Regenerative IDrive or an equivalent drive stabilizing 4 5 6 371 482 MT PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE C226 Power Down Enable Dela 1 250 ms Default Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter determines the Power Down delay after a mains loss is Function detected by the drive If C225 Alarm this delay is applied to the alarm tripped Setting a too long Power Down delay in case of mains loss can cause the drive to NOTE switch off C227 Sop Ramp Time in Power Down Range 1 32000 sec Default Level ENGINEERING Address Determines the gradient of the deceleration ramp occurring at Power Down after the first extra deceleration stage if C225 Yes IFD Control algorithm C227 is the basic gradient for deceleration adjustment when C225 Yes V Function C228 Start Increment of Ramp Gradient in Power Down 1 00 100 00 76 ENGINEERING Determines an increase in deceleration ramp gradient at the beginning of the Power Down function This is required to increase DC bus voltage C228 0 start deceleration is due to C227 C228 has no effect C228 10096 start deceleration is 100 times faster than deceleration set in C227 start ramp C227 100 sec C228 1 00 start deceleration is zero deceleration ramp of infinite time C229 Improved Sensitivity of DC Bus Control ENGINEERING B
383. nt value of the active reference If the SIARTcommand is active but the reference is lower than the preset threshold the drive operation is disabled To enable this operating mode with other types of control parameters 65 and 066 must be set accordingly The drive may also be disabled by the PID regulator see parameter P255 If the ENABLE input signal is disabled for one of the active terminals the drive is instantly disabled and the motor starts idling The motor could run at uncontrolled speed due to the activation of the mechanical load If so the mechanical load could cause uncontrolled acceleration slowing down of the connected motor CAUTION CAUTION If a protection alarm trips the drive disables and the motor starts idling If software timers are enabled for digital inputs the timer for the ENABLE signal timer NOTE active for MDI2 delays the signal enabling The ENABLE signal is always instantly disabled forthe ENABLE function Toff in MDI2 is ignored The activation of the ENABLE command enables the alarms controlling the NOTE configuration consistency of certain parameters When the ENABLE signal is shutdown C parameters cannot be changed factory NOTE setting If PO03 Condition required for changing C parameters Standby Fluxing the parameters may be changed even if the drive is enabled but the motor is not running When the ENABLE signal is shutdown for VTC and FOC controls the motor is fluxed by NOTE
384. o the integrator is always activated 184 482 PROGRAMMING c LO NNE P255 START Disable Delay with PID Out P237 0 Disabled 1 60000 5 0 Disabled ENGINEERING 855 This parameter sets the max time for the drive operation when the PID regulator output continuously operates at its min value P237 If this is true for a time equal to the time set in P255 the drive is automatically put on stand by until 1 the PID output value exceeds the min value if P237a Disabled 2 the Feedback or the Error drops below the Wake up level in P237b if P237a 1 or 3 respectively 3 when the Feedback or the Error exceeds the Wake up level P237b if P237a 2 or 4 respectively If C294 is set as External Out or P255 set to zero this function is disabled P256 PID Output Gradient Limit 1 65000 1 65000 msec ENGINEERING 856 This parameter limits the max acceleration for the PID regulator output The max acceleration for the PID regulator output is equal to 100 P256 76 msec P257 Gain for PID Measure Scaling 0 32000 0 000 32 000 ENGINEERING 857 Gain for the scaling of PID measures 023 025 This gain has effect only on the measures above It does not affect the PID operation Function This parameter allows scaling if you want to display PID measures with different unit of measure M023 M020 P257 M024 021 P257 P260 Anti Wind Up Gain 0 00 1 00 E
385. o ADVANCED 10 00 kHz 804 205 FOUT output value with reference to ADVANCED 100 00 kHz 805 P206 Filter for FOUT frequency output ADVANCED Oms 806 P207 AO Gain ADVANCED 807 P208 402 Gain ADVANCED 808 P209 AO3 Gain ADVANCED RESERVED 809 P210 AO1 Variable MODBUS address ADVANCED 810 P211 AO2 Variable MODBUS address ADVANCED 811 212 AO3 Variable MODBUS address ADVANCED 812 P213 ae of sinusoidal analog output ENGINEERING 100 0 813 P214 2 of sinusoidal analog output ENGINEERING 1 00 Hz 814 P215 2 saw wave analog output ENGINEERING 1 00 Hz 815 155 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e 156 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive P176 AO1Analog Output Disabled 10V 0 7 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA ABS 0 10V ABS O 20mA ABS 4 20 Default Level Address Function o f Signal SW2 1 20mA In the example above 01 is set as a current input Contact 1 of SW2 dip switch is open contact 2 is closed NOTE see the DIP switch configuration and follow the instructions displayed on the keypad Analog outputs are set as voltage outputs by default set them as current outputs or refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual P177 Selected Variable forAO1 Analog Output 0 69 Motor speed ADVANCED Selects the variable to be allocated to AO digital output P178 Min value of AO1 Selected Variabl
386. o PIDs and 2 zone mode are available based on the setting in parameter C291a PID Control Mode 3 4 PID Feedback Reference The PID feedback by default is the sum of the three sources programmed as feedback see parameters C288 C290in the PID CONFIGURATION MENU Different types PID feedback control Two PIDs and 2 zone mode are available based on the setting in parameter C291a PID Control Mode 27 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS 4 1 Multimotor The IDrive drive provides 3 separate sets of parameters allowing configuring three control algorithms for 3 types of motors e C009 Number of configured motors 72 e C173 Digital input for Motor 2 MDI When is open the parameters relating to Motor 1 are used for the motor control when MDI is closed the parameters relating to Motor 2 are used for the motor control see the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and the MULTISPEED MENU 4 2 Voltage Frequency Pattern When using a Volt Freq IFD control algorithm e g C010 V F IFD for Motor 1 you can select different types of patterns see the IFD Only section 4 3 Slip Compensation When using a Volt Freq control algorithm e g C010 V F for Motor 1 you can set the slip compensation function for a more accurate speed control see the Slip Compensation IFD Only section 4 4 Speed Searching When using Volt Freq IFD control algorithm e g C010 V
387. o that the selected variables are considered as absolute values The condition greater than is selected for test A and lower than equal to is selected for test B Table 45 parameterization for speed thresholds P270 MDOTl Digital output mode DOUBLE ANALOG P271 Variable A selection 71 Speed MEA P272 Variable B selection 71 Speed MEA 273 Testing variable A ABS x gt 274 Testing variable ABS x x P275 MDOI Comparing value for Test A 100 00 rpm P276 Comparing value for Test B 20 00 rpm P277 Function applied to the result of the two tests A Set B Reset Rising Edge 277 Variable C selection DO Disabled P278 MDO1 Output logic level TRUE Both tests are performed over the motor speed P271 P272 are set to motor speed The values of reference for the two tests are 100 and 20 the function applied is Flip Set Reset and the output is considered as a true logic Test A is the Set signal of the Flip Flop and Test B is the Reset signal Motor Speed rprm A 100 20 20 100 Out m E Figure 36 Digital output for speed thresholds example 202 482 PROGRAMMING ws LONNE Example 4 Digital output for electromechanical brake for lifting applications programming example related to MDOA digital output Table 4
388. ode The measures displayed on the Keypad page can be set up through parameters P268b to P268e From the Keypad page press the SAVE ENTER key to display the Keypad Help page describing the measures displayed on the Keypad page The Keypad Help page is displayed for a few seconds locked once the Keypad Page is displayed Hold down the ESC key for a few seconds If parameter P264b Navigation mode via MENU key is set to Operator navigation is A 5 resume navigation The following Keypad Pages are available Measures only four lines displaying measures only Speed gt line 4 shows the speed reference that can be changed with the and keys Torque line 4 shows the torque reference that can be changed with the A and keys Limit Torque line 4 shows the limit torque reference that can be changed with the and keys PID line 4 shows the reference that can be changed with the and keys If the Local Mode is NOT selected pressing the MENU key allows viewing only the pages containing the references sent via keypad see the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU LOCALMODE In LOCALmode the L CMD and L REF LEDs come on when the Local mode is active only the commands and references sent via keypad are enabled while any other control source or reference source is disabled see the CONTROL METHOD MENU the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU and the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU The keypad page displa
389. oder used as a speed feedback Please refer to the MOTOR For the correct operation of the tuning algorithms enter the motor ratings and the i NOTE CONTROL MENU and the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 261 482 iDrive 0 all no rotation 2 FOC Auto rotation ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Table 61 Programmable Motor Tune functions 3 VIC FOC Man rotation speed 4 FOC Man no rotation 262 482 5 rotation flux NOTE Automatic estimation of the stator resistance and the leakage inductance If no load current C018 is zero no load current values are computed based on the rated power of the connected motor Tuning mode required for the correct operation of the control algorithms Automatic autotune of the current loop Tuning mode required for the correct operation of FOC algorithm If autotune of the current loop fails Alarm 065 Autotune KO trips the current loop be manually tuned see 4 FOC Man no rotation current While autotuning the system can monitor the reference current and the current obtained in analog outputs AO2 and AO respectively Automatic estimation of the rotor time constant Tuning mode required for the correct operation of FOC algorithm After entering the correct no load current value parameters C021 C064 C107 for motors M1 M2 and M3 respectively and tuning the current loop the system can measure the rotor time constant
390. of the PID reference depends on the scale factor set in P257 132 482 e PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 16 PROHIBIT SPEED MENU 16 1 Overview This menu allows setting prohibit soeed ranges that the motor cannot maintain at constant rom due to mechanical resonance Three prohibit speed ranges are available 3 intermediate values of the speed range and their semi amplitude one for all ranges In this way the speed reference value is never included in one of the preset speed ranges when decreasing if the speed reference matches with the max allowable value of a prohibit speed range the value assigned To the reference is given by the min allowable value of the speed range and vice versa when the reference is increasing The discontinuity of the speed reference has no effect on the actual speed of the connected motor because this will vary with continuity until it reaches the new rpm value of the speed reference The intermediate values of the prohibit speed ranges are to be intended as absolute values independent of The reference sign Motor 4 Speed Decreasing Reference 2 P108 lt Increasing Reference gt Speed P105 106 P107 Reference P000132 B Figure 12 Prohibit Speed ranges Figure 12 illustrates different trends of the speed reference when it matches with the max allowable value of a prohibit soeed range when decreasing red or when it matches with the min allowable val
391. ol board 1 Reset the alarm send a RESETCommand 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service Incompatible Software Texas version When switched on DSP Motorola detected an incompatible version of the software downloaded to Flash Texas software version incompatible with Motorola The wrong software was downloaded 1 Download the correct DSP Texas software version 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service A039 Texas Hash not Programmed Description Texas Flash not programmed When switched on DSP Motorola detected that Flash Texas is not correctly 448 482 programmed PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Possible cause Solution A prior attempt to download DSP Texas software failed 1 Download the correct DSP Texas software version 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service 449 482 Possible cause Possible ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Alarm trip caused by the user as a testing procedure The user has forced the alarm to trip Value 1 was entered to address MODBUS 1400 via serial link Reset the alarm send a RESETCommand General hardware fault from IGBT side A Power converter A generated a general alarm e Electromagnetic disturbance or radiated interference e Overcurrent IGBT overtemperature IGBT fault 1 Reset the alarm send a RESETCommand
392. ole male connector Serial Link 1 is provided with an RJ45 connector or a three phone connector connected to the display keypad The display keypad connected through RJ45 connector dialogues correctly with the NOTE E drive using the default values preset in the parameter set for serial link 1 The drive will typically behave as a slave device i e it only answers to queries sent by another device A master device typically a computer is then needed to start serial communications The following items may be configured for both serial links The drive MODBUS address The drive response delay to a Master query The baud rate of the serial link expressed in bits per second The time added to the 4 byte time The serial link watchdog which is active if the relevant parameter is not set at 0 The type of parity used for serial communications Ovidio ho 49 1 1 WATCHDOG ALARMS The Watchdog alarms determined by the serial link may be the following e A061Serial alarm n 0 WDG e A062 Serial alarm n 1 WDG e 081 Watchdog The first two alarms trip when no legal message is sent from the serial link to the drive for a time longer than the time set in the relevant watchdog parameters these alams are active only if parameters R005 or R012 are set other than zero The third alarm trips only if the display keypad used as a reference command source detects a communication loss for a time longer than 2 seconds 42
393. ole pairs 2x x C015 Pole pairs is the integer number obtained by rounding down 60 015 016 The programmable parameters relating to the AutoBoost functions are the following C038 AutoBoost variable torque compensation expressed as a percentage of the motor rated voltage C019 The value set in CO38is the voltage increase when the motor is running at its rated torque 017 Pn rated power of the connected motor 32 1 7 SLIP COMPENSATION IFD ONLY This function allows compensating the speed decrease of the asynchronous motor when the mechanical load increases slip compensation This is available for control only The parameters relating to this function are included in the Motor Control Menu Configuration Menu Table 70 Parameters setting Slip Compensation IFD Control Rated voltage Rated voltage of the connected motor voltage rating son 062 aa No load power Power the motor when load is connected to CO20 C063 C106 The motor it is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated power Stator resistance Determines the resistance of the stator phases used to 022 C065 C108 compute the power consumption due to Joule effect Activation of slip compensation If other than zero this parameter enables slip compensation C039 82 125 and defines its relevant value Once the drive output power has been estimated and the power losses due to the Jou
394. omparing value of Test A with the first selected variable NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 Example P3502 Reference threshold for P352 P361 P370 P379 in MPLx P356 P365 P374 P383 Defines the comparing value of Test B with the first selected variable NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the selected digital output is gt 2 Example P3502 232 482 e PROGRAMMING c LO NNE MPL1 Function applied to the result of Tests A and B P357 P366 P375 P384 A logic function is applied to the two Boolean signals obtained in order to obtain the output TRUE FALSE Boolean signal Six different tests may be performed for variable A using the comparing value and variable B A OR B The selected digital output is enabled when at least one of the two conditions below is true this function also allows enabling the selected digital input based one test only po o 0 A SET B RESETRising Edge A RESET B SETRising Edge A SET B RESETFalling Edge A RESET B SET Falling Edge The selected digital output is activated as the output of a Flip Flop Set Reset whose inputs are signal A and signal B This function can be used in case of hysteresis The status of the input Qn depends on the previous value Qn 1 and on the result of the two tests Signals and B are consid
395. on the settings in the relevant parameter this parameter enables controlling digital XMDI O analog inputs XAIN and PT100 probes located on optional control boards NOTE ES847 is required to control analog inputs XAIN and PT100 probes Either ES847 ES870 be used to control digital XMDI O 433 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 52 PROFIDRIVE BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU 52 1 Overview This menu allows programming the PROFldrive expansion board It can be viewed only if the PROFldrive board is connected to the control board Parameters this menu are Rxxx parameters Once changed saved they become active only when the drive is next switched on or when its control board is reset by holding down the RESETkey for more than 5 secs For the correct operation of the PROFIdrive board please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual and to the PROFIdrive COMMUNICATIONS BOARD USER MANUAL If the PROFlidrive option is present parameter C149 START Input must be assigned NOTE to value 1 52 2 List of Parameters R025 to R045 Table 117 List of parameters R025 to R045 RO25 Slave address ENGINEERING 547 RO26 PZD3 OUT ENGINEERING 548 1 DIGITAL INPUTS R027 PZD4 OUT ENGINEERING 549 0 NOT USED RO28 PZD5 OUT ENGINEERING 550 0 NOT USED R029 706 OUT ENGINEERING 554 0 NOT USED R
396. ond week 3 third week 4 fourth week 5 last week The second digit D indicates the day of the week 1 Monday 7 Sunday The third and fourth digits MM indicate the start month 01 January 12 December Example European Union 5710 last Sunday in October USA 1711 first Sunday in November Brazil 3702 third Sunday in February Active Function If the first digit of the parameter is higher than or equal to 6 The first two digits WD correspond to the month when the DST starts added to 60 61 corresponds to 1 91 corresponds to 31 The third and fourth digit MM indicate the start month 01 corresponds to January 12 corresponds to December Example 6110 1 October R053 DST End HHMM Hour Minutes 100 2400 100 2400 200 ENGINEERING This parameter can be viewed and changed only if the Data Logger 5851 is installed and activated R021 ENABLE 438 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE first digit or the first two digits if the total digits are 3 4 respectively correspond to the end date The last two digits correspond to the minutes Example 200 2h 00m 2400 Oh Om midnight between the day set in RO52 and the previous day 439 482 PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 54 DATA LOGGER MENU 54 1 Overview The Data Logger menu is to be used if the IDrive drive cannot dialog with the Data Logger ES851 board through the Remo
397. one mode parameters P236 P260 pertain to the system where the error results from the reference selected with C285 and from the feedback selected with C288 whilst parameters P436 P460 pertain to the system where the error results from the reference selected with C286 and from the feedback selected with C289 NOTE The PID2 regulator is disabled when operating 2 zone mode Please refer to the block diagram in Figure 63 186 482 c L NNE 23 2 List of Parameters P436 to P460 Table 39 List of parameters P436 to P460 P436 Max value of PID2 output ENGINEERING 100 0076 1346 P437 Min value of PID2 output ENGINEERING 100 00 1347 P437a Wake up Mode ENGINEERING 0 Disabled 1282 P437b Wake up Level ENGINEERING 0 00 1283 P438 Max value of PID2 integral term ENGINEERING 100 00 1348 P439 Max value of PID2 derivative term ENGINEERING 100 00 1349 P440 PID2 proportional constant ENGINEERING 1 000 1350 P441 Multiplicative factor of P440 ENGINEERING 0 1 0 1351 P442 PID2 Integral time multiples of 44 ENGINEERING 500 Tc ms 1352 P443 PID2 Derivative time multiples of P444 ENGINEERING O Tc ms 1353 P444 Cycle time PID2 regulator ENGINEERING 5 ms 1354 P445 Min allowable value of PID2 reference ENGINEERING 0 00 1355 P446 Max allowable value of PID2 reference ENGINEERING 100 00 1356 P447 Min allowable value of PI
398. onnector Fault Precharge By Pass connector fault UnderVoltage Dc bus voltage lower than Vdc_min A048 OverVoltage Dc bus voltage exceeding Vdc_max A049 RAM Fault Control board failure PWMAO Fault PWMAI Fault Hardware Fault from IGBT converter side A Hardware overcurrent side A Illegal XMDI in DGO Illegal configuration of XMDI in the Digital Outputs menu PWMA Not ON Hardware failure IGBT A power on impossible Option Board not in Failure in detecting preset option board PTC Alarm External PTC tripped PTC Short Circuit External PTC in short circuit Illegal XMDI in MPL Illegal configuration of XMDI in the Virtual Digital Outputs MPL menu Encoder Fault Error of motor speed measure NoCurrent Fault Current is zero in FOC control Ser WatchDog SRI WatchDog Watchdog tripped in serial link O 9 pole D connector Watchdog tripped in serial link 1 RJ45 Generic Motorola Control board failure Mains Loss No power is supplied from the mains AutoTune Fault Autotune failed REF lt 4mA REF Current input 4 20 lower than 4mA lt 4mA Current input 4 20mA lower than 4mA AIN2 4mA AIN2 Current input 4 20mA lower than 4mA XAINS lt 4mA XAIN5 Current input 4 20mA lower than 4mA Fbs WatchDog Fieldbus Watchdog tripped 1ms Interrupt OverTime Control boa
399. onversion its unit of measure is the same as the one of the signal selected for analog input 59 Filtering Time over AIN1 Input 511 O 65000 0 65000ms Default 5 Level ADVANCED Address This parameter selects the value of the filter time constant of the first command applied to input signal when the signal saturation and conversion is over 118 482 PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive PO60 e of Signal over AIN2 Input ADVANCED This parameter selects the type of differential analog signal over terminals AIN2 and AIN2 in the terminal board The signal can be a voltage signal a current signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 10 V Bipolar voltage input between 10V and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values I 20 mA Bipolar current input between 20 and 20 The detected signal is saturated between these two values 2 4 20 mA Unipolar current input with min threshold between 4 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Before being saturated if the detected signal is lower than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA alarms A068 or A104 trip 3 0 10 V Unipolar voltage input between OV and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 4 0 20 mA Unipolar current input between 0 mA and 20 The detected signal is saturated between these two values Function The value set in para
400. onversion from the value read by the analog input to the corresponding speed torque reference value The conversion function is straight line passing through 2 points in Cartesian coordinates having the values read by the analog input the X axis and the speed torque reference values multiplied by the reference percentage parameters in the Y axis Each pointis detected through its two coordinates The ordinates of the two points are the following the value of Speed Min or Trq Min for the torque reference multiplied by the percentage set through P051a P056a P061a P071a P073a for the first point the value of Speed Trq Max for the torque reference multiplied by the percentage set through P052a P057a P062a P072a P074a for the second point 109 482 ee PROGRAMMING Div LONNE Speed Min depends on the selected motor see parameter C028 motor 1 C071 motor 2 or C114 motor 3 Tr Min depends on the selected motor see parameter C047 motor 1 C090 motor 2 or C133 motor 3 Speed Max depends on the selected motor see parameter C029 motor 1 C072 motor 2 or C115 motor 3 Tq Max depends on the selected motor see parameter C048 motor 1 C091 motor 2 or C134 motor 3 The X axis values of the two points depend on the analog input REF Input Parameter 1 15 the X axis value of the first point parameter P052 is the X axis value of the second point Parameter P056
401. oostl C036 C079 C 122 frequency for C037 080 123 C014 C057 C100 Phase Rotation 0 No Yes ENGINEERING 1014 1057 1100 Allows reversing the mechanical rotation of the connected motor DANGER When activating C014 C057 C100 the mechanical rotation of the connected motor and its load is reversed accordingly 282 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE C015 C058 C101 Rated Motor Frequenc 10 10000 1 0 Hz 1000 0 Hz See upper limits in Table 64 1015 1058 1101 This parameter defines the rated motor frequency nameplate rating C016 C059 C 102 Rated Motor Rpm 1 32000 1 32000 rom Default 1420 rom Level BASIC OD hd 1016 1059 1102 This parameter defines the rated motor rom nameplate rating C017 060 103 Rated Motor Power 1 32000 0 1 3200 0 kW Upper limited to twice the default value See Table 76 and Table 80 Level Oh 1017 1060 1103 This parameter defines the rated motor power nameplate rating C018 CO61 C 104 Rated Motor Current 1 32000 0 1 3200 0 See twice the upper values in Inom column in Table 73 and Table 77 See Table 76 and Table 80 1018 1061 1104 This parameter defines the rated motor current nameplate rating C019 C062 C 105 Rated Motor Voltage 50 12000 5 0 1200 0 V 2300 for class 2T drives 230 0V for class 2
402. ord for Write Enable Range Default Level Address Function 00001 32767 00001 32767 ENGINEERING Once write is enabled after entering the correct password in 000 you can use parameter 2 to enter a custom password CAUTION The new password allowing parameter write enable is the value entered in 2 Note itdown and keep ithandy C onditions for C Parameter Modifications 0 1 O Stand by only _1 StandBy Fluxing 1 StandBy Fluxing ADVANCED Factory setting allows parameters to be programmed even when the inverter is enabled However the motor must be stopped If 03 0 Stand by only parameters can be changed only when the inverter is disabled This parameter also affects the behaviour of the digital inputs for LOC REM and motor selection when those inputs change they produce their effect only when C parameters are allowed to be changed according to the value in 003 CAUTION If P003 1 StandBy Huxing when changing C parameter the drive automatically disables stops modulating and the motor starts idling NOTE If C020 0 ID Voltage Frequency C parameters may be set up when the Enable input is active and the motor is stopped independently of 003 83 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 11 DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU 11 1 Overview It is recommended that the Operating and Remoting the Keypad section in the NOTE a IDrive s Instal
403. orter silence time is considered as part of the previous message Message Address Function Data Error control End of message beginning TI T2 T2 T4 8 bits 8 bits n x 8 bits 16 bits TI T2 T3 TA Use parameter R004 TimeOut to increase the silence time interval up to max 10000ms for the systems that do not recognize standard timeouts Address The address field acknowledges any value ranging from 1 to 247 as the address of the slave peripheral device The master device queries the peripheral device specified in the adcress field the peripheral device will respond with a message containing its address to let the master device know which the slave source of the response is A master device query with a 0 address is addressed to all slave devices which will not respond at all broadcast mode Function The function related to the message may be chosen within the legal field ranging from to 255 A response of the slave device to a message of the master device will simply return the function to the master device if no error took place otherwise the most significant bit in this field is set to 1 The only functions allowed are 03h Read Holding Register and 10h Preset Multiple Register see below 417 482 aids LO e Data The data field contains any additional information for the function being used Enor Contol The error control is performed through th
404. osien 2 aS SITAL MS FLUXING MAX TIMES acier reri a eM ROME IMMO B FOC CURRENT 133 FOC FLUX REGULATOR 134 BRAKING RESISTANCE asit tac du 334 FREQUENCY OUTPUT 7137 BRIDGE CRANE eese nennen nennen 378 FUNCTIONING TIMES 67 C I CARRIER FREQUENCY ninen 247 CHANGEOVER FROM REMOTE TO LOCAL COMMAND 301 COMMAND SOURCES CONTROL METHOD CONTROLLED STOP IN CASE OF POWER FAILURE 27 CURRENT BALANCING sesssssavsccscocsiatocasonsdsaduiesonovanssaaosinessatse 128 CWIOGCWINPUT 314 J jor NNNM 115 D JOG INPUT 318 LOGGER ete 69 410 DAYLIGHT SAVING 408 K DC BRAKING 27 337 BRAKING START AND NON CONDENSING FUNCTION DCB INPUT rnit ttr nri retro estes DIGITAL INPUTS tiere ttti eto nte ttti DIGITAL OUTPUT MODE DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIGITAL PID REGULATOR DISABLE INPUT DISABLE LOC REM FWD REV KEYS DISABLE RESET ALARMS ON DISPEAY KEYPAD ave eth ace Gere eee doit DOWNLOAD UPLOAD FROM THE KEYPAD or DRIVECOM DRY RUN E EEPROM 412 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CONNECTED 252 ENABLE reno crei ero tinte to Poo Tbe rentes 305 92500 etes eee ve e 324
405. ot configured 8 Modem not dial out 16 Connect end echo time out 32 Connect end idle time out 64 Connect end term expired Status of the connection via 0 No conn modem 1 Dialing 2 Connecting 4 Connected 5 Attempt finished COMI 0 No data exchange 1 0 1 0 1 Data exchanged No data exchange COM2 Data exchanged No connection Ethernet Connection Reserved In computer networking the Intemet Protocol Control Protocol IPCP is a network control protocol for establishing and configuring Internet Protocol over a Point to Point Protocol link The IPCP configures enables and disables the IP protocol modules on both ends of the point to point link 74 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 8 10 Digital Input Settings Menu This menu allows checking the functions assigned to the digital inputs Table 9 Coding of the functions assigned to the digital inputs STOP Stop function REVERSE Startup with negative speed EN S ENABLE in safety condition DISABLE Drive disable MVelO Multispeed 0 MVell Multispeed 1 MVel2 Multispeed 2 MVel3 Multispeed 3 Cw CCw Reversal of the direction of rotation DCB DC braking UP Reference increase DOWN Reference decrease UDReset Reset of speed setpoint due to UP DOWN command Alarm 1 Auxiliary
406. ote The actual range depends on the min and max values of the PID2 reference set in parameters P445 P446 and on the gain level set in 457 This measure is active if enabled from 291 1737 This is the measure of the reference being used for the PID2 or the 2 zone mode as 019 but multiplied by the gain level set in P457 see also the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU As for the display keypad the unit of measure can be programmed with parameters P267b P267c in the DISPLAY KEYPAD menu 59 482 iDrive M024 PID Feedback PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min 32000 value of the PID feedback set in parameters 247 248 and on the gain level set in P257 Always active This is the measure of the feedback being used for the PID regulator as M020 but multiplied by the gain level set in P257 see also the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU As for the display keypad the unit of measure can be programmed with parameters P267 267 in the DISPLAY KEYPAD menu MO24a PID2 Feedback Range Active Address 60 482 Note The actual range depends on the max value and the min 32000 value of the PID2 feedback set in parameters P447 P448 and on the gain level set in P457 This measure is active if enabled from 291 1738 This is the measure of the feedback being used for the PID2 regulator
407. ources is the following e AND for the terminals allocated to the ENABLE ENABLE S Extemal Alarms n 1 n 2 n 3 functions e ORfor all other terminals 312 482 INSTRUCTIONS ox LONNE Bis If the keypad is enabled as a command source the START STOP RESET LOC REM FWD REV functions are enabled to disable LOC REM and FWD REV see parameter P269 The keypad is ignored for the processing of logic functions AND OR of the other command sources that are enabled at that moment As the ENABLE command of the hardware terminal board is hardware safety device it enables the drive it is always active even when none of parameters C140 C141 or C142 selects the terminal board 71 The commands for the Extemal Alarm n 1 n 2 n 3 functions are always considered for the drive terminal board only The LOCAL mode that can be enabled with the LOC REM key from the keypad or with the LOCAL command function from the terminal board see C180 forces the keypad as the only command source thus ignoring the values set in parameters C140 C141 C142 The following functions are therefore enabled for the hardware terminal board Extemal Alarm 1 n 2 n 3 Motor Sel n 2 Motor Sel n 3 SLAVE Source Selection LOCAL and the ENABLE and RESET functions are always enabled for terminals MDI2 and Table 82 Remote command inputs from serial link Remote virtual terminal board
408. own submenu in the Configuration menu The following options are available parameter C225 The function is disabled YES After the time set in C226 Power Down start delay starting from the instant when power down occurs a deceleration ramp takes place deceleration ramp in Power Down C227 The time period of the deceleration ramp can be user defined YESV In case of power down for a time longer than C226 the motor coasts to stop so that DC bus voltage value is kept constant at C230 To do so a PI proportional integral regulator is used which is adjusted through parameter C231 proportional term and C232 integral term Alam case of power down when the time set C226is over alarm A064 trips factory setting NOTE If the mains loss deactivates the ENABLE command the motor cannot coast to stop because the ENABLE command is required for the hardware enabling of IGBTs NOTE DC bus voltage Power Down cannot occur C008 xT Regen where x can be 2 4 drive is DC powered by Regenerative IDrive or an equivalent drive stabilizing 5 6 Speed DC bus 4 Voltage C230 Ld l 1 AC Mains A OK t gt 44 gt C226 Extra Power Down Delay Deceleration P000357 b 368 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE Figure 57 Power Down Example iDrive 369 482 ee mV PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE The figure above illustrates the
409. p menu is available only if P265 3 Start Up see the DISPLAY KEYPAD MENU NOTE The Keypad pages are available only if the relevant references feedback limits are activated see the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the PID CONFIGURATION MENU 20 482 PROGRAMMING cs L NNE 1 7 ESC Key Press the ESC key and to move up one level in the menu tree In the example below starting from parameter C015 in the MOTOR CONTROL MENU inside the Configuration Menu you can move up to the Root page by pressing the ESC key Page C015 Parameter of Configuration Menu Motor 1 NAL When using the SAVE ENTER key to change a parameter including multiple fields ESC gt is displayed for the ESC key press ESC to move to the next field In the example below 2 programmable fields are displayed for P269 Press SAVE ENTER to enter the editing mode sable REM F WD REV Press the following keys to quit the last page displayed e ESC new values are not saved to Eeprom SAVE ENTER new values are saved to Eeprom 21 482 PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 1 8 RESET Key Alarm and Control Board Reset The RESET key is used to reset the drive after an alarm trips and the cause responsible for the alarm has been removed Press the RESETkey for more than 5 seconds reset the control board and reinitiate it This procedure may be useful when changes made to Rxxx parameters which activa
410. pad is enabled a variation to the active reference may be added through an algebraic sum calculated by processing the other reference sources that are activated at that moment The reference variation method can be selected with parameters P067 PO68 P069 and C163 This function is the same as the UP and DOWN functions from the terminal board see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU C161 and C162 and P068 PO069 in the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU 315 482 316 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS The LOCAL mode that can be enabled with the LOC REM key on the keypad or with the LOCAL command function from terminal board see C180 forces the keypad to become the only command and reference source thus ignoring the values set in parameters C143 C144 C145 C146 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive ENCODER The Encoder source is an encoder input it can come from the terminal board terminals MDI6 MDI7 in Encoder A or from the optional Encoder B board see the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU It generates a reference resulting from the correct setting of the relevant parameters P073 P074 allowing the relevant scaling see the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU UP DOWN from digital inputs To enable the UP DOWN from digital inputs also set the relevant Up and Down inputs see the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU XAIN4 and XAIN5 XAIN4 and XAIN5 come from the analog inputs in the terminal board of ES847 and generate a referenc
411. parameter defines the rotor time constant of the connected motor If the rotor time constant is not stated by the motor manufacturer it can obtained through the autotune function see the FIRST STARTUP section and the AUTOTUNE MENU Whenever one of these parameters is written the drive automatically computes NOTE and saves the parameters of PI flux regulator and FOC control proportional constant for motor 1 P158 165 for motor 2 P172 for motor 3 and integral time P159 166 for motor 2 173 for motor 3 C026 C069 C112 Time Constant of Bus Voltage Low pass Filter 0 0 3200 0 ms ENGINEERING 1026 1069 1112 This parameter defines the time constant of the low pass filter of the bus voltage readout Changing this value can avoid motor oscillations especially when no load is connected to the motor 286 482 o PROGRAMMING cs L NNE C028 071 114 Min Motor Speed 32000 32000 32000 32000 rpm Default Level 7 1028 1071 1114 This parameter defines the minimum speed of the connected motor When references forming the global reference are at their min relative value the global reference equals the min speed of the connected motor Example CONTROL METHOD MENU 1 REF Selection of reference 1 source 2 AINT Selection of reference 2 source 0 Disable Selection of reference source 0 Disable Selection of reference 4 source INPUT
412. patterns of the motor speed and the DC bus voltage in case of mains loss In ihe example above power supply is restored before the drive turns off and before the deceleration ramp is over so the motor accelerates with the preset acceleration ramp If power supply is restored during the deceleration ramp in Power Down the connected motor accelerates following the selected acceleration ramp A speed value for the end of Power Down can be set in C235 the desired operating mode at stop can be set in C234 When the motor speed attains the end level of Power Down the following functions can be selected in parameter C234 Stop The drive will control the motor until it stops down independently of the value set in C235 when the motor stops and power supply is restored the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor DCB When the speed of the Power Down end set in C235 is attained DC braking occurs If power supply is restored during DC braking the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor Stand By When the speed of the Power Down end set in C235 is attained the drive is in stand by if power supply is restored when the drive is in stand by the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor 370 482 PROGRAMMING se LONNE 39 2 List of Parameters C225 to C235 Table 102 List of parameters C225 to C235 C
413. pensation and filtering of the reference obtained The inputs may be used as voltage or current inputs depending on the setting and the position of the relevant dip switches see the IDrive s Installation Instructions manual HN The source is a frequency input on terminal MDI6 or MD18 ANB and it generates a reference determined by the setting of the relevant parameters from P071 to P072 allowing proper scaling see the INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU and the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU SERIAL LINK The Serial Link source is an input located on the MODBUS link the reference value must be written by the user to the adaresses below 314 482 o PROGRAMMING cs L NNE Table 83 Reference inputs from serial link 3peed Min speed 1412 1025 BASIC Speed reference limit RPM Max speed integer portion Speed 1413 1026 BASIC Speed reference limit 99 99 RPM 100 decimal portion Torque Min torque 1416 1029 BASIC Torque Max torque Tenths 1025 is the speed reference if at least one among parameters C143 146 is set to 5 Serial Link and the type of reference of the active motor parameters 011 C054 C097 is set to 0 5 1025 is the speed limit if C147 5 Serial Link and the type of reference of the active motor is set to 2 Torque with Speed Limit The AN NOTE range of this reference depends on the active Minimum Speed value and Maximum Speed value a
414. ple 1 The Speed Reference is the algebraic sum of two references Analog inputs REF and AINI that are supposed to be 0 10V voltage inputs are to be used as speed references The main reference will be the sum of the two references being used The end result may vary based on the parameters concerned P050 Type of Reference for REF Input 3 0 10V 51 Value REF Input producing Min Reference 0 0 051 of Ref Min producing Min Reference 100 0 P052 Value of REF Input producing Max Reference 10 0V 052 Percentage of Ref Max producing Max Reference 100 076 P055 Type of Signal over AINI input 3 0 10V P056 Value of Input producing Min Reference 0 0V 5 Percentage of Ref Min producing Min Reference 100 0 57 Value of input producing Reference 10 0V 57 Percentage of Ref_Max producing Max Reference 100 0 C028 Min Motor Speed Orpm C029 Max Motor Speed 1500rpm C143 Selection of Reference 1 1 REF C144 Selection of Reference 2 2 AINI C179 for Source Selection 0 Disable 179 0 Disable ensures that the main reference is the sum of the references being used If a digital input for Source selection were used either one reference would be selected as the main reference based on the input status Both REF and AINT references are programmed order to meet the following requirements e at
415. ply voltages DC link and input reference Also check if alarm messages are displayed In the Motor Measures Menu check the speed reference 000 the reference speed processed by the ramps 002 the supply voltage of the control section M030 the DC link voltage M029 the condition of the control terminals M033 Check to see if these readouts match with the measured values INSTRUCTIONS 13 Additional parameter modifications 14 Reset LONNE bis For the optimization of the motor performance adjust parameters 021 no load current C024 mutual inductance C025 rotor time constant Consider the following 21 Too high values Lower torque especially at rated speed because most part of the voltage imposed by the drive is used to magnetize the motor instead of generating a proper motor torque C021 Too low values Because of the motor flux weakening higher current ratings are needed e C024 Mutual inductance This is computed each time the no load current level is changed This is not binding for the motor control but strongly affects the correct estimation of the output torque in case of overestimation decrease C025 and vice versa e C025 Optimum value To obtain the optimum value of the rotor time constant the best way consists in performing several attempts with a constant load but with different values of C025 The optimum value is the one ensuring to obtain the out
416. pped and n 8 is the first alarm tripped The measures marked with Mxxx are the same measures covered in this section the Data Logger ES851 is installed even the 5851 RTC version only and parameter 021 Data Logger is set to 2 ENABLE the date and time when the alarm has tripped are displayed instead of the Supply Time ST and the Operation Time OT respectively Navigation Example Fault List Menu 76 482 PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 8 12 Power Off List Menu This menu contains the measures of some characteristic variables detected at the drive power off in conjunction with the alarm if any tripped at that moment Press the SAVE ENTER key to access the submenu and navigate to the measures detected by the drive when the alarm tripped Measures and codes are the same as the ones shown in the Fault List Menu the Data Logger ES851 is installed even the 5851 RTC version only and parameter 021 Data Logger is set to 2 ENABLE the date and time when the alarm has tripped are displayed instead of the Supply Time ST and the Operation Time OT respectively The diagram below shows a navigation example for the Power Off List Navigation Example PowerOff List Menu Save Enter 77 482 PROGRAMMING we LO NNE 9 PRODUCT MENU 9 1 Overview T
417. put and P185 and P193 for and respectively Mode Sets the acquisition mode of the selected variable as an absolute value the type voltage current for the analog output If Mode Disable a different operating mode is activated for the analog output for which the represented variable is determined by the MODBUS address set in Address and the gain value set in Gain is applied P176 Mode P207 Gain P210 Address for AO1 P184 Mode P208 Gain P211 Address for 2 P192 Mode P209 Gain P212 Address for AO3 e Val Min Out Min Defines the minimum saturation value of the variable to be represented and the corresponding value to be assigned to the analog output For values equal to or lower than Val Min Out Min will be assigned to the selected analog output For analog outputs AOI 2 and AO3 the following parameters will be used P178 P182 P186 P194 and P190 P198 for values Val Min Out Min e Val Max Out Max Defines the maximum saturation value of the variable to be represented and the corresponding value to be assigned to the analog output For values equal to or higher than Val Max Out Max will be assigned to the selected analog output For analog outputs AO2 and AO3 the following parameters will be used P179 P183 P187 P195 and P191 P199 for values Val Max Out Max Offset Defines the offset value applied to the analog output Offset is set in parame
418. put is used as a frequency output and any MDOI settings in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU are ignored 150 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 20 2 2 ANALOG OUTPUT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES This section contains a description of operating examples of the analog outputs obtained with different programming modes Example 1 Table 30 Programming AO1 0 10V P176 0 10V 1 Analog output P177 1 Speed Selected variable for AO1 analog output P178 00 rom Min value of AOI selected variable P179 500 rpm Max value of AOI selected variable P180 0 000 V AO Analog output offset P181 0 ms Filter for AO1 analog output P182 0 0 Min output value with reference to 78 P183 10 0 V Max output value with reference to P179 Figure 17 Curve voltage speed implemented by 1 Example 1 19 94 8 7 5 44 3 2 4 4 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 rpm Example 2 Table 31 Programming 1 ABS 0 10 P176 ABS 0 10V Analog output P177 1 Speed Selected variable for analog output P178 Min value of 1 selected variable P179 500 rom Max value of AOI selected variable P180 0 000 V AO Analog output offset P181 0 ms Filter for analog output P182 0 0 V Min AO1 output value with reference to P178 P183 10 0 V output value with reference to 151 482
419. put torque with the lower current see M026 in the Motor Measures Menu When parameter P003 Standby Only condition required for changing C parameters you can change Cxxx parameters in the CONFIGURATION menu only when the drive is DISABLED or STOPPED whereas if P003 Standby Fluxing you can change parameters when the motor is stopped but the drive is enabled Before changing any parameters remember that the correct code for parameter POOO must be previously set up You can write down any custom parameters in the table provided on the last pages of this Programming Manual If an alarm trips find the cause responsible for the alarm and reset the drive Enable input MDI3 terminal 16 for some time or press the RESETon the display keypad 49 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 8 MEASURES MENU 8 1 Overview The Measures Menu contains the variables measured by the drive that can be used by the user In the display keypad measures are divided into subgroups The measure subgroups are the following Motor Measures Menu This menu contains the values of the speed reference at constant rpm the values of the reference being used and the speed values of the connected motor expressed in rpm the drive rated frequency the torque reference at constant rpm the torque demand and the motor torque output the torque limit reference at constant speed and the torque limit being used expressed both in Nm and as a percen
420. que min and Torque max C047 C048 for motor 1 and so on 102 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE PO28 Unit of Measure for Torque Ramp Time 0 0 01 130 15 2 15 9 5 105 1 0 15 ADVANCED 628 Defines the unit of measure for the torque ramp times See the unit of measure for ramp 1 par P014 P029 J og Ramp Acceleration Time O 6500 6500 sec ADVANCED The preset time corresponds to the time the ramped speed torque reference takes to go from zero to the JOG speed torque value 070 6500 sec The preset time corresponds to the time the ramped speed torque reference takes to go from the JOG speed torque value P070 to zero Defines whether acceleration is reset not when switching from acceleration to deceleration and vice versa reference gradient For more details see the description of the speed ramps at the beginning of this section Function Parameter is interlocked with parameter C210 Automatic extension of down NOTE ramp so that P031 0 No cannot be programmed in conjunction with C210 With resistor 103 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 2 Fire Mode Acceleration Ram 0 327 00 if PO14 0 0 01 s 0 3270 0 if PO14 1 0 1 5 0 32700 14 2 gt 1 5 O 327000 s if 14 3 gt 10s See Table 74 and Table 78 0 32700 ENGINEERING 632 This ramp is used to accelerate the moto
421. r REFinput ADVANCED P055 of signal over AINI input ADVANCED 2 4 20 655 P056 Value of AINI input producing min reference X axis ADVANCED 4 0mA 656 Percentage of Speed Min producing min reference Y axis related to 56 6 iid P057 a of AIN1 input producing max reference X ADVANCED 20 0mA 657 Percentage of Speed Max producing max Hoa reference Y axis related to P057 BRUM 199 0 679 P058 Offset over AIN1 input ADVANCED 658 59 Filtering time over AINI input ADVANCED 5 ms 659 PO60 Type of signal over AIN2 input ADVANCED 2 4 20mA 660 PO61 Value of AIN2 input producing min reference X axis ADVANCED 4 0mA 661 P06la Percentage of Speed Min Trq Min producing min ADVANCED 100 0 679 reference Y axis related to P061 P062 2 of AIN2 input producing max reference X ADVANCED 20 0mA 662 P062 Percentage of Speed Max producing max reference Y axis related to P062 DEBERE 10007 701 P063 Offset over AIN2 input ADVANCED OmA 663 P064 Filtering fime over AIN2 input ADVANCED 5 ms 664 P065 Minimum reference and SIARTGisobling threshold ADVANCED 0 665 P066 START disable delay at P065 threshold ADVANCED Os 666 67 Keypad and terminal board UP DOWN ramp ADVANCED Quadratic 667 68 Storage of UP DOWN values at Power Off ADVANCED YES 668 PO68a Reset UP DOWN speed torque at Stop ADVANCED 940 68 Reset UP DOWN PID at Stop ADVANCED 94
422. r is required when contacting LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s CUSTOMER SERVICE in order to Function activate the Fire Mode This measure is expressed in 32 bits divided into two 16 bit words the low part and the high part 80 482 o PROGRAMMING cs L NNE Fire Mode Enable Password 0 9999 Default Address enable the Fire Mode please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA CUSTOMER SERVICE and give the Serial Number of the drive where the Fire Mode is to be activated Enter the password given by the Customer Service CAUTION The Fire Mode Enable Password is set to when the Restore Default is performed Manufacturer The name of L nne Scandinavia AS is displayed followed by L nne Scandinavia AS s website santerno com You can also send a Modbus query message to read the product ID Product ID 1 65535 You can read the product ID from address 476 The eight high bits give the first character of the ID the eight low bits give the second character of the product ID E g for PD IDrive Drive MODBUS value read from address 476 20548d 0x5044H 50H Character P 44H gt Character 81 482 PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE 10 PASSWORD AND USER LEVEL MENU 10 1 Overview The Password and User Level menu allows changing the programming parameters and sets their visibility enables parameter modification POOL sets the use
423. r level 02 allows to change the password set in POOO conditions required to change parameters 10 2 List of Parameters 000 to P003 Table 15 List of parameters to Write enable BASIC 00001 513 1 Programming level BASIC 0 Basic 514 2 Write enable password ENGINEERING 00001 510 4 to change ADVANCED StandBy Fluxing 509 White Enable Factory setting is POOO 1 parameter write is enabled To access parameter allowing parameter write access the Password and User Level Menu from the Parameters Menu 00000 32767 00000 No 32767 00001 Cannot be accessed via serial link Parameter write via serial link is always enabled Set the correct value in POOO to enable parameter write The default password for POOO is 00001 You can enter a custom password in 02 82 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 01 User Level 0 Basic 1 Advanced 2 Engineering The inverter programming parameters are grouped by access levels based on their functions more or less complex functions Some menus or some parts of menus are not displayed when a given access level is selected When the BASIC access level is selected once the inverter parameterization is correct navigation is easier as only frequently accessed parameters are displayed The User Level is stated for each parameter 2 Passw
424. r when in Fire Mode Fire Mode Deceleration Ramp 0 327 00 if PO14 0 gt 0 01 s 0 3270 0 if 14 1 0 1 0 32700 5 if gt 1 5 O 327000 s if 14 3 105 See Table 74 Table 78 ENGINEERING 0 32700 This ramp is used to decelerate the motor when in Fire Mode 104 482 PROGRAMMING cs LONNE 13 INPUTS FOR REFERENCES MENU 13 1 Processing Speed Torque References The main reference is the value at constant rpm for the controlled physical variable speed or torque MOOO 007 required for the drive This reference is acquired by the drive only if the SIARTcommand is active and the drive is RUNNING otherwise itis ignored The main reference is the reference at constant rpm when the drive is RUNNING it will increment the speed or torque set point which will reach the main reference with a timed ramp see the RAMPS MENUJ The drive operating mode is factory set to MASTER with a speed reference In SLAVE mode a torque reference is used this operating mode may be configured for control Vector Torque Control and FOC control Field Oriented Control only The control algorithm and the MASTER SLAVE mode can be set for each of the 3 programmable motors depending on which motor is active at that moment motor 1 motor 2 or motor 3 To enable the SLAVE set the following parameters to Lor 2 011 motor 1 C054 motor 2 C097 motor
425. rameter C189 Possible cause A102 103 A104 A086 Current input gt 20 mA 102 REF Current input 4 20mA or 0 20mA greater than 20 103 Current input 4 20mA or 0 20 greater than 20mA A104 AIN2 Current input 4 20mA 0 20 greater than 20mA 086 XAIN5 Current input 4 20 or 0 20mA greater than 20mA A current value greater than 20mA has been detected over one input REF AINT AIN2 5 set with the following ranges 4 20 or 0 20 Possible e Wrong setting of on the control board except for A086 cause e Failure in the current signal source 1 Check setting of SW1 except for A086 Description Event Solution 2 Check the current signal source 105 A106 A107 A108 PT100 Channel 1 2 3 4 Fault A105 PT100 Channel 1 fault A106 PT100 Channel 2 fault A107 PT100 Channel 3 fault A108 PT100 Channel 4 fault Description Hardware input out of the measure range of the drive e Wrong setting of SW1 or SW2 on optional control board ES847 e Failure in the current signal source 1 Check setting of SW1 and SW2 2 Check the current signal source A109 Ambient Overtemperature The ambient temperature is too high The control board has detected a too high ambient temperature Inverter or cabinet overheated failure of control board NTC 1 Open the cabinet and check its conditions Also check measure M062 2 Reset the alarm send a RE
426. rameter selects the second digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO4 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MDO4 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 217 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P300 MDO4 Testing Variable A ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt ABS x lt ADVANCED This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P298 using P302 as a comparing value P301 MDO4 Testing Variable B ABS x gt ABS x gt ABS x lt ABS x lt This parameter defines the test to be performed for the variable detected by P299 using P303 as comparing value P302 MDO4 Comparing Value for Test A 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 96 of the full scale value of selected variable A see Table 41 Defaut O Level ADVANCED Address This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test P303 MDO4 Comparing Value for Test B 320 00 320 00 32000 32000 of the full scale value of selected variable B see Table 41 Level ADVANCED Address This parameter defines the comparing value with the selected variable for test B 218 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P304 MDO4 Function Applied to the Result of t
427. rameters for the selected motor of the motor speed reference Unlike function O Preset Speed if no multispeed is selected no digital input programmed for multispeed selection is activated or all digital inputs programmed for multispeed selection are deactivated the speed reference is zero P081 to P098 Output Speed Mspd n 1 15 32000 32000 32000 Default level From 081 to P085 BASIC From 087 to 98 ADVANCED 7497 121557 681 698 This parameter sets the multispeed output speed selected through the relevant digital inputs Table 90 The multispeed value is scaled based on the unit of measure set in P100 The reference resulting from the multispeed selected through the relevant digital inputs will be computed based on the setting of parameter 080 127 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 99 Fire Mode Speed 32000 32000 32000 rom 755 75000 NE ENGINEERING 699 Determines the value of the output speed in Fire Mode The Fire Mode 20 speed depends on the unit measure programmed 100 P100 Multispeed Unit of Measure Range 0 0 01 rpm 2 1 0 rpm Defaut 2 Level ADVANCED Address Function Determines the unit of measure considered for the 15 allowable multispeed values and the Fire Mode speed in P099 CAUTION When changing the unit of measure of the multispeed values in P100 the preset speed values for th
428. rcentage of the motor rated torque Flux reference required and expressed in Weber Wb 54 482 e PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive M026 Output C urent 0 6553 5 Note The actual range depends on the drive size 0 0 100 0 Heating of the connected motor This parameter indicates the current level of the motor heating following I2t pattern set in the MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MENU This value is expressed as a percentage of The allowable asymptotic value 0 65535 Note The actual range depends the drive voltage class Always active Measure of the RMS of the output voltage 0 6553 5 kW Note The actual range depends on the drive size 75 122 004 1723 1724 LSWord MSWord Counter of the drive energy consumption This is a value expressed in 32 bits divided into two 16 bit words the low part and the high part 55 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS M029 DC Bus Voltage jal CE o 1400 0 1400 V Always active 1679 Measure of the voltage in the drive DC link M030 Supply Voltage 0 1000 V Always active Measure of the RMS value of the drive supply voltage 56 482 PROGRAMMING T c LONNE 8 3 PID Regulator Menu This menu contains the measures relating to the input and output values of the internal PID regulator MO18 PID Reference at Constant RPM 96 100 00 76 10000 Note The actual range depends on t
429. rcentage of the motor rated torque 52 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive MO11 Torque Demand 500 Note The actual range depends on the torque limit values set for the selected motor C047 C 048 Motor 1 C090 C 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active for VIC and FOC controls only With speed control Torque demand of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of the motor rated torque With torque control Torque reference processed with respect to the preset torque ramp time and expressed as a reference of the motor rated torque Approximate value of the torque produced by the motor and expressed as a percentage of the rated torque of the selected motor 32000 Nm Note The actual range depends on the preset torque limit values and the rated torque of the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active for VIC and FOC controls only This is the limit value for the torque at constant speed If an external torque limit is used the value of this measure is the torque limit obtained at constant speed on the other hand if the torque limit is internal to the drive this value is the actual torque limit expressed in Nm 32000 Nm Note The actual range depends on the preset torque limit values and the rated torque of the selected motor C047 C048 Motor 1 090 091 Motor 2 C133 C 134 Motor 3 Active for VIC and FOC controls only This is the torque
430. rd failure Parm Lost Chk Parm Lost COMI Parameter download upload error Parameter download upload error Drive OverHeated Drive thermal protection tripped Motor OverHeated Motor thermal protection tripped Speed Alarm Motor speed too high MMI Trouble Control board failure FOC No Encoder FOC control but Encoder not enabled Tracking Error KeyPad WatchDog Encoder speed tracking error Communication watchdog via keypad Illegal Encoder Functions programmed for MDI or encoder B selected and encoder board not detected External Alarm 1 External alarm 1 External Alarm 2 External Alarm 3 External alarm 2 External alarm 3 XAINS gt 20mA XAINS Current input 4 20mA or 0 20 greater than 20mA A087 15V LOSS 15V Loss A088 ADC Not Tuned Control board failure A089 Parm Lost COM2 Parameter download upload error A090 Parm Lost COM3 Parameter download upload error A091 Braking Resistor Overload Overvoltage tripped with braking resistor activated due to continuous operation time exceeding the max programmed time 446 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE iDrive 447 482 MEET PROGRAMMING w LO NNE A092 SW Version KO Control board failure A093 Bypass Circuit Open By Pass relay open A094 HeatSink Overheated IGBT heatsink temperature too high A095 Illegal Drive Profile
431. rence 5 0 5 319 34 3 istot Parameters GEO TO C149 N 321 35 DIGITAL INPUTS MENU eue ene eme e eo erkennen ee eode 324 35 1 OVET SW iiic e vi pere a a 324 35 1 1 Jr de M H 326 35 1 2 ENABLE Terminal 15 012 tre teneri 327 35 1 3 RESET Terminal 328 35 2 Factory setting of the Digital INPUTS 328 35 3 histor Parameters C149 t0 C 188c and I006 5 3 oninia a 329 36 ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU 349 36 1 OVEST EW 5nd BHO PORRO RR n enu np nte 349 36 1 1 WhieniES936 15 NOTJUSGG 349 36 1 2 When Using ES836 or 5913 350 36 1 3 When Using 351 36 2 List Of 189 199 353 37 BRAKING RESISTANCE 200 0 40 357 37 1 sc d TR E
432. represents the max value of the modulation frequency being used As per FOC control the modulation frequency set in C002 is used only if exceeding 8 kHz when the max allowable carrier frequency is gt 8kHz Otherwise the max carrier frequency allowed is used for the models implementing a carrier frequency lt 8 kHz independently of C002 The max value set in 002 cannot be lower than the min value set in COOL Decrease the value 1 if you need to decrease the max value and if 1 equals C002 The max value in C002 also determines the max allowable speed value for the selected motor in order to ensure a minimum number of pulses per period of frequency produced This value is 16 for maximum carrier frequency max 002 value greater than 5kHz and 10 for lower maximum carrier frequency see Table 73 and Table 77 268 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C003 Pulse Number LONNE Bis 0 12 1 24 2 48 3 96 4 192 5 384 1 24 ENGINEERING 1003 IFD and VTC This parameter has effect only if 001 002 represents the min value of pulses per period obtained when modulation frequency changes synchronous modulation 1 Yes See Table 73 and Table 77 ENGINEERING This parameter enables silent modulation The electric noise due to the switching frequency is dampened 269 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 32 MOT
433. rform a new autotune procedure 3 If the alarm persists please contact L NNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service A066 A067 068 A069 C unent input lt 4mA 066 REF Current input 4 20 lower than 4mA Description 067 Current input 4 20mA lower than 4mA 068 AIN2 Current input 4 20mA lower than 4mA 069 XAIN5 current input 4 20mA lower than 4mA A current value lower than 4 mA has been detected over one input REF AIN1 AIN2 XAIN5 set with the following range 4 20 Wrong setting of SWL the control board except for A069 Signal cable disconnected Failure in the current signal source Check setting of SWL except for 069 Check that the signal cable is properly connected to its terminal Check the current signal source NOTE The alarms above trip only if the relevant inputs have been selected see CONTROL METHOD MENU and PID CONFIGURATION MENU 457 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE A070 Fieldbus Watc hDog Watchdog Fieldbus tripped The watchdog fieldbus tripped and communication is suspended Communication is interrupted the Master did not send any valid message for a time longer than the time set in the parameter relating to the value set with parameter R016 of the fieldbus watchdog time see the FIELDBUS CONFIGURATION MENU e Voltage removed from Fieldbus No communication from Master Watchdog times too short Check fieldbus connections Check t
434. riable to be controlled error 4 Y ntegral term this is the variable keeping track of the history of the detected errors summation of all errors Y Derivative term this is the variable keeping track of the evolution of the error or the controlled variable difference between two consecutive errors or between two consecutive values of the feedbacked variable The weighted summation of these terms represents the output signal of the PID regulator The weight of these three terms may be defined by the user with the parameters below P240 P241 P242 td P243 x PID Out M Inverse Anti P238 P236 256 Wind Up Rate Limiter err Wax Reference PID Normal Out PID Out gt err x gt 54 gt gt P238 Desaturation P237 xm PID Out Min Feedback PID Deriv Max D 5 gt dAtd 4 P239 000341 Figure 23 PID Block Diagram NOTE In LOCAL mode the PID regulator is disabled if it is used to correct the reference or the voltage values C294 2 Sum Reference or C294 3 Sum Voltage In LOCAL mode if the drive reference is the PID output C294 Reference and the Type parameter on the Keypad page in Local mode is P266 Ref Active Spd the NOTE PID reference can be changed by activating the Local mode from the Ke
435. rite to this parameter e g display keypad in editing mode or Upload Download to from keypad The parameter the Master is trying to write to is not included in the selected User Level e g it is trying to write an ADVANCED parameter when the BASIC user level is selected 419 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 49 SERIAL LINKS MENU 49 1 Overview NOTE Please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual for the description of the serial links and connections For a greater immunity against communication interference an optional optoisolated serial board ES822 may be used instead of RS485 serial link Serial links 5232 and AN NOTE RS485 can interface with ES822 board Please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual for the description of the optional optoisolated board The parameters described in this menu are Rxxx parameters AN NOTE Once changed and saved they become active only when the drive is next switched on or when the control board is reset by holding down the RESETkey for more than 5 secs Drives of the iDrive series may be connected to peripheral devices through a serial link This enables both reading and writing of all parameters normally accessed through the display keypad Two wire RS485 is used which ensures better immunity against disturbance even on long cable paths thus reducing the communication errors Two serial links are available Serial Link 0 is provided with a 9 p
436. roduce an output voltage with a frequency value equal to 100Hz in proximity to this speed the carrier frequency should be at its maximum level Suppose that a model implementing max 16kHz carrier frequency is used Assign the following 1 1600Hz C002 16000Hz gt C002 100Hz 160 pulses per period fcarrier 18000 Hz C002 16000 14000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 1 2000 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 C001 C003 fout Hz 002 003 Figure 40 Canier frequency example Suppose that 192 so that C002 C 003 16000 192 83 33Hz The max carrier frequency is obtained with this output frequency The min frequency is kept constant until frequency C001 C 003 8 33 Hz is attained corresponding to 250 rpm of the motor speed the output frequency range ranging from 8 33 to 83 33Hz synchronous modulation is obtained and the carrier frequency applied results from f carrier fout Hz 265 482 iDri PROGRAMMING j L e 266 482 o PROGRAMMING c LO NNE 31 1 3 FOC CONTROL The FOC control algorithm selects the silent modulation mode C004 and allows increasing the carrier frequency with parameter C002 The FOC algorithm uses a carrier frequency corresponding to e max carrier freq allowed for the IDrive size concerned if freq is lt 8kHz see Table 73 and Table 77 e ihe greatest betwe
437. rque curve automatic increase Variable torque compensation expressed as a percentage of the rated motor voltage The preset value expresses the voltage increase when the motor is running at rated torque C038 C081 C124 32 1 5 EXAMPLE 1 V F PATTERN PARAMETERIZATION Motor 1 the voltage frequency pattern is to be programmed for an asynchronous motor 400V 50Hz with a rated speed of 1500rpm up to 2000rpm Type of V f curve CO13 Constant Torque Rated frequency 015 50Hz Rated voltage 019 400V Preboost C034 depending on the starting torque Max speed C115 2000rpm 274 482 e PROGRAMMING c L NNE 32 1 6 EXAMPLE 2 V F PATTERN PARAMETERIZATION The voltage frequency pattern is to be programmed for an asynchronous motor 400V 50Hz having a rated power of 7 5 kW and a rated speed of 1420 rpm with a voltage compensation depending on the motor torque Voltage compensation AutoBoost is calculated as follows Type of V f curve CO13 Constant Torque Rated frequency 5 50Hz Motor rem 016 1420rpm Rated power 017 7 5kW Rated voltage 019 400V Preboost C034 depending on the starting torque Autoboost 8 4 Voltage compensation AutoBoost results from the formula below AV C019 x 038 100 x T Tn Where T is the estimated motor torque and Tn is the rated motor torque Tn is calculated as follows Tn Pn x pole pairs 2zf C017 x p
438. ry Before resetting an alarm deactivate the ENABLE signal on terminal MDI2 to disable the inverter and prevent the connected motor from running at CAUTION uncontrolled speed unless parameter C181 1 the Safety Start function is active after resetting an alarm or after supplying the inverter this will start only if the ENABLE contact is opened and closed again 444 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 56 2 What To Do When an Alarm Trips protection trips or the drive is in emergency condition the drive is locked CAUTION Um the motor starts idling the drive and to prevent the connected motor from running at uncontrolled Before resetting an alarm disable the ENABLE signal on terminal MDI2 to disable CAUTION speed Proceed as follows 1 Disable the ENABLE signal on terminal MDI2 to disable the drive and to lock the motor unless parameter C181 1 the Safety Start function is active after resetting an alarm or after supplying the drive this will start only if the ENABLE contact is open and closed 2 Ifthe motor is idling wait until it stops Check the FAULTUST carefully for any information about the alarm tripped in order to determine the cause responsible for the alarm and its possible solutions Any information stored to the FAULT LIST is also required when contacting L nne Scandinavia AS s Customer Service 3 In the following sections find the relative alarm code and follow the instructions
439. s Control 1 32000 1 0 32000 Disabled 33 33 ETE 759 766 773 FOC Ti Integral time of flux regulator PI for motor n 1 P166 and P173 relate to parameters 2 and 3 The regulator s structure is as follows error Set Point Measure integral status integral status eror Ki Ts Output integral status where Kp is the proportional coefficient is the integral coefficient 1 where is the integral time Ts is the regulator operating time ranging from 200 to 400 microseconds based on carrier frequency Parameters P159 P166 P173 are automatically recomputed and saved whenever the Rotor Time Constant parameter C025 is changed 145 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 20 ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU 20 1 Overview NOTE description of the analog output and the frequency output or for the Please refer to the IDrive s Installation Instructions Manual for the hardware configuration of the dip switches for voltage current outputs NOTE Than Disabled Any configuration set in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU will have no MDO1 digital output is used when the frequency output is enabled P200 other effect The IDrive drive allows configuring three programmable analog outputs as voltage outputs or current outputs as well as one frequency output 20 1 1 FACTORY SETTING OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog outputs are factory set to voltage values rangin
440. s P172 Flux Kp M3 0 00 P173 Flux Ti M3 33 ms 17 21 Analog Outputs P176 AO Mode 1 10V P177 AO1 Sel 1 Motor Speed 178 1 Min 1500 000 179 1 1500 000 180 1 0 000 V 181 1 Filt 0 000 5 P182 AO Out min 10 0 V 183 1 Out mox 10 0 184 2 Mode 1 10V 185 2 Sel 2 Speed Ref 186 2 Min 1500 000 rom 187 2 Max 1500 000 rom P188 AC2 Offse 0 000 V 189 2 Filt 0 000 s 190 2 Out_min 10 0 V P191 AC2 Out mox 10 0 P192 AO3 Mode 1 10V 193 Sel 5 Motor Current 194 Min 0 000 A 195 Max 36 000 A 196 Offse 0 000 V P197 AO3 Filt 0 000 s 198 Out_min 10 0 V 199 Out_max 10 0 V P200 PulsOut Mode 0 Disabled P201 PlsOut Sel 1 Motor Speed 202 5 Out Min Orpm 203 5 Out Orpm 204 5 Out Fmax 10 00 kHz 205 5 Out Fmin 100 00 kHz 206 5 Out Filt 0 000 s P207 AO1Gain P208 AO2Gain P209 AO3Gain RESERVED 210 RESERVED 211 2 212 P213 Sin Am 1 473 482 Dive LONNE 214 5 Freq 1 00 Hz P215 Saw Freq 1 000 Hz 21 22 Timers 216 1 delay On 0 0 5 217 1 dela
441. s that are dynamically linked with the speed error see figure below Integral coefficient 1 P126 err P130 1 P125 1 P126 P131 P130 Proportional coefficient P128 err P130 P129 28 P131 P130 Integral Proportional P000264 B coefficient coefficient 1 P125 P129 P128 1 P126 error error gt rpm P130 131 P130 P131 Figure 14 Dual Parameterization function example 138 482 PROGRAMMING c L NNE 18 2 List of Parameters P125 to P152 Table 27 List of parameters P125 to P152 P125 Motl Integral time for maximum error BASIC 500 ms 725 P126 Motl Integral time for minimum error BASIC 500 ms 726 P128 ji Prop coefficient for minimum BASIC 10 00 728 P129 i Prop coefficient for maximum BASIC 10 00 729 P130 Motl Minimum error threshold BASIC 1 00 730 1 1 Mot Maximum error threshold BASIC 1 00 731 135 Mot2 Integral time for maximum error BASIC 500 ms 735 P136 Mot2 Integral time for minimum error BASIC 500 ms 736 P138 Prop coefficient for minimum BASIC 10 00 738 P139 Prop coefficient for maximum BASIC 10 00 739 P140 Min error threshold BASIC 1 00 740 P141 Mot2 Max error threshold BASIC 1 00 741 145 Mots Integral time for maximum error BASIC 500 ms 745 P146 Mots Integral time for minimum error BASIC 500 ms 746 P148 Haie Prop coefficient for minimum BASIC 10 00 748 P149
442. s 00 C332 TFL1 Time ON Seconds 00 C333 TFL1 Time OFF Hour 08 C334 TFL1 Time OFF Minutes 00 C335 TFL1 Time OFF Seconds 00 C336 TFL1 Days of the week 1000000 The timed flag TFL1 is TRUE from 08 00 00PM on every Monday 8 00 00AM on every Tuesday 413 482 PROGRAMMING LO NNE 47 3 List of Parameters from C330 to C357 Table 113 List of Parameters C 330 C357 C330 TFL1 Time ON Hour 0 271 C331 TFL1 Time ON Minutes 0 272 C332 TFL1 Time ON Seconds 0 273 C333 TFL1 Time OFF Hour 0 274 C334 TFL1 Time OFF Minutes 0 275 C335 TFL1 Time OFF Seconds 0 276 C336 TFL1 Days of the week 0 277 C337 TFL2 Time ON Hour 0 278 C338 TFL2 Time ON Minutes 0 279 C339 TFL2 Time ON Seconds 0 280 C340 TFL2 Time OFF Hour 0 281 341 TFL2 Time OFF Minutes 0 262 C342 TFL2 Time OFF Seconds ADVANCI 0 283 C343 TFL2 Days of the week ADVANCE 0 284 C344 TFL3 Time ON Hour ADVANCED 0 285 C345 TFL3 Time ON Minutes ADVANCED 0 266 346 TFL3 Time ON Seconds ADVANCED 0 287 C347 TFL3 Time OFF Hour 0 288 C348 TFL3 Time OFF Minutes 0 289 C349 TFL3 Time OFF Seconds 0 290 50 TFL3 Days the week 0 291 51 TFL4 Time Hour 0 292 352 TFL4 T
443. s active Measure of the voltage current value detected by the drive analog input Function of the preset type Function of the type of reference voltage current set in Range of reference 60 The numerical value always includes two decimals voltage current the unit of measure is V or MA Always active Measure of the voltage current value detected by the drive in AIN2 analog input M039a XAIN4 Extemal Analog Reference Function of the type of reference voltage set Range Function Or ine presel ype Ol P390 The numerical value always includes two reference decimals the unit of measure is V Active Active only if set via parameter R023 Address Measure of the voltage value detected by the drive in XAIN4 analog input 64 482 PROGRAMMING c LO NNE MO039b XAIN5 Extemal Analog Reference Funcion af ine proset Tubd of Function of the type of reference current set in Range P 395 The numerical value always includes two decimals the unit of measure is MA Active Active only if set via parameter R023 Address 1794 Measure of the current value detected by the drive in the XAIN5 analog input M040 Speed Reference from Serial Link 32000 99 rom Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it is defined by the value set in the parameters for the max speed and min speed of the selected motor C028 C029 Motor 1
444. s for the slave device In broadcast mode address 0 the state of those registers is set in all the connected slave devices Additional parameters are the basic register address the number of registers to be set the relevant value and the number of bytes used for the data items QUERY RESPONSE Slave address Slave address 10h Function 10h Function Register 1 addr Hi Register 1 addr Hi Register 1 addr Lo Register 1 addr Lo Register N Hi Register N Hi Register N Lo Register N Lo Byte number Error correction Data Hi Data Lo Data Hi Data Lo Error correction 418 482 PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Error Messages If message error is detected the inverter will send a message to the master Slave address Function MSB 1 Error code Error correction The error code meaning is the following ILLEGAL FUNCTION ILLEGAL ADDRESS ILLEGAL DATA VALUE DEVICE BUSY ANOTHER USER WRITING BAD ACCESS LEVEL DESCRIPTION The function sent by the Master is different from 0 03 Read Holding Registers and 10 Preset Multiple Registers The Master wrote to or read from an illegal address The numerical value the Master tried to write is not included in the correct range The drive refused the Master writing attempt e g because it is running and a parameter is activated Other users are writing to the selected parameter when the Master is trying to w
445. s set in parameters C028 and C029 for motor 1 and relevant parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 If C029 lt C028 then Min speed C029 Max speed C028 If C029 gt C028 then Min speed C028 Max speed C029 NOTE 1026 is the decimal portion of the speed reference in RPM and has effect in FOC motor control mode only 1029 is used as a torque reference if at least one among parameters C143 146 is set to 5 Serial Link and the type of reference of the active motor parameters 011 C054 C097 is set to 1 Torque or 2 Torque with Speed Limit 1029 is used as a torque limit if C147 5 Serial Link 1029 is expressed as a percentage of the max absolute torque set with the parameters C047 and 48 motor 1 and relevant parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 The max absolute torque is the max value between absolute values of NOTE parameters C047 and C048 Max absolute torque Max 047 C048 The unit of measure is tenths of 76 Torque reference 1029 0 1 Reference range If C047 lt 048 then Min torque C047 Max torque C 048 If C047 gt C048 then Min torque C048 Max torque C029 Example 1200 120 0 HELDBUS For a description of the Fieldbus source see the FIELDBUS CONFIGURATION MENU KEYPAD The keypad is a special reference source The keypad reference may be changed with the A and keys only if this reference is on a Keypad page displaying a reference in line 4 If the key
446. se to the step based on the value of Kp when Ti is kept 5 174 Figure 27 Response to the step when Kp is Too 175 Figure 28 Response to the step based the value of Ti when Kp is kept 176 Figure 29 Response to the step when the values of Kp Ti are too small essere 176 Figure 30 PID Sleep Wake Up Mode when 237 Is set 1 nennen enne nnne nnne 180 Figure 91 MDO DIOCK OIGIGEORY 188 92 DIGITAL 198 Figure 33 199 Figure 34 DOUBLE DIGITAL 199 Figure 35 General structure of the parameterization of a digital output 200 Figure 36 Digital output for speed thresholds 202 Figure 37 Electromechanical brake command example 203 Figure 38 Block diagram of the virtual digital outputs 1 230 Figure 39 Example of MPL functionality 236 Figure 40 Carrier frequency 265 Figure 41 Equivalent circuit of the asynchronous mac
447. searching will always occur independently of the time passing between the drive disable and enable 378 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE C247 Frequency Decrease Rate c27 R 1000 1 100072 Default 10 Level ENGINEERING 1247 This parameter sets the frequency decrease rate during the speed search stage The frequency decrease rate expressed in Hz s is given from the following formula fmax X C247 10 This means that when C247 100 1 the IDrive drive takes 10s to go from the max frequency to OHz When 247 10 0 1 default value the system takes 100s to go from the max frequency to OHz The maximum frequency of the connected motor is given from the following formula npoles x C029 2 x 60 A NOTE The frequency decrease rate is not dependent on the preset ramp times When the IDrive drive enters the current limitation mode the time the system takes NOTE for speed searching can be longer than the preset time C248 Current Used for Speed Searc hi Range inverter Imot ong inverter Imot 100 Default 75 75 Level ENGINEERING 745 25 1248 Determines the max current level for soeed searching it is expressed as percentage of the rated motor current Function C249 Speed Searching Starting Level Last soeed 1 MaxSpd Last dir 2 MaxSpd Pos Dir 3 MaxSpd Neg Dir 0
448. secesscceseecssecessecessecesseceseecssscsssecesseceeeeeseees 271 667 271 Table 67 Parameters of the equivalent circuit of the asynchronous MACHINE 272 Table 68 Motor parameters used by control algorithms 272 Table 69 IFD control parameters for the connected 274 Table 70 Parameters setting Slip Compensation Control essen nnne nne nnne 275 Table 71 List of parameters 008 to 128 sena sesta sette 277 Table 72 Equivalence between AC mains range and DC 279 Table 73 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 2T AT 1 293 Table 74 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 2T AT 2 295 Table 75 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 2T AT 3 297 Table 76 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 2T AT A 299 Table 77 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 5T 6T 1 301 Table 78 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 5T 6T 2 sse 302 Table 79 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 5T 6T 3 sse 304 Table 80 Parameters depending
449. selection C179 the references selected via C143 and C144 are selected as the main reference depending on the input status When the input is inactive REF will be the main reference when the input is active AINT will be the actual reference 320 482 INSTRUCTIONS f O iDrive 34 3 List of Parameters C140 to C148 Table 84 List of parameters C 140 to C 148 C140 digital input 1 ADVANCED 1140 1 Terminal Board C141 Command digital 2 ADV ED 1141 1 Terminal Board 142 Command digital ENGINEERING 1142 0 C143 reference 1 ADVANCED 1143 1 REF C144 Input reference 2 ADVANCED 1144 2 AINT 145 Inputreference 3 ENGINEERING 1145 0 C146 Inputreference 4 ENGINEERING 1146 0 C147 Torque Limit input ENGINEERING 1147 0 Switch over from C148 Remote to Local ENGINEERING 1148 0 StandBy or Fluxing command The programming range of parameters C140 C141 C142 depends on the setting of parameter C150 and vice versa see the detailed description of the parameters above AN no C140 C141 C142 Command Source Selection 1 2 3 0 Disabled 1 Terminal Board 2 Serial Link 3 Fieldbus 4 Terminal Board B 5 Keypad C140 141 C140 141 1 Terminal Board C142 0 C142 0 Disabled C140 C141 ADVANCED C142 ENGINEERING 1140 1141 1142 Selection
450. sent from the following sources 0 Disabled 1 Terminal board A 2 Serial link with MODBUS protocol 3 Fieldbus fieldbus on option board 4 Terminal board B 5 Keypad remotable display keypad The factory setting enables only Terminal Board A C140 1 and C141 1 as a command source see also the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU Both Terminal board A and B refer to the same terminal board located on the control board but allow switching between one set START STOP REVERSE commands sent to three terminals to a different set of commands sent to three different terminals Most commands may be delayed when enabled or disabled refer to the TIMERS MENU 0 Disabled Local the Only command source is Keypad Enable 1685 1020 3 1407 ese 1 Select Alr 1 C164 C142 1164 4 Keypad 1142 xi 5 4 xtern Alarm n Select gt source 3 2 165 1165 Extern Alarm n 3 Select gt Alr3 C166 1166 P000343 b Figure 45 Selecting the command sources If the keypad is not selected as a command source or if the STOP input function is enabled C1500 more than one command source may be enabled at a time In this case the logic function implemented by the drive for the terminals of all active command s
451. speed at the end of Power Down If C234 is set as Stand by the drive is put on stand by if C234 is set as DCB it determines DC braking Both conditions occur during the deceleration ramp due to Power Down and when the speed value set in C235 is attained 374 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE 40 SPEED SEARCHING MENU 40 1 Overview When a command is sent to disable the drive the motor idles When the drive activates again the Speed Searching function allows the drive to reach the motor speed All parameters relating to this function are included in the Speed Searching submenu in the Configuration menu For FOC control the motor speed of rotation is always known so this function is always active and independent of the parameters of the relevant menu The Speed Searching parameters are used for control only When C245 is set to YES do the following to activate the Speed Searching function open and close the ENABLE command before tsas is over C246 disable the DC Braking command before the DC braking preset time is over see the DC BRAKING MENU reset any alarm tripped with reference other than 0 before tsas is over Speed searching does not take place when the drive turns off due to mains loss If the drive restarts after a time longer than tsas C246 frequency output is generated following the acceleration ramp and no speed searching takes place C246 Always On speed sear
452. splay keypad The third line shows the voltage class the size of the drive and the type of fan control In the case shown in the example the voltage class is 4T 400V the size of the drive is 0020 and the fan operation is not controlled by the drive character The numbers corresponding to the different models of the IDrive Drive are given in the table below Table 11 Indexes corresponding to the different models sizes of the IDrive Drive Index Model Index Index Model Index Model Index Model 0 0003 20 0023 40 0076 60 0259 80 0748 0004 21 0024 41 0086 6 0260 81 0749 2 0005 22 0025 42 0088 62 0290 82 0750 3 0006 23 0030 43 0113 63 0312 83 0800 4 0007 24 0032 44 0129 64 0313 84 0828 5 0008 25 0033 45 0131 65 0314 85 0831 6 0009 26 0034 46 0150 66 0366 86 0832 7 0010 27 0035 47 0162 67 0367 87 0850 8 0011 28 0036 48 0164 68 0368 88 0960 9 0012 2 0037 49 0172 59 0399 89 0964 10 0013 30 0038 50 0179 70 0401 90 0965 0014 31 0040 51 0180 71 0402 91 1128 12 0015 32 0042 52 0181 72 0457 92 1129 13 0016 33 0049 53 0200 73 0459 93 1130 14 0017 34 0051 54 0201 74 0523 94 1296 15 0018 35 0060 55 0202 75 0524 95 1800 16 0019 36 0062 56 0216 76 0526 96 2076 17 0020 37 0067 57 0217 77 0598 18 0021 38 0069 58 0218 78 0599 19 0022 39 0074 59 0250 79 0600 Table 12 Voltage classes of the PD Index Class 0 2T 1 4T
453. stant of the first command applied to 5 input signal when the signal saturation and conversion is over 260 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive 30 AUTOTUNE MENU 30 1 Overview NOTE See the FIRST STARTUP section for tuning based on the control algorithm to be used At the end of the Autotune procedure the system automatically saves the whole NOTE parameter set of the drive Autotune must be performed only after entering the motor ratings or the ratings of NOTE the encoder used as a speed feedback Please refer to the MOTOR CONTROL MENU and the ENCODER FREQUENCY INPUTS MENU The selected motor may be tuned in order to obtain the machine ratings or the parameterization required for the correct functioning of the control algorithms The user can also check the proper operation wiring of the encoder used as a speed feedback The Autotune menu includes two programming inputs 1073 and 1074 Input 1073 allows enabling and selecting the type of autotune Input I074 which can be programmed only if 1073 Motor Tune describes the type of autotune which is performed Because the values set in 1073 or 1074 cannot be changed once for all and are automatically reset after autotuning the ENABLE signal must be disabled and the ESC key must be used to accept the new value 30 1 1 MOTOR AUTOTUNE AND ADJUSTING LOOPS Set 1073 as Motor Tune to enable autotune functions that can be selected with 1074 ratings of the enc
454. stant set in this parameter Josi 0 Disabled 1 Enabled C This parameter enables the PTC probe AIN2 analog input If the PTC thermal protection C274 is enabled the reference from AIN2 is automatically managed as a 0 10V input The only parameter enabled for the control AIN2 is P064 60 P061 P062 and P063 cannot be viewed and are considered for calculations 389 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 43 MAINTENANCE MENU 43 1 Overview The Maintenance menu allows setting partial counters for the drive Operation Time OT and Supply Time ST When the preset time is reached a warning message appears W48 OT Time over and W49 ST Time over respectively 43 2 List of Parameters C275 to C278 Table 108 List of parameters C275 to C278 C275 Operation time counter reset C276 Operation time threshold 5 1276 Oh C277 Supply time counter reset EN RING 1277 C278 Supply time threshold ENGINEERING 1278 Oh C275 Operation time counter reset C276 Operation Time Threshold Range O 650000h Default Level ENGINEERING Address This parameter sets the threshold for the operation time of the drive When this time is exceeded Warning WAS OT Over appears To reset the warning message reset the partial counter or set the counter threshold to zero C277 Supply Time Counter Reset NO 1 YES Default Le
455. sting variable P381 MPL4 Testing variable B P382 MPL4 Comparing value for Test A P383 MPL4 Comparing value for Test B P384 MPL4 Function applied to the result of the 2 tests 84 MPL4 Selecting variable C 00 Disabled P384b MPL4 Function applied to the result of f A B C P385 MPL4 Output logic level TRUE P009 Acceleration time 1 Ramp for normal operation P010 Deceleration time 1 Ramp for normal operation 11 Acceleration time 2 Ramp for PIPE FILL 012 Deceleration time 2 Ramp for PIPE FILL POS0 Multispeed function 0 Preset Speed PO81 Output speed 1 Mspdl Min operating speed C182 MDI Multiprogramming enable Enabled C155 MDIfor multispeed 0 selection 12 MPL4 C167 multiramp 0 selection 11 MPL3 C171 MDI for PID disable 11 MPL3 It is required to feed back MPL3 output to MPL4 output because every MPL may be allocated to maximum 2 functions C182 Enabled see DIGITAL INPUTS MENU In that case 3 functions are required so an additional output is needed Ramp for normal function Ramp desired during normal operation Ramp for PIPE FILL Ramp desired when filling the pipes Minimum operating speed Min speed required for the correct delivery of the pump 239 482 PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 28 3 List of Parameters P350 to P385 Table 58 List of parameters P350 to P385 ADVANCE DISABLE D ADVANCE DO DISABLE D ADVANCE DO
456. t with 52 53 Offset over REF Input 10 00 V 10 00 V if P050 O or 3 2000 2000 20 00 mA 20 00 mA if POSO 1 2 4 Default MEE ADVANCED This parameter selects the offset correction value of the REF analog signal that has been measured The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation or conversion its unit of measure is the same as the one of the signal selected for REF analog input P054 Filtering Time over REF Input 0 6500 65000ms Default 7788 ADVANCED Address This parameter selects the value of the filter time constant of the first command applied to the REF input signal when the signal saturation and conversion is over 116 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive P055 e of Signal over AIN1 Input This parameter selects the type of differential analog signal over terminals AIN1 and 1 in the terminal board The signal can be a voltage signal a current signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 0 10 V Bipolar voltage input between 10V and 10V The detected signal is saturated between these two values 1 20 mA Bipolar current input between 20 and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values 2 4 20 mA Unipolar current input with min threshold between 4 mA 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Before being saturated if the detected signal is lower t
457. t for the drive enabling disabling onthe right the start signal persists for a shorter time than the delay set for enabling in this case the Start function is not enabled The Start function will be enabled only when digital input is ON for a time longer than the time set in P216 166 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS f O R iDrive 21 2 List of Parameters P216 to P229 Table 36 List of parameters P216 to P229 P216 Enable delay 816 P217 Disable delay 817 P218 12 Enable delay 818 P219 12 Disable delay 819 P220 13 Enable delay 820 P221 13 Disable delay 821 P222 T4 Enable delay 822 222 74 Disable delay 823 P224 15 Enable delay 824 P225 T5 Disable delay 825 226 a 09 0 No timer assigned 826 Timer assigned to inputs 227 MDI5 8 0 No timer assigned 827 Timer assigned to outputs Timer assigned to virtual 229 outputs 4 No timer assigned 829 216 Enable delay 0 60000 0 0 6000 0 sec This parameter sets enable time Using P226 or P227 if timer is assigned to a digital input having a particular function 216 represents the delay occurring between the input closure and the function activation Use P228 to assign timer 1 to a digital output in that case the digital output energizing will be delayed according to the time set in P216
458. t of parameters C189 to 19 353 Table 98 Coding OF G T89 aided dodo GU UR RARE dE 354 Table 99 Coding Of C199 356 Table TOO List of parameters C210 T0 212 e PY EE E 358 Table 101 List of parameters C215 to 224 366 Table 102 List of parameters C225 10 C235 E 371 Table 103 List of parameters C245 to C249 378 Table 104 List of parcimeters C 255 10 258 uii tense tait tees Pepe YU 381 Table 105 Suggested values for the motor thermal time 5 384 Table 106 Typical datasheet for 4 pole 50Hz 400V motors sse eene eene tenente 385 Table 107 List of parameters C264 to 274 388 Table 108 List of parameters C275 to C278 390 Table 109 Reference sources from serial link eene eene nennen nennen ener n
459. tage of The rated torque of the selected motor the flux reference and the electrical variables measured by the drive mains side the DC bus and output PID Controller Menu This menu contains the values relating to the PID controller of the IDrive drive Digital Inputs Menu This menu contains the state of the drive digital inputs and the indication of the functions programmed for the digital inputs of the IDrive drive References Menu This menu contains the following values analog references the encoder input and the frequency input references The speed torque or reference feedback values of the PID coming from serial link or fieldbus Outputs Menu This menu contains the state of the drive digital outputs analog outputs and frequency outputs Temperatures from PT100 Menu This menu contains the temperature values detected in the first four analog channels ES847 I O expansion board this menu is available only if ES847 is fitted Autodiagnostics Menu This menu contains the temperature values the operation time counter and the supply time counter the active alarm and the drive status Data Logger Measures Menu This menu contains the status of the type of connections serial links Ethernet and modem supported by ES851 Data Logger board this menu is available only if the Data Logger ES851 is fitted Digital Input Settings Menu This menu contains the functions assigned to the digital inputs Fault List Menu This menu con
460. tains the trip log of the last eight alarms tripped and the values of some measures being used when the alarm trip was stored PowerOff Log Menu This menu contains the value of some measures being used at the drive power off 50 482 PROGRAMMING c LO NNE 8 2 Motor Measures Menu This menu contains speed values torque values and electrical variables measured by the drive on the mains side DC bus and output 000 Speed Reference at Constant RPM 32000 99 rpm 32000 Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it is P defined by the value set in the parameters for the motor max speed and min speed C028 C 029 Motor 1 071 072 Motor 2 C114 C115 Motor 3 Active only when a speed reference is used for the selected motor 1650 integer part 1651 decimal par integer part 99 decimal part Value of the speed reference obtained when the motor rotates at constant speed once the preset ramp time is over M002 Speed Ramp Output 32000 99 rpm 32000 Note The actual range depends on the selected motor because it is defined by the value set in the parameters for the motor max speed integer part and min speed 99 decimal 028 029 Motor 1 part 071 072 Motor 2 114 115 Motor 3 Active only when a speed reference is used for the selected motor 1652 integer part 1653 decimal part This is the measure of the speed value processed
461. tal Digital Output Mode P271 D37 Fbus CMD4 Variable A Selection P278 1 True Output Logic Level Words 7 8 9 Analog Outputs controlled by HELDBUS Parameter R017 needs to be properly set up to distinguish which Analog Outputs are to be controlled by the Fieldbus Byte format Example R017 0112 analog outputs are controlled directly by the fieldbus independently of their configuration in the ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU The correspondence between the exchanged value and the real value in volts of the analog outputs is as follows 1889 10 20 mA 1000 0 0 111 10 20 Word 10 PID feedback from HELDBUS The PID feedback M049 can be sent from the fieldbus if at least one of the parameters C288 to C290 is set as 6 Fieldbus The value sent by the Master to the IDrive as the PID feedback must be multiplied by 100 Eg In order to send a PID feedback of 50 the word must contain the value 5000 or 1111101002 509010 x 100 500010 PID feedback from FIELDBUS 430 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 50 3 2 LONNE FROM THE IDRIVE TO THE MASTER 1 Status Alarms 2 026 Output Current O 65000 A x 10 3 Motor Speed 32000 32000 rom x Third measure that ma See selected See selected 1 be configured with P330 ALNE MEA Ures measure measure Fourth measure that See selected See sel
462. tal input D51 MPL 2 Delayed Virtual digital input resulting from MPL2 output DELAYED from MPL Timers 192 482 INSTRUCTIONS iDrive Selectable analog variables Selectable Value Full scale Value Ki Description A70 GROUND Analog 0 Volt A71 Speed 10000 rom Motor speed A72 Spd REF A75 MotCurr A76 OutVolt A77 Out Pow A78 DC Vbus A79 Torq REF A80 Torq DEM 1 A82 A83 PID REF A84 PID RMP 85 PID Err 86 PID Fok A87 PID Out A88 REF A89 AINT A80 AIN2 Pt Encin 92 Pulseln A94 Flux A95 REF 96 Id REF 97 19 A98 Id A99 Volt Vq A100 Volt Vd 101 Cosine A102 Sine A103 Angle A104 10V A105 10V A106 Reserved 07 SqrWave 08 Saw Wave 09 HtsTemp 10 AmbTemp A111 A109 Reserved 20 PT100_1 21 PT100 2 22 PT100 3 23 100 4 24 121 25 XAIN4 26 5 27 OT Counter 28 ST Counter 129 Reserved A80 Torg DEM ABO AIN2 Pt A93 Flux REF 1 1 A73 RampOut 10000 rpm A74 1000 0 Hz 10000 rpm 000 0 A 000 0 V 000 0 kW 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10000 rpm 100 00 kHz 1 0000 Wb 1 0000 Wb 000 0 A 000 0 A 000 0 A 000 0 V 000 0 V 00 00 00 00 00 00 e e
463. tal inputs also includes the selection of other remote virtual terminal boards see the CONTROL METHOD MENU and the possibility of delaying input digital signal enable disable by means of software timers see the TIMERS MENU 324 482 PROGRAMMING f As shown in the figure above the digital input status is displayed in measures M031 M032 M033 Measure shows the cument status of the 8 inputs in the local hardware terminals in the drive board The symbol displays the logic levels for terminals M033 for inactive inputs the active inputs are marked with Measure 32 shows the cument status of the virtual terminal board obtained by processing all active terminal boards It includes 10 signals with two additional signals with respect to the local hardware terminal board Inputs MDI1 MDI8 are obtained with the logic ORof the input signals for all active terminals The ENABLE input is obtained with the logic AND of the input signals for terminal MDI2 in all active terminal boards The 5 input is obtained with the logic AND of the terminals selected for this function in all active terminal boards Measure 1 is similar to 032 but it displays the status of the terminal board obtained after delaying the input signals of M032 using special timers The drive uses this terminal board to acquire digital commands Some functions cannot be programmed but they are assigned to special termin
464. tation 350 482 o PROGRAMMING cx LONNE Dive 36 1 3 WHEN USING Two ENCODERS MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2 02 2 01 Encoder 2 Feedback Optional board Encoder 1 Reference MDI6 MDI7 P000350 b Figure 50 Using two encoders example Suppose that motor 2 is to be controlled in closed chain and that its speed value is twice the speed value of motor 1 To do so use speed of motor 1 provided with an encoder as the reference for the IDrive Drive and use the speed measure of encoder B which is coaxial to the motor controlled by the drive as a speed feedback Suppose that motor 1 speed ranges from 0 to 750rpm and that motor 1 is provided with a Push Pull encoder with Single Ended outputs and that its resolution is 2048 pls rev Motor 2 is provided with an NPN encoder with Single Ended outputs its resolution is 1024 pls rev Only one Push Pull encoder can be connected to digital inputs MDI6 MDI7 so encoder NPN of motor 2 representing the speed feedback of the drive must be connected to ES836 board drive Encoder B whereas the encoder of motor 1 Push Pull used as a reference shall be connected to terminals MDI6 and drive Encoder A Encoder Configuration is as follows Encoder Frequency Inputs Menu operating modes and encoder feature setting C189 6 A Reference Encoder Frequency input operating mode C190 2048 pls rev Number of pls rev for Encoder A C
465. te only after resetting the equipment must immediately come to effect with no need to switch off the drive 1 9 TX RX Key Download Upload from to the Keypad Use the keypad to perform the UPLOAD parameters stored in the drive are copied to the keypad and DOWNLOAD parameters stored in the keypad are copied to the drive functions Press the TX RX key to go to the UPLOAD page press the TX RX key again to toggle between the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD pages NOTE parameters to a drive whose SW Version IDP PIN or current voltage classes are different from those of the drive previously used for parameter UPLOAD In that case download is not allowed The DOWNLOAD function allows the parameters stored in the keypad to be A Warning is displayed one among 1 to W46 when trying to DOWNLOAD copied to the drive However parameters are not stored to the non volatile memory of the drive NOTE To store the downloaded parameters to the non volatile memory of the drive go to the EEPROM menu and execute a Save Work command once the download procedure is complete Otherwise when power is lost the parameters downloaded to the drive are lost The TX RX key is disabled under the following conditions e no password is entered in e ihe OPERATOR mode is activated with the MENU Key P264b OPERATOR e he drive is running In the example below you can go to the UPLOAD page from any page the upper LED starts flashing If you th
466. teDrive software Parameter R116 imposes to ES851 the type of connection required for the communication mode being used The Data Logger menu may be accessed only if the Data Logger board is installed and if parameter R021 Data Logger setting is set to 2 ENABLE AN NOTE Important The complete version of the Data Logger ES851 shall be installed the version only is not suitable for this functionality Please refer to the Installation Instructions manual The parameters described in this menu are parameters Once changed and saved they become active only when the drive is next switched on or when the control board is reset by holding down the RESET key for more than 5 secs Data Logger board The parameters set from this menu are not saved to non volatile memory of the CAUTION They must be confirmed and saved using the RemoteDrive software 54 2 List of Parameters R115 and R116 Table 119 List of parameters R115 and 116 Oooo SIMCordPIN 1 BASIC 0000 116 Preset connection status ENGINEERING 0 no active preset 115 SIM Card PIN Range 0 9999 Default 0000 Level Address This parameter indicates the digits of the PIN of the SIM card fitted in the GSM GPRS modem The digits must be aligned left the symbol which is codified as OxA hex is intended as the number terminator Function NOTE The PIN can be composed of less than 4 digits a
467. ted in key operated mode only If the STOP input is not programmed and the switch operated mode is active the keypad may be selected as the only command source C140 5 C141 0 C142 0 NOTE The STOP function has priority over the START function if both inputs are active the STOP input prevails Therefore the STOP input acts as a key and as a switch AN NOTE The START STOP commands are ignored when the drive is disabled 331 482 iDrive 150 STOP B Input 332 482 ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 0 gt Inactive 1 85 MDII 8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 gt TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED The STOP B Input acts as the STOP Input see C150 when Terminal Board is active The STOP Bis normally closed input signal 0 5 Inactive 1 85 MDII MDI8 9 12 MPL4 13 16 TFLI TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive 0 16 0 24 if 847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED The REVERSE function carries out a START command but it reverses the motor direction of rotation If both the START and REVERSE inputs are active at the same time the drive is sent a STOP command If the STOP input function is not programmed 150 0 the REVERSE signal and the STARTinput act as switches otherwise they act as keys If the keypad is active pressing the FWD REV key on the display keypad will also reverse the direc
468. ter P180 for 1 analog output in parameters P188 P196 for 02 and AO3 respectively Filter Defines the filter time constant applied to the analog output The filter time constant is set in parameter P181 for AO analog output in parameters P189 P197 for 2 and AO3 respectively 147 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 9 20 1 3 FREQUENCY OUTPUT When programming the frequency output the setting of MDO1 in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU is disabled The figure below illustrates the structure of the frequency output Parameterization is similar to the one used for the analog outputs Max Val Out Max P201 Mode P203 P205 P206 Selection 50 duty Selection vector Min Val Out Min P202 P204 000339 5 Figure 16 Stucture of the Frequency Output 148 482 PROGRAMMING uw LONNE 20 2 Variables This section covers the variables that can be represented for the analog and frequency outputs Table 29 Variables to be selected forthe Analog and Frequency Outputs Full scale Selection Value Value Description Disable 100 0026 Disabled output 1 Speed 10000rpm Speed of the connected motor 2 Speed Ref 10000 rom _ Speed reference at constant speed Ramp Out 10000
469. termines how output voltage varies at Function 576 of the motor rated frequency with respect to the voltage obtained with a constant V f pattern constant voltage frequency 100 400 100 400 See Table 75 and Table 79 ADVANCED 1036 1079 1122 IFD Torque compensation at preset frequency parameter C037 for motor 1 C080 for motor 2 and C123 for motor 3 Determines how output voltage varies at preset frequency with respect to voltage obtained with a constant V f pattern constant voltage frequency C037 C080 C 123 RPM Relating to C36 C079 C 122 Frequency for Application of Boost 1 See Table 75 and Table 79 ADVANCED 1037 1080 1123 IFD Frequency for application of voltage Boost with parameter C036 for motor 1 parameter C079 for motor 2 and parameter C122 for motor 3 This is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated frequency 290 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C038 C081 C 124 Torque Curve Automatic Increment 1221 17 See Table 75 and Table 79 Level ADVANCED hz 1038 1081 1124 Variable torque compensation expressed as a percentage of the motor 1779 rated voltage The preset value expresses the voltage increase when the motor is running at its rated torque C039 082 125 Slip Compensation 0 Disabled 200 Default 0 Disabled Level ADVANCED 748519 225 1039 1082 1125 Control This parameter represents the motor rated slip
470. th 1073 Motor Tune and 1074 0 All no rotation 272 482 PROGRAMMING M cs LO NNE 32 1 4 VIF PATTERN IFD ONLY This group of parameters which is included in the Motor Control Menu defines the V f pattern trend of the drive when it is used as an control algorithm When setting the type of V f pattern e g 013 for motor 1 the following curves can be used e Constant torque e Quadratic e Free setting The diagram below illustrates three types of programmable curves compared to the theoretical V f curve If C013 Constant Torque Preboost parameter C034 allows changing the starting voltage value if compared to the theoretical V f curve this allows torque compensation for losses caused by the stator impedance and a greater torque at lower revs If 013 Quadratic the drive will follow a V f pattern with a parabolic trend You can set the starting voltage value C034 the desired voltage drop if compared to the relevant constant torque use C032 and the frequency allowing implementing this torque reduction use C033 If C013 Free Setting you can program the starting voltage C034 Preboost the increase in voltage to 1 20 of the rated frequency C035 5 0 and the increase in voltage C036 Boostl to the programmable frequency C037 Frequency for Boost1 Vn Vn C019 C019 i C034 gt F Hz F Hz C015 C015 n fn Vn C019 C034 i 1 gt F Hz
471. th the MENU 0 STANDARD 512 P265 Root page 3 Start Up 866 p266 of Keypad page in Local 1 Ref Activated 511 Mode P267 Preset PID units of measure O Disable 867 P267a Custom PID units of measure 76 1867 P267b Preset PID2 units of measure O Disable 861 P267c Custom PID2 units of measure 76 1869 cannot be P268 Measure 1 on Root page M004 Motor Spd d cessed P268y Scaling of Measure 1 Root 100 00 515 page cannot be P268a Measure n 2 on Root page Speed Ref accessed 2682 Scaling of Measure n 2 Root 100 00 516 page cannot be P268b Measure n 1 on Keypad page i 006 Mot Freq d cesed cannot be P268c Measure n 2 on Keypad page 26 Motor Current accessed cannot be P268d Measure n 3 on Keypad page M004 Motor Spd detested cannot be P268e Measure n 4 on Keypad page Speed Ref 269 Disable LOC REM FWD REV keys NO NO 869 P264 Navigation Mode 0 By Menu 1 Changed Pars Only 2 Linear ADVANCED Navigation by menu is factory set and is activated whenever the IDrive drive is powered on Set P264 1 Changed Pars Only to navigate only through the parameters whose default values have been changed In that case linear navigation becomes active only the parameters that have been changed are displayed in sequence Press the A and keys to go to a different parameter Navigation is slower if only few parameters have been changed Set P264 2 Linear
472. the absolute values of C047 and C048 motor 1 and relevant parameters for motor 2 and motor 3 Max absolute torque 047 C048 Factory setting is C147 0 the reference source is disabled and the torque limit is given by the max absolute torque 34 1 5 REMorE LocAL MODE According to factory setting switching over from the Remote mode to the Local mode can only be made when the drive is disabled The reference and command sources for the Remote mode depend on the settings of parameters C140 to C147 in the CONTROL METHOD MENU and on the settings of parameters C285 to C287 in the PID CONFIGURATION MENU When switching over from the Remote mode to the Local mode the command and reference can be sent via keypad only This is true for the switch over from the Local to the Remote mode as well Parameter C148 allows customizing the Loc Rem function so that it can be performed even when the drive is running Parameter C148 also allows setting whether the same running condition and the same reference must be maintained when switching over from the Remote to the Local mode NOTE For more details on the Loc Rem function see LOC REM Key Keypad Pages and DIGITAL INPUTS MENU 318 482 o PROGRAMMING cs LONNE 34 2 How to Manage the Reference Sources This section covers how to manage the reference sources Two examples are given along with the table including the configuration of the parameters to be used Exam
473. the controlled motor C218 Expressed in seconds Speed loc f C220 Enable ON OFF Start Command ON OFF P000352 b Figure 51 DCB Hold and DCB at Start Output speed holding and DC braking curent when the DC B Hold and DCB at Start functions are active 360 482 PROGRAMMING f The non condensing function consists in injecting DC into the motor DC current brakes the motor and heats the motor windings thus avoiding condensation This function is active only for the IFD control if C221 is other than zero and ENABLE ON For the other control algorithms the non condensing function is performed by injecting current during motor fluxing Parameter C221 expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the controlled motor determines the level of direct current injected into the motor Parameters used to program this function are the following C216 enabling DCB at Start C218 setling the duration of DCB at Start C220 setting the intensity of the DC braking C221 setting the intensity of the holding current this function is active forthe IFD control only f C220 Enable A ON OFF ON OFF P000351 b Figure 52 DCB at Start with VIC Control Output Speed and DC Braking when the DCB At Start Function is active for the Vector Torque control 361 482 NEST PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 38 1 2 DC BRAKING AT STOP To activate this funct
474. the drive Motor fluxing is allowed only if the START contact is shutdown and C184 Yes If set accordingly safety parameter C181 prevents the drive from starting if the NOTE ENABLE signal is already active when the drive is powered on PPPs gt gt 327 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 35 1 3 RESET TERMINAL 16 MDI3 The RESETfunction is assigned to input terminal MDI3 resets the alarms to unlock the drive operation It cannot be set to other terminals whereas the same terminal may be assigned to different functions To disable the reset function from terminal MDI3 set 154 Yes If protection trips the drive locks the motor starts idling the motor idles and stops due to friction or the mechanical load and an alarm message is displayed see also the AUTORESET MENU and the ALARMS AND WARNINGS section Reset procedure To unlock the drive activate the RESETinput for an instant or press the RESETkey from the keypad When the drive unlocks and the cause responsible for the alarm has disappeared Inverter ok comes up on The screen otherwise the alarm persists and cannot be reset If set up accordingly safety parameter C181 permits to deactivate and reactivate the ENABLE signal to restart The drive once the cause responsible for the alarm has disappeared Factory setting does not reset alarms at power off Alarms are stored and NOTE displayed at next power on and the drive is locked A manual r
475. the min C097 C114 C115 Control of Motor 3 speed or the mox speed Limit for C047 CO48 Motor 1 C090 C091 CunentLimitfor Parameters setting the min torque and the max Motor 2 torque Curent Limit for C133 C134 Motor3 The following pages contain block diagrams illustrating speed reference processing Figure 6 and torque reference processing Figure 7 Menus and parameters used are also stated 105 482 INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING LONNE nve JOJOU ANIV 9 99000 1019 4030 N o NMOG LOJON 6000 JO OW 2200 1200 909 4 OUD 690d 1904 6209 8200 105 1030075 66 d 06 d 671 0 40 EPLO 790d 0504 801d SOld Figure 7 Speed Reference computing peeds jueoJeg oadenin SOUdIOJOY HIN 104405 10 4 uoisJeAu 106 482 rive LONNE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 9 199000 dn NMOG df 690d 290d ol SHLD 0 0
476. the minimum reference set with P396 259 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE P397 Value of XAIN5 Input Produc ing Max Reference X axis 200 200 if P395 2 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if P395 2 20 mA 40 200 if P395 3 4 0mA 20 0 mA if P395 3 4 20 mA 0 200 if P395 4 0 0 mA 20 0 mA if P395 4 0 20 mA 20 0 This parameter selects the value for 5 input signal for maximum reference or better the reference set CO29xP397a Master mode or in C048xP397a Slave mode If motor 2 is active C072 and C091 will be used instead of C029 and C048 if motor 3 is active the values set in C115 and C134 will be used P397a Percentage of Speed Max Producing Max Reference Y axis related to P397 O 1000 1000 ADVANCED This parameter represents the max speed percentage or the max torque percentage for a torque reference to be used for the maximum reference set with P397 P398 Offset over XAIN5 Input 20 00 mA 20 00 mA Mo l Level ADVANCED Address This parameter selects the offset correction value of XAIN5 analog signal that has been measured tian The value set is added to the signal measured before saturation or conversion its unit of measure is the same as the one of the signal selected for 5 analog input P399 Filtering Time over XAIN5 Input 0 65000 0 65000ms ADVANCED This parameter selects the value of the filter time con
477. the signal saturation and conversion is over This parameter selects the type of differential analog signal over terminals XAIN5 5 in the terminal board The signal can be a current signal a unipolar signal or a bipolar signal 2 20 mA Bipolar current input between 20 and 20 The detected signal is saturated between these two values 3 4 20 mA Unipolar current input with min threshold between 4 mA 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values Before being saturated if the detected signal is lower than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA alarms 069 or 086 trip 4 0 20 mA Unipolar current input between 0 mA and 20mA The detected signal is saturated between these two values P396 Value of XAIN5 Producing Min Reference X axis 200 200 if P395 2 20 0 mA 20 0 mA if P395 2 20 mA 40 200 if P395 3 4 0mA 20 0 mA if 95 3 4 20 0 200 if 395 4 0 0 20 0 mA if P395 4 0 20 mA ADVANCED This parameter selects the value for 5 input signal for minimum reference or better the reference set CO28xP396a Master mode or in C047xP396a Slave mode If motor 2 is active C071 and C090 will be used instead of C028 and C047 if motor is active the values set in C114 and C133 will be used ADVANCED This parameter represents the min soeed percentage or the min torque percentage for a torque reference to be used for
478. the variable set in P202 is implemented 10 00 100 00 kHz 100 00 kHz Maximum output value obtained when the maximum value of the variable set in 203 is implemented 0 000 65 000 sec 0 000 sec Value of the filter time constant applied to FOUT frequency output P207 AO1 Gain P208 AO 2 Gain P209 AO3 Gain P210 AO1 Variable MODBUS Address P211 AO2 Variable MODBUS Address P212 AO3 Variable MODBUS Address P213 Amplitude of Sinusoidal Analog Output Signal 1000 0 100 0 1000 3 Level ENGINEERING Address Amplitude of the sinusoidal analog output signal when Sine or Cosine variables are selected Function 163 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P214 Frequency of Sinusoidal Analog Output Signal Pa o 20000 0 200 00Hz I ii 100 Level ENGINEERING Address Frequency of the sinusoidal analog output signal when Sine or Cosine Function variables are selected P215 Frequency of Saw Wave Analog Output Signal 200 00Hz ENGINEERING Frequency of saw wave analog output signal when Sine or Cosine variables are selected This can be used as the carrier frequency when setting MDO1 or MDO2 in PWM mode see the example given the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU 164 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 4 21 TIMERS MENU 21 1 Overview The Timers menu allows setting enable and disable delay times for digital inputs outputs
479. tion C217 DCB at Stop Duration IFD and VIC Determines the duration of the DCB at Stop function 366 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive C218 DCB at Start Duration 0 1 60 0 sec 0 1000 rom IFD and VTC Determines the speed at the beginning of DCB at stop while decelerating C220 DCB Curent Level O MIN inverter Imot 100 0 Min Ipeak inverter Imot 120 Determines the level of direct current injected to brake the motor It is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the controlled C221 DCB Hold Determines the level of direct current injected during the Hold function To activate this function set a value other than zero in parameter C221 DC level is expressed as a percentage of the rated current of the controlled motor C222 C223 C224 Ramp Braking Time for DCB 2 32000 msec See Table 74 and Table 78 ENGINEERING 1222 1223 1224 IFD and VIC This parameter represents the time required for flux weakening before DCB 367 482 PROGRAMMING L NNE 39 POWER DOWN MENU 39 1 Overview In the case of power failure the drive can be kept powered on by exploiting the kinetic energy of the motor and the load energy recovered due to motor slowing down is used to power the drive thus avoiding loosing The drive control when a black out occurs All parameters relating to the Power Down function are included in the Power D
480. tion of rotation of the connected motor The reference direction of rotation can be reversed with Cw CCw if this is set up C159 0 Both functions cause a signal reversal if they are both active they will cancel each other The keypad and the terminal board can be simultaneously activated only if the STOP C 150 0 function is activated Three sources for the signal reversal are then active REVERSE Cw CCw REV key if two of them are active they will cancel each other while if all three sources are active the reference sign will be reversed When the reference sign is reversed the direction of rotation of the connected motor is not immediately reversed the setpoint decreases to zero following the preset deceleration ramp and it increases up to the reference value having the opposite sign following the preset acceleration ramp PROGRAMMING c L NNE C 151a REVERSE B Input 0 5 Inactive 1 85 MDII MDI8 0 16 ere 9 12 MPLA 0 24 if ES847 or ES870 is fitted 13 16 gt TFL TFL4 17 24 2 XMDI8 ADVANCED The REVERSE B Input acts as the REVERSE Input see C151 when Terminal Board B is active The figure below illustrates the processing logic diagram for the START REV Cw CCw functions and the START STOP REV keys on the display keypad if the STOP function is not programmed STOP Not PROGRAM C150 0 Keypad Disabled Keypad Enabled Inv
481. tive motor is IFD In this case the PID regulator output is a correction of the output voltage The percentage value of the PID output relates to the instant voltage value For example if a motor is operating in IFD mode and the drive output voltage is 200V rms at 25 Hz with PID Output O if PID Output drops to 10 the actual voltage will be 200 200 10 100 180V C294 Reference Sum Full The regulator output is a correction of the speed torque reference of the connected motor depending on the type of reference configured for the active motor The value percent of the PID output is managed in the same way as C294 Reference and is summed to the main reference For example if a motor is speed controlled with C029 1500rpm considering the PID regulator output as null the reference is 400rpm if the output becomes 50 the total speed setpoint is 400 1500 50 100 1150rpm In that way if the PID output is other than zero the reference generated will be other than zero as well even if the main reference is null unlike what would happen if C294 Reference Sum 401 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 44 4 Keeping Fluid Level Constant Example Sensor Level 4 20mA Figure 67 Keeping fluid level constant Example Suppose that the maximum level in the tank is be kept at 50 and that a 4 20mA level probe is used with an output of 4mA for the min level and 20mA
482. to display parameters in sequence using the and V keys If Linear navigation is selected parameters are no longer divided into menus and submenus NOTE This parameter cannot be saved Navigation by menu is restored whenever the drive is powered on 86 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS LONNE iDrive 87 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P264a Circular Navigation Parameter P264a is factory set to 1 YES This means that wrap navigation is activated navigation starts from the first page of the selected menu Press A to go to the next page When the last page is displayed press A again to return to the first page of the selected menu From the first page of the selected menu press W to go to the last page of the active menu If P264a 0 NO when the last page of the active menu is displayed the key is disabled you can only view the previous pages up to the first page of the active menu by pressing the key 0 STANDARD 1 DPERATOR STANDARD ADVANCED Press the MENU key from any parameter to go to the access page of the menu containing that parameter press the MENU key again to go to the Root page press the MENU key again to go to the Keypad page If factory setting is active P264b 0 STANDARD press the MENU key from the Keypad page to go to the Root page then to the starting parameter If P264b 1 OPERATOR navigation is locked once the Keypad Page is displaye
483. to the drive configure one of the analog outputs as PID Out C294 Reference The PID regulator output is the speed torque reference of the connected motor depending on the type of reference configured when the motor is running any other reference source which will be selected will be ignored If the output is a speed reference 100 corresponds to the max absolute value between min soeed and max speed set for the motor being used lt Max C028 C029 Mot2 lt C071 072 Mot3 lt C114 C115 If the output is torque reference 100 is the max absolute value between the min limit and the max limit of the torque of the active motor lt C047 Mot2 lt C090 C Mot3 lt 133 C294 Reference Sum PID regulator output is a correction of the speed torque reference of the active motor depending on the type of reference configured when the motor is running The percentage value of the PID output relates to the instant value of the speed torque reference For example if the soeed reference of the active motor is 800rpm and the PID output is ignored if this drops to 50 the overall speed setpoint will be 800 800 50 100 1200rpm Therefore the PID regulator can never reversed the reference sign C294 Voltage Output Sum This configuration is active only when the control algorithm of the ac
484. trip 1 Alarm 2 Auxiliary trip 2 Alarm 3 Auxiliary trip 3 MRmpO Multiramp 0 1 Multiramp 1 JOG Jog mode SLAVE Selection of Slave Mode PID Dis PID Disable KpdLock Display keypad unit Mot 2 Selection of Motor 2 Mot 3 Selection of Motor 3 Var 0 Reference Variation 0 Var Reference Variation 1 Var 2 Reference Variation 2 PID UDR PID Reference Reset due to UP DOWN commands LOCAL Selection of Local mode Brk Lock Mechanical brake locking FireM Fire Mode enabled Src Sel Reference command source switch nTlim External torque limit disable START B START function terminals B STOP B STOP function terminals B REVERSE B Startup with negative speed terminals B MRefO PID Multireference 1 MRef1 PID Multireference 2 MRef2 PID Multireference 3 PID Csl PID Control Selection START START function ENABLE ENABLE function RESET Alarm RESET EncA Encoder A Input EncB Encoder B Input FINA FINA Frequency input FinB FINB Frequency input Multi More than one function allocated to the same input iDrive 75 482 PROGRAMMING w LO NNE 8 11 Fault List Menu Scroll the Fault List Menu to display the codes of the last eight alarms tripped Press the SAVE ENTER key to access the alarm submenu and navigate to each value measured by the drive when the alarm tripped The diagram below shows a navigation example for the Fault List Menu relating to alarm n 1 in particular Note that n 1 is the last alarm tri
485. ue of a prohibit speed range when increasing blue Example 105 500 rom Prohibit speed 1 P106 650 rom Prohibit soeed 2 P107 700 rpm Prohibit speed 3 P108 50 Semi amplitude of prohibit speed ranges 1 450 550 2 600 700 3 650 rpm 750 rpm In this case the second and third prohibit ranges partially match because the allowable value of the second range 700 rpm is higher than the min allowable value of the third range 650 thus forming a prohibit speed range ranging from 600 rpm to 750 rpm 133 482 PROGRAMMING Dive LONNE 16 2 List of Parameters P105 to P108 Table 25 List of parameters P105 to P108 Prohibit speed 1 P106 Prohibit speed 2 P107 Prohibit speed 3 B P108 Hysteresis band of prohibit speed ranges P105 P106 P107 Prohibit Speed 1 2 3 0 32000 O 32000 rpm Default Level ADVANCED Address Determines the intermediate value of the first prohibit soeed range This value is to be considered as an absolute value i e independent of the Function speed reference sign P108 Hysteresis band of Prohibit Speed Ranges 5000 0 5000 rom Default Level ADVANCED Address Function Sets the semi amplitude of the prohibit soeed ranges 134 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive 17 REFERENCE VARIATION PERCENT MENU 17 1 Overvie
486. ue sent by the Master to the IDrive as the PID reference must be multiplied by 100 E g In order to send a PID reference of 50 the word must contain the value 500010 or 1111101002 507610 x 100 500010 PID reference from FIELDBUS Word 5 Digital Inputs from HELDBUS The virtual digital inputs via the Fieldbus are the low byte of the word it 15 bit 14 8 bit 7 0 k MDI2 MDI3 MDI The logic status of these bits is included in the overall status of the drive digital inouts measure 031 along with the other command sources if at least one of the parameters C140 C142 set as 6 FieldBus AN NOTE Auxiliary virtual terminal board XMDII 8 cannot be simulated via fieldbus 428 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive Bit 15 must always be written 1 this means that data exchanged between the CAUTION master and the drive is consistent thus keeping the watchdog counter reset see Alarm A070 Communication Suspended 429 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE 4 Word 6 Command for Digital Outputs from HELDBUS Digital commands from FIELDBUS are the 4 lower bytes of the word CMD 4 CMD 3 CMD 2 CMD 1 Byte format Fbus CMD 1 Fbus CMD 2 Fbus CMD 3 Fbus CMD 4 Columns 2 and 3 state the name and position of the commands sent via fieldbus Example to control digital output 1 via fieldbus through command 4 set the parameters below in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS MENU P270 1 Digi
487. ure Mode ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 0 no input 1 val PT100 0 no input ADVANCED 920 This parameter selects the type of analog signal available in terminals 27 28 in ES847 expansion board 0 no signal is used The parameter relating to the analog input disappears 1 val PT100 The acquired signal is transformed into degrees centigrade P321 Channel 1 Measure Offset P323 Channel 2 Measure Offset See Measure 069 30000 30000 300 00 300 00 ADVANCED 921 Value of the measure offset for channel 1 an offset can be applied to the measure to correct possible errors 0 no input 1 val PT100 0 no input ADVANCED 922 This parameter selects the type of analog signal available in terminals 29 30 in ES847 expansion board 0 no signal is used The parameter relating to the analog input disappears 1 val PT100 The acquired signal is transformed into degrees centigrade See Measure M070 30000 30000 300 00 300 00 ADVANCED 923 Value of the measure offset for channel 2 an offset can be applied to the 226 482 measure to correct possible errors o PROGRAMMING Us LONNE P324 Channel 3 Measure Mode 0 no input 1 val PT100 0 no input ADVANCED 924 This parameter selects the type of analog signal available in terminals 31 32 in ES847 expansion board 0 no signal is used The P parameter relating to the analog input disappears 1 val
488. ure that the Drive Profile board is correctly configured for the IDrive drive Replace the Drive Profile board 462 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A096 Fan Fault LONNE Fan alarm Power heatsink overheated with fan locked or disconnected or faulty see also A094 and A099 Fan locked or disconnected or faulty Replace fan A097 Motor Cables KO Description Event Possible Cause Solution A098 Illegal Motor Possible cause A099 Sensor 2 Fault Description Event Possible cause Solution Motor not connected This protection trips during autotune or DC Brake if the motor is not connected to the drive or if its current value is not compatible with the drive size e One cable of the motor is disconnected e The motor size is too small if compared to the drive size 1 Check that motor cables are properly connected to terminals U V W 2 Check the motor parameters perform autotune procedure again FOC controls A disabled motor has been selected Motor 2 is enabled but only one motor be enabled 009 1 see the MOTOR CONTROL MENU Motor 3 is enabled but only 1 or 2 motors can be enabled 009 1 or 2 see the MOTOR CONTROL MENU e Incorrect setting in parameter C009 e Incorrect setting of the digital input parameters enabling the selection functions for motor 2 C173 and or motor 3 C174 1 Check and enter the correct value for 009
489. urrent signal can be bipolar 20mA 20mA Unipolar OMA 20mA can have a minimum offset 4mA 20mA The user will set each analog input mode in parameters P390 P395 Table 59 Analog input hardware mode Differential input Pin 11 12 XAIN4 10V Input P390 Differential input Pin 13 14 XAIN5 20mA Input P395 NOTE Configurations different from the ones stated in the table above are not allowed Scaling is obtained by setting the parameters relating to the linear function for the conversion from the value read by the analog input to the corresponding speed torque reference value The conversion function is straight line passing through 2 points in Cartesian coordinates having the values read by the analog input in the X axis and the speed torque reference values in the Y axis The speed torque reference values are multiplied by the reference percent parameters Each pointis detected through its two coordinates The ordinates of the two points are the following the value of Speed Min or Trq Min for the torque reference multiplied by the percentage set with P391a P396a for the first point the value Speed or Trq for the torque reference multiplied by the percentage set with P392a P397a for the second point Speed Min depends on the selected motor see parameter C028 motor 1 C071 motor 2 or C114 motor 3 Tr Min depends on the selected motor see parameter C047 motor 1 C090
490. used configuration modes 1 2 and 3 NO The Motor Thermal Protection function is disabled 1 YES No Derated The Motor Thermal Protection tunetion is active with trip current Itindependent of operating speed No derated Forced The Motor Thermal Protection function is active with current It depending on Cooled operating speed with fan cooled motor de rating The Motor Thermal Protection function is active trip current depends on operating 3 YESB Self Cooled speed and de rating is suitable for motors having a fan keyed to the shaft factory setting 2 YES A When C265 1 2 and 3 the motor thermal model is considered The heating of a motor is proportional to the square of the current flowing lo2 The Motor overheated alarm 075 will trip after the time t computed based on the motor thermal model is over The alarm be reset only after a given time depending on the thermal constant C267 of the motor thus allowing for the correct cooling of the motor Forced Self Cooled Cooled 0 5 nier n Dor Figure 60 current drop depending on speed values The graph above shows how trip current It drops depending on the generated speed based on the value set in parameter C265 383 482 PROGRAMMING LONNE The motor heating can be monitored with measure M026a This value is expressed as percentage of the asymptotic value that can be attained
491. using the display keypad is described in the Menu Tree section The complete tree structure is disolayed but the actual structure depends on the user level set in POOL and on the implemented programming For example if only motor 1 is programmed 009 1 the menus relating to motors 2 and 3 will not be displayed Motor 2 3 Configuration and Motor 2 3 Limit Also if the type of motor control is CO1O IFD Voltage Freq the BRIDGE CRANE MENU will not be displayed When P264 Linear linear navigation the parameters displayed are no longer grouped into menus and you can scroll through all parameters using the and keys When P264 Modified Pars Only only the parameters having different values than the factory settings are displayed and you can scroll through all parameters using the and keys The Navigation section shows how to use function keys to navigate through the parameters and to change parameter values 264 BY MENU The function keys and their functionality are described below 15 482 iDrive 1 2 Menu Tree 16 482 PROGRAMMING MEA PAR AUTODIAGNOSTICS PROHIBIT SPEED IMEA DATA LOGGER REFERENCE VARIATION MEASURES PERC ENT MEA PAR DIGITAL INPUTS SPEED LOOP AND SETIINGS CURRENTBALANCE IMEA PAR FAULT FOC HEL
492. ut depends on 2 selected digital signals on the logic function calculating the output value and on the logic output function True False ANALOG The digital output depends on a selected analog variable which is tested through Test A and Test B thus obtaining 2 digital signals starting from their value the selected logic function calculates the output value whereas the True False logic output function calculates the end value See Example 3 DOUBLE ANALOG The digital outputs depends on 2 selected analog variables Test A is performed for variable A whilst Test B is performed for variable B thus obtaining 2 digital signals starting from their value the selected logic function calculates the output value whereas the logic output function True False calculates the end value DOUBLE FULL As DOUBLE ANALOG or DOUBLE DIGITAL mode but both digital signals and analog variables can be selected If you select a digital signal its value TRUE FALSE is used to calculate the selected logic function If you select an analog variable the test selected for this variable is performed and its result TRUE or FALSE is used to calculate the selected logic function BRAKE As ABS BRAKE below although the selected variables are not expressed as absolute values but depend on the selected tests ABS BRAKE The ABS BRAKE mode allows controlling the electromechanical brake of a motor used for lifting applications To enable the rel
493. ut offset ADVANCED 0 000 V 780 P181 Filter for AOI analog output ADVANCED 0 ms 781 182 M output value with reference to ADVANCED 10 0 V 782 P183 P AO output value with reference to ADVANCED 10 0V 783 P184 AO2 analog output ADVANCED 1 10V 784 P185 Selected variable for AO2 analog output ADVANCED 785 at constant rom P186 Min value of AO2 selected variable ADVANCED 1500 rom 786 187 Max value of AO2 selected variable ADVANCED 1500 rom 787 P188 402 Analog output offset ADVANCED 0 000 V 788 P189 Filter for AO2 analog output ADVANCED 0 ms 789 P190 Min AO2 output value with reference to ADVANCED 100 V 790 P191 Max AO2 output value with reference to ADVANCED 10 0V 79 P192 AO3 analog output ADVANCED 2 0 10V 792 P193 Selected variable for AO3 analog output ADVANCED 5 Output current 793 P194 Min value of AO3 selected variable ADVANCED OA 794 P195 Max value of AO3 selected variable ADVANCED Inverter Imax 795 196 Analog output offset ADVANCED 0 000 V 796 P197 Filter for AO3 analog output ADVANCED ms 797 P198 4 output value with reference to ADVANCED 00 V 798 P199 id AOS output value with reference to ADVANCED 10 0V 799 P200 FOUT output frequency ADVANCED 0 Disabled 800 P201 2 ADVANCED 1 Motor speed 801 P202 Min FOUT value of selected variable ADVANCED 0 802 203 Max FOUT value selected variable ADVANCED 0 803 204 output value with reference t
494. ut the brake unlocks digital output open when a given torque value is attained which is automatically determined based on the last torque value required in the previous stroke Variable A Selected for MPL1 2 3 4 P351 P360 P369 P378 Selects the digital signal or the analog variable used for Test A set with P353 P362 P371 P380 The whole list of the selectable items and their description are stated in Table 41 If a digital signal is selected Test A is not performed therefore the comparison value for Test A set with P355 P364 P373 P382 has no meaning NOTE This parameter can be accessed only if the operating mode of the digital output concerned is other than zero Example MPL1 P3500 Variable B selected for MPL1 2 3 4 P352 P361 P370 P379 This selects different digital signal or the analog variable used for Test B set with P354 P363 P372 P381 The whole list of the selectable items and their description are stated in Table 41 If a digital signal is selected Test B is not performed therefore the comparison value for Test B set with P356 P365 P374 P383 has no meaning Parameter P352 cannot be accessed when the digital output operating mode is 1 DIGITAL 3 ANALOG Example P350 1 OR P350 3 231 482 ue LO e Testing Variable for MPL1 2 3 4 P353 P362 P371 P380 If an analo
495. utput logic level AD 0 FALSE 896 MDO4 Digital output mode MDO4 Selecting variable A MDO4 Selecting variable B MDO4 Testing variable A MDO4 Testing variable B MDO4 Comparing value for Test A MDO4 Comparing value for Test B MDO4 tests Function applied to the result of the 2 MDO4 Selecting variable C MDO4 Function applied to the result of f A B C MDO4 Output logic level 1 DIGITAL D1 Inverter Run Ok D1 Inverter Run Ok A OR 0 Disable 0 1 TRUE 207 482 iDrive PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS P270 1 Digital Output Mode DISABLE DIGITAL DOUBLE DIGITAL ANALOG DOUBLE ANALOG DOUBLE FULL BRAKE ABS BRAKE ABS LIFT PWM MODE ANALOG Level ADVANCED Address This parameter defines the operating mode of digital output 1 The different operating modes are described at the beginning of this chapter NOTE MDOI Digital output can be programmed only if the frequency output is not set up P200 Disable see ANALOG AND FREQUENCY OUTPUTS MENU P271 1 Selecting Variable A See Table 41 A71 Speed MEA ADVANCED 871 This parameter selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of MDO1 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of MDOIdigital output if one of th
496. ve if the fluxing time period is longer than the preset time if the ENABLE command not a RUN command is sent To restore motor fluxing disable and enable the ENABLE command or send a SIARTcommand when ENABLE is closed NOTE The time set in C183 is added to the Fluxing Ramp Time set in CO41 084 C127 C184 at Activation only with STARTClosed 1 6 02 ADVANCED 1184 VTC and FOC Fluxing may be carried out only when the SIARTcommand is closed 346 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS C185 STOP Mode LONNE Bis 0 Deceleration Ramp 1 Idling 0 Deceleration Ramp ADVANCED This function allows selecting whether the drive is to be deactivated with controlled deceleration ramp or is left idling when the SIARTcommand is open 0 5 Inactive 0 16 1 8 5 MDII 8 O 24 if ES847 ES870 is 9 12 gt MPL4 fitted 13 16 TFL4 17 24 2 XMDI1 XMDI8 ENGINEERING This parameter allows programming a digital to activate the Fire Mode see the Fire Mode section 0 5 Inactive 1 85 MDII 8 9 12 MPLI MPL4 13 16 TFL TFL4 17 24 gt XMDI1 XMDI8 0 Inactive 0 16 0 241 5847 or ES870 is fitted ADVANCED This function sets a digital inout allowing disabling the external torque limit When the digital input set for C187 is active the torque limit will depend on the parameters contained in t
497. vel ENGINEERING Address This parameter resets the partial counter for the drive supply time C278 Su Time Threshold 0 65000 0 650000h ENGINEERING This parameter sets the threshold for the supply time of the drive When this time ia aid 5 exceeded Warning W49 ST Over appears To reset the warning message reset the partial counter or set the counter threshold to zero 390 482 e PROGRAMMING cs LONNE Dive 44 PID CONFIGURATION MENU 44 1 Overview The IDrive is provided with two separate PID Proportional Integral Derivative regulators allowing performing regulation loops such as pressure control delivery control etc with no need to connect external auxiliary devices The PID Configuration Menu defines configuration parameters for the two PID regulators The configuration parameters for the PID regulator can be modified only when the drive is in stand by and they set the following variables reference sources feedback sources and type of PID output action The programming parameters for the two PID regulators including coefficients of proportional integral and derivative terms output saturation etc are covered in the PID PARAMETERS MENU and the PID2 PARAMETERS MENU 44 2 Operation and Structure of the PID Regulator 291 285 287 Ramp Reference sources C171a selection 1 C294 PID PID PID Control Action Control Selector Selection Mode Re
498. vercurrent detected by the drive output current circuit See A044 SW Overcurrent See A044 SW Overcurrent 453 482 iDrive ee PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS Illegal configuration of XMDI in the Digital Outputs menu A052 Illegal DGO e The drive checked if at least XMDI input from ES847 or ES870 I O option board is available in the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU The drive checked if R023 I O Board setting is set to O in the EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU Event Possible cause Solution Check settings and enter correct settings Wrong settings A053 Not PWONA 2 21291 Hardware failure IGBT A power on failure Event IGBT A power on controlled by Motorola microcontroller has failed Possible cause Control board failure 1 Reset the alarm send RESETCommand Solution 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service A054 Option Board notin ES847 ES870 in Event The control board detects no ES847 or ES870 I O expansion boards after parameter R023 I O Board Setting is set as 0 Possible Option board not in or faulty cause 1 Check consistency of parameter RO23 see the EXPANSION BOARD CONFIGURATION MENU Solution 2 Reset the alarm send RESETCommand 3 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA 5 Customer Service A055 Alarm External PTC resistor tripped The drive detect
499. versed cause e Precharge relay contactor failure 1 Reset the alarm send a RESETcommand Solution 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service Event A047 Undervoltage DC bus Voltage lower than minimum voltage Voltage measured in DC bus capacitors has dropped below the min value Event allowed for a proper operation of the drive class being used e Supply voltage has dropped below 200 15 class 2T 380V 1576 class AT 500V 15 class 5T 600Vac 5 class 6T e Alarm A047 can trip even when voltage temporarily drops below the Possible allowable min value which is caused for example by the direct starting of r1 4 the connected load f the drive is powered directly by the bus bar the bus feeder is responsible for the alarm e Failure in DC bus voltage measure circuit 1 Check voltage in terminals S T Check mains voltage value and DC bus voltage value 029 Also check the values of M030 and M029 sampled in the FAULTUSTwhen the alarm tripped 2 If the alarm persists please contact LONNE SCANDINAVIA AS s Customer Service 452 482 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS A048 Overvoltage Possible Possible cause Overvoltage in DC bus voltage in DC link Voltage measured in DC bus DC link capacitors has exceeded the max value allowed for a proper operation of the drive class being used e Check that voltage does not excee
500. voltage C029 Speedmaxl mox speed desired Also set C022 resistance of one stator phase for a star connection or one third of one phase resistance for a delta connection and C023 stator leakage inductance of one phase for a star connection or one third of the leakage of one phase for a delta connection The value for C022 corresponds to half the resistance value measured with an ohm meter between two phases of the motor If values to be set for C022 and C023 are not known motor autotune is required see step 6 otherwise go to step 7 Press SAVE ENTER each time a new parameter is set First remove the ENABLE command then access the AUTOTUNE MENU and set 1073 1 Motor Tune and 1074 0 All Ctrl no rotation Use the ESC key to accept changes Close the ENABLE command and wait until tune is complete Warning W32 Open Enable is displayed The drive has computed and saved the values for C022 stator resistance and C023 leakage inductance If alarm A097 Motor Wires trips check the motor wiring If alarm A065 Autotune KO trips this means that the ENABLE command has opened before autotune was complete In this case reset the drive sending a command from terminal MDI3 or press the RESET key in the display keypad and perform the autotune procedure again C023 From the resulting value manually subtract the value in mH of the With the Autotuning function calculate the value of the leakage inductance output
501. w The Reference Variation Percent Menu allows defining the variation values of the speed torque PID instant reference to be entered through digital inputs that have been properly programmed As per the selection of the variation percentage programmed to the reference and given by the combination of digital inputs configured with parameters C175 C177 please refer to the DIGITAL INPUTS MENU The parameters included in this menu represent seven speed torque PID variation options to be applied to the speed reference Variation may range from 100 0 to 100 0 of the instant reference given by the addition of all the selected Sources Example 115 0 0 Variation percent of reference 1 P116 50 0 Variation percent of reference 2 P117 80 0 Variation percent of reference 3 Based on the speed torque PID variation selected through digital inputs the speed reference at constant speed will be as follows Variation 1 the current reference with no changes no effect Variation 2 the current reference increased by 50 0 Variation 3 the current reference decreased by 80 076 speed variation the value used to control the motor is saturated at max and min Whatever the speed torque reference value resulting from the application of a A NOTE speed torque values set in the parameters relating to the selected motor Speed control example Speed PO00815 B reference A P116 50 0 Reference before spe
502. wave The test selected with P273 is performed between the analog variable selected P271 and the saw wave Motor Speed rom 3000 1500 A 204 482 o PROGRAMMING c LONNE Dive This example shows how to activate a digital output based the logic AND inputs A B C particularly the ENABLE input the ENABLE 5 Safety for redundancy and the condition of Inverter Ok On An additional block applied and C is used Table 48 MDO parameterization for the Ready state of a PLC supervisor P270 MDOI Digital output mode DOUBLE DIGITAL P271 Variable A selection D21 MDI Enable P272 Variable B selection D22 MDI Enable S P277 Function applied to the result of the two tests AND B 277 Variable C selection D2 Inverter Ok On P277b Function applied to the result of f A B and AND C C test P278 Output logic level VERA 205 482 iDrive 24 4 LONNE List of Parameters P270 to P305 Table 49 List of parameters P270 to P305 PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Digital output mode Quom eNOS 1 Selecting variable A a A71 Speed 1 Selecting variable B 1 Testing variable dicis d 1 Testing variabl
503. wer Down 0 Stop 1 Stand by 2 Dcb ENGINEERING 1 1234 When the motor speed during Power Down attains the Power Down end value set in C235 three operating modes are possible depending on C234 programming Stop If the drive is capable of bearing DC bus voltage it will control the motor until it stops irrespective of the speed value set in C235 If power supply is restored when the deceleration ramp is over the RUN command must be disabled and enabled again to accelerate the motor If power supply is restored when the motor is still decelerating the speed of reference is forced to the motor with the preset acceleration ramp Stand by When decelerating once the speed value set in C235 is attained the drive is put on stand by and the motor keeps decelerating motor idling If power supply is restored the same conditions as described in the step above see Stop instead of stopping the motor the drive is put on stand by DCB When decelerating once the speed value set in C235 5 attained DC braking occurs Its duration depends on the speed value set in C235 and on DC braking parameters see the DC BRAKING MENU t C217 C235 C219 with 235 219 equal to max 10 If power supply is restored the same conditions as described in the step above occur see Stop instead of stopping the motor the drive performs DC braking C235 Motor ed atthe End of Power Down O 5000 rpm ENGINEERING 1235 Motor
504. witch see C 180a C148 sets whether toggling between Remote mode and Local mode is activated only when the drive is disabled or whether toggling from Remote to Local mode does not affect the drive running conditions bumpless commands but it does affect the reference You can also choose to keep running conditions and reference unaffected any command is bumpless For more details please refer to the description of parameter C148 CONTROL METHOD MENU In LOCAL mode the L CMD and L REF LEDs come on when drive references and commands are sent via display keypad the Keypad page allows changing the given reference using the A and keys see P266 in the DISPLAY KEYPAD menu When not in LOCAL mode press the MENU key to access the Keypad pages from the root page Only the Keypad pages relating to the Keypad source will be displayed along with the Measure Keypad page Example Parameter C147 Torque Limit Reference Selection is set to Keypad From the root page press the MENU key once to display the Measure Keypad page and press the MENU key twice to display the Keypad page relating to the torque limit and allowing changing the torque limit reference using the A keys The Keypad page allows entering custom measures see parameters P268b to P268e in the DISPLAY KEYPAD menu From the Keypad pages press the SAVE ENTER key to access the Keypad Help page containing any details about the measures displayed in the Keypad page 1 11
505. y 0 05 P218 12 delay 0 05 P219 T2 delay Off 0 0 P220 13 delay 0 0 5 P221 13 delay 0 0 5 222 4 delay 0 0 5 223 14 delay 0 0 5 224 5 delay 0 0 5 225 5 delay 0 0 5 P226a Timer 0 P226b Timer MDI2 0 P226c Timer MDI3 0 P226d Timer 4 0 227 MDIS 0 P227b Timer MDI6 0 227 0 P227d Timer MDI8 0 P228a Timer MDO1 0 P228b Timer MDO2 0 228 0 P228d Timer MDO4 0 P229a Timer MPL1 0 P229b Timer MPL2 0 P229c Timer 0 P229d Timer MPL4 0 P23x P26x PID Parameters P236 PID Out 100 00 P237 PID Out Min 100 00 P237a Woke Up 0 Disabled P237b Wake Up 0005 Level P238 Integ Max 100 00 P239 Der Max 100 00 P240 PID Kp 1 000 P241 PID KpMult 0 1 242 Ti Tc 500 Tc P243 PID Td Tc O0 mTc P244 PID Tc 5ms P245 PID Ref Min 0 00 P246 PID Ref Max 100 00 P247 PID Fdbk Min 0 00 P248 PID Fdbk Max 100 00 P249 PID Tup 0 00 s P250 PID Tdn 0 00 s P251 PID U Mea 1 0 1 P252 Rnd start 50 P253 Rnd stop 50 P254 Thresh Int 0 0 76 Refmax P255 Disab Time Disabled P256 Trate Lim ms P257 GainScale 1 000 P260 GainAWUP 1 00 P27x P30x Digital Outputs P270 Outl Mode 3 Analog P271 Out1Sell A71 Speed P272 Out1Sel2 A71 Speed P273 Out1 Test 0 gt P274 Out1 Test2 3 lt P275 D01 ValTst 50 000 P276 D01 ValTst2 10 000 rom P277 OutlFunc 1 Set B Reset P277a Out1Sell DO Disable P277b Outl Func 0
506. y a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied 222 482 e PROGRAMMING cs LONNE See Table 41 00 Disable ENGINEERING 912 Selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of 4 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of XMDOA digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P313 XMDO4 Output Logic Level 0 TRUE 1 FALSE 1 FALSE ENGINEERING 913 XMDO4 digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied See Table 41 DO Disable ENGINEERING 914 Selects the digital signal used to calculate the value of 5 digital output It selects an analog variable used to calculate the value of XMDO5 digital input if one of the analog operating modes is selected Digital signals and analog variables are detailed in Table 41 P315 XMDO5 Output Logic Level ENGINEERING 915 XMDOB digital output logic function to apply a logic reversal negation to the calculated output signal 0 FALSE a logic negation is applied 1 TRUE no negation is applied 223 482 iDrive P316 XMDOG6 Signal Selection PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS See Table 41 00
507. y pressing the LOC REM key or by enabling the LOCALinput function C181 If the LOCAL mode is already active the LOCK command will have no effect on the LOCALfunction it only avoids changing the programming parameters while it is still possible to send references and the START STOP OG RESET commands via keypad If the LOCK command is active and the LOCAL mode is disabled the LOCK function prevents the LOCAL mode from activating C173 C174 MOTOR SEL Input 0 gt Inactive 1 8 5 MDI8 9 12 gt MPLA 13 16 gt TFLI TFLA 17 24 2 XMDI8 Level ENGINEERING 1173 1174 This function activates motor 2 and 3 and sets the relevant programming parameters see Table 93 A different active motor can be selected only when the drive is disabled 0 16 o 2411 ES847 5870 is fitted Table 93 Motor selection 0 0 Motorn 1 1 0 Motorn 2 0 1 Motorn 3 1 1 Motorn 1 AN NOTE When both inputs are enabled Motor 1 is selected again 342 482 e PROGRAMMING cs L NNE C175 C 176 C 177 SPEED VAR Inputs 0 gt Inactive 0 16 1 8 5 MDII 8 O 24 if ES847 or ES870 is 9 12 gt MPLI MPL4 fitted 13 16 TFL TFL4 17 24 2 XMDI1 XMDI8 Inactive ENGINEERING 1175 1176 1177 This function generates up to 7 values of variation for the active reference ranging from 100 to 100
508. yed when the LOC REM key is pressed depends on the setting of parameter P266 Type of Keypad Page in Local Mode P266 Measures Only Page containing 4 preset measures no reference can be changed P266 Ref Activated Line 4 in the Keypad Page enables changing the drive reference the speed reference if a speed control is activated Ref displayed the torque reference if a torque control is activated TRef displayed If the drive reference is the PID output C294 PID Action 1 Reference the PID reference is given PRef displayed Use the A and V keys to change the reference displayed in line 4 on the Keypad Page P266 Ref Activated Spd To be used only when the drive reference depends on the PID output when a speed control is used C294 PID Action 1 Reference When the LOC REM key is pressed for the first time PRef is displayed in line 4 and the reference may be adjusted when the LOC REM key is pressed twice the PID is disabled and the speed reference can be changed Ref displayed Use the A and keys to change the reference shown in line 4 on the Keypad Page 85 482 PROGRAMMING we LONNE 11 4 List of Parameters P264 to P269 Table 16 List of parameters P264 to P269 Navigation mode BY MENU 864 264 Circular navigation 1 YES 865 P264b i mode wi
509. ypad AN page Press the LOC REM key again when the drive is disabled or the MDI LOC REM key if it is programmed as a pushbutton C180a Pushbutton to disable the PID and to set the speed reference directly from the Keypad page 171 482 iDrive 22 2 LONNE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS PID Regulator Tuning Method of Ziegler and Nichols Tuning a PID regulator consists in selecting and allocating values to PID parameters in order to adjust the operation of the system to the technical requirements of the process and to the equipment restrictions One of the possible PID tuning procedures is the Method of Zegler and Nichols This method implies the following steps 1 Set the integral action and the derivative action to zero Ti P242 0 Td P243 0 2 Assign very low values to 240 then apply a little step to the reference signal setpoint selected with C285 286 287 3 Gradually increase the value of Kp until permanent oscillation is attained in the PID loop 4 Tune the parameters for PID regulator based on the table below where is the value of the proportional gain corresponding to the permanent oscillation critical gain and is the period of the permanent oscillation 172 482 Kp P240 Ti P242 Td P243 P 0 5 0 45 Kpc Tc 1 2 PID 0 6 Kpc Tc 2 8 Figure 24 Permanent oscillation with critical Tc P
510. ze and Model Class 5T 6 1 53 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0524 800 2 50 0831 20 40 2 2 1130 1700 2040 2448 2 1800 2600 3100 2076 3000 3600 OOO 6 ZIZIZIZIzzzzlzzz 2 2 2 2 2 OJO O OJO JO O O O O 0100010 010 2 2 2 2 2 2 301 482 PROGRAMMING Dive L NNE Table 78 Parameters depending on the Drive Size and Model Class 5T 6 2 Mi cos c222 Poo 010 POI2 P013 PO32 2 84 C223 pois pois 21 poss 210 127 cin 224 polo 003 30 15 50 10 10 On 10 02 004 30 15 so 10 10 On 10 02 512 514 0006 30 150 so 10 10 On 10 01 02 002 30 so 10 10 On 30 02 o8 so 10 10 On 10 01 02 09 30 150 so 10 10 On 10 01 02 0021 30 150 so 10 10 On 10 02 514 0022 300

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GATOR XUV 6x4  Projektarbeit    A7908 ポータブル Bluetooth 4.0 スピーカーを発売開始  Logic Programming Guide - Pro  Kenmore 790.4802 Oven User Manual  DELL Inspiron 14R  ZyXEL Communications Network Router ZLD User's Manual  Handbuch - Aupperle Land  Samsung SL-M3820ND Manuel de l'utilisateur  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file